Home

Eudora® Email 7.1 User Guide for Windows

image

Contents

1. Anywhere ae i Headers paai z Sa 3 Body f poe contains whole word E Seach d t contain Attachment Name s Results Mailboxes fo matches in 18 fmatches xd query Summary ME eudora Mailbox Name FO ou ae To Z 3 n is after q Date From MVE Recent RASE Subject pila bos w ME Project P cc a 6 AN BCC z pin Pied is greater than lt Size ae Wig Bool iori Any Recipient ey Cats ereny AQ Friends Attachment Count VUEZ Krittin S ta tus P4 ERAN VIE Sailing is Label re Personality Following is a description of each verb option in the drop drop list contains lf the specific item contains the text string search and display those messages This allows for other text to the right of the text string contains whole word lf the specific item contains the exact word search and display those messages This does not allow for other surrounding text does not contain lf the specific item does not contain the text string search and display those messages 185 Organizing Your Messages matches x1 query lf the specific items matches the x1 formatted query string search and display those messages This allows for complex queries to be performed within a single search criterion For details on x1 query syntax please see X1 Search Queries on page 436 NOTE The following options are available only when Indexed Search is turned off Verb drop down lists
2. b Craig myoffice net Dawn lt Dawn_QCTS qualcomm com gt Meeting Friday 8 29 se Boss myoffice net Bcc Attached v Low Lowest Craig The following items will be discussed in our quarterly meeting Friday Customer Satisfaction TPS Reports New Hires Returns Marketing Possible relocation of stock room attendant NOTE To set up Eudora to default to the sender s priority on your replies turn on the Copy original s priority to reply option in the Replying options See Replying on page 309 for more information You can always change the priority in the message window Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only You can request that your recipients notify you when they have seen your message To do this click in the message toolbar 42 Creating Messages When your recipients open the message and then close it a dialog box appears asking them to create a notification message now later or never If you sent yourself a copy of the message you will see the request for notification If a recipient chooses to create a notification message it is sent to you and tells you when the recipient opened your message Request for notification Return Read Receipt The sender has requested notification that you have seen this Dawn 04 18 PM 8 13 2003 Meeting Friday 8 29 Notify Sender Later Never Cancel To respond to a request for notification
3. pop myfirm com User Name jcamp SMTP Server Outgoing smtp myfirm com Composing Mail Allow authentication wy Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Real name This is the real name assigned to your principal account generally your first and last name The text you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this account It identifies you to your recipients 293 Setting Eudora Preferences Email address This is the email address used in outgoing messages and recipients replies if this address is different from your incoming mail account The address you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this account and when a recipient replies to a message from this account the reply is sent to this address If you do not enter an address in this field Eudora uses your incoming mail account as the return address Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form username incomingmailserver For example suppose your incoming mail account is j camp pop myfirm com but your email address is jcamp myfirm com This is slightly different You would then enter j campemyfirm comin this field NOTE If you do enter an address in the Email Address field first test the address to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you If you use an invalid email address no one will be
4. New Message With or Reply With command For more information see Composing Mail on page 305 and Account Settings Dialog on page 125 You can also set up a filter to reply with a stationery message See Filtering Messages on page 161 for more information Replying with Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only To reply to a message with stationery 1 From the Message menu choose Reply With 2 From the Reply With submenu select a stationery file The stationery file is opened as a message and is addressed as appropriate You may also reply to message with stationery in the following ways With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window e Open the Stationery window right click a stationery item and from the drop down list choose Reply With With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window e Open the Personalities window right click a personality and choose Reply As from the Message submenu of the drop down list The default stationery assigned to that personality is used in the reply With the Personalities window open e Drag an open message by clicking ty or drag selected message summaries in a mailbox window onto a personality in the Personalities window A reply is initiated from that personality and the stationery stored with that personality is used in the reply 113 Using Signatures and Stationery Set up a filter that uses the Reply with filter action For more i
5. Search Web For Newsletter Search Eudora for Newsletter Search Mailbox for Newsletter Search Mailfolder for Newsletter Ul Newsletter Transfer Transfer to Old Newsletters Reply Reply to All Forward Redirect 160 Organizing Your Messages Filtering Messages NOTE If you are using Eudora in Light mode you have access to fewer features when using Eudora s Filtering functionality Many of the email management functions in Eudora can be done automatically using filters For example you can automatically reply to a request for information transfer all the messages from your children into a personal mailbox and label all the messages from your customers as Hot A filter can be thought of as a personal valet or butler that takes your mail and does certain things to it that you specify One kind of valet might watch for particular mail from a mailing list and move it into a mailbox open the message and play a sound Another might look for other kinds of mail and give it a label color a high priority and a new subject line You can create as many of these valets or butlers as you like and you can give each of them from one to five instructions on what to do with your mail that fits a certain set of criteria based on information in the header of the message and the message body Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Command The simplest filters are t
6. To delete an entry or an address file select it from the list and click the Delete button or press the Delete key Or right click it and select Delete from the drop down list You cannot remove the Eudora Nicknames file e lIfanickname file is set to read only meaning you cannot change it you cannot move or copy entries into it or delete an entry from it e To save your entries from the File menu choose Save Your address book entries are saved NOTE You save your address book entries in CSV format This allows you to save the entire contents of your address book as a single CSV formatted file With your address book open from the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears for you to save the csv file To save only selected address book entries hold the Ctrl key down when selecting entries To move or copy an entry to another address book 1 Right click the address book entry to display the drop down list 2 From the drop down list choose Move To to move an entry or Copy To to copy an 3 4 entry The Choose a Nickname File dialog box appears so that you can select the file to which you want to move or copy the entry Choose a Nickname File dialog box Choose a Nickname File x Nickname File Cancel You can move an entry or entries to a different file by dragging it or copy it by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and then dragging it You cannot move an entry into the file it
7. a word starting with the in the subject column More on column specifiers below Performs a b first then AND s with c Performs b amp c first then OR s with a Same as al b amp c AND s have higher precedence than OR s so they are performed first even though they come later in the expression See precedence rules below the prefix phrase the big d It will match the big dog and the big date the exact phrase the big d It will not match the big dog or the big date only the big d where d is a complete word Same as the big d Any non alpha numeric characters in a phrase search mean exact word Same as the phrase search a b com All puncuation is stripped then prefix phrase search See punctuation rules below Same as a AND b but a and b must be near each other a max of 10 words in between Same as a NEAR b Same as a NEAR b with a max of 5 words in between a and b Same as a NEAR 20 b Same as a AND b but a must preceed b Same as a PRE b with a max of 5 words inbetween a and b See more proximity search examples below You can also search on a specific column by selecting that column in the search category drop down list For the next example we will select Subject in the search category 437 Subject matches x1 query X1 Search Queries Result anything from above NOT
8. Shari First Name Last Name Suzanne Brittnee Gardner gt Tisa QQ Personal This nickname will expand to the following addresses Alexandre_Antunes Aunt Doris B_bop eudora com amp Ben 2 Ez Camping Freaks amp Carla amp Danielle amp DonH amp Evan Family amp Frenz gt Girls p a Girtrude v Address Book TE Directory Services Fites Q Fiter Report Link History 233 Using the Address Book All of the names are kept in address books so you can group your names by putting them in different address books Eudora Nicknames is the default address book and the example above shows an additional address book called Family To show or hide the names in an address book click the book icon to the left of the file name If the book is closed the names are hidden if the book is open the names appear You can use the View By drop down menu to display the names by different criteria for example by Last Name If you want to view the entries by Last Name choose Last Name from the View By drop down list If you view by a field that does not contain any data the entry appears as the nickname enclosed in brackets preceded by spaces lt lt Dad gt gt If you view by a field that doesn t contain any data the entry appears with lt lt gt gt NOTE Eudora remembers your selection in the View By field when you quit and restart the program You can do the foll
9. 432 Dialup Eudora Defining a Login Script Here is a sample login script for an Annex terminal server proc main transmit M waitfor Annex username until 30 if FALSE SSUCCESS then goto Failure endif transmit SUSERID M waitfor Annex password until 30 if FALSE SSUCCESS then goto Failure endif transmit SPASSWORD M waitfor Permission granted until 30 if FALSE SSUCCESS then goto Failure endif transmit ppp M Failure set screen keyboard on halt Done endproc Based on your experience with manually connecting to your Internet Service Provider you may need to change the Annex username and Annex password strings to match the prompts displayed by the machine to which you are connecting You may or may not need to transmit the ppp command after the system accepts your username and password The Dialup Networking tool automatically replaces the USERID and PASSWORD variables with your Dialup Networking username and password so that you don t expose your username and password in an unencrypted plain text file To use this login script you must first save the file to a known location on your disk By convention Dialup Networking script files have an SCP file extension To use the script under Windows 98 2000 ME XP e Launch the Dial up Scripting Tool found on the Start Programs Accessories menu 433 Dialup Eudora Select the Phonebook entry from the Connections list box and enter
10. In the Address Book choose which address book if more than one is set up in which you want this group s information listed Click New Type the nickname in the Nickname text field on the right side of the window for example My buddies The nickname entry appears in the list and you can now add information for this entry When finished click anywhere or press Enter and the nickname appears in the list Click the Personal tab The Personal dialog box appears 238 6 7 8 Using the Address Book Address Book Personal dialog box group Nickname lintrepidadventurers Recipient List C Bosswatch List Personal Home Work Other Notes Full Name intrepid Adventurers First Name Last Name ee This nickname will expand to the Following addresses trent lt trent intrepidadventure com gt findlay lt findlay intrepidadventure com gt mitzi lt mitzi intrepidadventure com gt solen lt solen intrepidadventure com gt gabriel lt qabriel intrepidadventure com gt nerith lt icemaiden intrepidadventure com gt In the Full Name field type the a descriptive or an informal name for the group This name is included in the To field for your recipient to see In the This nickname will expand to the following addresses text field type the complete email address for each person included in the group Separate multiple addresses with commas or carriage returns this is the only place you
11. Receiving and Responding to Messages BLAH BLAH BLAH If this is on all the message headers appear Pencil If this is on you can edit the message Delete From Server If this is on the message will be deleted from the server the next time mail is checked POP servers only This icon appears only if you have the Leave Mail on Server option selected in the Incoming Mail options window See Leaving Mail on the Server on page 86 Retrieve From Server Fetch If this is on the message is retrieved fetched from the server the next time mail is checked POP servers only This icon appears only if you have the Leave Mail on Server option selected in the Incoming Mail options window See Leaving Mail on the Server on page 86 Priority drop down list This lets you indicate that the message is of higher or lower priority than a normal message For most messages this is just an empty box normal priority For details see the section Setting the Message Priority on page 42 Subject This is the subject that was assigned by the sender and is shown in the message summary For instructions on changing this subject see Editing Incoming Messages on page 84 Message Body The message body contains the message header and text information as well as the name and icon of each attachment Attachments can be opened from within the message window by clicking on the attachment icon or name or you can drag and drop the attachm
12. Transfer to New Mailbox NASANews hg nasa gov In Folder Eudora C Transfer to Existing Mailbox In C Delete Message Transfer to Trash Add Details Cancel Match Conditions The Match Conditions area of the dialog box helps you set up the criteria that will determine whether a particular message will be acted on by this filter You can specify that the type of messages you are interested in should be Incoming and or Outgoing You can also specify that this should be a Manual filter described below You can check and uncheck any combination of the three boxes Incoming Outgoing and Manual NOTE If the messages you selected when you chose Make Filter were in any mailbox other than your Out mailbox the Incoming and Manual check boxes are checked automatically If the messages you selected were in your Out mailbox the Outgoing and Manual check boxes are checked automatically e Incoming lf this box is selected then any incoming message that satisfies the content match condition you specify will be acted on according to the action you ve specified in this filter e Outgoing lf this box is selected then any outgoing message that satisfies the content match condition you specify will be acted on according to the action you ve specified in this filter The matching and action occurs after the message has been sent 162 Organizing Your Messages e Manual lIf this box is selected then when you select one or more
13. Automatically purge deleted messages Deleting an IMAP message marks it for deletion on the server but it is not removed from the mailbox until the mailbox is purged Never Select this option to leave messages marked for deletion until you manually select to purge the mailbox Always Select this option to automatically purge the mailbox of deleted messages when you mark a message for deletion No deleted messages will be kept in the mailbox When __ of messages are deleted Select this option to trigger purging of deleted messages when the percentage of deleted messages in your mailbox exceeds the number entered into this setting For example if you entered 20 your mailbox would be automatically purged when more than 20 of the messages were marked for deletion Authentication style This specifies which IMAP account authentication technology to use for this personality Passwords Kerberos or CRAM MD5 Ask your email administrator which one to use The default is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MD5 is not being used then it will use passwords Secure Sockets when Sending or Receiving See the next section Using SSL for Your Personalities For information about Secure Sockets Layers SSL refer to About security Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 28 To access SSL settings for a personality 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities 131 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only The Personaliti
14. NOTE It is recommended that you retain the default settings To configure your group settings 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Click Settings located a the bottom of the Groups window The Group Setting dialog box appears 389 Eudora Sharing Protocol Group options window box ESP Settings ESP Automatic Filters Precedence Run automatic filters before user filters C Run automatic filters after user filters Automatic Actions V Allow automatic processing of incoming attachments MV Allow automatic scanning of shared folders Cancel 3 In the ESP Automatic Filters Precedence area choose Run automatic filters before user filters or the Run automatic filters after user filters Depending on which option you activate ESP filters incoming messages into the shared folder either before or after your own filters take effect To run the automatic ESP filters before your personal filters is the default 4 In the Automatic Actions area check the Allow automatic processing of incoming attachments box if you want the shared folder updated automatically with email message attachments as specified in the Settings dialog box The default is to automatically process incoming attachments 5 If you want your shared folders scanned automatically at the frequency you specified in the Settings dialog box check the Allow automatic scanning of shared folders box The system default is t
15. Present As field Therefore any Ph query you perform on that server would display the Full_Name data in the Name column in the Results List To manage the attribute list 1 So one of the following e To add an attribute mapping to the attributes list click Add e To edit an attribute mapping click the attribute on the list and click Edit Edit the attribute name e To remove an attribute mapping click to select it and then click Remove Add an Attribute Attribute Name Full Name Present As 2 When you are finished making entries or changes click OK The attributes are added to or changed in the database 268 Using Directory Services Attributes panel showing new attribute Modify Database General Attributes Attribute Present As Add ou Emaillw Ede OK Cancel If you added a new database the database is added to the Databases list with its checkbox Finger Database Finger is an Internet directory service similar to Ph To add a new Finger database 1 2 In the Protocols list click the Finger protocol to select it Click New Database Or just double click Finger in the Protocols list The New Database window General panel appears Finger Database window General panel Modify Database Network Attributes Search Options Log Type the name by which you would like to refer to this server Database Server information Host Name test d
16. Star_and_Crescent Full Name First Last Name This nickname will expand to the following address Joey Steward lt js adpsc com gt Dorothy lt dot adpsc com gt Dominica In the Address Book Eudora Nicknames Put it on the Recipient List a In the Nickname text box type a nickname for the new entry In the Full Name field type a descriptive name for this group In the This nickname will expand to the following address field Eudora displays the nicknames you selected from the Address Book You may add more nicknames and email addresses if you d like If you have more than one address book in the n the Address Book drop down list choose the address book in which you want to place this group If you want to put the group on your Recipient List check the Put it on the recipient list box If you want to put the nickname on your BossWatch List check the Put it on the BossWatch list box When finished click OK The new group is now in your address book NOTE If your new group has the same name as an existing group name a prompt appears asking if you want to add the address es to the existing name or replace the existing name with the new address es Finish Address Book Entry Command By using the Finish Address Book Entry command you can enter a unique portion of a nickname in the To Cc or Bcc fields of a message 249 Using the Address Book To use the Finish Addre
17. 406 General Reference nndbase txt Your nicknames are saved in the nndbase txt file Note that this file contains the nicknames only while the files in the Nickname directory see above contain the full data for each Address Book entry which includes the nickname and more Readme txt This file contains the Eudora Readme a text file that contains important release current information and instructions that might not be included in the Eudora User Manual the Eudora Quick Start Guide or the Eudora Online Help tix clx Dictionary information is stored in the tlx and clx files Plug ins Extended Messaging Services Plug ins are special add ons that can be installed to add features to Eudora For example you could use a language conversion plug in to translate a message to another language a security plug in to automatically secure a message or a text manipulation plug in to change lowercase to uppercase Plug ins interface to Eudora using the Extended Messaging Services Application Programming Interface EMSAPI To make plug ins available to Eudora put them in the Plugins directory in your Eudora directory then restart Eudora Depending on the plug in type it will be available in Eudora in the following ways e The Message Plug ins submenu under the Edit menu typically includes plug ins that are used to modify the text of a message These are referred to as on request plug ins Some samples of these types of pl
18. Anywhere 5 Find Messages Headers contains rei Body contare whole word d t tai Attachment Name s Results Mailboxes No matches in 18 o Bai Summary E eudora 7 Starts wkh i 4 ds with ee Name v a matches regexp case insensitive 0 vi Juni matches regexp ra g Trash From a Lad Recent is a s ME Business is not Subject Boss is after cc E Projects E Report i BCC Pesona i is not ae Wig Books is greater th i Any Recipient DS cats ESES Priority I iend AS ening Attachment Count Wey Online sh Status oa De tre Label Vig Stocks Personality is lf the specific item is an exact match search and display those messages is not lf the specific item is not an exact match search and display those messages starts with lf the specific item starts with the text string search and display those messages ends with lf the specific item ends with the text string search and display those messages matches regexp case insensitive If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters with case insensitivity search and display those messages 186 Organizing Your Messages Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters For example if you are searching for messages sent to you by two people choose From in the first drop down options list then choose matches regexp then type their usernames between brackets separated by a vertical pipe symb
19. Immediate send option is turned on in the Sending Mail options window For information on the Sending Mail options window see Sending Mail on page 302 To send the current message e From the Message menu choose Send Immediately or click amp Send A Task Status window can appear to show the progress of the transmission See Task Status Window on page 225 If you have the Immediate send option on but want to put the current message in the queue hold down the Shift key and click the Send button The Change Queueing dialog box appears and you can set detailed instructions For more details see Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time on page 68 Queueing a Message to Send Later If you want to put your messages in a queue in the Out mailbox to send all together at a later time be sure the Immediate send option is off in the Sending Mail options For information on the Sending Mail options window see Sending Mail on page 302 67 Sending Messages and Checking Mail You can set up Eudora to warn you if you try to delete a queued message or try to quit Eudora with queued messages To do this turn on those options in the Extra Warnings options window See Extra Warnings on page 341 To put the current message in the queue e From the Message menu choose Queue For Delivery or click Queue The message window is closed the message is saved in the Out mailbox marked Q meaning it s ready to be sent and the
20. NOTE The main toolbar although not a window is also dockable to any edge of the main Eudora window or to another dockable window Dockable windows can be docked to any edge of the main Eudora window and to each other You can also dock multiple windows along a single edge of the main window When you dock a window to the main window the visible window work area is reduced Docked windows cannot be obscured by normal windows but they can be obscured by floating windows 201 Managing Windows in Eudora To make a window dockable 1 To display the drop down context menu right click the window s border or tab 2 To turn off the command from the context menu choose Float In Main Window The check mark disappears 3 To turn on the command choose Allow Docking A check mark appears 4 Tothen dock the window drag the window to an edge of the main Eudora window or to another docked window When the ghosted docking rectangle appears indicating that the window will be docked release the mouse button The window attaches to the main window edge or the other window Some windows are more convenient to use when docked vertically tall and narrow while others are more convenient to use when docked horizontally short and wide Examples of windows that work better as tall and narrow windows are the Mailboxes window and the File Browser window Examples of windows that work better as short and wide windows are the Task Status window a
21. This manual was written for use with the Eudora for Windows software version 7 1 This manual and the Eudora software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved This manual and the Eudora software may not be copied except as otherwise provided in your software license or as expressly permitted in writing by QUALCOMM Incorporated Export of this technology may be controlled by the United States Government Diversion contrary to U S law prohibited Copyright 2006 by QUALCOMM Incorporated All rights reserved QUALCOMM Eudora Eudora Pro Eudora Light and QChat are registered trademarks of QUALCOMM Incorporated PureVoice SmartRate MoodWatch WorldMail Eudora Internet Mail Server and the Eudora logo are trademarks of QUALCOMM Incorporated Microsoft Outlook Outlook Express and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Exchange are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Apple and the Apple logo are registered trademarks and QuickTime is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc Netscape Netscape Messenger and Netscape Messenger are registered trademarks of the Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries Netscape s logos and Netscape product and service names are also trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation which may be registered in other countries All o
22. e Click Now to queue the notification message in your Out mailbox It will be sent the next time queued messages are sent e Click Later to close the message without sending a notification Note that each time you open the message and then close it or if you try to delete it the notification request will appear until you click either Now or Never e Click Never to cancel the notification request without ever sending a request for notification message e Click Cancel to dismiss the request for notification request from the screen while the return receipt message is open Note that if you close the message the notification dialog box will appear again The Return Receipt options may or may not work as described depending on your recipients email software Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only You can use standard text editing options to format the text of your outgoing messages your text files and your signatures The formatting is delivered to your recipients using text editing standards in common use today In Eudora styled and plain text formatting is delivered to your recipients using the Hypertext Markup Language HTML format This enables you to compose and send messages styled with different fonts colors font sizes etc However the formatting your recipients see depend on how well their email packages support this standard 43 Creating Messages HTML is the text formatting standard used in the World Wid
23. or from the Special menu choose Compact Mailboxes for all mailboxes TIP Try not to keep too many messages in your In Out or Trash mailboxes because it slows down your system s performance If you wish to keep these messages it s better to transfer them to other mailboxes Message Preview Pane If the Show message preview pane option is selected in the Viewing Mail options window then the message preview pane appears in roughly the bottom half of the mailbox window See Viewing Mail on page 317 The message preview pane shows the key headers and the message body of the currently selected message in the message summary list If the full message body is not visible in the preview pane scroll bars are displayed allowing you to view the rest of the message Only one message in a mailbox can be previewed at a time To move the keyboard focus from the message summary list to the message preview pane and back again press Tab or F6 Or simply click in the preview pane to put the focus there When keyboard focus is in the preview pane you can do any of the following as you can in an open incoming message window e Press the spacebar to page down through the message e Use the arrow keys as set in the Miscellaneous options window unmodified or with Ctrl or Alt to switch to the next or previous message in the mailbox See Miscellaneous on page 356 e Use standard keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl R for Reply Ctrl D for Delet
24. www eudora com download other Open Sponsored and Paid modes only Opens the mailbox and or message when a message is received If you set a previous action to filter messages into a mailbox then that mailbox is opened Print Sponsored and Paid modes only Prints one copy of each message Notify User Sponsored and Paid modes only Notifies you As Normal and or In Report when messages are received The As Normal option notifies you based on the options you have selected in the Getting Attention options The In Report option notifies you by opening the Filter Report window and displaying in that window a filter report that details what filter actions have been done See Filter Report Window on page 220 171 Organizing Your Messages Notify Application Notifies the selected application when messages are received and provides information from the message Specify the application to use and the part of the message to be included Use the Browse button to select an application or enter the command line yourself The command line should include the path to the executable any options and the following substitution variables all separated by blank spaces 1 Date 2 TO 3 From 4 Subject 5 Cc 6 The entire message For example the command line to send the subject of a message to a pager might look like this C apps pager exe c 4 Forward To Sponsored and Paid modes only Forwards m
25. you may have multiple email accounts in which you receive mail but want to collect mail from all of the accounts in one place You could set up separate Program Items for each account each having a different INI file on the command line and switching between accounts would be as simple as double clicking on a Program Item And for an even more tricky specification if the first parameter is an INI filename without a path then the mail directory is searched through the normal process of checking the EUDORA environment variable and then using the executable directory 446 Eudora ini File Examples SET EUDORA c mymail Command Line c apps eudora exe myeudora ini will use c mymail as the mail directory and c mymail myeudora ini as the INI file SET EUDORA myeudora ini Command Line c apps eudora exe will use c apps as the mail directory and c apps myeudora ini as the INI file Default INI file When an entry in the EUDORA INI file is not found Eudora will look in the DEUDORA INI file located in the same directory as the EUDORA EXE file The Mappings section of the DEUDORA INI file acts as though it was appended to the end of the Mappings section of the EUDORA INI file Examples SET EUDORA c mymail Command Line c apps eudora exe myeudora ini will use c mymail as the mail directory and c mymail myeudora ini as the INI file SET EUDORA myeudora ini Command Line c apps eudora exe will use c
26. 212 oo gt amp BP amp B amp B ef F amp F t P Managing Windows in Eudora Checks for mail See Checking for Mail Manually on page 74 Creates new message See Creating an Outgoing Message on page 32 Replies to senders message See Replying to a Message on page 96 Replies to all recipients of the message including the sender See Replying to a Message on page 96 Forwards the message See Forwarding a Message on page 98 Redirects the message See Redirecting a Message on page 98 Opens next message Opens previous message Attaches a file to the message See Attaching a File to a Message on page 49 Checks spelling See Checking Your Spelling Automatically Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 55 Open the Find Messages window See Find Messages on page 181 Opens address book See Using the Address Book on page 233 Sends the message to the printer Activates context sensitive help 213 Managing Windows in Eudora Opens new message and displays QUALCOMM s PureVoice a recorder player Viewing the Main Toolbar To show or hide the main toolbar select or deselect the Show toolbar option in the Display options window See Display on page 315 If the Show cool bars option is selected in the Display options window the toolbar buttons have a flat look and a button appears raised only when you position the mouse pointer over it If this option is deselected in the Display opti
27. 3 Make your changes 4 From the File menu choose Save As Stationery to save Deleting Stationery To delete a stationery file 1 Select the desired item in the Stationery window and press the Delete key or right click the stationery item and from the drop down context menu choose Delete 2 When you are prompted to confirm the deletion click Yes Using Stationery in a Message To send a stationery message 1 From the Message menu choose New Message With or Reply With 2 From either the New Message With or Reply With submenus select a stationery file Acomposition window appears containing the header and body from the stationery file If you are replying to a message the stationery information is added to the reply You can edit and send this new message just as you would any other message You can also send a new stationery message by double clicking on a stationery item in the Stationery window or by selecting the stationery item and pressing Enter In either case anew composition window opens containing the selected stationery T2 Using Signatures and Stationery To use a particular stationery file for all of your outgoing messages select a stationery from the Stationery drop down in the Composing Mail options for your dominant account only or in the Account Settings dialog box for any of your personalities Most new messages use this file unless you create the message using the Redirect Send Again
28. Automation downloaded messages Bring error window to Front Extra Warnings Bring task status window to front aie MAPI m Cj Ld Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Task Status Columns These options determine which columns appear in the Task Status window Check the box next to the field column that you want to display The options are Task Persona Status Details and Progress Task Displays an icon with a short description of the tasks actions Persona This column is available only if there is more than one personality set up If checked the Personality column displays the personality name for the given task Status Displays a general description of the tasks current status for example Logging into POP server Details Displays more information of the tasks status including network protocol commands Progress Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks 337 Setting Eudora Preferences Wait for _ seconds of user inactivity before processing filtering downloaded messages default 20 seconds If Eudora is retrieving mail automatically in the background the amount of time set in this field indicates the idle time Eudora waits before delivering mail to your mailboxes and folders For example if you are composing a message and Eudora is retrieving mail in the background Eudora will not deliver the mail until y
29. Bit 6 32 All bytes sent Bit 7 64 All bytes received Bit 8 128 Corrupt mailbox TOC file messages Bit 9 256 Basic EMSAPI translator messages Bit 10 512 Advanced EMSAPI translator messages 477 Eudora ini File 478 Troubleshooting What to Do First Occasionally you may encounter a problem or bug when using Eudora This section includes information to help you solve those problems You can also check the Eudora Technical Support Web Pages click the following URL http eudora qualcomm com techsupport If you are having problems try the following Be sure that you have the current release of Eudora e Be sure that your incoming mail account POP or IMAP is set correctly This mail account may be different from your e mail address so double check to see that you have entered the proper information in the Return address Mail Server Incoming and Login Name fields of the Getting Started options Tools gt Options gt Getting Started Incoming mail accounts are usually of the following format loginname mailservername e Be sure your SMTP server is set correctly in the SMTP server field of the Sending Mail options Tools gt Options gt Sending Mail This server may or may not be the same computer as your POP server See Sending Mail on page 302 e Be sure you are entering your password correctly paying attention to uppercase and lowercase letters make sure the Caps Lock key is off e Be sure th
30. DHCP then keep the default Server assigned IP address setting Click Next to display the Name Server Addresses page If your ISP supports DHCP then the name server addresses will automatically be configured by DHCP and you should leave the default addresses of 0 0 0 0 Otherwise enter the server addresses assigned by your Internet Service Provider Click Next to display the final page of the Phonebook Wizard Click Finish to create your new Phonebook entry Back in the Dialup Networking tool select your new Phonebook entry in the drop down list then click Dial to dial your Internet Service Provider Your modem should immediately dial the phone number defined in your Phonebook entry Once your modem negotiates the connection with the remote system you typically then have to log in to that remote system by entering the username and password assigned to you by your Internet Service Provider Some systems require that you first press Enter to display a login prompt then enter the username and password In any event once you are logged on authenticated some providers automatically start your SLIP or PPP session while others require that you take an extra step such as typing ppp to initiate a PPP session Carefully note the exact steps you must take in order to manually log in and establish a SLIP PPP session you will need this information in order to automate the login process as described in Defining a Login Script
31. From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 371 Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP Groups window Fe ESP Groups Eudora Alpha Test Goodies Users Eudora Settings Notifications Advanced GF Eudora Seniors GF Mac Eudora by IDisk User Mac Eudora by Mail A Dawn Group Leader lt D_work myoffice com gt Delete 2 In the ESP Groups window click New located at the bottom of the window The Share Group Settings dialog box appears Share Group Settings dialog box New ESP Share Group Wizard en Share Group Settings Would you like to Skip directly to advanced share group setup Cancel Help 3 Choose Create a brand new share group then click Next The Share Group Name dialog box appears 372 Eudora Sharing Protocol Share Group Name dialog box New ESP Share Group Wizard en Share Group Name What would you like to call this share group It will help people you invite if this name is descriptive and unique so that it s unlikely that they already have a share group with the same name Share Group Name Eudora Documents e g gt Smith Family Photos lt Back Cancel Help 4 Inthe Share Group Name text box type the name of your group then click Next The Share Group Description dialog box appears Share Group Description dialog box New ESP Share Group Wizard en Share Group Description In the edit box below you may optionally type a description
32. Ignore words with numbers The spelling checker ignores words that contain numbers Ignore words with mixed case The spelling checker ignores words that contain a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters Report doubled words The spelling checker reports words that appear twice in sequence in text and identifies them as Doubled words Suggest Words The spelling checker displays Eudora s suggestions for the correct spelling of an unknown word You can select any combination of the suggestion options Phonetic words Split words Typographic words 61 Creating Messages Using BossWatch Have you ever used Reply All and wished you hadn t The new BossWatch feature will alert you to the presence of email addresses that you have designated giving you an extra chance to think twice before you click Send Using BossWatch for Outgoing Messages When you compose a new message or reply to a message you received BossWatch will alert you if any of the recipients match the criteria specified by your BossWatch settings New message composition window with BossWatch alerts Boss 03 08 PM 9 28 2005 0700 Meeting Friday 10 28 E mei AB EGT h a B send Arial F A B Z U amp rr OF E a To Boss lt Boss myoffice net gt f __From Peter lt peten myoffice net gt Werning Subject Meeting Friday 10 28 This message contains addresses on your BossWatch list Ce Bcc Atta
33. LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used SPAMWatch Eudora s SPAM filtering plugins Junk mail is automatically identified and transfered to a Junk mailbox Stationery Stationery files are templates you create for outgoing messages for example a generic response when you are on vacation Table of Contents TOC The TOC in Eudora is the list of messages and their data displayed in each mailbox or folder Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP TCP IP is a set of protocols for computer network communication The protocols provide conventions for connecting networks and routing traffic between them It supports local area networks as well as interconnections between local area networks TCP IP protocols are described in IETF RFCs and in numerous reference works Universal Resource Locator URL URLs are Internet addresses and links to pages and sites that reside on the World Wide Web For example to display the Eudora Web page on the Internet you need the Eudora URL which is www eudora com UNIX to UNIX Copy Protocol UUCP UUCP is a UNIX email protocol Uuencode This is an attachment decoding method best used for recipients using PC or UNIX systems that are not MIME compliant 489 Glossary Username A character string by which users are known for example dclifford Username is also called Login name Winsock Winsock is a connection method There are two methods of making Winsock calls using TCP IP
34. Modify the properties of the selected personality You can modify only one personality at a time When you select this command the Account Settings dialog box displays with its fields filled in with the information associated with that personality See the description of this dialog box later in this chapter e Delete Delete all selected personalities Note however that you cannot delete the lt Dominant gt personality You are prompted to confirm the deletion for each personality you have selected to delete Note that these deletions are permanent and cannot be undone When you delete a personality any messages associated with that personality are reassigned to your Dominant personality You can use the Delete key as a shortcut for this command you will still get the confirmation requests You can also display the drop down context menu and create a new personality by right clicking in a blank area of the Personalities window off all personality items when none of the items are selected When creating a new personality this way you are walked through the New Account Wizard as in the description of the New command above If you drag one or more received messages to a personality item in the Personalities window Eudora will Reply As that personality to the messages hold down the Shift key to Reply to All As Adding a New Personality Following are the basic procedures for setting up alternate accounts followed by addi
35. S and X Header Supervisor X contains v Work Project Action B IransferTo Work Stuff Qa Make Personality v Business Remove _ Address Book E Directory Services Filters Filter Report i Link History 2 To add anew filter click New or to modify a filter click an existing filter to select it 3 Select the options for how you want the filter to be used as an automatic filter to be invoked on any Incoming and or Outgoing mail and as a Manual filter that can be invoked when you choose Filter Messages from the Special menu Any combination of these options works 4 Define the criteria for the filter by using the header item drop down menus and the text fields to specify which header items should include a particular string of text You can define two related terms for the criteria so that your filter is as specific as possible For details see Filter Criteria Match Area on page 167 5 Define the action or actions to be taken on messages that fit the criteria and save the filters For details see Filter Actions on page 170 Eudora places a small icon to the left of the filter in the list for some action you have selected for that filter up to five icons actions per filter NOTE Filters are automatically named based on the first term of the criteria for the filter You can reorder them by dragging a filter up or down in the list 166 Organizing Your Messages You should reorder your filters to i
36. Search Eudora Choose one of the following search options e Search Web default Eudora launches your web browser and initiates a search for the text you entered in the search field e Search Eudora If you have an item open in Eudora such as a mailbox or an email Eudora searches it for any text you entered in the search field If you do not have anything highlighted it searches all your mailboxes in Eudora The submenu also displays your most recent searches at the top of the search menu Recent Searches Search Web for flowers Search Web for log file Search Web Search Eudora 194 Organizing Your Messages Saving a Message to a File To save a message to a separate text file on your computer 1 2 3 4 5 Open or select the messages you want to save From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog box appears Save As dialog box Save in My Documents ex EE amy Music B My Pictures File name Meeting Minutes Save as type Text Files txt x Cancel Include Headers Guess Paragraphs Enter the name you want to give the text file and select the appropriate options In the Save as type drop down menu choose Text Files When selected Include Headers retains the first message s header information in the saved document If this is not checked only the body of the messages is saved When selected Guess Paragraphs removes extraneous
37. The ESP Groups window appears 2 In the left column choose the name of the group you want to leave 3 Click Leave located at the bottom of the Groups window The Leave Share Group dialog box opens Leave Share Group dialog box Leave Share Group Are you sure you want to leave the Marketing Plans share group 4 Inthe Leave Group dialog box click Leave 387 Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP creates a message to other group members announcing your departure from the group This message s attachment deletes you from other group members membership lists Until you save changes to the ESP Groups window you can cancel your departure from the group Just choose the share group that you had planned to leave and click Rejoin which is what the Leave button will be renamed when you chose this group If you re sure you want to leave the group then save changes to the ESP Groups window by either closing the window and choosing Save in the displayed dialog box or by choosing Save from the File menu ESP will send a message to other group members announcing your departure from the group Working with Shared Folders Use the shared folder like any folder in Windows by adding modifying or deleting files as needed To open the shared folder 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups 2 Inthe left column choose the name of the group you want to open and click Open Folder The Save Changes dialog box opens if you have any
38. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL QUALCOMM ITS LICENSORS OR THEIR DIRECTORS OFFICERS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS IN FORMATION AND THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF QUALCOMM OR A QUALCOMM AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDEN TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY In no event shall QUALCOMM s total liability to you for all damages losses and causes of action whether in contract tort including negligence or otherwise exceed the amount paid for the Software and its documentation Acknowledgments The Eudora software for version 7 1 was designed and developed by Shrinivas Bairi Jeff Beckley John D Boyd Rob Chandhok Sagar Chitnis Marshall Clow Steve Dorner original author of Eudora Sangita Mohan Apul Nahata Martin Naskovski Ben Ogdon Eitan Pilipski Raj Pitchaimani Bill Rhodes Jim Riley Keerthi Sundarmurthy Geoff Wenger and Dale Wiggins The software was quality assured by Colleen Archer Kevin Askew Matt Dudziak and Steve Han Other contributors to this version of Eudora are Anthony Arellano Ellen Boemer Helen Elson Beth Flanagan
39. You must include at least one recipient in the To field of your outgoing message in order for the message to be delivered If you have a nickname in the To field be sure that in the Address Book at least one e mail address or valid nickname is included in the Address es tab If the Address es tab is blank there are no recipients and this causes the error Error getting a network socket Cause no buffer space available 10055 The buffers the error message is referring to are TCP buffers TCP IP stacks need buffers in which they can store data that goes to from the network Since at a low level the data has to be sent to a hardware device the buffers generally have to be in low memory i e lt 1MB This is valuable space for most users so most TCP IP stacks have a way of controlling how many of these buffers the user wants allocated If you re using a lot of other network applications at the same time especially the X Window System which uses a buffer for each window then you might get this error The other time this error might occur is when the TCP IP stack is not correctly marking buffers as being unused so you have a buffer not being used that the stack thinks is being used 480 Troubleshooting Could not rename 1mos tmp to lmos dat Quit Eudora and go to your Eudora directory Find the files called 1mos tmp and 1mos dat and delete them both 1mos tmp may not be there that s not a problem On your n
40. a sequence of four small integers each less than 256 When written the numbers are separated by periods for example 210 170 2 45 The DNS converts IP addresses to the more familiar domain names Java This is a programming language that allows software developers to write programs to run on any computer platform regardless of the operating system Kerberos This is one of many authentication systems Eudora uses If your network uses Kerberos for authentication the appropriate options are provided by your email administrator 486 Glossary Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP LDAP is a protocol that provides an online fully indexed fast access white pages directory service developed and freely distributed by the Regents of the University of Michigan LDAP is included in Eudora s Directory Services Mailbox A location that stores messages for a single user Mailing List This is usually a special interest group you can join on the Internet to receive and send information Once you belong to a mailing list you can receive messages anyone sends to this list If you send email to the mailing list every member of the list receives your message Message Application Program Interface MAPI Eudora s MAPI support allows you to quickly attach documents to email messages directly from the application where you created the document Without MAPI you would have to save the document remember what folder the document is in swit
41. cellspacing display the headers in a preview pane 0 cellpadding 0 width 100 bgcolor s text s gt r n 1 When on 1 printed messages get headers and footers 3 Number of seconds a foreground tasks continues before the Progress window is shown This prevents a distracting flash of the Progress window for a task that may take a long time but in this instance only takes a short time QuoteEnd The string that gets inserted after the original text of a forwarded message A newline is added before the string QuotePrefix gt The string that precedes all lines of the original message in a forwarded message QuoteStart The string that gets inserted before the original text of a forwarded message A newline is added after the string RasChooseBeforeEvery 0 If 1 Eudora will allow the user to choose a connection each Connection time Eudora initiates Dial up networking Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP only 460 Entry RasUseExisting Connection Default Value 1 ReadMessageStyleShe lt STYLE et ReadRecieptAsk ReadRecieptNo ReadRecieptYes RelayPersona TYPE text cs s gt n n font family S WANTT font family s r nBLO CKQUOTE CIT E border left solid S r nNBLOCK QUOTE CITE padding left 0 5em r nBLO CKQUOTE CIT E m argin left OWr nBLOCKQ UOTE CITE margin top 0 5em r n 1 0 0 RemoveSuspiciousLoca 1 IFileRefs ReplyAllAttribution At 1 2 you wrot
42. definition 487 server source code 426 Ph Database 266 Ph protocol 257 ph ini file 406 Picture command 46 280 404 Pictures inserting in outgoing message text 47 Plain command 45 Play a sound how to enter in Options 335 Play a sound option 79 Play Sound action 171 Plug ins 407 Plugins directory 405 407 POP option 129 POP server 86 410 how to obtain 425 Macintosh 425 UNIX 425 VAX VMS 425 Windows NT 425 POP version 3 410 POP vs IMAP 152 POPS definition 488 Post Office Protocol 410 Post Office Protocol 3 POP3 definition 488 Postmaster user definition 488 Preview Pane 318 Preview pane 79 147 Print action 171 Print command 82 278 from Directory Services window 262 Print One command 278 Print Preview command 278 from Directory Services window 262 Print Setup command 278 Printer fonts how to enter in Options 314 printing with strange line breaks 481 Priority column 142 Priority drop down default for replies 42 Priority levels 42 Priority Popup in incoming mail 81 in outgoing mail 33 Priority popup in composition window 42 Profile 26 Proportional fonts how to enter in Options 313 Protocols list 258 263 Purge Messages command 93 283 Put text attachments in body of message how to enter in Options 312 Q Q in the Status column 68 70 142 502 Index QPopper 425 Query field 259 Query results Directory Services 260 Queue a message bigger than K how to enter in Options 342 Queue a message with
43. expensereport mail The server gives this reason 550 lt expensereport mail gt User unknown Notice the task error icon on the Eudora tool status bar at the lower right of the main Eudora window Click this icon to display the Task Error message To expand the message click Details Following are field descriptions for the Task Error details window Persona The personality name associated with this error appears Title The name of the Eudora function when this error occurred Status The name of the system function when this error occurred Info More information on this error appears if any Time The time and day of this error appears 227 Managing Windows in Eudora Link History Sponsored and Paid modes only Link History is a new option on the Tools menu that displays Internet web site URLs attachments and ads that have appeared in Eudora To display your link history 1 From the Tools menu choose Link History The Link History window appears Link History window 04 34 PM 8 12 2003 http qbuilder qualcomm com eudorapro archive Installers 03 04 PM 8 12 2003 http www eudora com techsupport win 12 16 PM 8 12 2003 http webdey eudora com 12 04 PM 8 12 2003 http www microsoft com technet treeviews url technet s 11 49 AM 8 12 2003 http corpmetro qualcomm com departments qref ehs_cale 11 24 AM 8 12 2003 FA a http www symantec co uk avcenter security Cont
44. from the Special Searches Same as above but for the Subject column only something items with non empty Subject columns nothing items with empty Subject columns Same as See Special Searches below anything all items no effect You might think it would be the same as S but is special that way NOT requires something after it Normal punctuation rules apply It will notsearch the From column for the since you re already in a Subject column search and have special meaning when they are for a column search either by entering them in a column search box or with a main search box column specifier like subject Once you start typing more characters immediately after them they loose their speciality and follow other rules i e the is NOT the 10 would follow normal punctuation rules discussed below and turn into just 10 10 would turn into NOT 10 which is NOT 10 NOTE When searching using these special searches you might notice extra results when searching for or You might see some empty results that you thought you were filtering out The problem is that those values contain spaces or other invisible characters so they look empty but they are not and therefore belong in the non empty search that and give Parenthesis and If parenthesis are not balanced we try to recover in the best possible way Not enough
45. matches regexp Sponsored and Paid modes only If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters filter those messages is greater than lf Junk Score is selected in the Header field filter the message if the junk score is greater than the score you enter in the following field For information about Junk scoring see Junk Mail Paid mode only on page 359 is less than lf Junk Score is selected in the Header field filter the message if the junk score is less than the score you enter in the following field Enter text in the text field boxes to specify the text strings that the filter is searching for It is recommended that the contents of the text boxes be kept as specific and brief as possible The greater the complexity the less likelihood of a match 169 Organizing Your Messages Be sure not to enter a header label in the text box as part of the text string For example to filter all messages from Justine do not enter From Justine in the text box Rather select From in the Header field and enter simply Justine in the text box Use the conjunction drop down menu ignore is the default to link the two terms The conjunction options are as follows ignore lIgnore the second term If the message matches the first term filter the message and lf the message matches both the first and second terms but not just one alone filter it or lf the message matches either term or bo
46. open document from your word processor select the Send command from your word processor s File menu This automatically activates Eudora and attaches a snapshot of the open document to a new composition message The MAPI system standardizes how messages are handled by client applications so that each client application does not have to have custom code for each target messaging application MAPI accomplishes this by providing a standard application program interface used by all MAPI enabled client applications An additional MAPI feature supported by Microsoft Office applications is the ability to adda routing slip to a Word Excel or PowerPoint document This routing slip contains a list of email recipients obtained from the MAPI subsystem Once a document has an embedded routing slip then it can be semi automatically routed as an attachment via email to all recipients listed in the routing slip Once the routing is complete the annotated document is returned back to the original sender MAPI Overview Let s start with a picture 413 MAPI Technical Report 16 bit MAPI 32 bit MAPI client application client application MAPLDLL MAPI32 DLL A MAPI client application is any 16 bit or 32 bit Windows application that knows how to access the standard MAPI messaging functions in a library known as a DLL Dynamic Link Library The functions in the MAPI DLL allow a MAPI client application to transparently and generic
47. the main Eudora window called Application Background in the Appearance tab of the Control Panel gt Display options It needs to be specified as a full path name This setting requires QuickTime to be installed To install a new background color you must open the Eudora ini file and add a new header for example Decorations Backgroundimage If this is set to 1 a backup copy of the Statistics data is made each day in the Eudora data directory The name of the file is Stats lt month gt lt day gt xml where lt month gt and lt day gt are replaced by the current month and day For example on September 7 it would be called Stats9 7 xml When the POP server returns an error on sending the PASS command the password will only be erased when the error response includes this text If on and displaying lines is mailboxes draw lines as black instead of gray When on 1 centers the bitmap in Mailbox menu items that indicate that the mailbox has unread messages If the display of this bitmap is not correct turn this switch off 0 How often in seconds Eudora should check the OWNER LOK file to see if another instance of Eudora has been started on the same set of mailboxes What the amount of wasted space taken up by deleted messages in a mailbox as a percentage of total free disk space must be before the mailbox automatically gets compacted when closed 449 Entry Default Value CompactMailbox 50 CompactOutgoin
48. those messages are treated as new and are transferred to that computer For more information see Incoming Mail on page 298 87 Receiving and Responding to Messages NOTE The Leave mail on server option can also be set for each alternate personality you have To do this use the Account Settings dialog box accessed from the Personalities window See Account Settings Dialog on page 125 CAUTION The Leave mail on server option should be used with care since it can result ina buildup of messages on the POP server Deleting a Message from the Server To delete a message that has been left on the server without retrieving it again click the Trash button in the message toolbar or set the message summary s server status to Delete then check mail again Or use the Delete all messages that have been retrieved option in the Mail Transfer Options dialog box as described in Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions on page 89 Skipping Messages Over a Certain Size To stop Eudora from transferring incoming messages that are too large select the Skip messages over _ K in size option in the Incoming Mail options window and specify a size Only the first few lines of the messages that exceed that size are transferred with a note at the bottom stating that the whole message has not been transferred See also Incoming Mail on page 298 The Skip messages over _ K in size option can also be set for each personality you have To
49. turn on Using options at left or as specified in the Incoming Mail options window for your dominant account To set options for any of your personalities access the Account Settings dialog box from the Personalities window You can also specify the personalities that you want to check or send with this mail transfer Hold down the Shift key to select multiple personalities in sequence or the Ctrl key to select them out of sequence 90 Receiving and Responding to Messages NOTE Another way to check mail for multiple personalities regardless of your settings elsewhere is to open the Personalities window select your desired personalities right click on the selection and select Check Mail from the drop down list See Using Alternate Email Accounts on page 115 Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server If your incoming mail server uses the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP you manage your mail mailboxes and folders on the server not on your computer When you create mailboxes and folders you create them on the server However you can see them in the Mailboxes window in Eudora When you launch Eudora you retrieve your mailboxes and folders from the server When you check mail the mail you retrieve is filtered on the server although your filters are created in Eudora This is beneficial if you have to retrieve mail from different computers Your mail remains on the server for you to retrieve at anytime on any computer During mai
50. which makes it very easy to quickly determine if the URL is legitimate before you click on it Using ScamWatch To use ScamWatch move your mouse over the URL link in any incoming email message If the URL is suspicious Eudora will display a warning message in the help tag Eudora displays a warning message and the true URL E Ciiibank 09 59 PM 9 23 2004 Ciiibank Online Security Message ay TP EAN P K Subject Ciiibank Online Security Message system is compatible with our new standards This security update will be effective immediately Please signon to Ciiibank Online in order to verify security update installation Failure to do so may res amp Jin your account being compromised The host http 64 49 14 146 Form is a numerical IP address most legitimate sites use names not addresses 85 Receiving and Responding to Messages If you click on a suspicious URL a new window will appear with another warning message Warning Message Warning Warning The URL you are about to visit may be deceptive Visit it anyway The host http 64 49 14 146 Form is a numerical IP address most legitimate sites use names not addresses Cancel Click Cancel and the suspicious URL will not be opened Otherwise click Visit to open the URL in your preferred web browser Managing Your Mail on the POP Server During a mail check your incoming messages are normally transferred from your account on the POP server to your
51. 1 Check to see whether or not the Eudora MAPI DLLs are already installed in the Windows SYSTEM directory If so then you are finished 2 Check for existing Microsoft MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL files If found rename MAPI DLL to MAPI 000 and rename MAPI32 DLL to MAPI32 000 If a MAPI 000 file already exists then Eudora uses MAPI 001 MAPI 002 etc 3 Copy the EUMAPI DLL and EUMAPI32 DLL files from the Eudora program directory to the Windows SYSTEM directory as MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL respectively Eudora MAPI Shutdown Procedure When shutdown Eudora runs the following unswap procedure when the user selects either the When Eudora is running or Never MAPI Server option in Eudora see MAPI Technical Report on page 413 1 Check to see whether or not the Eudora MAPI DLLs are already installed in the Windows SYSTEM directory If not then you are finished 2 Delete the Eudora MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL files 416 MAPI Technical Report 3 Rename the MAPI 000 and MAPI32 000 files if any to MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL respectively If a MAPI 001 MAPI 002 etc file exists then Eudora renames the one with the highest number Eudora DLL Swapping Restrictions It is important to note that there are several restrictions with the above Eudora swap and unswap procedures The Eudora swap and unswap procedures can only run successfully if the MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL are not currently in use by one or more MAPI client
52. 224 Task Status Window 225 Task Error Window 227 Link History Sponsored and Paid modes only 228 Statistics Window Sponsored and Paid modes only 229 Printing the Statistics Report 231 Using the Address Book 233 Printing Your Address Book 234 Searching for Your Address Book Entries 235 Creating an Address Book within your Address Book Sponsored and Paid modes only 235 Adding a Person to the Address Book 235 Adding a Group to the Address Book 238 Adding Entry Information 240 Changing Deleting Moving Copying and Saving Entries 243 Renaming a Nickname 245 Addressing a New Message from the Address Book 245 Make Address Book Entry Command 246 Creating a Group from the Address Book 248 Finish Address Book Entry Command 249 Using the BossWatch List 250 Including Nicknames on the Recipient List 251 Using the Recipient List 252 Including Nicknames on the Recipient List 253 Using Central Address Book Files on a Server 255 Using Address Book Files Not Created by Eudora 255 Using Directory Services 257 Opening Directory Services 257 Keeping the Directory Services Window on Top 258 Making a Query 258 Automatic Name Completion in Directory Services Sponsored and Paid modes only 259 Reading Query Results 260 Addressing a Message from the Directory Services Window 261 Making an Address Book Entry from Query Results 262 Printing Your Query Results 262 Considering the State of the Window 263 Using Directory Service Pro
53. 257 LDAP definition 487 LDAPInit ini file 406 Leave mail on server how to enter in Options POP server 299 Leave mail on server option 87 129 Leave server status 144 145 Left arrow in the Status colum 96 Left arrow in the Status column 141 Left command 45 210 Light mode 25 26 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 257 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP definition 487 Link History option 288 Link history window 228 Imos dat file 406 Imos tmp to Imos dat 481 Login Name option 126 479 M Macintosh server POP or IMAP how to obtain 425 Mail folder fol directories 406 Mail folders creating during transfer 159 creating in the Mailboxes window 151 creating using Mailbox menu 149 Make if a folder option 149 management on POP vs IMAP server 152 New command 149 151 removing in the Mailboxes window 152 renaming in Mailboxes window 151 storage 406 Mail Server incoming how to enter in Options 294 Mail Server Incoming option 479 Mail storage 403 mail folders 406 mailboxes 406 contents 406 POP and IMAP servers 152 Mail Transfer Options dialog 70 86 89 144 Delete all messages on server 90 Delete all messages that have been retrieved 90 Delete messages marked for deletion 89 Fetch all message headers to In mailbox 90 How should checking sending be performed 90 Retrieve messages marked for retrieval option 90 Retrieve new mail 89 Send queued messages 89 Mailbox mbx files 406 Mailbox toc files 406 Mailbo
54. 265 Using Directory Services Ph Database Ph is an online fully indexed fast access white pages directory service developed and freely distributed by the Computer and Communications Services Office at the University of Illinois at Urbana To add a new Ph database 1 Inthe Protocols list click the Ph protocol to select it 2 Click New Database Or just double click Ph in the Protocols list The New Database window General panel appears Ph Database window General panel Modify Database General Attributes Server name Enter the name for this server the way you would like it to appear in the list of servers test Server setup Enter the network host name for this server Host name test Port 105 Cancel 3 In the General panel enter a descriptive name for the Ph server its Host Name or IP address of the Ph server and the Port in the respective fields The default port for Ph is 105 Don t change this port number unless you know for certain that the port number is not 105 4 Select the Attributes tab to display the Attributes panel The Attributes pane appears 266 Using Directory Services Ph Database window Attributes panel Modify Database General Attributes Attribute Present As name Name email Emailfw Cancel In the Attributes panel you can add edit or remove attributes that display in the Results List top half of left window and in the Details List bottom
55. 297 Setting Eudora Preferences Incoming Mail The Incoming Mail options determine how Eudora receives incoming messages addressed to your primary email account dominant personality The options configure the incoming mail server name that is entered in the Mail Server Incoming field in the Getting Started options window To display the Incoming Mail options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Click the Incoming Mail icon The Incoming Mail options window appears Following are field descriptions for Incoming Mail Server configuration Specify which email protocol the incoming mail server uses POP Post Office Protocol or IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol If you are not sure which server to use ask your email administrator The options in the rest of this window depend on whether you ve chosen POP or IMAP in this field Options for both configurations are described below 298 Setting Eudora Preferences When Server configuration POP Incoming Mail options window POP Options Category A Server configuration pop OMAP Getting Started Leave mail on server C Delete from server after lo day s Checking Mail C Delete from server when emptied from Trash Om Der Incoming Mail Cl Skip messages over 40 K in size J offline Sending Mail Authentication style Composing Mail Passwords O Kerberos i Ovapop ORPA Leave mail on server lf you select this opt
56. 4 From the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry The Make Address Book Entry window appears so that you can name the nickname The real name and email address for each selected query result is included in the new entry NOTE The use of this command from this window is subject to the restrictions in Considering the State of the Window on page 263 Printing Your Query Results You can print and print preview the results of your query as shown in the details pane First perform your query then select one or more summaries in the results list The details pane lists the details of each selected item with each item s details separated by a divider line To preview your query details for printing e From the File menu choose Print Preview The Print Preview window appears showing how the query details will look when printed To print your query details e From the File menu choose Print 262 Using Directory Services NOTE The use of these commands from this window is subject to the restrictions in the next section Considering the State of the Window Considering the State of the Window The behavior of some Eudora features internal and external to the Directory Services window depends on the state of the window For definitions of window states see on Managing Windows in Eudora on page 197 When the Directory Services window is in the docked or floating state either alone or as part of a tabbed window group th
57. Account Settings Dialog on page 125 All options other than those specified in the New Account Wizard or the Account Settings dialog box cannot be changed for alternate personalities they are effective for all If you want to change other options for a personality or use a separate set of mailboxes for an account see the section Mail Transport on page 410 133 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Deleting a Personality You may delete any account except your dominant personality To delete a personality 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or if the Personalities window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab Open the Personalities window and select the personality you want to delete Press the Delete key A warning appears asking you if you re sure you want to delete this personality Click OK The selected personality is deleted Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality In Eudora you can link a signature and a stationery to an existing personality via the Account Settings dialog box For example if you have a Business personality you can link your Business signature and Business stationery to this personality For creating signatures and stationery refer to Adding a New Signature on page 106 and Creating New Stationery on page 111 NOTE Before you can link a signature and stationery to a personality you need to create them first To link a
58. Account Wizard See ee Personality Name What would you like to call this personality Please note that this name should be as descriptive as possible so that you can easily remember which email account this personality refers to Personality Name Business e g gt My Laptop Account Email Account Setup Quaroni 5 In the Personality Name text box enter the name to identify this Personality only for example Business Click Next The next New Account Wizard window Personal Information appears New Account Wizard Personal Information window New Account Wizard Personal Information In the edit box below please enter your name as you would like it to appear in the From field of your outgoing message Your Name Joe Camp e g gt Chris Jones Email Account Setup Quaroni 119 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only 6 In the Your Name text box enter your name Click Next The next New Account Wizard window E mail Address appears New Account Wizard E mail Address window New Account Wizard Shen ee Email Address Please enter your email address which has been assigned to you by your Internet Service Provider This address will be the address other people use to send email to you Email Address jcamp myfirm com e g gt cjones isp com 7 Inthe E mail Address text box enter your full email address
59. Database Network Attributes Search Options Log Enable log for Log file name Browse F Overwrite existing log file Cancel In the Log panel specify whether you want to generate log files and if so how to store them specify whether you want to enable logs for Protocol interactions and or a Configuration data load store Enter a Log file name or select one using the Browse button And if you want new logs to replace the old ones select the Overwrite existing log file option When all your information is entered in the New Database window click OK A new LDAP database is created with its checkbox Modifying a Database You can modify any Ph Finger or LDAP database in your Databases list 275 Using Directory Services NOTE You cannot modify a Eudora Address Book database from the Directory Services window but you can view the path where the file is stored Nickname files must be modified from the Address Book See Using the Address Book on page 233 for more details To modify an existing database NOTE You can only modify one database at a time Multiple selections disable the modify feature Click the database name or icon in the Databases list to select it Click Modify Or just double click the database in the list The Modify Database window appears with its text boxes containing information from the selected database In the Modify Database window make your changes To
60. Filtering Messages 161 Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Command 161 Match Conditions 162 Action Area 164 Detailed Filters with the Filters Window 165 Filter Criteria Match Area 167 Filter Actions 170 Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only 173 Creating an Auto Reply Message Sponsored and Paid modes only 174 Using the Junk Mail Filter for Incoming Messages Paid mode only 176 Sorting Messages Within Mailboxes 177 Simple Sorting 178 Complex Sorting 179 Using the Find Command 179 Finding Text Within One Message 180 Stopping a Find 181 Find Messages 181 Using Web Words 192 Searching in Eudora 194 Saving a Message to a File 195 Managing Windows in Eudora 197 Window States and Tabbed Windows 197 Normal Windows 198 Docked Windows 200 Gripper Bar 202 Zoom Button 202 Close Button 203 Resize Bar 203 Floating Windows 203 Tabbed Windows 205 Eudora s Default Tabbed Windows 206 Opening and Activating Tabbed Windows 207 Reorganizing Tabbed Windows 207 Creating a New Tabbed Window 208 Tab Display in Single Tabbed Windows 208 Tab Contents Location Auto Activation 209 Closing Tabbed Windows 209 Window Context Menu 210 Tab Location 210 Hide command 211 Float In Main Window 212 Eudora Toolbar 212 Viewing the Main Toolbar 214 Adding Moving and Removing Toolbar Buttons Sponsored and Paid modes only 214 Eudora Taskbar 218 Filter Report Window 220 File Browser Window 221 Background Tasks multi threading
61. IMAP accounts The name of a top level IMAP folder is the personality name for that IMAP account For more information on managing your mail on POP and IMAP servers see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 86 and Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 91 153 Working with Mailboxes 154 T Organizing Your Messages Deleting a Message As a safeguard against inadvertent deletions two steps are used to delete a message from your computer first put the message in the Trash then empty the Trash If your incoming mail server uses IMAP the procedure is slightly different as described later POP Procedure To put a message in the Trash 1 Click to select the message 2 From the Message menu choose Delete or from the Transfer menu choose Trash Also you can just press the Delete key or click the Delete toolbar button The message is transferred to the Trash mailbox NOTE To cancel a deletion to the Trash from the Edit menu choose Undo To delete the messages in the Trash mailbox that is remove them permanently from your computer e From the Special menu choose Empty Trash Or if the Mailboxes window is open on your desktop right click on the Trash mailbox in the window and choose Empty Trash from the drop down menu You can set up Eudora to warn you if you try to delete unread queued or unsent messages To do this use the Extra Warnings options windows to select those options See Extra War
62. In the text box enter your user name You can match others as well but it may cause a large number of emails to be auto replied In the Action section choose Reply with in the first drop down list In the text box to the right of the first drop down list enter the name of the stationery Click OK The stationery message you created will be sent to the people you indicated in this filter TIP Remember to delete this filter when you want your auto reply message to stop 175 Organizing Your Messages Using the Junk Mail Filter for Incoming Messages Paid mode only Once you install Eudora Eudora asks you if you want to install a new mailbox called Junk to hold junk email messages spam The Junk mailbox appears in your mailbox list The Junk mailbox is a special mailbox like the In Out and Trash mailboxes It cannot be deleted or renamed sample Junk mailbox ml Label Who Gl E Subject o 99 DirectMortgageAdvisors 02 08 PM 6 44 2003 4 Are you ready for your DREAM HOME o 99 Fun Time Deals 02 50 PM 644 2003 3 Give your Child a Chance of a Lifetime o 99 eBargains News Letter 03 17 PM 6 4 2003 3 Life insurance information and comparisons o 99 Palm Inc 03 47 PM 6 4 2003 26 What s In Store June 2003 o 99 Leola Bruce 04 03 PM 6 4 2003 2 Generic Sildenafil Citrate at 5 a pil O000C o 99 iMatchUp com Find A Mat 04 09 PM 6 4 2003 3 Find you match with iMatchup James 05 16 PM 6 4 2003 4 Why Wait Refinance To
63. Instant me amp Discussions Guy Incognito 04 48 PM 7 18 2 1 House for E Need to Reply l Personal E Travel E E Work No Recipient No Subject v Standard v ponard J AIBE F Ue e From Gu To Se oer S Filters DER m Match E Incoming H Outgoing ja Manual Header g contains Y v fianore v Header B P Address Book Directory Services Filters Filter Report Ei Link History je Filters n hy No Recipient No s For Help press F1 DEK Send zzl elzels Normal windows can be moved around within the window work area They can also be minimized and can be maximized to completely fill the visible window work area When a normal window is maximized its title bar partially blends with the main window title bar Normal windows can overlap other normal windows and are obscured by both docked and floating windows The title bar of a normal window contains the window menu icon far left and three standard window buttons far right minimize restore maximize restore and close A tool window in the normal state whether alone or in a tabbed group can be dragged out of the confines of the main Eudora window but it must first be converted to a dockable or floating window 199 Managing Windows in Eudora To convert a normal window to a docked or floating window 1 To display the drop down context menu right click the window s border or tab 2 To turn the comman
64. Options 2 Scroll and click the Display icon The Display options window appears Display options window Options Category a Show toolbar Show toolbar tips Composing Mail Show cool bars b Show large buttons Show status bar Show category icons Show MDI task bar Automatically download HTML graphics Display attached images inline Display emoticons as pictures C Minimize Eudora to the system tray Cl Always show icon in system tray Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Show toolbar lf you select this option Eudora displays the main window toolbar Show toolbar tips lf you select this option holding the mouse pointer over a button in the main window toolbar displays a very brief description of that button s function Show cool bars lf you select this option the main window toolbar buttons have a flat look and only become raised when you position the mouse pointer over the button If this option is turned off the main window toolbar buttons always have a raised look 315 Setting Eudora Preferences Show large buttons lf you select this option the main window toolbar buttons appear large Show status bar lf you select this option Eudora displays a status bar at the bottom of the main window The status bar provides a brief description of menu items and toolbar buttons Also information about background tasks if running appears Show cat
65. SMTP server but their own If you have accounts at other ISPs or third party email services you may not be able to send mail from those accounts unless you use your primary ISP s SMTP servers The SMTP relay feature allows you to send all your mail through your primary ISP s server To use SMTP relay 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click Sending Mail The Sending Mail dialog appears Sending Mail options window Options Category Email address peggy lou athome com Domain to add to unqualified addresses SMTP server smtphost athome com SMTP Relay Personality Sybil at Home vl Allow authentication Immediate send Sending Mail Send on check amp Cluse submission port 587 Secure Sockets when Sending Composing Mail 7 If Available STARTTLS Last 55L Info a na 3 In the SMTP Relay Personality field choose the personality previously set up for the SMTP relay from the drop down menu None is the default 4 Click OK 71 Sending Messages and Checking Mail All messages sent from each of your personalities will use the account information for the selected personality For example if you bring your computer to a friend s house or your office you can easily change your SMTP relay to a personality that uses a different ISP to send mail Or you can set the relay personality to None so that you can send all mail directly to the serv
66. See Using the Address Book on page 233 287 Using Menu Commands Directory Services Display the Directory Services window which lets you look up people on the Internet on your local network e g within your organization or in your Eudora Address Book s The Directory Services window is similar to an Internet White Pages See Using Directory Services on page 257 Link History Sponsored and Paid modes only Display the Link History window which displays active links you have received in Eudora including ads if you are using Eudora in the Sponsored mode You can activate the link and view its information in this window See Link History Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 228 Statistics Sponsored and Paid modes only Display the Statistics window which displays your Eudora usage by day week month or year Reset Tools Reset the toolbar and windows positions back to the default A dialog will appear asking you to confirm that this is what you would like to do ESP Groups Sponsored and Paid modes only Display the ESP Groups window to create and maintain ESP groups See Eudora Sharing Protocol on page 369 Options Display the Options windows which lets you set preferences for a variety of categories in Eudora In the open Options window click a category in the category list then set the options for that category Click OK to save your changes and close the window You can make changes in multiple c
67. Shift Space all mailboxes except Out Priority Column This column displays the message priority You can use the drop down list to set a particular priority x Highest priority an High priority 142 Working with Mailboxes Sank Normal priority Low priority Lowest priority For more information on message priorities see Setting the Message Priority on page 42 Attachments Column If a message has attached documents this column displays the attachment icon a paper clip holding a sheet of paper Fy Label Column This column displays the message label You can assign labels to messages either manually or automatically using filters See the section Filtering Messages on page 161 Whena message summary is assigned a label the entire summary changes color to match the label color To assign a label to an existing message 1 Select the message in the TOC you want to label 2 Right click to display the drop down list 3 From the drop down list choose Change Label Or from the Message menu choose Change then Label The Label submenu appears 4 Choose the label you want for this message NOTE Label colors and titles are assigned using the Labels options See Labels on page 331 Sender Recipient Column Who This column shows the sender of the message for incoming messages or the intended recipients for outgoing messages 143 Working with Mailboxes Date Column This column displays the d
68. Single Message Profiles K Preview Pane Compact Miscellaneous Message Window None Junk Mail Multiple Messages None Profile Terse lt Compact i l Junk Mail Extras Maximum to Concentrate Terse TA Require matching subjects or senders C Generate multiple messages on Reply Content Concentrator A BossWatch Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Single Message Profiles Preview Pane The profile of single concentrated messages as they appear in the preview pane Choose one of the options from the drop down menu Compact is the default Following are the options None Turns off Content Concentrator There is no change in the message format 363 Setting Eudora Preferences Compact Message is truncated that is excess headers and text are removed and replaced with ellipses and a snip indicator Only the To From Subject and CC of the header fields appear Terse Message is truncated further only the From field of the header appears in the message and the concentrated text Message Window The profile of single concentrated messages as they appear in the message window Choose one of the options from the drop down menu None is the default Multiple Messages Profile The profile of multiple concentrated messages as they appear in the preview pane Choose one of the options from the drop down menu None i
69. Transfe New File Open File Ctrl O Open Attachment Enter Close Ctrl Save Ctrl S Save As Save As Stationery Send Queued Messages Ctrl T Check Mail 04 43 PM Ctrl M Work Offline Print Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Print One Import Exit Ctri Q New File Create a new text file Open File Open an existing text file Open Attachment Open the attachment on the cursor line Shortcut Enter 2 7 Using Menu Commands Close Close the current window Shift Close Close all windows Save Save the changes to the topmost window Shift Save Save the changes to all open windows Save As Save the current message s to a text file Save As Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Save the current message to a stationery file Stationery files have the sta extension and by default are saved in your Stationery directory Send Queued Messages Send all messages that have been queued for delivery Shift Send Queued Messages Display the Mail Transfer Options dialog box Check Mail Pick up new mail from the incoming mail server POP or IMAP Shift Check Mail Display the Mail Transfer Options dialog box Print Setup Display the Print Setup window where you can set the printing options Print Preview Display the Print Preview window giving a preview of how the current item s to be printed will look when printed Print Print the current message s or
70. Vera Fuentes Bill Ganon Stevan Gonzales Cary Gordon Terry Hornig Jen Isaac Brandon Jackson J Michael Lanaghan Ken Ludwig Judi Meade Alex Nikodijevic Armand Rouleau James Santos Carolyn Schultz Joe Toth and Jim Ybarra This manual was written by Danny Atwood Thanks to all the users and testers of Eudora whose suggestions have made it a much better program than it otherwise would have been The SpamHeaders plug in was made easy thanks to the Boost Regular Expression Library one of a group of free peer reviewed portable C libraries maintained at lt http Awww boost org gt The SpamWatch plug in was heavily influenced by work done by Paul Graham and publicized in his article A Plan for Soam lt http www paulgraham com spam html gt and additional suggestions made by Gary Robinson in his Linux Journal article Spam Detection lt http radio weblogs com 0101454 stories 2002 09 16 spamDetection htmI gt About the Name Why the name Eudora When looking for a name for this new Post Office Protocol mail program we thought immediately of the title of the short story Why Live at the P O and named the program after the author of the story Eudora Welty Why Live at the P O can be found ina collection entitled A Curtain of Green and Other Stories Harcourt Brace amp Co Ms Welty s stories are funny sad and fascinating she s surely one of the great American writers September 2006 80 48070 9 Rev
71. able to reply to your mail Mail Server Incoming This is the name of the incoming mail server for your principal email account All incoming messages to your primary account are routed through this server Use the Incoming Mail options window to specify whether this server uses POP Post Office Protocol or IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol A sample server name might be pop myfirm com User Name This is the name you use to log in to your primary email account for accounts that require a user login For example in the incoming mail account jcamp pop myfirm com the user name is j camp All accounts require a user name SMTP server outgoing This is the name of the outgoing mail server for your principal email account All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server If the computer that your primary incoming mail account is selected also runs an SMTP server you can leave this field blank SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Allow Authentication Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MDS If CRAM MD5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used See Using SMTP Authentication on page 72 294 Setting Eudora Preferences Checking Mail The Chec
72. about or use the Tab and arrow keys to move keyboard focus to that item Then press F1 Keyboard focus is indicated by a dashed highlight box a highlighted entry or item or a flashing insertion cursor If the item is in a tabbed window move the mouse arrow to a field and press F1 The entire procedure for the window appears Help Topics For instructions on how to do certain tasks choose Topics from the Help menu The Help Contents are displayed and you may either browse the contents or use the Find and Index options For more information see Help Menu on page 289 Tip of the Day After you set up Eudora the Eudora Tip of the Day dialog box appears each time you open Eudora showing you the Tip of the Day You can display the following and previous tips by clicking the Next Tip and Previous Tip buttons To prevent the Tip of the Day dialog box from being displayed on startup uncheck the Show Tips at Startup check box You can always display the Tip of the Day from the Help menu To close the Tip of the Day dialog box click the Close button Introducing Eudora Email About Eudora About Eudora displays the software version registration information and the credits for those who worked on or contributed to this version of Eudora Importing from Other Email Programs You can import settings address books and mail from Netscape Messenger 4 x versions Microsoft Outlook Express 4 0 and 5 x versions Outlook 98 and Outlo
73. and Paid modes only If you select this option replies are automatically copied to the same mailbox that contains the original message with the exception of the In box replies which are copied to the Out box 309 Setting Eudora Preferences Include signature on reply lf you select this option your default signature will be included on all of your replies automatically Quote only the selected text If you select this option only the text you highlight in a received message will appear on the reply message Generate multiple messages on Reply to multiple messages Check this box if you want individual reply messages to be sent to each sender of each concentrated message instead of one message being sent to all the senders When replying to all This specifies how to address a reply If Include yourself is selected when you Reply to all as described above your address is left in the address list of the new message and you receive a copy of your own reply If this option is turned off the default your address is removed from the reply message and you do not receive a copy of the reply To determine who you are for the Include yourself option Eudora uses the me nickname You create the me nickname in your Address Book If you do have a me nickname Eudora uses the contents of the Login Name Mail Server and Return Address from the Getting Started options If Put original To recipients in Cc field is on th
74. and click Next The next New Account Wizard window Login Name appears This is your return address 120 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only New Account Wizard Login Name window New Account Wizard User Name In the edit box below please enter the name you will use to log into this account User Name jcamp e g gt cjones 8 In the Login Name text box enter your login name This is the account name you use to gain access to your email from your Internet Service Provider ISP Click Next The next New Account Wizard window Incoming Email Server appears New Account Wizard Incoming Email Server window New Account Wizard Incoming Email Server In the edit box below please type in the Full name of your incoming mail server Incoming Server mail myfirm com e g gt mailisp com Please choose the type of server you are using You can always change this later POP O IMAP 121 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only 9 In the Incoming Server text box enter the name of your incoming server Your ISP or system administrator should provide you with the name of this server for this account 10 At the bottom of this window select the type of incoming server you will be using POP or IMAP Click Next The next New Account Wizard window Outgoing Email Server appears New Account Wizard Outgoing Email Se
75. and click the right mouse button inside the selection Select an option from the drop down list to make your change To select the display of lines in the message summaries portion of mailbox windows horizontal lines to separate summaries and vertical lines to separate columns select the Show mailbox lines option in the Mailboxes options window Status Column This column displays the message status which is one of the following w Message has not been read all mailboxes except Out or is queueable or sendable but has not been queued or sent Out mailbox only Dank Message has been read all mailboxes except Out or is not yet able to be queued or sent because it has no recipients in the To or Bcc fields Out mailbox only a Message has been replied to 141 Working with Mailboxes Message has been forwarded lt A Message has been redirected af Message has been sent outgoing messages only a Message is queued to be sent outgoing messages only B Message is saved and not sent c Message is queued to be sent at a specified time outgoing messages only Message was transferred from the Out mailbox before being sent ua Message is being processed for sending Message cannot be sent because of an error Usually the error is in the recipient s email address You can change the status of one or more selected messages or an open message from Read blank to Unread or from Unread to Read by pressing
76. applications When a MAPI client application loads a MAPI or MAPI32 DLL file Windows locks the DLL file while the library is loaded into memory to show that the file is in use Eudora can normally detect that the MAPI DLL and or MAPI32 DLL files are in use If Eudora detects that a MAPI or MAPI32 DLL is locked it displays an error message and skips the swap or unswap procedure When Eudora is forced to skip the swap or unswap procedure this means that the MAPI DLLs are in the wrong state with respect to Eudora that is 1 the Microsoft MAPI DLLs could be installed even after Eudora starts or 2 the Eudora MAPI DLLs could be installed even after Eudora shuts down To prevent this from happening use the following procedure when using Eudora MAPI 1 Start Windows 2 Start Eudora 3 Start any MAPI client applications 4 Send attachments to Eudora via the installed Eudora MAPI interface 5 Shutdown all MAPI client applications 6 Shutdown Eudora 7 Exit Windows 417 MAPI Technical Report Once Eudora s MAPI DLLs get into the wrong state with respect to Eudora you cannot correct the state mismatch until a MAPI client applications unload the MAPI DLLs and Windows is able to unlock the DLL file Since the MAPI DLLs are shared by multiple MAPI client applications Windows does not unlock the MAPI DLL file until the last MAPI client application is shut down Therefore to force all MAPI client
77. are stored with the txt extension See the Using a Signature on page 105 and Signature Window on page 105 for more details on creating and using signatures Stationery Directory Your stationery files are kept in the Stationery directory Stationery files are stored with the sta extension See Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 109 and Stationery Window on page 109 for more details on how to create and use stationery files descmap pce Mappings between mailbox names and file names are stored in the descmap pce file Eudora cnt Eudora hlip The Eudora cnt and Eudora hip files contain respectively the table of contents information and the help text for Eudora s online help topics accessed when you select Topics from the Help menu These two files must be kept in the same directory Eudora exe Eudora exe is the Eudora application executable file You may find it convenient to keep a shortcut of this file on your Windows desktop double click on the shortcut icon to open Eudora Eudora ini Your Options information is saved in the Eudora ini file along with other information For more information see the EUDORA INI Settings File topic in the Help Topics dialog of the online help Contents tab accessed by selecting Topics from the Help menu Also see Setting Eudora Preferences on page 292 405 General Reference eudora log eudorlog old Eudora can keep records of all mail transfers These records are k
78. as bold Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Mailbox windows contain all of your incoming and outgoing message summaries If the Show message preview pane option is selected in the Viewing Mail options window mailbox windows also show the message preview pane the bottom half of the window in the figure below See Viewing Mail on page 317 To open a mailbox e From the Mailbox menu choose the mailbox you want to open or double click its icon or name in the Mailboxes window Mailbox window a F Need to Reply SBT ae TS E E Pope 9 01 20 PM 6 30 2 Where s my burrito Where s my E phinneas kiyomur 03 46 PM 6 12 2 this thing Danny Atwoed 08 42 AM 8 4 20 Re Surprise birthday party for Joe Dawn Shume 11 31 AM 6 4 20 Re Surprise birthday party for Joe Armand Rouleau 04 00 PM 6 4 20 New Features manual for Window Rhiannon Turkse 11 10 AM 7 15 2 Radiohead vs U2 Cage Match Kevin 04 46 PM 7718 2 Instant messengers Danny Atwoed 05 40 PM 6 6 20 Fwd new support query junkDow Danny Atwoed 05 06 PM 6 4 20 Re Takeover of Compuglobalhype Jim 02 59 PM 5 2 20 i Re Bug Report My Eudora is Po w gt NMINMNNM Wh Nh o O o o o 0 To Eugene Subject Where s my burrito Where s my burrito 139 Working with Mailboxes Message Summaries Each line in the list portion of a mailbox window represents a message and is called a message summary Outgoing messages that are in any mailbox other than Ou
79. be automatically purged when more than 20 of the messages were marked for deletion 157 Organizing Your Messages Automatically Deleting Attachments When you delete messages you can have their attachments automatically deleted To do this select the Delete attachments when emptying Trash in the Attachments options windows To do this be sure the attachments are still in the Attach Directory or the directory you have specified for attachments If you have this option selected and want to delete a message but save its attachment move the attachment into another directory before deleting the message See Attachments on page 311 Transferring Messages You can transfer messages to any of your mailboxes There are several ways to do this e Click to select the message s you want to transfer then choose a mailbox from the Transfer menu e Click to select the message s you want to transfer then right click on the selection and choose a mailbox from the Transfer drop down menu e Drag a message summary to an open mailbox window or to a mailbox icon in the Mailboxes window To put a copy of a message in another mailbox instead of transferring the message hold down the Shift key and use one of the transfer options above This is useful if you want to file a message in more than one mailbox If you try to transfer a message to the Out mailbox an alert appears informing you that some header information may be removed from the
80. be notified of new mail in one or all of the following ways an alert dialog box the opening of the mailboxes to which new mail is delivered and a special New Mail sound These options are turned on or off in the Getting Attention options For information see Getting Attention on page 334 Also an envelope appears on the Windows taskbar indicating mail is waiting See Background Tasks on page 336 When you receive notice that new mail has arrived select Eudora from the Windows task bar Mail usually arrives in the In mailbox unless you are using filters to transfer messages If the In mailbox is not already open select In from the Mailbox menu The messages are listed in the order they are received with the most recent message listed last Unread messages are designated by a bullet in the Status column of the message summary Double click anywhere on a message summary to open the message You can also view messages using the message preview pane at the bottom of the mailbox window while the message summary is highlighted Incoming messages are saved indefinitely in the In mailbox or the mailbox into which they are filtered until they are deleted or transferred to another mailbox Incoming Message Window To open an incoming message double click on its message summary in a mailbox window or if the message summary is current highlighted press the spacebar or the Enter key 79 Receiving and Responding to Messages I
81. bottom of incoming messages and the message preview pane To open an attachment from the open message window or the message preview pane click on the attachment name or its icon If you have the application that the attachment was created in that application launches and the attachment opens You can now drag and drop attachments from your message to other directories Use this feature to easily file the documents you receive 82 Receiving and Responding to Messages If you open a received attachment outside of Eudora for example directly from the Attachments directory or from a Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP directory a warning alerts you to be careful when opening the attachment in case it s a malicious file You can turn the warning Launch a program externally on or off in the Extra Warnings options window found under Options in the Tools menu See Extra Warnings on page 341 If you receive a large message consisting largely of indecipherable text it is probably an attachment that was not automatically decoded Usually this occurs because the attachment headers are formatted incorrectly To decode an attachment that was not automatically decoded 1 2 Open the message From the File menu choose Save As to save the message as a text file Run the decoding utility appropriate for the encoding method that the sender used Decoding utilities can be found at various shareware sites on the Internet Also see Attaching a Fi
82. build filters to sort messages alert you and even send an automatic reply All your favorite addresses can be stored in your personal address book or you can let Eudora search for addresses for you And if you use more than one ISP Eudora allows you to create multiple personalities to send and receive mail to multiple accounts Also you can use Eudora in one of three modes Sponsored Paid or Light For more information on Eudora s modes see Operating Eudora in One of Three Modes on page 25 There are many more Eudora features and functions described later in this manual System requirements In order to install and use Eudora you must have the following IBM PC or compatible e Microsoft Windows 98 ME XP 2000 It is recommended that you have the latest service pack for each operating system e A mail account with an Internet Service Provider ISP e Access to your mail account via a modem or Internet style network connection Introducing Eudora Email What s New in Eudora Email 7 1 The following new features and functions have been added to Eudora in version 7 1 e Recent mailboxes A virtual folder of recently used mailbox for conveniently getting to your most often used mailboxes e Expanded Media for Alert Sounds Play a Sound functionality on New Mail arrival and filters has been expanded from wav files to allow for other media files such as mp3 e Saved Searches Save the search criteria of your Ultr
83. closing parens We add them internally at the end of the search expression to balance them So a b c is equivalent to a blc 438 X1 Search Queries Not enough opening parens We treat the extra closing parens as normal punctuation So a b c d is equivalent to a b c d In this case you might think it should be a b c d since we ve noted before that punctuation between terms like a b com turns it into a phrase search The exception to that rule is extra parenthesis Parenthesis are only used to group terms and then thrown away Or in this case just thrown away However they do serve a purpose to separate c from d just like space NOTE and In other words you can mismatch your parenthesis i e a b c is equivalent to a b c and is therefore balanced Order Of Operations Precedence Rules 1 Parenthesis are done first 2 then proximity NEAR PRE NEAR n PRE n n 3 then negation NOT 4 then intersection amp AND 5 then union OR Example NOT aOR b AND c NEAR d is equivalent to a b amp c NEAR d Numbers A search for 1 234 567 89 is equivalent to 1 234 567 89 OR 1234567 89 In other words the commas in a number are optional so we search for both Negative Numbers A search for 123 is equivalent to NOT 123 OR 123 In other words the negative sign could mean logical negation or as actually the prefix of a number le
84. computer and then deleted from the POP server But this can be awkward if you want to read mail from two or more computers and keep your mail organized at the same time There are several options you can use to control your mail transfers and the storage on the server Some of these options are available in the Incoming Mail options for your dominant account only and the Account Settings dialog box for any of your personalities Some of the options are available in the Mail Transfer options For more information see on Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions on page 89 and on Account Settings Dialog on page 125 Leaving Mail on the Server If you use the POP protocol for your incoming server to retrieve mail your mail is normally deleted from the server once it is delivered to Eudora However most POP incoming servers allow you to indicate that you wish to keep your mail on the server so you can retrieve it from several different computers at various times 86 Receiving and Responding to Messages Facts you should know if you decide to leave your mail on the server Some mail servers won t allow you to keep mail on them Your system administrator may not allow you to keep mail on the server even though you have the option turned on Usually administrators do not like to keep too much mail on the server because of space concerns Keeping a lot of mail on the server may slow down the mail checking process If you check m
85. date and time are placed in the Date column Queued messages in the Out mailbox o ut EE UO Eo E Bob Clark your 04 29 PM 8 11 21 meeting tomorrow Don Morgan yc 04 29PM 8 11 21 meeting 2 0K 0K To send all of your queued messages e From the File menu select Send Queued Messages If you have the Task Status window displayed you can see the progress of the transmission See Task Status Window on page 225 If you have the Immediate send option turned on but want to send a message immediately hold down the Shift key and click the Queue button The Change Queueing dialog box appears and you can select Send Message Right Now However if you select this option all messages that are queued in the Out box will be sent Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time You can specify that a message be sent at a certain time in the future To queue an outgoing message to send a certain time 1 From the Message menu choose Change 2 From the Change submenu choose Queueing 68 Sending Messages and Checking Mail The Change Queueing dialog box appears 3 Change Queueing dialog box Change Queuing Send Message Next time queued messages are sent C Ono after Time 03 32 PM Date 8 11 2003 C Don t send i Cancel 4 If you choose Right now the message is sent immediately when you click OK If you choose Next time queued messages are sent the message is sent the next time queued mes
86. definition 486 Icons filters 166 IETF definition 486 ignore option 170 Ignoring previously read messages 88 IMAP 95 145 Deleting a message from the server 93 Imap directory 404 IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix how to enter in Options IMAP 300 497 Index IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix option 130 IMAP option 129 IMAP server 410 Full message except attachments over K 92 how to obtain 425 Macintosh 425 managing mail 91 UNIX 425 VAX VMS 425 Windows NT 425 IMAP version 4 410 IMAP vs POP 152 IMAP attachment directory 93 IMAP definition 486 Immediate send how to enter in Options 303 Immediate send option 67 68 Import Mail command 278 Import settings from other e mail programs 123 Importing from Microsoft Outlook 22 Importing from Netscape Messenger 24 Importing from Outlook Express 21 In command 281 284 In mailbox 79 in mbx file 406 in toc file 406 Include Headers option 195 Include outdated Return Receipt To how to enter in Options 358 Include signature on reply how to enter in Options 310 Include yourself option 96 Incoming Mail Options 86 Delete from server when emptied from Trash option 90 Skip messages over K in size option 88 Incoming Mail options 298 Full message except attachments over K 92 Incoming mail server 73 Incoming Mail tab 128 Incoming message window Message body 81 Title bar 80 Toolbar 80 BLAH BLAH BLAH button 81 Delete From Server button 81 Fixed Width button 80 Pencil button 81 Pri
87. delete them when their corresponding messages are emptied from the Trash Last you have an option to send a single MAPI text file attachment TXT and HTML files only as an inline attachment text in the body of the Eudora message rather than as a rider or normal attachment to the message So for example you can pass a Web page from your Web browser directly into the body of a Eudora message for your recipients to read right in the message itself they don t have to open an attachment 409 Mail Transport Mail Transport Eudora uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP to transfer your outgoing mail to your SMTP server machine which in turn uses SMTP to send your mail to the world at large Mail from the world at large arrives on your incoming Post Office Protocol POP or Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP mail server where it waits for Eudora to pick it up with either POP version 3 or IMAP version 4 The mail Eudora sends and receives is constructed in accordance with RFC 822 and RFC 2045 MIME Eudora mail transport overview POP similar for IMAP POP Check Mail POP SMTP Your PC Server Send Queued Messages The World at Large Outgoing Mail When you send an email message to someone Eudora uses SMTP to send the mail to your local SMTP server computer That computer then sends the mail to your addressee s computer also usually by means of the SMTP protocol 410 Mail Transpo
88. desired personality A new message opens from that personality When the composition window opens in response to any of the three message creation methods as previously described the default signature for the selected personality is used But if a stationery file was selected or a default stationery file is specified in the account s options then the signature stored with the stationery file is used However you can always change the signature drop down list in the composition window For details see Using a Signature on page 105 Once you open a new composition message from a particular personality you can change your message s personality 136 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only To change your message s personality 1 In an open message click the From header or right click to display the drop down context menu 2 Inthe From field of the message header choose the personality Or from the context menu choose Change Personality From its submenu select a new personality The From field of the message header changes to the information associated with the new personality for that message NOTE If you are composing a message and decide to change the personality the signature and stationery assigned to that personality in the Account Settings dialog box change as well When Eudora changes a personality as it responds to a message it assigns the same personality under which it received the
89. desktop and drag attachments to new messages and otherwise partially manage your files and folders The File Browser window is nota full replica of MS Windows Explorer Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Display the Stationery window which lets you create manage and apply your stationery files See Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 109 Signatures Display the Signature window which lets you create manage and apply your signatures See Using a Signature on page 105 Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Display the Personalities window which lets you create modify manage and apply your personalities See Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 115 Task Status Display the Task Status window which lets you see Eudora checking mail for and sending mail from each of your personalities simultaneously Task Error Display the Task Error window which lets you see a detail summary of any error that may occur while in Eudora Address Book Display the Address Book window which lets you create manage and apply entries that contain nicknames shorthand names for groups of email addresses and associated information In the Address Book window you can also create multiple Address Book files for storing nickname entries Nicknames provide a quick and convenient way to address e mail especially to multiple recipients and to people you correspond with frequently
90. do this use the Account Settings dialog box accessed from the Personalities window See Account Settings Dialog on page 125 If you decide you want to transfer the whole message click on the Fetch button in the incoming message window or select the Fetch server status in the message summary then check mail again Also you can use the Trash button or the Fetch then Delete server status so that the message is deleted from the server after it is transferred If you decide you don t want the message and want to delete it from the server click the Trash button in the incoming message window or select the Delete server status in the message summary then check mail again The message will be deleted from the server without ever being retrieved 88 Receiving and Responding to Messages Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions To check your mail and give special transfer and storage instructions to the POP server 1 2 Hold down the Shift key and from the File menu choose Check Mail The Mail Transfer Options dialog box appears Mail Transfer Options dialog box Mail Transfer Options Mail checking amp sending options How should checking sending be performed j i a gt M EEA on the selected personalities below V Send queued messages Delete messages marked for deletion Retrieve messages marked for retrieval Steve Janoff Mac Delete all messages that have been retrieved Delete all
91. email message and does not appear within the message text Instead the name of the document appears automatically in the Attached field of the message header To attach a file to an outgoing message 1 From the Message menu choose Attach File The Attach File dialog box appears Attach File dialog box Attach File Look in S M ey EB apps eudora O Testins compaq eudoratest Sutil ami My Downloads winpows Documents and Settings Program Files _ WUTemp Dropbox a Public E GatorPatch log SEPOAgent temp 0s070469 bin lt i gt Files of type All Files M Cancel Locate the file you want select it and click Open to attach the document to the current message or to open a new message with the file attached You can add as many attachments as you want to a message You can also drag one or more files from either the desktop or the File Browser window onto the message window to attach them See File Browser Window on page 221 To detach an attached document before the message is sent select the document name in the Attached field then press either the backspace key or the Delete key When the message is sent if the chosen document is not a plain text ASCII file it is encoded in the selected attachment type This allows you to send any kind of document through the mail even applications 49 Creating Messages If the document is an ASCII file you can put it in the body of th
92. excerpted text in the message should be used when calculating the MoodWatch score of a composition message Controls whether or not phrases identified by the MoodWatch engine in composition messages should be highlighted by underlining Time of the delay in minutes if MoodWatch is configured to delay the sending of messages 456 Entry Default Value MoodWatchDeltaTime 5 MoodWatchinterval 1000 MoodWatchThresholdTi 1000 me MultipleRepliesForMulti 0 pleSelection NetscapbeURLDDE 1 NetworkOpenTimeout 60 NewMailUpdateFrequen25 cy NoAutoResponseHeadeerrors to list rs NoAutoSendPrecedenc list bulk e NonJunkToAddressBoo 1 k NonJunkAddressBook NoSplashScreen 0 Eudora ini File Description MoodWatchDeltaTime is how long Eudora must be idle in seconds before background MoodWatch scanning starts Number of milliseconds that Eudora will wait until checking the MoodWatch score after the user hits a key in a composition message MoodWatchThresholdTime is how long it keeps scanning in milliseconds once scanning starts If 1 Eudora will generate separate reply messages for each selected message Otherwise Eudora will concentrate all messages into a single reply If this setting is on when clicking on a URL in a message and Netscape Navigator is running then Eudora will send the URL to that open Navigator window If this setting is off i e set to zero then clicking on a URL in a message will
93. field click the down arrow to display the drop down menu Following is a description of each option on the SSL drop down menu Secure Sockets when Sending Never Do not use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security even if SSL is available on the server If Available STARTTLS default Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL that is if the server supports STARTTLS If your server doesn t support STARTTLS mail transfers will occur successfully but they will not be secured with SSL Required Alternate Port Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically use the older style alternate port method for starting SSL If your server does not support SSL on the appropriate ports mail transfers will fail Required STARTTLS Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL If your server does not support STARTTLS mail transfers will fail NOTE If you use SSL and cannot make a connection when receiving or sending mail you may need to check with your ISP to update any invalid SSL certificates However to override any issues with SSL when retrieving or sending mail choose Never from the drop down menu to make a successful connection 30 Introducing Eudora Email 4
94. field and the format fields RECENT OLD and ANCIENT In each field enter 1 to stand for the Time enter 2 to stand for the Date enter 3 to stand for the Day of the week and enter 4 to stand for the Time zone but only if the message did not originate from the local time zone Separate each entry with a space to improve readability of the display output for example 1 2 4 330 Setting Eudora Preferences Labels The Labels options determine the title and color of the seven labels that can be used to categorize messages To display the Labels options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Labels icon The Labels options window appears Labels options window Options Category Click on the box on the left to choose a color g for the label al Auto completion Label 1 Fo 2 Label 2 Date Display Label 3 Label 4 Label 5 Label 6 Label 7 Background Tasks To change a label title type the new title in the field to the right of the label number To change a label color single click the label number to display the Color dialog box 331 Setting Eudora Preferences Color dialog box You can select from one of the pre defined Basic colors or create your own Custom colors To assign a basic color to a label select the color and click OK To create a custom color click Define Custom Colors to display th
95. folders only your personal folders cannot be accessed The Mailboxes window does not reflect the real time status of the IMAP mailbox list So between mail checks a disparity can grow between what appears in the list and what is actually on the IMAP server as new mailboxes are added and existing ones are changed or removed To refresh your list of mailboxes and folders on the IMAP server as it appears in the Mailboxes window 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group The Mailboxes window appears 2 Right click on the top folder in the IMAP tree to display the drop down list 3 From the drop down list choose Refresh Mailbox List The mailbox list is updated according to what actually appears on the IMAP server at that time Also the Mailbox and Transfer menus are updated with the current IMAP mailbox configuration Using IMAP Tasks Offline If you use IMAP as your incoming server you can perform certain tasks offline Being offline is the preferred method when you are using a laptop away from home or office When you are offline you are disconnected from the server To go offline 1 Move your mouse pointer to the taskbar and right click A context drop down list appears 2 From the context menu choose Offline You are now disconnected from your IMAP server When you are offline you can perform these tasks e Disable timed mail ch
96. for each person in your address book 39 Creating Messages In the example below you want to send Barb a message Previously you had to enter her nickname from your address book or if she wasn t in your address book you had to enter her full email address To use the auto completion feature just enter B in the To field and Eudora displays a drop down name list of names beginning with B for you to choose from You can also press Esc to prevent the drop down name list from appearing If you had typed BA Eudora would have displayed a drop down name list with all names beginning with Ba Scroll through the name list and click or press Enter to select the correct name The name is now entered into the header field Name auto completion in a new message No Recipient No Subject lt none gt m ir he egy H amp Y Queue Subject Shalom lt vedancegr aol com gt Ce amp Shannon Shari m Bcc ahari UT al annn Attached If you have only a Barb and a Beth as names in your address book or history file Eudora completes the first alphabetical name So when you type B Barb would appear first on the list if Names should appear in alphabetical order is selected in the Auto Completion options window explained later in this section amp indicates that the name came from your address book If the name is from your address book only the nickname appears in t
97. half of left window Following is an example of a Results and Details List Results and Details List left pane of Directory Services window nw fish i Status Ready Last found 1 freckle_three merkury net 858 555 Pe Results List Unknown phone2 858 Phone w 858 555 1 Unknown last Russ i i Unknown first Kelly Details List Name Kelly Russ Email Alias Kelly Personal Email w freckle_three merkury net 555 1212 212 gt A Io Cc Bcc I Keep On Top Results List In the Results List the data associated with the Ph attributes you name appear in the columns on the left pane of the Directory Services window You do this by mapping attributes to one of the three special Present A field selections Name Email w and Phone w See step 5 267 Using Directory Services For example if you want to display the data associated with the Ph attribute Full_Name in the column named Name in the Results List add an attribute mapping for Full_Name with Name selected as the Present As value Details List Any attribute name can be renamed before it appears in the Details List This is done via the Present As field Simply replace the text in the Details List with alternate text For example if your Ph server is configured to display an attribute called Full_Name but you want only Name to display you need to map Full_Name to Name using the
98. in a Message Header You can select the account you want to use directly in the header of your outgoing email message Just click the arrow to the left of the From field and a drop down list appears showing your different personalities Select the personality you want to use for this message The current personality will have a dot next to the personality s name Also to display the personalities drop down list press Alt R See the following example 135 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Personality drop down list in a message header To Joe Camp lt jcamp myfirm com gt lt Dominant gt Business Joe at home Joe at school st Using a Personality in a Message The easiest way to create an outgoing message from a specific personality is to choose the one you want from the From field s drop down list See the previous section Selecting a Personality in a Message Header However there are several other ways to do it To use a personality in a message alternate method 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or select the Personalities window tab if grouped in a displayed tabbed window 2 In the Personalities window right click the desired personality to display the drop down context menu 3 From the context menu choose Message 4 From the Message submenu choose New Message As Or select the desired personality and press Enter Or simply double click the
99. is available only if you have installed the dial up networking services with Windows 98 XP or Windows NT 4 0 Distribution list A group of recipients to whom users can refer by a common name for example a distribution list called Marketing When users address a message to a distribution list all members of the distribution list receive the message Domain In general a group of computers and other devices under the management of a single administrator or administrative entity In Windows NT a domain is a group of servers that share common security policy and user account databases In the Internet a domain identifies a range of IP addresses and mail forwarding information See DNS 484 Glossary Domain Name System DNS The naming service used by Internet Mail to support message routing It maps domain addresses to IP addresses so Internet messages can be delivered to a particular server Emoticon Characters used to indicate an emotion or expression In internet communication emoticons such as smiley faces can add an extra level of context to email messages Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP Using this protocol you can create and maintain groups whose members share files in a shared folder without using a server File Transfer Protocol FTP Using this protocol you can transfer files over the Internet Filters A filter in Eudora sorts your mail as it is being delivered You set up filter parameters for your specific needs for
100. key switching fields with 37 Tab Location submenu 209 210 Tabbed windows 197 205 and taskbar 218 closing 209 creating 208 default 206 opening and activating 207 reorganizing 207 tab display 208 Table of Contents in Eudora definition 489 Tabs and the Save As command 195 Switching fields with 34 Tabs in Body button 34 Tabs in body of message how to enter in Options 306 Tabs windows contents 209 location 209 showing and hiding 208 Task Error 336 Task Error command 287 Task Error window 227 Task Status 336 Task Status command 287 Task Status window 224 Taskbar buttons 218 Taskbar Eudora 218 Technical Support command 290 Technical support information 27 Technical support number 858 658 1292 28 Text As Attachment button 33 Text as Attachment button 50 Text submenu 44 280 Text symbols display 34 Tile Horizontal command 289 Tile Vertical command 289 Timed status clock icon 69 Tip of the Day 19 Tip of the Day command 290 Title bar for incoming mail 80 for outgoing mail 32 tlx files 407 To button in Directory Services 261 in the Address Book 245 To field in a reply 96 in Filters 167 in outgoing mail 38 Attach File 49 toc files 406 Toolbar adding a separator line 217 adding buttons 214 changing placement of a button 217 in incoming mail 80 in outgoing mail 33 main 212 removing a button 217 removing a separator line 217 show hide 403 using Shift key 215 Toolbar command 403 Top command 210 Topi
101. make a successful connection Last SSL Info Click to display the most current information for an SSL connection between a server and Eudora since the last time you started Eudora The Eudora SSL Connection Information Manager window appears with SLL and certificate information WARNING If you display the SSL information windows make certain you don t change any of the field information unless you are familiar with SSL 304 Setting Eudora Preferences Composing Mail The Composing Mail options determine what Eudora features are available to you when composing messages To display the Composing Mail options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Composing Mail icon The Composing Mail options window appears Composing Mail options window Options Category Default Stationery lt No Default gt Getting Started When not using Stationery Signature Standard Checking Mail Word wrap Keep copies May use quoted printable Tabs in body of message Show signature while composing Composing Mail i Default Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only This is the default stationery to be used in all outgoing messages from your dominant account Select a stationery file from the drop down list or select lt No Default gt for no default stationery If a stationery file is selected that file is used when you open new messages from this account exce
102. menu Choose Forward e To redirect the message to someone else highlight the message right click to display the context menu Choose Redirect e To delete a message highlight the message and press the Delete key or right click to display the context menu Choose Delete 191 Organizing Your Messages Using Web Words Web Words provide you with two easy ways to access search engines e Clicking a word or words in your email to activate a contextual search e Typing your search query in your toolbar You can now highlight a word or words anywhere in a message header or text and search the Internet for that topic For example you can highlight the word flowers anywhere in the message and search the Internet for all topics relating to flowers Or you can type your search query in your toolbar and search the Internet for that topic To search using the toolbar 1 Click in the Search text field on your toolbar Toolbar Search Field 2 Type the text that you wish to search the Internet for The text that you type appears in the Search Web field Toolbar Search Field co 3 Press the Return key Eudora launches your web browser and initiates a search for the topic To search using a drop down menu 1 Highlight a word or words in an email 2 Right click the word 192 Organizing Your Messages A contextual submenu appears showing the option to Search for your topic W
103. message summaries in a mailbox window and choose Filter Messages from the Special menu the incoming and or outgoing messages selected that satisfy the content match condition you specify will be acted on according to the action you ve specified in this filter This option is useful when testing your filter or manually filtering messages that you have already received or sent NOTE If Incoming or Outgoing is selected or both the filter is automatic that is Eudora performs the filter operation behind the scenes automatically when you send or check mail If you now also select Manual the filter becomes both automatic and manual meaning you can now manually perform the filter operation by selecting Filter Messages from the Special menu while message summaries are selected in a mailbox window but Eudora still filters the messages automatically during mail sends and checks In short checking Manual does not turn off Eudora s automatic filtering for that filter Also making a filter manual also gives you a good way to test the filter to your needs as soon as you set it up rather than having to wait until the next time you send or check mail After creating a manual filter with the Make Filter dialog box check to see that it does what you want by selecting Filter Messages from the Special menu Your open message or selected message summaries are immediately filtered according to the new filter You can choose one of three content mat
104. messages from the server mailbox that have been marked to be deleted by using the Message gt Remove Deleted Messages menu item Specifies whether IMAP accounts should support EMSAPI Include Headers check box in the Save As dialog Whether or not the default signature should be included when forwarding a message 454 Entry IncludeSigRedirect IncludeSigReply InteractiveSpellCheck Default Value 0 1 1 InterpretFormatFlowed 1 JunkMailboxName JunkNeverUnread JunkTrimMbox Junk 0 Trash KerberosSetUserName 0 Krb4Dilname LastSettingsCategory LexPath MainLexFiles MainWindowState ManualJunkScore ManualNotJunkScore kerberos32 dll 0 100 Eudora ini File Description Whether or not the default signature should be included when redirecting a message Whether or not the default signature should be included when replying to a message When doing a spell check controls whether you get prompted with a dialog for each misspelled word or each misspelled word gets marked with a double red underline which then you can right click on to get suggestions and other options for the misspelled word If you hold down the Shift key while doing a spell check the other method of spell checking will be performed Turns format flowed off and on Specifies name for Junk m If this is 1 the Junk mailbox will never be marked as having unread mail in it If this is 1 the Junk mailbox will
105. messages or current message Changing the personality changes the associated stationery and signature Junk Transfer a message to the Junk mailbox Not Junk Filter a message out of the Junk mailbox into its designated mailbox Delete Transfer the current message into the Trash mailbox POP server or mark the message for deletion IMAP server UnDelete Unmark the message for deletion IMAP server only Purge Messages Remove all messages marked for deletion IMAP server only Removes these messages from both your PC and the IMAP server 283 Using Menu Commands Transfer Menu This menu lets you transfer the current message s to another mailbox either an existing mailbox or a new mailbox that you create NOTE Holding down the Shift key while selecting any of the items on the Transfer menu transfers a copy of the current message s to the selected mailbox and leaves the original messages where they are Transfer menu Transfer esta In uE Junk Trash Recene a Blew Business F Personal F In Transfer the current message s to the In mailbox Out Transfer the current message s to the Out mailbox Junk Transfer the current message s to the Junk mailbox Does not train Junk scoring Trash Transfer the current message s to the Trash mailbox Recent Transfer the current message s to a recently used mailbox of your choice New Display the New Mailbox dialog b
106. mistakenly filter more valid mail to the Junk mailbox If you slide the arrow to a higher number Eudora filters less junk mail but is less likely to incorrectly filter valid mail The default setting is 50 359 Setting Eudora Preferences Junk amp Address Books Mail isn t junk if the sender is in an address book Check this box to indicate that mail coming from people in your address book s should never be marked as junk mail NOTE The following field does not work unless you check the Mail isn t junk if the sender in an address book box Put Not Junk ed senders in address book Check this box to indicate that senders of valid mail found in the Junk mailbox are to be added to your address book when you select Not Junk from the Message menu Future mail from this sender will never be filtered to the Junk mailbox again This function works with the previous field Junk Mailbox Automatically place junk in Junk mailbox Check this box if you want Eudora to filter what it considers junk mail to the Junk mailbox If this is not checked junk mail appears in your In box and is scored To see the junk mail score go the Mailboxes option in the Tools menu and check the Junk box located under the Show Mailbox Columns section Junk mailbox is never marked unread Check this box if you don t want your junk mailbox to indicate that it contains unread mail Trimming Junk Mailbox Remove mail that is at least _ days old Enter th
107. never be marked as having unread mail in it Specifies which mailbox to trim old junk to Changing this setting to will cause old Junk to be deleted rather than being trimmed to a mailbox Uses KClient SetUserName function to set user name in Kerberos system Turning this switch on may cause Kerberos tickets to be invalidated The name of the Kerberos version 4 DLL e g kerberos32 dll Last category that was displayed in the Options dialog Directory in which the dictionary files for spell checking reside Main dictionary files British dictionaries can be used by changing this to british tlx british clx The state of the Main Window normal 1 minimized 2 or maximized 3 The state is set when Eudora closes and the Main Window is set to this state the next time Eudora starts up The score assigned to mail the user specifies as junk A setting of 0 means do not change the score when the user specifies mail as junk The score assigned to mail the user specifies as not junk 455 Entry Default Value MapiAutoSendSignatur 0 e MapiExcerptFixedText 1 MaxConcurrentDialupTa2 sks MaxConcurrentTasks 10 MaxMenus 30000 MDNSendAddress 0 MinAgeOffScore 0 MinScoreToJunk 50 MoodWatchCheckOriginO al MoodWatchCompBadW 1 ords MoodWatchDelayinMinu10 tes Eudora ini File Description Controls whether messages sent through Eudora s MAPI will tack on the default signature Controls whether message
108. no subject how to enter in Options 342 Queue button 35 68 Queue For Delivery command 68 283 Queue mail 67 Change Queueing command 68 70 Change Queueing dialog 68 Don t send option 69 70 editing before sending 69 for a certain time 68 Immediate send option 67 Next time queued messages are sent option 69 On or after option 69 Queue button 68 Queue For Delivery command 68 Right now option 69 Send Message Right now option 68 Send Queued Messages command 68 sending queued mail when checking mail 70 taking mail out of the queue 70 Queued Q status 68 Quick Recipient List 216 280 282 285 putting nicknames in 251 253 removing nicknames from 251 254 Removing recipient from 251 252 Quick Start Guide 407 QuickTime 47 Quit with messages queued to be sent how to enter in Options 342 Quitting Eudora 31 Quoted printable Turning off 421 Quoted Printable button 33 R RAS definition 488 Readme txt file 407 Real name how to enter in Options 293 Real Name option 126 Recent command 281 284 RECENT format in Options 329 Recipient List 252 Add to Recipient List command 250 252 Adding email address to 252 Insert amp Expand Recipient submenu 253 Insert Recipient submenu 253 Remove From Recipient List command 251 252 Redirect automatically put new message in the queue g9 no signature 100 Turbo redirect by default option 99 Redirect command 98 282 Redirect To action 172 Redirect To submenu 99 283 Redirect defini
109. on slow connections For details see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 86 Authentication style This specifies which POP account authentication technology to use for this personality Passwords Kerberos APOP or RPA Ask your email administrator which one to use If you use Eudora at home most likely your Authentication Style is Password CompuServe users should use the RPA authentication method 129 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only When Configuration IMAP Sample Account Settings Incoming Mail panel IMAP configuration Create New Account Generic Properties Incoming Mail Server pop mycomputer net Configuration OPOP map IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix For new mail download Minimal headers only O Eull message except attachments over 0 When I delete a message Markit as deleted O Move it to Trash Automatically purge deleted messages Never O always __ Owhen 20 of messages are deleted Authentication style Passwords O kerberos Cram MD5 Secure Sockets when Receiving If Available STARTTLS v Last SSL Info Following are option descriptions for the Incoming Mail dialog box IMAP configuration IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix tThis specifies the mailbox location prefix that IMAP will use when locating your mailboxes on the incoming mail server An example prefix is usr mail Ask your email administrator what to enter here i
110. provides online answers to your technical questions about QUALCOMM s Eudora software products Go to the Technical Support web site to get valuable how to information and step by step interactive tutorials www eudora com techsupport tutorials Also you will be able to retrieve most current Eudora products and documentation Sponsored and Light mode users may use the Eudora web site technical support and tutorials In addition you can learn from other Eudora users by searching the archives or posting a question to the Eudora User Forums The forums are a free online community of Eudora users helping one another If you still need help after reviewing all of the available materials the User Manual this Quick Start Guide the README files the Online Help and the Technical Support Web Site contact your ISP or email administrator or the Eudora Technical Support group Before you call technical support you need to register your copy of Eudora in Paid mode Be sure to register as soon as possible to avoid any delays in receiving technical support Person to person support by phone or email is available to Paid mode users who have a valid registration code Eudora tech support reps are available Monday Friday from 8 A M to 5 P M Pacific Time using the following phone number and email address Phone 858 658 1292 Paid mode users only Email eudora support qualcomm com Paid mode users only When sending email make sure to incl
111. recipients replies for this personality if this address is different from the personality s incoming mail account The address you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this personality and when a recipient replies to a message from this personality the reply is sent to this address If you do not enter an address in this field Eudora uses the personality s incoming mail account as the email address Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form username incomingmailserver For example suppose your incoming mail account is jcamp pop myfirm com but your email address is slightly different j campemyfirm com You would then enter j camp myfirm com in this field If you do enter an address in this field first test the address to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you If you use an invalid email address no one will be able to reply to mail sent from this personality User Name Enter the name you use to login to this email account For example in the incoming mail account j camp pop myf irm com the login name is j camp The part after the at sign is the name of the incoming mail server See Incoming Mail on page 298 SMTP Server Enter the name of the outgoing mail server for this personality SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Outgoing messages you send are routed through this server If the computer selected by this personality s incoming mail account als
112. save the changes and close the window click OK or click Apply save the changes and leave the window open You can then make additional changes and save or discard them The Modify Database window will differ depending on the protocol you ve selected For details on the fields of the different dialogs see Adding a New Database Server on page 265 NOTE If you attempt to modify a Eudora Address Book database the Modify Database window merely displays the path where the address book file is stored Deleting a Database To delete a database 1 2 Click the database name or icon in the Databases list to highlight the item Click Delete You are prompted to confirm the delete Click Yes and the database is removed from the list Click No and the deletion is cancelled and the database remains You can delete multiple databases at once use the Shift key to select a range in the list or use the Ctrl key to select items non consecutively 276 Using Menu Commands This section describes Eudora s menu commands Each menu is illustrated and each command is described Additional commands are available by pressing the Shift key while choosing menu commands If there is a shortcut to the menu command it appears to the right of the command on each menu Just press Ctrl and the appropriate keyboard character to access that command File Menu This menu provides basic file and mail functions File Menu Edit Mailbox Message
113. selected When this command is on for a docked or floating window the window can be docked to any edge of the main Eudora window When Allow Docking is deselected for a docked window the window is converted to a floating window and cannot be redocked When the command is turned off for a floating window the window cannot be docked Even with Allow Docking selected you can hold down the Ctrl key while dragging a docked or floating window to suspend dockability until you release the key Hide command This command is always available on the context menu Choose Hide to close the tool window or tabbed window Hide performs the same function as the Close command Ctrl F4 on the standard MS Windows window context menu Note however that when you hide or close a tool window its content state and position are all preserved And when you hide or close a tabbed window the content state and position of all member windows are preserved Thus if you hide and redisplay a floating tabbed window the window floats in its same position If you attempt to hide or close a tool window that contains unsaved changes or a tabbed window in which the active window contains unsaved changes Eudora asks if you want to save your changes To redisplay a tool window after you ve hidden it choose it from the Tools menu To redisplay a tabbed window after you ve hidden it choose one of its member windows from the Tools me
114. selected message s Make Address Book Entry Create an Address Book entry from the current message the Address Book or the Directory Services window Add as Recipient Add the selected text usually a full email address to your Quick Recipient List Remove Recipient Select a recipient from this submenu to remove the recipient from your Quick Recipient List Empty Trash Delete all messages from the Trash mailbox As a result of this action these messages are completely removed from your computer Compact Mailboxes Reclaim unused space in all mailboxes 285 Using Menu Commands Forget Password s Make Eudora forget your passwords so that next time mail is checked for one of your password controlled mail accounts the password must be entered first Useful if you step away from your desk in a non secure area Message Plug ins Settings Open the Installed Message Plug ins dialog box which lets you set the options for those installed message plug ins that have settable options In the open Installed Message Plug ins dialog box click the desired plug in Scroll through the list if necessary and then click the Settings button which will only be available if the plug in has settings In the displayed Plug in Settings dialog box set the options you want and click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box When you are finished setting your plug in options from the Installed Message Plug ins dialog box click
115. shared folder are ignored The system default is No Preference 6 Inthe Notifications area If you want ESP to notify the person you invite when updates are coming into your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder box This box is checked by default If you want ESP to notify the person you invite when updates are going out of your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM my shared folder box This box is checked by default If you want ESP to warn the person you invite when the potential member attempts to change role type check the Prefer that user does not change role displays warning box If checked the member can change role type but is discouraged to do so 7 Click OK A message window opens that contains an invitation message for the selected group This message has a special attachment containing the group invitation 8 In an open message window enter the email addresses of the invitee s in the To header When an invitee accepts the invitation information contained in the attachment creates a group entry in the invitee s Groups window and prompts him or her to specify a group folder and mailbox ESP sends an RSVP message back to the inviter The inviter then sends an updated copy of the membership list to all the members 379 Eudora Sharing Protocol Configuring Shared Folder Settings Every group member needs a shared folder o
116. sorted mailbox will automatically be placed in the correct sorted order For example if you have a mailbox sorted by date and you want all of the messages to be grouped by subject any new messages will be grouped with other messages containing the same subject in a chronological NOTE You can also sort message in the Find Messages window when the Results panel is active Complex Sorting You can perform complex sorting by holding down the Ctrl key and click one column then another column and so on The columns are sorted in the order you clicked on them For example if you click the Subject column first and then the Date column the subjects in this mailbox sort alphabetically and then chronologically You will notice numbers in each column header indicating the order of the sort See the following example Complex sorting by subject and then date Date 2 S 4 Subject 4 08 55 AM 11 12 1999 5 Re Paid gt Adw 04 31 PM 1 19 2000 0 1 PDF distiller 10 37 AM 1 18 2000 0 2 Please donate y 12 31 PM 10 19 1999 2 Please join the E 01 29 PM 7 8 1999 05 2 Please join the E 02 23 PM 10 25 1999 8 Prize Donations 11 02 AM 1 26 2000 0 3 Proofs for the 80 03 53 PM 7 12 1999 0 4 Property Passes To perform a complex sort you can click two columns or all eight To cancel the sort just click on the column that displays 1 All the sort criteria will cancel Using the Find Command Eudora incorporates a Find command that sea
117. tab onto an existing tab Eudora adds the new tab at the end of the group of existing tabs The end depends on the location of the tabs in the tabbed window top bottom the default left or right For example with tabs along the bottom the end is the far right Note that the relocated window takes on the window state normal docked or floating of the destination tabbed window To reorganize the left to right or top to bottom order of tabs within a tabbed window just drag the tabs left and right or top and bottom The drop scheme is the same as that described above Creating a New Tabbed Window To create a new tabbed window drag one of the tabs from an existing tabbed window and drop it onto an exposed portion of the window work area If the window work area is completely obscured a normal window is maximized for example then drop the tab onto the status bar The dropped window converts into a normal tabbed window with a single tab To convert the window to docked or floating 1 To display the drop down context menu right click the tab or the window border 2 To turn off the command from the context menu choose Float In Main Window The check mark disappears 3 To turn on the command choose Allow Docking The check mark appears 4 While dragging the floating or docked window you can hold down the Ctrl key to temporarily suspend docking behavior When you release the key docking behavior resum
118. that Kerberos is set up properly To learn more about the Kerberos authentication system click on the following URL to display website http web mit edu kerberos www 426 Sources Spelling Dictionaries There are additional spelling dictionaries that are compatible with Eudora s built in spelling checker They are available via anonymous ftp from ftp eudora com in the directory eudora eudorapro windows extras dictionaries To configure Eudora to use these dictionaries look at the online help select Topics from the Help menu under EUDORA INI File Settings MainLexfiles Developer Information If you are a software developer and are interested in how to have your application used or integrated with Eudora click on the following URL http www eudora com developers 427 Dialup Eudora Dialup Eudora As of version 4 0 Eudora no longer supports the built in Serial Dialup shell connection method found in previous versions of Eudora Eudora now requires that you use the Microsoft SLIP PPP Dialup Networking connection method that is a standard feature of both Windows 98 2000 ME XP and Windows NT 4 x The Microsoft SLIP PPP Dialup Networking facility offers the following advantages over the retired Eudora Serial Dialup feature e TCP IP running on top of SLIP PPP is inherently more reliable than a Serial Dialup connection because reliable end to end data transmission is an integral feature of TCP IP e ASLIP PPP dial
119. that begins with one of Reply X these values will not be shown Priority Mime Version Content X Persona Resent Message Refer enes Return X 400 Mail System Errors To X List Delivery Disposition X Juno Precedence X Attachments X MSMail X MimeOLE TabSpaces 0 If on then when the Tab key is pressed while the cursor is in the body of the message spaces are inserted instead of a tab character TabStop 8 How many spaces to insert for a lt Tab gt in the body of a composition message TaskErrorKeepAll 0 When set Eudora will not automatically remove errors from the task error list TaskErrorLinesPerRow 3 Number of lines for each error in the Task Errors window TaskErrorRemoveFrom 1 Controls whether or not to remove errors from the Task Errors List window after seeing the corresponding error dialog TaskMgrWaitTime 20 The number of seconds in which the user has to be idle in Eudora which is defined as pressing any key or mouse button before background tasks are processed see IgnoreldleOQnManualCheck above for an exception case TaskStatusGraphBorder 0 0 0 RGB color of the border of the progress bar in the Task Status Color window TaskStatusGraphCompl 18 106 254 RGB color of the completed portion of the progress bar in the eted Color Task Status window 467 Entry Default Value TaskStatusGraphRemai 129 207 254 nColor TaskStatusRecvGraphC 18 106 254 ompletedColor TaskStatusRecvGraphR 129 207 254 emai
120. that viruses that look for txt files won t find them If this option is turned off address book files are stored with txt extensions 358 Setting Eudora Preferences Junk Mail Paid mode only You can change the Junk Mail options in the Junk Mail options window In this window you can determine at what junk score level you wish your messages to be filtered and adjust other junk mail options To display the Junk Mail options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Junk Mail icon The Junk Mail options window appears Junk Mail options window Options Category Statistics i Miscellaneous t Junk Mail S Junk Mail Extras ka Content Concentrator A BossWatch Junk Threshold Consider mail junk if score is at least 0 50 Junk and Address Books O Mail isn t junk if sender is in an address book Put Not Junk ed senders in address book 100 Junk Mailbox Automatically place junk in Junk mailbox C Junk mailbox is never marked unread Ignore date on junk Trimming Junk Mailbox Remove mail that is at least 30 days old Warn before removing Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Junk Threshold Eudora distinguishes junk mail by a scoring system You can adjust this scoring threshold by using the slide bar indicator If you slide the arrow to a lower number Eudora filters out more junk mail but may also
121. the Filters window can use one or two terms as its criteria connecting them as appropriate with the conjunction drop down menu Header Use this field to specify which message header items you want the filter to search You can choose an option from the drop down menu or enter one yourself This is helpful if you want to use a header item that does not appear on the menu such as X Priority The selections are as follows e To e From e Subject e Cc e Reply To 167 Organizing Your Messages e Any Header e Body e Any Recipient e Personality e Junk Score The Any Header option searches all message headers including hidden headers that are shown with the BLAH BLAH BLAH option The Body option searches the message body The Any Recipient option searches all possible recipient items To Cc Bcc The Personality option searches the name of the personality email account associated with the message You will most likely want to search for both the To and Cc fields when receiving mail If so you should use lt lt Any Recipient gt gt instead of To or Cc Use the match type contains is the default drop down menu to control how the header item is matched with the text string in the text field The match options are as follows contains or doesn t contain If the specified header item contains or does not contain the text string filter the message It allows other t
122. the book Internetworking with TCP IP by Douglas Comer 1988 Prentice Hall ISBN 0 13 470154 2 025 If you want to know more about SMTP RFC 822 POP version 3 MIME and IMAP the official standards are RFC 821 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol by Jonathan B Postel RFC 822 Standard for the Format of Internet Text Messages by Dave Crocker RFC 1939 Post Office Protocol Version 3 by Marshall Rose RFC 2045 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions by Ned Freed and Nathaniel Borenstein 411 Mail Transport RFC 2060 Internet Message Access Protocol Version 4 Rev 1 by Mark Crispin You can find the RFCs on the web in several different places e http www rfc net e http www faqs org rfcs e http www ietf org rfc html e http www rfc editor org rfcsearch html 412 MAPI Technical Report MAPI Technical Report Where to Get More Information on MAPI For more information supplementary to this technical report visit our online MAPI FAQ at the web site lt http www eudora com developers gt What Does MAPI Do Eudora s MAPI support allows users to quickly attach documents to email messages directly from the application that created the document Without MAPI users must first save the document remember what folder the document is in switch to Eudora and then remember to manually attach the document to the outgoing message MAPI streamlines this process dramatically To email the current
123. the emails that SpamWatch scores as being Junk Accuracy of statistics is based on your usage of the Junk and Not Junk commands to train and correct SoamWatch NOTE Eudora usage statistics are statistics for you only No statistical information is sent to QUALCOMM or any other location To display the Statistics window 1 From the Tools menu choose Statistics The Statistics window appears 229 Managing Windows in Eudora Sample Statistics window showing received email for one day Bia Statistics Show statistics for Day T More Statistics Received Email 52 messages today 228 messages yesterday 146 00 average per day 1778 total messages Messages read 38 today 73 yesterday 78 00 average per day 1398 total messages Badd today yesterday average Attachments received 4 attachments today 8 attachments yesterday 3 00 average per day 48 total attachments Sending mail usage not shown Statistics window showing Eudora usage in general fia Statistics Show statistics for Day Mote Statistics Eudora Usage 0 31 hours today 3 27 hours yesterday 1 24 hours average per day 17 10 hours total Usage Activities today 55 reading mail 5 composing mail 40 other Add today yesterday mmm average HB Reading HB Composing E other From the drop down menu choose to see email usage statistics for the Day Week Month or Y
124. the item to display the drop down list From the drop down list choose Remove From Recipient List The entry s nickname is removed from the Recipient List and the entry is unbolded in the Address Book list Or select the item you wish to remove from the Remove Recipient submenu under the Special menu 252 Using the Address Book To open a new message addressed to someone on your Recipient List 1 2 From the Message menu choose New Message To Forward To or Redirect To From the displayed list select the nickname A new message window appears addressed to the nickname you selected To insert a recipient into a message that you have already opened 1 2 Move the cursor to where you want the recipient From the Edit menu choose Insert Recipient The Insert Recipient submenu appears From the Insert Recipient submenu choose the recipient The recipient you choose is inserted into the opened message To insert the real address es instead of a nickname 1 Hold down the Shift key and from the Edit menu choose Insert Recipient The Insert Recipient submenu appears From the Insert Recipient submenu choose the recipient The real address of the recipient is inserted in the message To set this to happen all the time select the Automatically expand nicknames option in the Miscellaneous options window More than one recipient from the Recipient List can be added to the To Cc and Bcc fields of any mes
125. the list a drop down context menu appears with the following commands the standard Eudora window management commands appear at the bottom New Create a new signature Eudora prompts you for the name of the new signature then opens an editing window for you to type the signature text Save the text with the File menu Save command or close without saving to discard it Edit Open an editing window for the selected signature Double click a signature as a shortcut for this command Save your changes with the File menu Save command or close the window without saving to discard your changes Delete Delete the selected signature Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion Use the Delete key as a shortcut for this command Rename Rename the selected signature Use the F2 key as a shortcut for this commana or click the signature item s name box then edit the name right in the box You can also display the drop down context menu and create a new signature by right clicking anywhere in an empty Signature window or by right clicking anywhere off a signature item in a Signature window that is not empty Adding a New Signature Following is the basic procedure for creating a new signature in the Signature window followed by additional information on managing signatures and sending them with messages Eudora comes with a default signature called Standard This is an empty signature file that you fill with signature text Inst
126. the message or requeue it To return to the composition window without sending or queueing the message click Cancel Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages By changing the options in the MoodWatch options window you can have MoodWatch scan your incoming messages for offensive text as well The indicators are one two or three chili peppers appearing in the mailbox message summary column as shown MoodWatch scanning incoming mail Need to Reply Sa malone te eaten T Dr Davi 05 29 PM 8 1 20 3 Re Ragietration atte John Sir 09 00 AM 8 2 20 5 Eudora Takes Five O Jeremy 06 31 PM 8 2 20 2 Re Fwd Re ESP tr fe Armand 04 34 PM 8 3 20 2 Fwd Looking for goc iO a Armand 04 35 PM 8 3 20 3 Fwd Daily Manna fr JO Internati 04 35 PM 8 3 20 3 Daily Manna from thi O david 04 35 PM 8 3 20 2 4 Fwd Daily Manna fre O david 04 35 PM 8 3 20 3 J two chilies i lo David He 04 47 PM 8 3 20 2 5980 Address boo O david 04 36 PM 8 3 20 3 d low high KAK dad Also by turning on an option in the MoodWatch settings you can have MoodWatch scan and display chili peppers on all of your stored mail See the section MoodWatch Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 351 for more information 64 Creating Messages Saving a Message for Later Changes Sometimes it is convenient to save an outgoing message either as a safeguard when typing long messages or so you can return to it later to make changes To save the current messag
127. the same subject If this switch is on then the selected messages will be grouped together as well You can temporarily turn this off by holding down the lt Shift gt key while doing the lt Alt gt click Set to 1 if you have a constant Internet connection such as LAN or cable modem If this is 1 the Junk and Not Junk menu items will always be enabled If this is 0 they will be enabled only when appropriate i e Junk is enabled only for messages not in the Junk mailbox and Not Junk is only enabled for messages in the Junk mailbox If 1 the auto complete feature will list entries from the address books before entries from the history list 448 Entry BackgroundColor Backgroundimage BackupStatisticsDaily BadPasswordString BlackTocLines CenterUnreadStatus CheckOwnerFreq CompactDisk Default Value password Eudora ini File Description Specifies an RGB triple in hexadecimal for the color to use for the workspace area of the main Eudora window Can be used in conjunction with the BackgroundImage entry for choosing a color better suited for the image being displayed Examples white is FFFFFF black is 000000 and blue is OOOOFF This setting does not require QuickTime to be installed To install a new background color you must open the Eudora ini file and add a new header for example Decorations BackgroundColor 0000FF Specifies an image to be displayed in the workspace area of
128. to redirected 357 Setting Eudora Preferences Include outdated Return Receipt To Sponsored and Paid modes only If this is turned off Eudora uses the Disposition Notification To header in return receipt requests to request that you be sent a notification when your message appears by the recipient If you select this option Eudora also sends the Return Receipt To header in return receipt requests This header is understood by some older mail delivery systems and may return you a receipt when your message is delivered to your recipient s mailbox The Return Receipt To header cannot give you any information about whether or not your recipient displayed your mail and is not supported by many newer mail delivery systems Your recipient must specify that he she wants to send you a return receipt for you to receive it Automatically expand nicknames Sponsored and Paid modes only If you select this option nicknames in message headers are replaced with the real addresses when you switch fields If turned off the nickname is expanded when the message is sent Auto save messages every _ minutes Enter the number of minutes between auto save intervals In case of a system shut down the messages saved are from the most current auto save You can find your saved messages in your Out mailbox Hide address books from simple viruses lf this option is on Eudora uses nnt as the file extension for address book file so
129. to the left of the database name until a checkmark appears in the box If no databases are selected you cannot perform a query You can select multiple databases to perform a query and you can mix protocols Click a column heading to sort this list by that column alphabetically Shift click the column heading to sort in reverse order To resize columns position the mouse pointer over the divider line to the right of the desired column and drag the line to the left or right The use of the Modify button in this section of the window is described in Modifying a Database on page 275 The use of the Delete button is described in Deleting a Database on page 276 Adding a New Database Server In addition to the default directory service databases that already come configured with Eudora you can add new Ph Finger and LDAP databases for your Directory Services queries By adding a new database you can then query that database for names email addresses phone numbers etc Databases are created from the Protocols section of the window and they must be created using one of these three listed protocols TIP You must be able to identify the server by its description and its host name before you can add it to Directory Services NOTE You cannot create a new database using the Eudora Address Book protocol in the list Nickname files must be created from the Address Book window See on Using the Address Book on page 233 for more details
130. to you and the other members in your group You will need to share the secret word or phrase with the other group members The secret word or phrase is used to make the transmission of file changes more secure so that ESP can verify any incoming file changes were actually sent by a group member NOTE If your shared secret does not match the shared secret of other group members you will get a security error when you receive file changes from them So if you choose to use a shared secret word or phrase for improved security be sure that all group members set the exact same shared secret word or phrase The secret word or phrase is case sensitive 10 When finished click OK 384 Eudora Sharing Protocol Maintaining ESP Group Members In the User dialog box in the Groups window you can maintain your group members by deleting them from the group inviting new members or by syncing the selected member s shared folder To maintain group members 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Inthe left column choose the group whose users you wish to maintain 3 Choose the Users tab The Users dialog box appears and a list of members of the selected group appears User dialog box Users Eudora Settings Notifications Advanced User A Dawn Shumr Eugenu lt esu Invite Open Folder ESP Settings 4 In this dialog box you can do all of the following e Invite
131. using Windows NT 4 x 431 Defining a Login Script 433 Creating a Desktop Phonebook Shortcut 434 Configuring Eudora to Auto Dial the Phonebook Entry 435 X1 Search Queries 436 X1 Search Queries 436 Columns 436 Basic Search Rules 436 Special Searches 438 429 Parenthesis and 438 Order Of Operations Precedence Rules 439 Numbers 439 Negative Numbers 439 Multiple Negative Searches 439 Spacing 440 Maximum Word Length 440 Master Search Field Rules 440 More Punctuation Rules 442 Proximity Searching 443 Eudora ini File 445 EUDORA INI Settings File 445 Optional Sections 445 Name and Location of the INI File 446 Default INI file 447 Settings 448 Mappings 471 Window Position 472 Tool Bar 473 Debug 477 Troubleshooting 479 What to Do First 479 Formatting and Printing 481 Miscellaneous 482 Glossary 483 Index 491 Introducing Eudora Email Welcome to Eudora Email 7 1 Eudora Email hereafter referred to as Eudora is a comprehensive electronic mail email software program that accesses your Internet Service Provider ISP or network to receive and send your email messages In Eudora you can write messages and send them with custom stationery and signatures You can send files both text and graphic created in other programs and attach them to your email messages You can forward messages redirect them or reply to all recipients of a message You can set up mailboxes and folders for your mail and
132. window Print One Sends the item immediately to the printer One copy of the item is printed Import Display the Import Mail amp Addresses dialog box to import your messages and address book from Netscape Messenger 4 0 or Microsofts Outlook 98 and Express 5 0 Exit Exit quit the Eudora application 278 Using Menu Commands Edit Menu This menu provides text editing tools Edit menu Mailbox Message Transfer Special Undo Typing Ctrl 2 Redo Deletion Ctrl Shift Z Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste Special Paste As Quotation Ctrl Text gt Insert gt Insert Emoticon gt Wrap Selection Finish Address Book Entry Ctrl Insert Recipient gt Find b Sort gt Check Spelling Ctrl 6 Message Plug ins gt Undo Reverse the most recent action taken In the example above the last action was typing You can undo the last 50 actions in reverse order Redo Redo the most recent action that was undone with the Undo command You can redo up to the last 50 actions depending on how many were undone Cut Delete the selected text and place it on the clipboard Copy Copy the selected text and place it on the clipboard Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard Paste Special Paste copied text as unformatted Rich Text Format RTF Eudora standard or Hyper Text Markup Language HTML text 279 Using Menu Commands Paste As Quotation Paste the contents of the clipboard as quoted te
133. window displays two columns of data e Persona tThe identifying name assigned to the personality lt Dominant gt indicates your principal email account which is the account Eudora uses whenever you don t specify otherwise and is the account associated with all mail stored before you began using alternate personalities e Account The incoming mail account assigned to the personality This is generally in the form loginname incomingmailserver See Account Settings Dialog on page 125 To resize the column widths position the pointer over the divider line between the column headings until a splitter cursor appears Then just drag the divider to left or right Note that it is possible to completely collapse the Persona column NOTE You cannot manually sort the information in the Personalities window Clicking on a column heading does sort the column If you select one or more personalities in the Persona column and right click the selection a drop down context menu appears with the following commands TIP You can select multiple items in the Persona column to perform some of the operations listed below Hold down the Shift key to select a consecutive range of items and hold down the Ctrl key to make non consecutive selections e Check Mail Check mail now for all selected personalities e Send Queued Messages Send messages queued by all selected personalities now e Message This submenu lets you perform message creation f
134. window to perform complex searches Available columns with Eudora search are attachment attachmentcount bcc body cc date from headers id imapflags junk label mailoboxname mailboxpath priority size status subject to and who Basic Search Rules Let s begin with a simple scenario In the Find Messages window we select Anywhere for the Search category and matches x1 query for the verb The table below lists various text the user enters in the search text box and the results of such a search Anywhere matches x1 query Result the a word starting with the in any column the the exact word the in any column the no occurrences of any word starting with the in any column NOT the Same as the NOT must be all caps the no occurrences of the exact word the in any column NOT the Same as the a AND b a word starting with a and a word starting with b in the same column AND must be all caps ab Same as a AND b AND is the default operator 436 X1 Search Queries Anywhere matches x1 query Result a amp b aORb alb subject the alb amp c al b amp c alb amp c the big d the big d the big d a b com a NEAR b b NEAR a a NEAR 5 b a 20b a PRE b a PRE 5 b Same as a AND b a word starting with a or a word starting with b in any column OR must be all caps Same as a OR b
135. with your POP account Shift Queue Send Opens the Change Queueing dialog Shift Insert Recipient lInserts the address es instead of the nickname Shift Ctrl Expands the nicknames in the current field to their real addresses the cursor must be in the appropriate field Shift Finish Address Book Entry Finishes the Address Book entry with the address es instead of the nickname Shift Sort command Sorts in descending order Shift Transfer Puts a copy of the current message in the selected mailbox and leave the original where it is Shift Wrap Selection Removes the carriage returns from the selected text unwrap Shift Save Saves changes to all open windows Shift Close Closes all open windows Shift Exit Sets all open windows to open again when Eudora is next started 395 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Shift Check Spelling Performs an inline spelling check of the entire message or selected text Misspelled words are highlighted in red double underline Right click on a highlighted word and select the correct spelling from suggestions on a drop down list Shift Space Switches the status of the open incoming message or one or more selected incoming messages from read to unread or from unread to read Ctrl Space Resets the current or selected text in the message body of a composition window to the default character fo
136. you complete the registration process contact information for the Eudora Technical Support group will be displayed in this help window Report A Bug Displays a new composition window addressed to Windows Eudora Bugs at Qualcomm If you are having technical problems with Eudora just answer the questions in the email message Tip of the Day Display the Tip of the Day window Payment amp Registration Display the Payment and Registration dialog box which lets you change operating mode and register your copy of Eudora SeeChanging Eudora Modes on page 25 and Registering Eudora on page 27 for registration instructions Insert System Configuration lInsert text containing detailed information about your system configuration into the message body of a new composition message Eudora related configuration files may also be attached to the composition message when you select this command Use this feature when reporting bugs or when corresponding with the Eudora Technical Support group 290 Using Menu Commands About Eudora Display the About Eudora screen which contains information on this release a link to the Eudora web site and developer and support team credits It also displays your registration number and name 291 Setting Eudora Preferences To display category windows where you can specify how you want to use Eudora select Options from the Tools menu By selecting or turning off criteria on these windows you cus
137. 51 252 254 Remove Recipient submenu 252 removing nicknames from the Quick Recipient List 251 254 renaming a nickname 245 resizing 234 Save command 238 To button 245 Using central Address Book files on a server 255 View By field 234 window 233 Work tab 241 Address Book command 287 Address Book file storage 404 Address Book definition 483 Advanced Network options 347 After sending message how to enter in Options 312 Age sensitive in Options 329 Age sensitive date formats 144 Alias 483 Align Center button 36 Align Left button 36 Align Right button 36 Allow Authentication how to enter in Options 294 303 Allow Docking command 202 204 208 211 212 Allow drag and drop transfers how to enter in Options 321 Allow drag and drop transfers option 159 Allow drag select of messages how to enter in Options 321 Alternate personalities 115 ANCIENT format 330 and option 170 Any Header field in Filters 168 Any Recipient field in Filters 168 APOP definition 483 appears option 168 Application Configuration Access Protocol definition 483 Arrange Icons command 289 As Normal option 171 Ask me each time how to enter in Options 323 Attach Directory 82 158 Attach directory 404 Attach submenu 283 408 Attached field in a forwarded message 98 in outgoing mail 39 49 in redirected message 98 Attachment directory how to enter in Options 311 Attachment directory for IMAP 93 Attachment directory option 404 Send File 283 Attachment Typ
138. 54 oO ia Billyboys 07 49 PM 2 3 2003 2 Pictures from your New Year s Party oO 4 Billyboys 07 53 PM 2 3 2003 2 pictures part 3 pix 21 28 0 Billyboys7 08 04 PM 2 3 2003 2 Pictures part 2 pix 13 21 0 ia Billyboys 12 30 PM 7 7 2003 3 Paul s Retirement Party Pictures 0 Billyboys 03 27 PM 7 7 2003 2 Paul s Retirement Pix part 3 0 ia Billyboys 03 28 PM 7 7 2003 2 Paul s Retirement Pix part 4 0 Billyboys 11 50 PM 7 25 2003 2 A Bad Day at the Bull Ring gt 0 Billyboys 02 46 PM 7 26 2003 4 no subject 0 Verizon EBil 11 37 PM 1 10 2003 4 Online Billing Notification 0 A Phil Akin 10 00 PM 1 16 2003 2 Emergency 1302465K7746K 4 gt 424 Paul s Retirement 030 Jerry Harry Fumio ZIP From Billyboys 1 is Paul s Retirement 019 Mike Jim Stan ZIP From Billyboys 1 AA Paul s Retirement 020 Bob Scott ZIP From Billyboys All the highlighted messages in the thread appear with abbreviated headers in the preview pane NOTE The messages appear concentrated as a single message in the preview pane Changing the concentration level in the preview pane Content Concentrator allows you to change the level of concentration right from the preview pane Instead of setting the level of concentration in your Eudora Options you can now change the level for each mailbox 102 Receiving and Responding to Messages To change the level for each mailbox 1 Click the Content Concentrator b
139. 68 70 278 Send queued messages option 89 Send styled text only how to enter in Options 323 Send the signature with styles how to enter in Options 323 Send To Back command 289 Send to Browser command 403 Sendable e status 65 70 Sender Recipient Who column 143 Sending all Mail Through One Account 71 Sending Mail Options Immediate send option 67 Send on check 70 Sending Mail options 302 Sending rejected messages again 100 Sent status 73 Separator adding to main toolbar 217 removing from main toolbar 217 Server e mail Internet how to obtain 425 Server configuration how to enter in Options 298 Server option 128 Server Options action 173 Server Status column 144 145 Server status popup 88 Server definition 488 Settings button 286 408 Shared folder definition 488 Shift key and toolbar buttons 215 Shift Space 148 Shift Space modifier change to Read or Unread status 142 Show attachment icons how to enter in Options 319 Show category icons how to turn on and off in Options 316 Show cool bars how to turn on and off in Options 315 Index Show cool bars option 214 Show formatting toolbar how to enter in Options 322 Show large buttons how to turn on and off in Options 316 Show Mailbox Columns how to enter in Options 320 Show mailbox lines option 141 Show MDI task bar how to turn on and off in Options 316 Show MDI task bar option 218 Show message preview pane how to enter in Options 318 Show message previ
140. 7 Message is processing Following are field descriptions for columns in the Task Status window Task default An icon and its description displays in this column indicating what function Eudora is performing In the above example the Send icon appears Persona This column is available only if have set up more than one personality If checked the Personal column displays the personality name for the given task Status default Displays a general description of the tasks current status for example Logging into POP server Details Displays more information of the tasks status including network protocol commands 226 Managing Windows in Eudora Progress default Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks Task Error Window The Task Error window displays an error message as it occurs In the example below a password error appears You can indicate if you want the Task Error window brought to the front when an error occurs See Background Tasks on page 336 To access and display the Task Status window 1 From the Tools menu choose Task Errors Or if the Task Error window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab The Task Error window appears Task Error window displaying an error Task Errors personal Closing the connection 04 06 29 PM Error reading from network Cause socket was shut down 10058 D lt Dominant gt 1 messages left to send 11 53 07 AM Can t send to
141. 9 PM 5 2 QUALCOMM cap NUM The Eudora taskbar displays a button for each normal Eudora window that is open or minimized The taskbar provides a convenient way to switch between normal windows by clicking buttons without having to display the different windows from the Window menu The Eudora taskbar is modeled after the Windows 98 XP and Windows NT 4 0 system taskbars which usually appear at the bottom of the screen but there are important differences as noted below To show or hide the Eudora taskbar 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll through the category list and select Display The Display options window appears Select or deselect Show MDI task bar option Any normal Eudora window that is open or minimized is represented by a button on the taskbar This includes composition messages received messages mailbox windows and any tool windows or tabbed windows that are in the normal state Any open tool or tabbed windows that are in the docked or floating state are not represented as buttons on the taskbar If a tabbed window is represented by a button on the taskbar the button shows the name and icon associated with the active tool window in that tabbed window Click a taskbar button to make that normal window active The window comes to the front of the stack of all normal Eudora windows If you right click a taskbar button the standard Windows context menu displays letting you Restore Minimiz
142. AR c d is also an valid proximity search Example 5 a NEAR NOT b Makes no sense treated as a NEAR NOT AND b since NEAR and PRE have higher precedence than OR AND and NOT Example 6 a NEAR NOT by Makes no sense treated as a AND NEAR AND NOT b since parenthesis have highest precedence 444 Eudora ini File Eudora ini File EUDORA INI Settings File The EUDORA INI file is where Eudora keeps most of the settings It is a standard Windows INI file and may be edited with any text editor NOTE Since Windows caches information from INI files in memory while the program is running you should never change the EUDORA INI file while Eudora is in use If you need to make a change first quit Eudora then edit the file and then restart Eudora The EUDORA INI file is divided into a number of sections the following of which appears by default e Settings e Mappings e Window Position e Tool Bar e DirectoryServices e Debug Optional Sections The following sections will appear in the INI file only when the appropriate conditions are met or the appropriate items created Personalities This section appears only when you have created alternate email accounts personalities Stationery This section appears only when you have created stationery files Open Windows This section appears only when there are windows currently open in Eudora 445 Eudora ini File WazooBars This s
143. B Contents Introducing Eudora Email 15 System requirements 15 What s New in Eudora Email 7 1 16 Where do find information 16 Eudora Quick Start Guide 17 Online Help 18 Context Sensitive Help 19 Help Topics 19 Tip of the Day 19 About Eudora 20 Importing from Other Email Programs 20 Importing from Outlook Express 21 Importing from Mircrosoft Outlook 22 Importing from Netscape Messenger 24 Operating Eudora in One of Three Modes 25 Changing Eudora Modes 25 Registering Eudora 27 Technical Support 27 About security Sponsored and Paid modes only 28 Using SSL for your Dominant Personality 29 Starting and Quitting Eudora 31 Creating Messages 32 Creating an Outgoing Message 32 Using the Composition Window 32 Title Bar 32 Text Toolbar 33 Message Header 37 Message Body 39 Using Automatic Name Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only 39 Setting the Message Priority 42 Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only 42 Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only 43 Text Editing Menu Commands 44 Other Formatting Options 46 Using Format Painter Sponsored and Paid modes only 46 Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only 47 Attaching a File to a Message 49 Manually Decoding Attachments 50 Sending Emoticons 50 Including a URL in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only 54 Creating a Hyperlink in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only 54 Checking Your Spelling A
144. Copy To command 244 Copying a message to a mailbox 158 CRAM MD5 definition 484 CRAM MD5 definition 484 Creating a new alternate account personality 118 Creating a new tabbed window 208 Creating a vacation message 174 CSV format saving entries in address book 244 Customize command 214 Customize dialog 214 Cut command 279 Index D Daemon definition 484 Databases creating 265 modifying 275 Databases list 258 264 Databases default Directory Services 264 Date column 144 Date Display Options 144 Date Display options 328 Date formats how to enter in Options 329 Date formatting 144 Decoding attachments 50 Default Domain option 127 Default Signature option 127 Default Stationery how to enter in Options 305 Default Stationery option 127 Delete all messages on server option 90 Delete all messages that have been retrieved option 90 Delete an auto completion entry 41 Delete attachments when emptying Trash how to enter in Options 312 Delete attachments when emptying Trash option 158 Delete automatic attachments how to enter in Options 312 Delete button 265 Delete command 93 155 156 283 Delete from server after day s how to enter in Options POP server 299 Delete from server after days option 87 129 Delete From Server button 81 Delete from server when emptied from Trash how to enter in Options POP server 299 Delete from server when emptied from Trash option 90 129 Delete messages marked for deletion option 89
145. Delete queued mail how to enter in Options 341 Delete server status 88 144 145 173 Delete unread mail how to enter in Options 341 Delete unsent mail how to enter in Options 341 Deleting 276 Deleting a personality 131 Deleting a signature 108 Deleting mail fromthe IMAP server 93 Deleting stationery 112 descmap pce file 405 Detaching attachment 49 Diagonal arrow in the Status column 99 142 Dialup Networking definition 484 Dictionary files 407 Directory Services addressing a message from 261 auto name completion 259 Bec button 261 Cc button 261 creating a new database 265 Databases list 258 264 default databases 264 Keep On Top option 258 looking someone up 258 making a nickname from 262 making a query 258 modifying an existing database 275 previewing query details for printing 262 printing query details 262 Protocols list 263 Query field 259 reading your query results 260 Registered Drivers column 264 Start button 259 Status field 260 Stop button 259 To button 261 window state considerations 263 Directory Services command 288 Directory Services window 257 DirectoryServices directory 404 Display dates using sender s timezone in Options 328 Display Options Show cool bars option 214 Show MDI task bar option 218 Show status bar option 214 Show toolbar option 214 Show toolbar tips option 214 Display options 315 Distribution list definition 484 DNS definition 485 Docked windows 200 clo
146. Directory Access Protocol Eudora Address Book NOTE The Eudora Address Book protocol does not appear in the list until you have created an Address Book in Eudora Click the column heading Registered Drivers to sort the protocols alphabetically Shift click the column heading to sort in reverse order You can resize the column by dragging the divider line to the right of the column heading to the left or right The use of the New Database button shown in this section of the window is described under Adding a New Database Server on page 265 Using Directory Service Databases The Databases section of the Directory Services window lists the databases that are available to you for searching for individuals over the Internet within your company or in your Address Book Eudora comes with these servers already configured by default e Idap bigfoot com e Idap switchboard com e Idap whowhere com e Idap infospace com e Idapbiz infospace com e Idap four11 com 264 Using Directory Services e Eudora Nicknames or the name of your nicknames file This last item appears only if you have a Eudora Address Book set up You can modify or delete these databases and you can also create new databases See the following sections for more information You use the databases in this list to perform your lookup queries To perform a query you must first select one or more databases in the list To select a database click the checkbox
147. Down Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Toggles between the two halves of any split window in composition windows the Address Book the Filters window and when the preview pane appears mailbox windows Sends the topmost window to the back of all displayed windows Shows or hides one half of a split window current window only in composition windows shows hides the message header in mailbox windows shows hides the message preview pane if it is set to display Scrolls to the beginning of the mailbox window or to the beginning of the line in a message Scrolls to the end of the mailbox window or to the end of the line ina message Scrolls up or down through the window 401 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts 402 General Reference Right Mouse Button The commands that are available from the right mouse button are generally the same as those on the main menu and toolbar the right mouse button simply offers another access method To use the right mouse button commands position the mouse pointer over a Eudora window and click the right mouse button called a right click then select a command from the popup menu that appears The contents of the popup menu vary depending on which window you are in and what tasks you might need to perform while in that window Right click in an open incoming message and select View Source if available from the popup menu to view the formatting of the HTML text in a text file Right cli
148. Eudora to forget Forget Passwords window multiple personalities only Forget Passwords You can also make Eudora remember all of your passwords from one session to the next which means you never have to enter passwords again even if you quit and restart Eudora You want to do this only if your PC is in a secure location where there is no possible chance of someone else having access to it To use this option turn on Save password in the Checking Mail options See Checking Mail on page 295 76 Sending Messages and Checking Mail Changing Your Password To change the password for one of your personalities 1 From the Special menu choose Change Password 2 Select the personality whose password you want to change 3 At the prompt enter your old password once and your new password twice Depending on the server you are using the password can be up to 30 characters but normally it is only 7 or 8 NOTE This works only if the incoming mail server is running a compatible password change server For information about these servers see Sources on page 425 When you choose a new password try not to use real words names dates familiar acronyms etc Some systems require at least one number or symbol in your password and you may want to do that even if it is not required 77 Sending Messages and Checking Mail 78 _ Receiving and Responding to Messages Receiving New Mail When Eudora does a mail check you can
149. Eudora window to the back of all displayed windows A tabbed window group is considered a single window for this purpose Your Windows All normal Eudora windows that are open appear here Tabbed windows are represented as single windows identified by the currently active window in the group Select the desired window to bring that window or the tabbed group containing it to the front of all displayed windows Help Menu Go to this menu to get help read a tip change mode register insert system configuration or see information about this release 289 Using Menu Commands Help menu Topics Context Sensitive Help Technical Support Report 4 Bug Tip of the Day Payment amp Registration Insert System Configuration About Eudora Topics Display the online Help contents Context Sensitive Help Display context sensitive Help Selecting this command attaches a question mark icon to the mouse pointer You then click any screen object in Eudora icon menu command text field etc and a Help window appears containing help for that object Technical Support Display a Eudora Help window containing information on getting more help and optionally contact information for the Eudora Technical Support group See Technical Support on page 27 for more information on how to obtain technical support directly from the Eudora Technical Support group if you are eligible to receive it If you are eligible for this support and
150. IMAPAlternatePort 993 Specifies IMAP alternate port only SSLPasswordAlternate 106 Specifies password alterernate port only Port SSLPasswordUse 0 Use SSL for password changes or not If used the corresponding receive settings apply SSLPOPAlternatePort 995 Specifies POP alternate port only SSLReceiveAllowRegE 1 Specifies POP and IMAP only xp Specify whether you want to allow the usage of Regular Expressions in hostname matching in CN from the certificate subject or not For example if you are connecting to a server cgate qualcomm com that has a certificate with CN as qualcomm com then SSL will succeed if you have the value for this setting set as 1 A value of zero will require the server to have a certificate with CN cgate qualcomm com causing SSL to fail because of hostname mismatch SSLReceiveAllowVersio 1 Specifies POP and IMAP only n2 SSLReceivelgnoreExpCO Specifies POP and IMAP only ert SSLReceiveMinEncryptiO Specifies POP and IMAP only on SSLReceiveMinKeyExc 0 Specifies POP and IMAP only hangeLength 464 Entry SSLReceiveVersion Default Value 6 default 0 Undetermine d 1 SSL_Version _3 0 With _2 0 _ Hello 2 SSL_Version _3_0_Only 3 TLS_ Version _1_0_Only 4 TLS_Version _1_0 With _2_0 _ Hello 5 SSL_Version 20 6 SSL_Version 30 7 TLS_Version 10 SSLSendAllowRegExp 1 SSLSendAllowVersion2 1 SSLSendlgnoreExpCert0 SSLSendMinEncryption 0 SSLSendMinKeyExcha 0 ngedLength
151. LDAP look_elsewhere var nla users eud E BigFoot Ph sponsor qcpm amp Qualcomm Ph A Girls Broun Fudara Address amp Modify Delete Configured Servers Protocol Lek Directory Services 2 Address Book Filters 2h Filter Report Link History 257 Using Directory Services The directory service protocols available for your search are listed in the Protocols section of the window For more information see Using Directory Service Protocols on page 263 The databases you can use to look up your target individual are listed in the Databases list For more details see Using Directory Service Databases on page 264 Adding a New Database Server on page 265 Modifying a Database on page 275 and Deleting a Database on page 276 Keeping the Directory Services Window on Top To keep the Directory Services window on top so that you can easily continue using it select the Keep On Top option located at the bottom of the left pane Eudora remembers the state of this option when you quit and restart the program NOTE The behavior of this option is subject to the restrictions in the section Considering the State of the Window on page 263 Making a Query You can look someone up on the Internet within your company or in your Eudora Address Book open the Directory Services window NOTE If you are using Eudora in Light mode you cannot make multiple or simultaneou
152. Network open timeout _ seconds how to enter in Options 348 Network timeout after _ seconds how to enter in Options 348 Network definition 487 Never how to enter in Options 312 New button in Address Book 235 New button in Filters window 166 New command 149 159 281 284 New Database button 264 New File command 277 New Mailbox dialog 149 159 New Message command 32 282 New Message To submenu 282 New Message With submenu 283 Next time queued messages are sent option 69 Nickname directory 404 Nickname definition 487 Nicknames me 100 adding to the Recipient List 251 253 creating in the Address Book 235 removing from the Recipient List 251 254 renaming 245 nndbase toc file 406 nndbase txt file 407 None action 170 Normal windows 198 and taskbar 218 Not Junk command 283 Index 501 Not Junk menu option 176 Notify Application action 172 Notify User action 171 O Offline how to enter in Options POP server 300 OLD format in Options 330 On or after option 69 Online Help 18 online help 18 Open action 171 Open Attachment command 277 Open File command 277 Open mailbox option 79 Options command 288 or option 170 Out command 281 284 Out mailbox 69 70 158 out mbx file 406 out toc file 406 Outgoing message window Message body 39 Message header Bcc field 38 Cc field 38 From field 38 Subject field 38 To field 38 title bar 32 Toolbar 33 Align Center button 36 Align Left button 36 Align Right button 36 Attach
153. Nickname kelly Recipient List C Bosswatch List Personal Home Work Other Notes Other Email kelly home net Other Phone 619 555 1212 Mom s house Other Web Pages http eudorabb qualcomm coam In this dialog you can type other email addresses phone numbers and web site addresses for this person All fields are optional 2 To enter more information on this person 1 Click the Notes tab The Notes dialog box appears 242 Using the Address Book Notes dialog box Nickname mearyn C Recipient List C Bosswatch List Personal Home Work Other Notes Birthday July 7th Anniversary September 13th 2 In this dialog you can type anything you want This is good place to enter information such as the person s birthday and other important dates specific to this person To save your changes to the Address Book e From the File menu choose Save or press Ctrl S Or if you close the Address Book click Save in the warning dialog NOTE If your Address Book has duplicate entries Eudora recognizes only the topmost entry of the duplicates Changing Deleting Moving Copying and Saving Entries e To change the nickname for an entry see the next section Renaming a Nickname e To change an Address Book entry choose the entry from the list and edit the fields in any of the address book s dialog boxes as appropriate 243 Using the Address Book
154. P server you can leave this field blank SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Relay Personality Choose the personality from the drop down list that you previously set up as your SMTP Relay This feature allows you to send all your mail through your primary ISP s server Allow authentication Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MD5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used Immediate send lf you select this option the rightmost button in the toolbar of the message composition window is labeled Send Clicking this button immediately sends the message to the SMTP server If this option is turned off the button is labeled Queue and clicking on it places the message in the Out mailbox marked ready for delivery Q Send on check If you select this option any messages from your primary account that are queued in the Out mailbox are sent when mail is checked for this account whether the mail check is automatic or manual Use Submission Port lf you select this option when sending mail Eudora will connect to the outgoing mail server on the new submission port 578 instead of the old SMTP port 25 Using the submission port requires authentication to be turned on
155. SPAMWatch definition 489 Speak action in Filters 171 Spell check as you type 55 Spell check manually 57 Spell Checking options 324 Sponsored mode 25 26 SSL certificates 30 133 297 304 SSL dominant personality 29 SSL drop down menu 30 132 296 303 SSL other personalities 131 Start button 259 Start Eudora and it s not the default mailer how to enter in Options 342 Starting Eudora 31 starts with option 168 STARTTLS 30 132 133 296 303 304 Stationery defintion 489 deleting 112 modifying 112 Stationery command 287 Stationery directory 405 Stationery files storage 405 Stationery messages changing 112 creating 111 creating a default 113 deleting 112 opening 112 opening with a filter 113 172 Stationery Window 109 Statistics 229 changing settings 354 displaying Statistics window 229 printing 229 231 Statistics option 288 Status never sent 142 read or unsendable 141 e sendable or unread 65 70 79 141 sent 73 142 clock icon timed 69 142 diagonal arrow redirected 99 142 left arrow replied 96 141 not sent 142 Q queued 68 70 142 right arrow forwarded 98 142 Status Bar command 403 Status column 141 Status field of Directory Services 260 Stop button 259 Strike through button 36 Styled Text options 322 Subject column 146 Subject field changing in message summaries 84 in a forwarded message 98 in Filters 167 in incoming mail 81 in outgoing mail 38 System requirements 15 F Tab
156. SSLSendVersion 6 SSLSMTPAlternatePort 465 Eudora ini File Description Specifies POP and IMAP only Specifies SMTP only Specify whether you want to allow the usage of Regular Expressions in hostname matching in CN from the certificate subject or not For example if you are connecting to a server cgate qualcomm com that has a certificate with CN as qualcomm com then SSL will succeed if you have the value for this setting set as 1 A value of zero will require the server to have a certificate with CN cgate qualcomm com causing SSL to fail because of hostname mismatch Specifies SMTP only Specifies SMTP only Specifies SMTP only Specifies SMTP only Specifies SMTP only Specifies SMTP only 465 Eudora ini File Entry Default Value Description SpoolDirTemp 0 StatBarBlink 0 StatBarErrorAnimationR 250 ate StatBarGraphWidth 100 StatBarErrorRunningAni 125 mationRate StatBarWaitingAnimatio 500 nRate StationerySignatureRule1 s StripDuplicateAddresse 1 S SwitchFindKeyAccl 0 SwitchPreviewWithTab 1 Controls whether Eudora should use the temp directory on your local hard drive for spooling messages when sending and receiving which can increase performance when your data directory resides on a network drive Controls whether or not the icon shown in the status bar for tasks that are waiting or have errors should blink Controls the speed of the animated icon in the status bar for ta
157. Secure Sockets when Sending Use the drop down menu to choose a SSL security setting for your dominant personality when sending messages Following is a description of each option on the SSL drop down menu Never Do not use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security even if SSL is available on the server If Available STARTTLS default Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL that is if the server supports STARTTLS If your server doesn t support STARTTLS mail transfers will occur successfully but they will not be secured with SSL 303 Setting Eudora Preferences Required Alternate Port Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically use the older style alternate port method for starting SSL If your server does not support SSL on the appropriate ports mail transfers will fail Required STARTTLS Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL If your server does not support STARTTLS mail transfers will fail NOTE If you use SSL and cannot make a connection when receiving or sending mail you may need to check with your ISP to update any invalid SSL certificates However to override any issues with SSL when retrieving or sending mail choose Never from the drop down menu to
158. Sender s timezone Date formats tee SE Fixed 1 2 o4 Spell Checking dae sensitive g RECENT format 1 al r Auto completion Hours to be OLD Bp OLD Format Fa P Date Display Hours to be ANCIENT ANCIENT Format 2 1 Time 3 Day of week 2 Date 4 Timezone if not in local Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Display dates using This specifies what time zone to use to display dates Sender s timezone lf selected messages appear with the sender s time and date as determined by the sender s time zone Local timezone lf selected messages appear with your time and date based on your local time zone 328 Setting Eudora Preferences Date formats default Fixed These options and fields specify how to display message dates whether with a fixed or an age sensitive format and the specific formatting for the selected option A fixed format means that all dates appear under the same formatting rule An age sensitive format means that message dates appear differently depending on how old the messages are Formatting is entered in the text fields using the format key at the bottom of the Date Display Options window discussed further below Fixed defaults 1 2 4 If you select this option all message dates appear using the formatting entered in the edit field based on the formatting key see below The default format 1 2 4 specif
159. Size Make the selected text a specific size Bold Make the selected text bold Italics Make the selected text italic 35 IS E ihr Creating Messages Underline Make the selected text underlined Strikeout Make the selected text strikeout Use strikeout text to show the text has been changed editing Color Sponsored and Paid modes only Make the selected text a specific color Note that Automatic is the default for text on your computer usually black NOTE When typing a message your text color defaults to Automatic typically black However you can change the color as you type or by selecting text If you change the text color this button will now retain and display that color When you want to change colors click this button and choose the color from the drop down menu Note that if you change the text color to Automatic this button will not change color You can also ignore the color change by pressing the Shift key while changing colors Typewriter Sponsored and Paid modes only Make the selected text the fixed width typewriter style message font set in the Fonts options See Fonts on page 313 Align Left Sponsored and Paid modes only Align the selected paragraph to the left margin Align Center Sponsored and Paid modes only Align the selected paragraph to the center of the page Align Right Sponsored and Paid modes only Align the selected paragraph to the right margin Inde
160. The Eudora implementation of MAPI does not implement authentication since Eudora itself requires authentication to access the POP3 and IMAP4 servers Eudora Implementation of MAPI Eudora implements a subset of the full MAPI library by providing two replacement DLLs for the standard Microsoft MAPI DLLs The Eudora EUMAPI DLL is a replacement for the 16 bit Microsoft MAPI DLL and the Eudora EUMAPI32 DLL is a replacement for the 32 bit Microsoft MAPI32 DLL The Eudora MAPI DLLs must be located in the same directory as the Eudora program The Eudora MAPI DLLs implement the standard Simple MAPI functions detailed in the MAPI specification The MAPI specification also defines Extended MAPI functions however the Eudora MAPI DLLs implement only the Simple MAPI subset NOTE The Eudora MAPI implementation requires all MAPI client applications to use only the Simple MAPI functions supported by the Eudora MAPI DLLs MAPI client applications which use only the basic Simple MAPI calls will generally not be able to tell the difference between the Eudora MAPI DLL functions and the Microsoft MAPI DLL functions It is important to understand that MAPI client applications load the MAPI DLL libraries at runtime whenever they need to access the MAPI functions Each client application expects to find either the 16 bit MAPI DLL file or the 32 bit MAPI32 DLL file in a common application independent location generally the Windows SYSTEM directory Therefo
161. To display the most current information for an SSL connection between a server and Eudora since the last time you started Eudora click Last SSL info The Eudora SSL Connection Information Manager window appears with SLL and certificate information CAUTION If you display the SSL information windows make certain you don t change any of the field information unless you are familiar with SSL NOTE If you get an error messages that states SSL Negotiation failed click Last SLL Info and then click Certificate Information Manager If you see a certificate with a skull image to left of it that means the certificate is not trusted To make it trusted click Add to Trusted This will add the non trusted certificate to the trusted list NOTE On the first SSL negotiation for an email account Eudora will report if a certificate is not trusted If the user agrees to trust the certificate Eudora will add the certificate to the trusted list Starting and Quitting Eudora To start Eudora 1 From the Start menu under Programs choose Eudora 2 Choose Eudora again Eudora launches To quit Eudora 1 From the File menu choose Exit or press Ctrl Q Eudora closes If you have queued messages or timed messages due to be sent in the next 12 hours you are given the option to send them See the sections Queueing a Message to Send Later on page 67 and Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time on page 68 The Trash mailbox is emptied if the Emp
162. To invite a new ESP member to join the group click Invite See Inviting Members to Join Your Group on page 377 385 Eudora Sharing Protocol e Delete To delete group members choose the member s name and click Delete You should use this function to delete invalid members To preserve group participation and communication use the Delete function sparingly In most situations the departing group member uses the Leave function to notify all group members of the departure from the group The Delete function bypasses this process e Sync Folder To send the entire contents of your shared folder to another group member choose the member s name and click Sync Folder NOTE ESP updates email addresses when you change the email address for a personality When saved in the ESP Group window ESP asks you if you want to update both your ESP s information and other members information or just update your ESP information If you choose both an email message is sent to all group members and automatically updates your changed email address Joining an ESP Group ESP manages group membership through a shared mailing list allowing group members to share files and messages ESP creates the mailing list through a series of processes called invitations ensuring that each member of the group has explicit knowledge of group membership by acknowledging and approving each new member To join an existing group 1 Wait for an email message from
163. Value 0 0 0 0 110 185 635 500 10 10 500 300 60 345 580 480 60 345 580 480 50 100 358 450 80 80 565 415 0 0 640 480 50 5 590 475 10 40 630 440 0 0 0 0 10 60 630 240 10 60 630 240 0 0 600 460 472 Eudora ini File Tool Bar This section reflects the current settings of the main Eudora toolbar If you create additional Eudora toolbars then additional Tool Bar sections will appear in the INI file We strongly recommend that you do not change any of the settings in the Tool Bar section s of the INI file and that you instead make any changes to any Eudora toolbar from the toolbar customization dialog Customize dialog This dialog is accessed by right clicking anywhere on the toolbar and selecting Customize from the drop down menu For more information see Eudora Toolbar on page 212 The DirectoryServices section controls the use of the Directory Services window accessed from Eudora s Tools menu and its associated databases For more information on Directory Services see its dedicated section in the Eudora User Manual 473 Eudora ini File NOTE Of the entries listed below only those marked with an asterisk are user settable Default Entry Value Description OldKeepOnTopPCCovert What in pre 4 0 versions of Eudora used to be ed Settings AddressKeepForeground is now KeepOnTop in this section KeepOnTop saves the check state of the Keep On Top check button in the Directory Services window Eudora us
164. W W v W E E F7 V RINNE In the above example if you click Search Eudora will search through all of your mailboxes for every message that contain the text Ron anywhere in the header portion of the message 6 To continue adding a second level of criteria you can add up to five levels click More Choose and enter more criteria to further streamline the search as in the following example You can also select Match All or Match Any to include or differentiate the criteria from one level to the other Match All will find messages that match all of the criteria you entered Match Any will find messages that match any of the criteria you entered 188 Organizing Your Messages Example of search criteria for a two level search S Find Messages Headers v contains Anywhere vj contains Match All O Match Any Results Mailboxes No matches in 18 mailboxes a eudora In Out Q Junk GH Trash J Recent Business J Boss C Projects C Reports Personal amp Books yp Cats Friends ef Knitting Online shopping A Sailina 402 2 h KKK JAAA RRR In the above example if you click Search Eudora will search for every message through every selected mailbox that contains the word speaker anywhere but only if the text Ron is somewhere in the hea
165. When you click the button a version of the Transfer menu appears letting you choose the mailbox from the Transfer menu NOTE Also you can create a new mailbox in the Filters window by choosing New from the drop down mailbox menu This is handy for creating a new mailbox within another folder Delete Message Transfer to Trash Select to delete the message that satisfies the filter match conditions transferring it to your Trash mailbox This feature is useful for deleting junk email or spam as it is called in the Internet world Test this filter to make sure messages you really want to keep don t go to the Trash mailbox 164 Buttons Organizing Your Messages Create Filter When you have set up your match conditions and filter action click Create Filter to create the filter The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list in the Filters window discussed below The filter is available immediately and will act on messages that satisfy the conditions at the next mail check mail send or selection of the Filter Messages command as appropriate Filters are processed from top to bottom of the filters list Add Details Alternately after setting up the filter information click Add Details to both create your filter and also open the Filters window You can add additional information to your new filter and make it more powerful or just change it The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list and is immediat
166. You can click Fewer to reach a level where all text boxes are filled to conduct your search 190 Organizing Your Messages Search context menu right click s Find Messages Headers v contains v Ron Anywhere v contains w Speaker Body v contains v message Match all O Match Any Results Mailboxes One match in 19 mailboxes Mailbox Who Date Subject ASG 06 Ron Zetterberg 01 06 New Speaker Open Message Enter Open Mailbox Ctrl Enter Transfer Reply Reply to All Forward Redirect Delete Junk e To sort the messages click a column heading to sort by that column To sort in descending order click the column header again e To open a message select and double click the message or right click to display the context menu Choose Open Message e To open the mailbox where this message resides highlight the message right click to display the context menu Choose Open Mailbox e To transfer the message to another mailbox highlight the message right click to display the context menu Choose Transfer and then select the mailbox you want e To reply to the message highlight the message right click to display the context menu Choose Reply e To reply to everyone on the message highlight the message right click to display the context menu Choose Reply to All e To forward the message to someone else highlight the message right click to display the context
167. a Fast searches to use them again and again e Minimize to Windows System Tray Manage Eudora tasks from in icon in the system tray Insert Downloadable Picture Include references to graphics stored on web servers For details on other changes in Eudora 7 1 refer to the README and RELNOTE text files that reside in the directory where Eudora 7 1 is installed Where do find information If you can t find the information you are looking for in this user manual it may be in the Eudora Quick Start Guide or in the online help program in Eudora This user manual is an online user manual that is it provides the basic procedures for using Eudora The online help is primarily procedures and definitions The manual s topics are linked When you see a page number associated to a topic in the Table of Contents the Index or a cross reference just click the page number and the topic appears If you prefer you can print the PDF manual From the File menu in Acrobat Reader choose Print Introducing Eudora Email Eudora Quick Start Guide The Eudora Quick Start Guide is included as an electronic file in you Eudora directory The Quick Start Guide shows you how to install Eudora and allows you to begin using the basic functions of Eudora immediately The Guide provides only simple descriptions so for more details refer to this document Information provided in the Eudora Quick Start Guide is as follows e Finding Information
168. a Signature in a Message 108 using offline 95 UUCP definition 489 Uuencode definition 490 Uuencode encoding 50 Uuencode definition 489 V Vacation message creating 174 VAX VMS server POP or IMAP how to obtain 425 View Source command 403 Viewing an incoming HTML message in your Web browser 403 Viewing HTML formatting 403 Viewing Mail Options 82 Mark previewed messages as read after second s option 148 Show attachment icons option 81 82 Show message preview pane option 147 Use Microsoft s viewer option 82 Viewing Mail options 317 Viewing Web pages 82 W Warnings Try to delete unread queued or unsent mail 165 When message emptied from Trash how to enter in Options 312 When not using Stationery how to enter in Options 306 When replying to all how to enter in Options 310 When sending mail with styled text HTML how to enter in Options 323 Where do find information 16 Who column 143 Window context menu 210 Window states 197 Window tabs contents 209 location 209 showing and hiding 208 Windows docked 200 floating 203 normal 198 tabbed 197 205 Windows NT server POP or IMAP how to obtain 425 Windows Sockets 426 Winsock definition 490 winsock dll 479 Index Word wrap how to enter in Options 306 Word Wrap button 34 46 World Wide Web definition 490 WorldMail Server 425 Wrap Selection command 46 280 Wrapped text 34 Z Zoom button in a docked window 202 Zoom windows when opening how to ente
169. a headers that are sent with each outgoing message If multiple headers are to be sent separate each with r n For example ExtraHeaders X Header 1 foo r nX Header2 bar List of directories to search for additional nickname files Multiple directories can be entered separated by semicolons G When doing a Make Filter the name of the mailbox folder to place the default named mailbox that is created when filtering based on whom the message is from When doing a Make Filter the name of the mailbox folder to place the default named mailbox that is created when filtering based on whom the message is to When doing a Make Filter the name of the mailbox folder to place the default named mailbox that is created when filtering based on the subject of the message This controls how mailbox names should be displayed in the button that indicates which mailbox is the target of a transfer or copy filter action 0 is the mailbox name only 1 is the full path of each mail folder and the mailbox name 2 is the full path to the filename of the mailbox 3 is just he parent mail folder and the mailbox name Match Case check box in the Find dialog Summaries Only check box in the Find dialog When checking mail on a POP server download any mail that hasn t been retrieved at this machine When checking mail on a POP server download only messages that haven t been read on any machine 452 Entry Default Value FixCurlyQuote
170. achment If this button is on plain text files are attached to messages not incorporated into the message as part of the message body 33 ce Creating Messages Word Wrap If this button is on a carriage return is not required at the end of each line When the message is sent the text is automatically wrapped meaning that carriage returns are inserted at the end of each line of text with roughly 76 characters per line Tabs in Body If this button is on pressing the Tab key within the message body inserts a tab If this button is off pressing the Tab key within the message body returns the cursor to the To field of the message header Format Painter Sponsored and Paid modes only If this button is on clicking a word or phrase copies its text and paragraph formatting Click elsewhere to transfer the formatting Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only If this button is on the message to your recipients includes a Notify Sender button that when clicked creates a message notifying you that the original message was viewed This function does not work in all cases For details see Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 42 Show Text Symbols If this button is on invisible text symbols such as carriage returns tabs and spaces appear in the message You can see these symbols only in your composition window They do not appear in the message you send S MIME Signer If this b
171. achments To specify a folder single click the folder name button A dialog box appears prompting you to select a folder The default folder is the Attach sub folder of your Eudora Pro folder 311 Setting Eudora Preferences Put text attachments in body of message If you select this option Eudora puts any plain text attachment you send directly within the message body as if it were typed in manually Receive MIME digest as a mailbox attachment If you select this option Eudora automatically creates a mailbox specifically for email messages from a mailing list that supports MIME digests Delete attachments when emptying Trash lf you select this option Eudora automatically deletes an attachment received with a message when that message is deleted from your system that is when the message is emptied from the Trash The attachment must still be in the folder defined as the Attachments Folder If you want to save an attachment but delete the message move the attachment to another folder or turn off this option Delete automatic attachments This specifies how to handle attachments to automatically generated messages such as is created with the Insert System Configuration command Never lIf you select this option automatic attachments are never deleted from the attachment directory After sending message If you select this option automatic attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding me
172. address option 479 Return Receipt 34 Return Receipt button 34 RFC defintion 488 Right arrow in the Status column 98 142 Right command 45 210 Right mouse button 403 Right now option 69 Right click definition 403 RPA definition 488 S S MIME Encrypter button 35 S MIME Signer button 34 S MIME definition 489 Save As command 195 278 Save As Stationery command 110 111 278 Save command 65 278 Save mail as text as a single file 195 Guess Paragraphs option 195 Include Headers option 195 Save password option 76 Saving messages 65 ScamWatch definition 488 Screen fonts how to enter in Options 314 Searching in Eudora 194 Searching the web from the toolbar 192 Select All command 280 Select newly inserted messages FUMLUB how to enter in Options 321 Send Again command 100 282 Send button 35 67 Send Immediately command 67 283 Send mail all at once 67 at a certain time 68 Change Queueing dialog 67 Immediate send option 67 68 Mail Transfer Options dialog 70 replies 96 Send button 67 Send Immediately command 67 Send Message Right now option 68 Send Queued Messages command 68 70 sending queued mail when checking mail 70 with a password 482 with server instructions 70 Send Message Right now option 68 Send on check how to enter in Options 296 303 Send on check option 70 Send plain and styled version in message how to enter in Options 323 Send plain text only how to enter in Options 323 Send Queued Messages command
173. age 86 and Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 91 Checking for Mail Automatically To set up Eudora to automatically check your incoming mail account and transfer new mail 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll through the category list and choose Checking Mail 73 Sending Messages and Checking Mail The Checking Mail option window appears For more information see Checking Mail on page 295 3 In the Check for mail every _ minutes field enter the number of minutes that you want between mail checks NOTE Fifteen minutes is a good minimum interval because checking mail more frequently puts an unnecessary load on your incoming mail server If the field is empty or is set to 0 mail is not automatically checked If automatic checking is set the Check Mail command under the File menu shows you the next scheduled time for an automatic check 4 From the Tools menu choose Personalities The Personalities window opens See Personalities Window on page 115 for more information 5 For each personality you want automatically checked right click the personality to display the drop down context menu 6 From the context menu choose Properties The Account Settings dialog box appears 7 Turn on the Check Mail option for that personality The Check Mail option also specifies that an account should be checked for new mail when a manual mail check is done Checking for Mail Manually To manually check fo
174. age status from queued Q to sendable The message is held in the Out mailbox until it is either deleted re queued or sent Sending Queued Messages When Checking Mail If the Send on check option in the Sending Mail options window is on every time Eudora checks for mail automatically or manually all queued messages are automatically sent See Sending Mail on page 302 Sending Messages with Special Server Instructions To send your queued messages with special instructions for the incoming server 1 Hold down the Shift key and from the File menu choose Send Queued Messages The Mail Transfer options dialog box appears Mail Transfer Options dialog box Mail Transfer Options Mail checking amp sending options How should checking sending be performed Iv Retiova nen ial on the selected personalities below V Send queued messages i l Delete messages marked for deletion C Normally Retrieve messages marked for retrieval Steve Janoff Mac Delete all messages that have been retrieved Delete all messages on server Fetch all message headers to In mailbox Cancel 70 Sending Messages and Checking Mail 2 Set the options you want and click OK All the actions you have requested are completed Sending Mail Through One Account SMTP Relay The Internet Service Provider ISP with whom you have your primary email account may not allow you to send messages through any other Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
175. ages You create an IMAP server account using the New Account Setup wizard for your dominant personality or using the Account Settings dialog box accessed from the Personalities window See Getting Started on page 293 and Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 115 The Mailboxes window is the main tool for managing your IMAP mailboxes and mail folders In the Mailboxes window right click one of the folders or mailboxes in an IMAP hierarchy and select an item from the drop down list See Using the Mailboxes Window on page 150 for more information NOTE The additional commands for IMAP are Refresh Mailbox List and Resynchronize Mailbox Some mailboxes stored on your IMAP server may have been created by others and made accessible to you For some of these mailboxes you may have both read and write permission that is you can read the messages stored in them can change or delete the messages Other mailboxes may give you only read permission you can only read the messages not change or delete them If you have multiple personalities email accounts and the incoming mail servers for all of them use POP then you will have only one top level mail folder named Eudora Mail by default If the incoming mail server for at least one of your personalities uses IMAP then you can have multiple top level mail folders one to hold mail from a of your POP account and one top level folder for each of your
176. ages with mailbox lf you select this option all opened messages in a mailbox will close automatically when you close the mailbox Select newly inserted messages FUMLUB f you select this option the first message of the most current block of unread messages is highlighted in the Table of Contents window when new messages are added to a mailbox for example when receiving new messages as a result of a mail check FUMLUB means First Unread Message of the Last Unread Block For example you may have a series of unread messages in a mailbox scattered throughout your Table of Contents The first message of the last block of unread messages listed in your Table of Contents is selected Show no more than _ items in the Recent mailbox menus default 10 Enter the maximum number of mailboxes you would like to see in the Recent mailbox menus Set this option to 0 to disable the Recent mailbox menus When dragging in a mailbox Allow drag and drop transfers lf you select this option you can transfer a message to another mailbox using drag and drop select one or more messages in a mailbox drag them to another mailbox and drop them in the target mailbox Also you can drag and drop messages to a mailbox displayed in the Mailboxes window Allow drag select of messages If you select this option you can click and drag on adjacent messages to select them as a group in the Table of Contents window This allows you to transfer a group of messages
177. ail address or the message You can change it if you like In the This nickname will expand to the following address field Eudora enters the email address as it appears in the message You can change the email address if you like If you choose multiple message summaries in the mailbox window addresses are taken from each message and all are put in the new entry If the open or selected message is an outgoing message the new entry will include all of the addresses in the To Cc and Bcc fields If the open or selected message is an incoming message the new entry will include the address in the From field If you have more than one address book in the n the Address Book drop down list choose the address book in which you want to place this nickname You cannot make a new address book using the Make Address Book Entry command If you want to put the nickname on your Recipient List check the Put it on the recipient list box If you want to put the nickname on your BossWatch List check the Put it on the BossWatch list box 247 Using the Address Book 9 When finished click OK The new entry is now in your address book NOTE If your new nickname has the same name as an existing nickname a prompt appears asking if you want to add the address es to the existing nickname or replace the existing nickname with the new address es Also when you use the Make Address Book Entry command in an open message or mailbox wind
178. ail from several computers at different times you can end up reading your messages two or more times However if you delete mail from your Trash folder the message is deleted on the server Eudora has an option that allows you to leave your email messages on the server for a specified number of days To transfer all of your new messages from the incoming server to Eudora and also leave copies of those messages on the server 1 2 5 From the Tools menu choose Options Scroll through the categories and select Incoming Mail In the Incoming Mail options window turn on the Leave mail on server option This option is available only if you are using POP Select the Delete from server after _ days box and set the maximum number of days that copies of your email messages should be kept on the server This number is determined by the time it takes for you to check mail from all of your computers If this number is too small copies of your mail will not be delivered to all of your computers CAUTION Make sure the settings in steps 3 and 4 are identical on all of the computers from which you will be receiving your mail If you don t one computer will delete the mail from the server before you can receive it at another computer Click OK and close the window At the next mail check from that computer Eudora ignores the copies of those previously read messages and looks for new ones However if you check mail from another computer
179. ailable via anonymous ftp from ftp eudora com QPopper versions are available for a number of UNIX systems e VAX VMS VAX VMS systems may try either the Multinet package from TGV or IUPOP3 available via anonymous FTP from ftp indiana edu 425 Sources For information on QUALCOMM s family of Internet Email Servers send e mail to lt eudora rep eudora com gt or visit the World Wide Web site lt http www eudora com gt Ph Server Source Code A server for the Ph protocol is available via anonymous FTP from ftp eudora com Password Change Server Three sample UNIX servers for Eudora s Change Password command on the Special menu are available via anonymous FTP from ftp eudora com Windows Sockets Products Demos of Windows Sockets 1 1 compliant stacks and applications are available via anonymous ftp from papa indstate edu in the directory winsock l For those with World Wide Web WWW browsers try the following sites Click the URL to display website The Consummate Winsock Applications list http cws internet com The Ultimate Collection of Winsock Software http www tucows com Stardust Technologies http www stardust com wsdir WinSite http www winsite com Kerberos You can get the necessary files and information for setting up Kerberos authentication in Eudora from ftp eudora com in the directory eudora eudorapro windows extras kerberos Be sure to read the installation instructions to ensure
180. ally access a MAPI service provider A MAPI service provider is the application that handles the receipt transmission and storage of messages Examples of MAPI client applications front ends include Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel Examples of MAPI service providers back ends include Microsoft Exchange and Microsoft Fax All 16 bit client applications use the 16 bit MAPI DLL and all 32 bit client applications use the 32 bit MAPI32 DLL The MAPI and MAPI32 DLLs are twins which contain the same list of MAPI functions they are parallel implementations of the 16 bit and 32 bit MAPI functions These DLLs are provided by Microsoft as standard components of Windows 98 2000 ME XP and Windows NT The MAPI DLLs are normally installed in the Windows 98 2000 ME XP SYSTEM directory SYSTEM32 for Windows NT 414 MAPI Technical Report When a MAPI client application wishes to send a document it simply loads the appropriate MAPI library DLL and calls the defined MAPI functions The MAPI DLL takes care of routing the messaging and authentication requests to the appropriate MAPI service provider application displaying the address book user interface and returning address book and messaging data to the MAPI client application The MAPI DLL also provides an optional user interface for user authentication For example the user may need to supply a user name and password to the mail system in order to log on to the mail system
181. and Paid modes only You can create an email message that can be sent to people automatically when you are on vacation or away from your computer This message is called an auto reply You create an auto reply by using Eudora s stationery and filter functions 174 Organizing Your Messages Before you create the auto reply make sure that the Check for mail every _ minutes the value you enter must be greater than 0 and Send on check options are turned on in the Checking Mail options window See Checking Mail on page 295 Also make sure you have entered your incoming mail server s password for your current session or have Eudora save your password To create an auto reply 1 Write your auto reply message using Eudora s Stationery functions Once the auto reply message is written name and save it in stationery See Creating New Stationery on page 111 From the Tools menu choose Filters The Filters window appears In the Match section choose a header from the Header drop down list Select a header that matches the header in the messages to whom you want to send your auto reply lt lt Any Recipient gt gt is the most common for an auto reply NOTE If you choose lt lt Any Recipient gt gt all recipients including mailing list you subscribe to will receive your auto reply For example to set an auto reply only to messages sent to your user name just select lt lt Any Recipient gt gt then choose contains
182. and from the Tools menu The tabbed window opens with the selected window as the active frontmost window If the tabbed window is already visible and you wish to display one of its member windows that is currently not active simply click the member window s tab You can also select the appropriate item from the Tools menu The desired window comes to the front of the tabbed group You can also use the tool window s keyboard shortcut if it has one to open or activate the tool window in its tabbed window Reorganizing Tabbed Windows You are not restricted to the default tabbed window arrangements supplied with Eudora You can mix and match tabbed windows any way you like At one extreme you can have each of the tool windows in its own container with its own tab At the other extreme you can have all tool windows combined into one tabbed window In between you can have multiple tabbed windows open at once mixed and matched to suit your purposes To move a window from one tabbed group to another drag the window tab from the first group and drop it onto the second While the drag operation is in progress the cursor changes and Eudora displays a small ghosted rectangle when you are over a valid drop location 207 Managing Windows in Eudora If you drop the window tab onto another tab in the second group the new window tab is inserted at that position and the other tabs are displaced to accommodate it If you don t drop the
183. applications to unload the DLLs you must shutdown all MAPI client applications NOTE When running 16 bit MAPI client applications under Windows NT then Eudora cannot detect the lock placed on the MAPI DLLs by Windows unless the SHARE program is running This means that Eudora can inadvertently perform the DLL swap and or unswap procedures while the MAPI DLL is loaded into memory This almost always causes Windows to become unstable and can lead to crashes in MAPI client applications as well as in Windows itself NOTE If you run 16 bit MAPI client applications under Windows NT then you should always run the SHARE program The good news is that Windows 98 2000 ME XP implements the SHARE functionality without requiring you to explicitly run the SHARE program By default Windows NT only implements the SHARE functionality for 32 bit applications If you are running a 16 bit application under Windows NT then you must run the SHARE program explicitly 418 MIME and Mapping MIME and Mapping What Is MIME MIME stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME serves two major purposes it allows mail applications to tell one another what sort of data is in mail and it also provides standard ways for mail applications to encode data so that it can be sent through the Internet mail system MIME Encoding The Internet uses the SMTP protocol to move mail around SMTP is limited to the US ASCII character set see the Mail Transpo
184. apps as the mail directory and c apps myeudora ini as the INI file 447 Settings Eudora ini File Entry Default Value Description AddressBooklsWhitelist 0 AgeJunkOff 1 AgeJunkOffDays 30 AllowAttachDrag 1 AllowClipboardHTML 0 AllowDefPlugins 1 AllowOverwriteMode 1 AltClickMoveSummary 1 AlwaysConnected 0 AlwaysEnableJunkMen 0 us AutoCompAddrBookFirs1 t If this is 1 mail will not be considered junk if the sender appears in an address book If this is 1 old junk will be trimmed from the Junk mailbox The number of days before junk is considered old enough to trim Controls whether attachments inside received messages Controls whether Eudora should use the HTML format when copying from the clipboard caution some applications put very bad HTML on the clipboard You can always use Paste Special to get at the HTML clipboard format Controls whether or not EMSAPI plug ins can be automatically added to the toolbar Controls whether or not toggling the Insert key puts the message editor into overwrite mode Helpful for people who use the Ctrl Insert and Shift Insert accelerators for Copy and Paste and have a tendency to linger on the Insert key after letting go of the Ctrl Shift key When you hold down the lt Alt gt key while clicking on an item in a mailbox all messages in that mailbox with the same item are selected e g lt Alt gt clicking on a subject will select all messages in that mailbox with
185. ard If this is 1 junk that has been fetched will be deleted from the server Applies only to POP accounts where mail is left on the server The name of the DLL implementing the DES encryption routines for use with Kerberos version 4 e g des32 dll If this is set to 1 no Statistics data is saved Indicates whether to include nicknames generated by ESP and potentially by other Eudora plugins in the Auto Completion list A value of 1 means to include them and a value of O means don t include them Controls whether or not the by default non editable From and Attached headers in the composition message window Number of characters sent on a line before adding a soft newline when sending styled text Default port number for the Eudora password changing service epass 451 Entry ExceptionHandling ExcerptBars ExtraHeaders ExtraNicknameDirs FilterFromFolder FilterRecipFolder FilterSubjectFolder FilterTransferName FindMatchCase FindSummariesOnly FirstUnreadNormal FirstUnreadStatus Default Value 1 Eudora ini File Description Controls whether or not Eudora s exception handling code is called when a program exception occurs can be helpful to turn off if the exception handling code is hiding the source of the problem HTML style sheet parameter for excerpt bars Can use this to change the width color and style of excerpt bars Only works when using the Microsoft viewer Extr
186. arens or brackets Subject gift box Subject gift box Subject gift box The last quoted version acts a little differently since it specifies a phrase search meaning the two words must be adjacent and in that order The paren bracket versions just mean AND namely that the two words must occur in the column in any order and position Special case consider this search expression Subject Since there is nothing after the column specifier it is not treated as a column specific search at all Rather it is a search using normal punctuation rules In this example the search is for the actual text Subject in any column following our punctuation rules see below The name of the column may be abbreviated in various ways Column name specifiers are case insensitive may not contain spaces so to specify for a column whose name has a space like Attachment Count the user must leave out the space and write for instance AttachmentCount may be abbreviated as any prefix of the name so Subject would work for Subject as would sui In case of ambiguity as to which column is meant the column specifier chooses the first one in alphabetical order So s would mean Size rather than Status or Subject 441 X1 Search Queries If no column name is matched the expression is searched using normal punctuation rules i e subjict x1 is equivalent to subjict x1 More Punctuation Rules All punctuation i
187. arrow keystrokes do work when composition windows are open on the screen Empty Trash when exiting lf you select this option the Trash mailbox is emptied when you exit Eudora If this is turned off the Trash is only emptied when you select Empty Trash from the Special menu Say OK to alerts after _ second s default 120 If you select this option any alerts that announce a problem with the network communication automatically go away after the specified number of seconds Many network problems are temporary so this allows Eudora to try the communication again This is most useful if you have automatic mail checking enabled for any of your accounts Turbo redirect by default lIf you select this option the behavior of the Redirect command is changed If you frequently redirect mail to a particular person make that person s email address correspond to a nickname and also add it to your recipient list in your Address Book When you get an email message that you want to redirect select the message then choose Redirect to from the Message menu and select the recipient The message gets queued as a redirected message to the recipient and the original received message gets deleted This method can be used to redirect a large number of messages If this option is turned off then selecting Redirect to a recipient will open the message and wait for you to send queue the message The original message is kept but its status is changed
188. ash option 90 Delete server status 88 144 145 Fetch button 88 Fetch server status 88 144 Fetch then Delete server status 88 144 145 Leave mail on server option 86 Leave server status 144 145 Mail Transfer Options dialog 89 Skip messages over K in size option 88 Trash button 88 Manual option 166 Manual spell check 57 Map Ctrl R to Reply to All how to enter in Options 309 Map Ctrl R to Reply to All option 97 MAPI 408 MAPI options 344 MAPI definition 487 Margins submenu 45 Mark it as deleted IMAP server 301 Mark previewed messages as read after second s how to enter in Options 318 Mark previewed messages as read after second s option 148 Matches regexp case sensitive 186 May use quoted printable how to enter in Options 306 mbx files 406 ME nickname 310 Menu context for tool windows 210 Message how to enter in Options 313 Message body in incoming mail 81 in outgoing mail 39 Message header in incoming mail 81 Message Plug ins Settings command 286 408 Message Plug ins submenu 280 407 Message preview pane 79 147 Message priority how to set 42 Message store definition 487 Message summaries 140 Attachments column 143 changing the subject of 84 Date column 144 Label column 143 Priority column 142 resizing columns 146 selecting 140 Sender Recipient Who column 143 Server Status column 144 145 Size column 144 Status column 141 Subject column 146 Who column 143 Message window height how to
189. ast EP Mid states EP Southern states Gy West Coast 9 Business To open a mailbox or folder within the window double click it or click it once and press Enter You can move among the folders and mailboxes using the up and down arrow keys or close or open folders using the left and right arrow keys You can start typing the name of the mailbox or folder you want and it is highlighted when you have typed enough unique characters to identify it the item must be displayed so a mailbox that is in a closed folder cannot be selected 150 4 Working with Mailboxes Right click any item in the Mailboxes window and a drop down list appears whose commands let you depending on the item create find messages remove and rename mailboxes and folders open existing mailboxes and folders and empty the trash from the Trash mailbox The folder trees displayed in the Mailboxes window and some of the operations available from the drop down list depend on what protocol your mail server uses POP or IMAP For more information on these differences see Mailbox and Folder Management POP vs IMAP on page 152 Creating a New Mailbox or Folder To create a new mailbox or folder in the Mailboxes window 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group Right click a folder From the drop down list choose New A dialog box appears requesting the name of the new
190. atabase com Port 389 I This server requires me to log on Account name Password 269 4 Using Directory Services In the General panel enter a descriptive name for the server the Host Name or IP address of the server and the Port in the respective fields The default port for Ph is 79 Don t change this port number unless you know for certain that the port number is not 79 To create the new Finger database click OK A Finger database is created LDAP Database LDAP means Lightweight Directory Access Protocol An LDAP server is a service that provides information about individuals You can look up virtually anyone on the Internet using public LDAP servers And furthermore you can add new LDAP servers to query in Eudora To add a new LDAP database 1 2 In the Protocols list click the LDAP protocol to select it Click New Database Or just double click LDAP in the Protocols list The New Database window Network panel appears LDAP Database window Network panel Modify Database Network Attributes Search Options Log Type the name by which you would like to refer to this server Test Server information Host Name idap test com Port 389 This server requires me to log on Account name Password Cancel In the Network panel enter a descriptive name for the server the Host Name or IP address of the server and the Port number in the respective fi
191. atch e Color code Bosswatch addresses using this color fe Warn me additionally with a dialog lf you select this option Eudora will display a warning dialog when you click the Send or Queue button on messages that match your BossWatch criteria When sending to more than _ recipients If you select this option Eudora will warn you with a dialog if you are sending to more recipients than the number entered in this setting as well as to addresses on your BossWatch list 365 Setting Eudora Preferences NOTE You must have enabled Warn me additionally with a dialog for the above setting to have any effect When I do a Reply All If you select this option Eudora will warn you with a dialog when you queue a message where Reply to All was used to generate the reply as well as to addresses on your BossWatch list NOTE You must have enabled Warn me additionally with a dialog for the above setting to have any effect Speak Addresses lf you select this option Eudora uses the Microsoft Text to Speech engine to read the addresses that match your BossWatch criteria When sending to more than _ recipients lf you select this option Eudora will warn you by speaking the names of your recipients if you are sending to more recipients than the number entered in this setting as well as to addresses on your BossWatch list NOTE You must have enabled Speak Addresses for the above setting to have any effect When I do a Repl
192. ate and time the message was composed or for timed messages the date and time the message is scheduled to be sent Date formats including age sensitive indications such as the day of the week or Today are set in the Date Display options window See Date Display on page 328 Size Column This column displays the size of the message in kilobytes K 1 K 1 024 bytes Also an indicator in the Size column indicates if the body of the message is empty Server Status Column POP This column displays the action that is done to the corresponding incoming message on the server The next time you check mail the server status you requested is automatically completed Fetched Don t change the message on the server A solid diamond indicates that the z message has been fetched an open diamond indicates that the message has Not k fetched Ot yet been fetched Fetch Retrieve the whole message from the server Delete Delete the message from the server K Ao ui Retrieve the whole message then delete it from the server NOTE To control the mail transfer for a POP server you can also use the Mail Transfer options window For details see Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions on page 89 and Checking Mail on page 295 144 Working with Mailboxes Server Status Column IMAP This column displays the action that is done to the corresponding incoming message on the server The next time you check mail th
193. ategories before clicking OK See Setting Eudora Preferences on page 292 for descriptions of all the options in all categories Window Menu All of Microsoft Windows standard Window menu options are listed in this menu including the names of all normal Eudora windows that you currently have open tabbed window groups are listed by the currently active window in the tabbed group Note that this menu does not apply to docked or floating Eudora windows See Managing Windows in Eudora on page 197 for more information on normal docked floating and tabbed windows 288 Using Menu Commands Window menu Hep Cascade Shift F5 Tile Horizontal Shift F4 Tile Vertical Arrange Icons Send To Back Ctrl F6 1 Junk v 2 Out 3 Robert 10 53 4M 8 15 2003 RE room assignments 4 Address Book Cascade Display all open normal Eudora windows in a cascading fashion diagonally offset from each other in a stack Tile Horizontal Display all open normal Eudora windows in a tiled edge to edge fashion with horizontal edges touching top to bottom Tile Vertical Display all open normal Eudora windows in a tiled edge to edge fashion with vertical edges touching left to right Arrange Icons Arrange all Eudora window icons representing minimized normal Eudora windows in a line at the bottom of the Eudora main window work area These icons are also represented by buttons on the Eudora taskbar Send To Back Send the topmost open normal
194. athe Modify Delete Address Book Directory Services Filters Filter Report i Link History E Directory Services Quarcoo A window tab has two purposes e Itlets you bring the window to the front of the group to display it by clicking on the tab It serves as a drag handle that lets you drag the tool window from one tabbed window to another so that you can reorganize your tabbed windows and create new tabbed windows Only tool windows those windows accessible from the Tools menu except the Options dialog box can be combined into a tabbed window All other windows in Eudora particularly mailbox windows and message windows cannot be combined into a tabbed window A tabbed window can be normal docked or floating You can convert a tabbed window from any state to any other state If a tabbed window shows a title bar the title in the bar is the name of the active window in the group 205 Managing Windows in Eudora Eudora s Default Tabbed Windows Eudora comes with three default tabbed windows shown in the previous figure which together include all eleven tool windows The first default is a vertically oriented tabbed window that is docked to the left side of the main window and contains the following five tool windows with tabs in left to right order e Mailboxes e File Browser e Stationery e Signatures e Personalities The second default tabbed window is a normal window that contains these f
195. atically Conversely if you find Junk mail in your other mailboxes just choose Junk from the Message menu and these messages are transferred to the Junk mailbox With time Eudora eventually learns to recognize these messages as junk and filters them into the Junk mailbox Sorting Messages Within Mailboxes When you check your mail and new messages come into your In box or are filtered into other mailboxes the new messages are placed in their mailboxes in the order in which they arrive By default these new messages appear at the bottom of the message summary list in the mailbox window Note that this is not necessarily a strict date order since occasionally messages may arrive out of date order The date indicates when the message was sent not when you receive them TT Organizing Your Messages Similarly when you transfer messages to another mailbox those messages appear at the bottom of the message summary list in that mailbox You can sort messages in a mailbox by status priority attachment label sender date size server status subject and group by subject You can sort these messages in either ascending or descending order one column at a time or by combining several columns in the sort Simple Sorting You can access Eudora s sort feature to perform a simple sort in three ways e By clicking the column header you want to sort For example if you click the Who column senders of your messages are sorted in alphab
196. ay button and choose a mailbox for this group messages Click OK 7 Click the Personality long gray button and choose the Eudora personality you want linked with this group Click OK 8 In the Description text box type a brief description of the group function or contents optional 9 Click OK ESP adds the new share group to your list of groups The share groups you create are listed in the ESP Groups window in the left column Inviting Members to Join Your Group To be fully functional your group must contain members in addition to yourself Once you invite someone you can determine at what level a role they will play within the share group You can invite members to the group who can receive only the group messages 377 Eudora Sharing Protocol To invite users to join your group 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 In the left column choose the Group name to which you want to invite members 3 Click the User tab The User dialog box appears 4 Click Invite The Share Group Role Settings dialog box appears NOTE To add auser to receive the group messages only press the Shift key while clicking Invite The Advanced Add dialog box appears where you can enter the person s name and email address The user s name and email address is stored in your Users list but ESP doesn t send an invitation This user receives only email messages that have the group shared documents as a
197. box For example you would edit phone number Only do automatic mail checks when a network connection is already established lf you select this option Eudora will do an automatic mail check only if you are connected to a network 308 Setting Eudora Preferences Replying The Replying options determine how replies are created To display the Replying options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Replying icon The Replying options window appears Replying options window Options Cl Map Ctri R to Reply to All C Copy original s priority to reply Composing Mail C Automatically Fec to original mailbox Include signature on reply Internet Dialup Quote only the selected text on Reply or Forward 4 C Generate multiple messages on Reply to multiple messages S Replying When replying to all aS C Include yourself Attachments C Put original To recipients in Cc field Al Fonts P __ i Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Map Ctrl R to Reply to All If you select this option when you hold down the Ctrl key and press R a new message is created addressed to all of the recipients of the original message as well as the sender Copy original s priority to reply lf you select this option your replies use the same priority as the original message Automatically Fcc to original mailbox Sponsored
198. box notifies you when new mail is received You will see the alert dialog box only if Eudora is in the foreground Open mailbox lf you select this option mailboxes are automatically opened when new mail arrives in them and the first unread message of the last unread batch of messages is selected 334 Setting Eudora Preferences Play a sound lf you select this option a sound is played when Eudora needs attention To select a sound file click the long horizontal button below the Play a sound option the button is blank by default Browse until you find your sound file When the Select sound file dialog box appears select a sound and click Open To switch back to the default mail arrival sound click Use Default Generate filter report lf you select this option a filter report is generated when filters are used Filter reports appear in the Filter Report window accessed from the Tools menu Note that this option must be on for such reports to appear in that window NOTE These notifications can be changed on a per message basis using Filters See Filtering Messages on page 161 335 Setting Eudora Preferences Background Tasks The Background Tasks allow you to set parameters that determine how background tasks behave and what kind of information you want to see in the Task Status window In other words you can configure the behavior of background tasks Also you can set the Task Status and or the Task Error wi
199. can use a carriage return to separate addresses You can also use nicknames in this field but be sure that any nicknames you use are defined by their own entry You can use a mixture of nicknames and complete email addresses NOTE Make sure this field contains no other information except addresses and nicknames or your messages will be addressed incorrectly If you want to put this group on your recipient list check the Recipient List box The group s name is bolded in the address book list 239 Using the Address Book Adding Entry Information In the Eudora Address Book there are several dialogs in which you can add information for a person or a group These text fields may be used liberally when entering information Following is a description of each dialog Personal dialog is described in the Adding a Person to the Address Book on page 235 To enter Home information for this entry 1 Inthe left side of the window choose the entry for whom you want to enter information His or her nickname appears in the Nickname field 2 Click the Home tab The Home dialog box appears Address Book Home dialog box Nickname lint repidadventurers C Recipient List C Bosswatch List Personal Home work Other Notes Street 9 Main Street Address city Law City State Province ICA Country USA Zip Postal Code 98789 Phone 481 516 2342 Fax 481 615 4225 Mobile 823 415 4216 Web lw intrepidadventure c
200. carriage returns from the message and leaves returns only at the ends of paragraphs It also converts multiple spaces into tabs Once you ve made all of your choices click Save If you select multiple messages from a mailbox window and choose Save As all of the messages are saved to a single file 195 Organizing Your Messages 196 _ Managing Windows in Eudora Window States and Tabbed Windows Every window in Eudora exists in one of three states Normal e Docked e Floating You can use these different window states to set up Eudora the way you want to see it on your screen These states are described below and in the following sections A tabbed window is a collection of windows combined into a single window in which each window has its own tab for activating and dragging A tabbed window can exist in any of the above three window states normal docked or floating Tabbed windows are discussed separately below NOTE Only tool windows those windows accessible from the Tools menu except the Options dialog box can exist as docked windows floating windows and tabbed windows All other windows in Eudora particularly the mailbox TOC windows and message windows exist only in the normal state and cannot be combined into tabbed windows The tool windows that can be docked floating or tabbed are as follows in their order down the Tools menu e Filters e Filter Report e Mailboxes e File Browser e Statione
201. cept attachments over _ K If you select this option the full message full set of message headers and the message body and any attachments smaller than the specified size are downloaded for each incoming message Also any attachments larger than the specified size are not downloaded with the message To download all of your IMAP attachments enter a large number in this field If you enter 0 in the text box all attachments regardless of size are retrieved When I delete a message These options you must choose one let you control the way you want your deleted messages handled Mark it as deleted Select this option to mark your messages on the IMAP for deletion These messages are not removed from the server until you choose to remove them See Deleting a Message from the Server on page 88 Move it to mailbox Select this option to move your deleted messages to a specific mailbox The default is your Trash mailbox Authentication style This specifies which IMAP account authentication technology to use for this account Passwords Kerberos or CRAM MD5 Ask your email administrator which one to use if you are not sure CRAM MDS5 is the default If CRAM MD5 is not detected Eudora will use Passwords 301 Setting Eudora Preferences Sending Mail The Sending Mail options determine how Eudora sends your outgoing messages from your primary email account dominant personality To display the Sending Mail options window 1 From t
202. ch to Eudora and then remember to manually attach the document to the outgoing message Message store A collection of mailboxes Multi Purpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME The is an attachment decoding method best used for recipients with MIME compliant email readers regardless of what operating system they are using MIME is a set of extensions to the Internet Mail standards that supports the inclusion of multi part and multimedia files such as sound and video in email messages Network A group of connected computers that can communicate with one another Networks enable computers to share files and resources and exchange messages Nickname In Eudora a nickname is entered instead of an email address For example in the Address Book where nicknames are set up you can enter the nickname TERRY for terry aol com When you write a message you can enter TERRY in the To field instead of Terry s entire email address Nicknames are also called aliases Personality This is an alternate email account In Eudora you can access mail from several email accounts at the same time However you must set up each account separately using Eudora s personality functions Ph Ph Phone book is a protocol providing an online fully indexed fast access white pages directory service developed and freely distributed by the Computer and Communications Services Office at the University of Illinois at Urbana 487 Glossary POP3 The Post Off
203. check box in the Save As dialog HTML text would be displayed in messages in the Out box The number of seconds that Eudora has to be idle before it will consider performing an automatic mail check If this is 0 ESP control messages devoid of human friendly content are automatically deleted to avoid cluttering up your ESP mailboxes If this is 1 those messages are preserved Controls whether background tasks started manually e g Ctrl M to do a Check Mail should be processed immediately after completing or wait until a sufficient amount of user idle time see TaskMgrWaitTime below Specifies whether or not Eudora should ingore IMAP UIDPLUS responses If this is set to 1 IMAP junk handling will not work as expected Controls whether IMAP mailboxes with no child mailboxes should be shown in the Mailbox Transfer menus as an entire menu or just a menu item Default is to just show it as a menu item Default port number for IMAP connections Controls whether or not IMAP mailboxes have a preview pane On slower networks it may be desirable to turn off the preview pane for IMAP mailboxes but still have the preview pane for local mailboxes You can do that by keeping the normal Preview Pane option turned on but turning this setting off setting to 0 Controls whether or not a message in an IMAP mailbox that is deleted will be removed from the server mailbox immediately If this setting is off the default then you can remove
204. check your mail manually it is retrieved from the server immediately and delivered to Eudora without waiting for user inactivity However if you do a manual check and then perform a task in Eudora while Eudora is retrieving your mail Eudora will wait for user inactivity before processing your newly retrieved mail When this occurs the envelope displays on the status bar until the user inactivity time specified has been reached NOTE The envelope that displays on the status bar only indicates that mail is waiting to be processed It does not mean that you have new mail waiting on the server When your mail is processed user inactivity time is needed for your mail to be filtered and attachments decoded Your inactivity allows you to decide when you want your mail processed 224 Managing Windows in Eudora Envelope displayed on the status bar E NUM If you click once on the envelope the mail is processed If you right click on the envelope a drop down list appears Envelope s drop down list Process All Waiting Tasks Show Task Status e To send or retrieve your messages in the background choose Process All Waiting Tasks e To display the Task Status showing background activity choose Show Task Status Task Status Window The Task Status window displays background activity retrieving mail from incoming servers and sending mail to outgoing servers Mail can be retrieved and sent from each of your personalities simultaneousl
205. ched lv lt none gt v Send it anyway Meeting notes from Quarterly staff meeting Cl Don t warn me anymore Customer Satisfaction j Surveys were not sent due to technical difficulty with printer which appears to be missing TPS Reports Employees are still having difficulty using the new cover sheet Action Item Bill to send another departmental memo Eudora can alert you when you are about to send a message to email addresses on your BossWatch list by underlining the addresses outlining the Send Queue button with a custom color displaying a dialog speaking the address or any combination of these options See BossWatch Paid mode only on page 365 62 Creating Messages Using MoodWatch Sponsored and Paid Modes only MoodWatch is a Eudora feature that monitors incoming and outgoing messages for offensive text A new options window has been added for MoodWatch so you can determine how you wish to use MoodWatch MoodWatch works similarly to a spell checker MoodWatch scans and determines what words or phrases in a message or a header may be offensive One two or three red chili peppers appear to indicate the severity of the offensive text If you are sending or queueing a message a warning appears letting you know that text in your message may be offensive to your recipient Less offensive text in the message is underlined with a green squiggly line More offensive text in the m
206. ches From Any Recipient or Subject From selected by default Select to match the message against the From field the sender of the messages you selected You can then edit the field The From field of a target message must contain the information in this box but does not have to exactly equal it Note that if you selected multiple messages and they do not have a common sender the From field is unselectable and is left blank Any Recipient Select to match the message against any of the recipients in the messages you selected recipients are contained in the To and Cc fields and in an outgoing message the Bcc field Choose one recipient from the drop down menu accessed from the menu button next to the field or edit the text in the field Note that the information you enter in the field must be contained in any of the recipient fields of the target message but does not have to exactly equal any recipient field Subject Select to match the message against the Subject field of the messages you selected If you have selected multiple messages and they do not have a common subject this field is left blank In either case you can edit the field The subject line of a target message must contain the information in this box but does not have to exactly equal it 163 Organizing Your Messages Action Area The Action area of the window lets you determine the one action that will be performed on messages that satisfy the Match C
207. ck in the message and select Send to Browser if available to view the HTML message in your Web browser If you want to turn the main toolbar or the status bar on or off in the main Eudora window right click on the gray area of the toolbar or status bar and select the item you want to show or hide Toolbar or Status Bar If you have Eudora minimized as a button on the Windows 98 2000 ME XP NT 4 x Taskbar you can check for new mail without maximizing the Taskbar button To do so place the mouse pointer over the Eudora Taskbar button click the right mouse button and select Check Mail Mail Storage When you install Eudora it creates a number of files and directories within the assigned directory In addition Eudora creates additional files and directories as needed for mailboxes signatures stationery nicknames Address Books and other functions The major Eudora files and directories are described EudPriv Ads AdCache Directory All ad files downloaded to Eudora are kept in this directory 403 General Reference Attach Directory Incoming attachments are saved in the Attach directory until you specify another directory using the Attachment directory button in the Attachment Options Tools Options Attachments See the Receiving Attachments on page 82 for more details DirectoryServices Directory Eudora uses the DirectoryServices directory to store the dll files for the Directory Services protocols that you use in the Dire
208. cknames If the nickname that appears in the header of the message is in the address book Eudora filters the message accordingly This match criterion is good to use if you wish all messages that are not from the entries in your address book to go in other mailboxes This is an alternate method to control SPAM doesn t intersect address book If the text string or nickname is not included in an address book whether it is a full address or a nickname within the nickname filter the message matches regexp case insensitive Sponsored and Paid modes only If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters with case insensitivity filter those messages Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text For more information see Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 173 Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters For example if you are filtering messages sent to you by two people choose From in the first drop down options list then choose matches regexp Then type their usernames between parentheses separated by a vertical slash for example bobclark janedoe in the text box Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people For more information on regular expressions refer to the readme txt file in your Eudora folder or click on the following Web site URL http sansecus usc es unixpages concepts regexp html
209. click on an http link while offline not connected to the Internet That dialog lets you choose what action should be taken regarding that link the next time Eudora is online ask you if you want to launch the link launch it without asking bookmark the link in your browser or remind you later The dialog now has a checkbox that will make the action you choose the default from then on which means you won t see the Offline Link Dialog any more It defaults to 0 ask and the other values are 1 launch 2 bookmark and 3 remind Controls whether Eudora uses an older method of importing the Windows Address Book which may do a better job of importing on some setups than the default method Some external applications like to open up files that Eudora is using e g virus checkers and backup software so this setting controls how many times Eudora should try to open a file before it gives up Time in milliseconds Eudora waits before attempting to open a file again see OpenRetryCount above Controls whether the cursor gets hidden to prevent flicker when switching between categories in the Tools gt Options dialog which causes a small minority of systems to lose the cursor while in the dialog If this is non zero an OWNER LOK file will be created on startup which helps to prevent possible corruption if multiple instances of Eudora are used on the same set of mailboxes The name of the server to use for changing passwords By d
210. cord all changes to group membership check the Log any membership update box A log file is created and placed in a subfolder in the Eudora folder The box is checked by default lf you chose Custom Member as your role you must click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced dialog box to configure your role settings In this dialog box you are required to make various decisions about how you want ESP to handle modifications to the shared folder It also enables you to choose how ESP should track group membership 382 Eudora Sharing Protocol Advanced dialog box fe ESP Groups d Eudora Alpha Test Goodies Users Eudora Settings Notifications Advanced Eudora Seniors E Mac Eudora by IDisk Shared Folder Actions Custom Member Mac Eudora by Mail Incoming Outgoing Log g Pestilence New Items Do file updates v Ignore file updates D Stationary Updated Do file updates Ignore file updates D Deleted Items Do file updates flgnore file updates T Set Shared Secret Open Folder ESP Settings 7 Inthe Shared Folder Action Custom Member area Determine which type of incoming or outgoing items New Items Updated or Deleted Items you want ESP to handle From the drop down lists choose one of the following To have ESP notify you before specific files in the shared folder are added updated or deleted choose Ask first To have ESP modify specific files in the share folder automatica
211. cs command 19 290 405 427 Tow Truck icon 80 Transfer To action 173 Transferring mail to another mailbox and creating a mailbox or folder 159 by dragging it 159 by dragging the Tow Truck icon 159 transferring a copy 158 Index using the Transfer menu 159 Transferring mail to the Out mailbox 158 Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP 489 Trash button 88 Trash command 281 284 Trash mailbox 73 155 trash mbx file 406 trash toc file 406 Try to delete unread queued or unsent mail 155 Turbo redirect by default how to enter in Options 357 Turbo redirect by default option 99 Typewriter button 36 Typewriter command 45 280 U UnDelete command 93 156 283 Underline button 36 Underline command 45 Undo command 279 Universal Resource Locator URL definition 489 UNIX mail 406 UNIX server POP or IMAP how to obtain 425 unless option 170 Unload Winsock DLL after closing socket how to enter in Options 348 Unqualified name adding domain 127 Unread e status 79 Unwrap Selection command Shift Wrap Selection 46 URL in outgoing mail 54 URL in a message 54 URL definition 489 URLs in incoming mail 85 Use an alert dialog box option 79 Use Directory button 83 Use Microsoft s viewer how to enter in Options 318 Use Microsoft s viewer option 82 Use proportional font by default how to enter in Options 314 User Name how to enter in Options 294 Username definition 490 Using a personality in a message 135 Using
212. ction entered in the Drive Selector field For example if in the Drive Selector box you choose the C drive then the Folder Browser displays the folder tree hierarchy branching down from the C drive folder Right click a folder item in the Folder Browser to display the standard Windows context menu for that folder e File List bottom section This is a list control that displays the files contained in the folder selected in the Folder Browser You can select one or more file items in the list then right click the selection to display the standard Windows context menu for those files Eudora does not fill in the Send To submenu on the context menu When selecting multiple items use the Shift key to select a range of items and use the Ctrl key for disjoint selections The File List control shows these four columns e Name Displays the name of the file and the icon associated with the file e Type Based on the file name extension displays the file type as set in the Options dialog box of Windows Explorer e Size Displays the size of the file in kilobytes K where 1K 1 024 bytes e Modified Displays the date and time that the file was last modified As in Windows Explorer you can click any of the four column headings to sort the listing by the data in that column 222 Managing Windows in Eudora You can also resize the widths of the columns by dragging the separator line between the column heading labels Pos
213. ctory Services window See Using Directory Services on page 257 for more details on these protocols Embedded Directory Eudora uses the Embedded directory to store JPEG image files that you insert into the body of outgoing messages using the Insert Picture command under the Edit menu Eudora deletes these files from this directory when the messages containing the images are emptied from the Trash mailbox See Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 47 for more details Filters Directory Filters are saved in the Filters directory See Filtering Messages on page 161 for more details on creating and using filters Imap Directory Eudora uses the Imap directory to store your IMAP mailboxes and messages Nickname Directory Address Books Address Book entries are saved in the Nickname directory in the default Eudora Nicknames file If you have created additional Address Book files they are kept under their own name in the Nickname directory See Using the Address Book on page 233 and Using the Recipient List on page 252 for more details on creating and using Address Book files and Address Book entries nicknames 404 General Reference Plugins Directory The EMSAPI plug ins are kept in the Plugins directory See the section Plug ins Extended Messaging Services on page 407 for more information Sigs Directory The Standard and additional signature files are kept in the Sigs directory These files
214. d documentation To display the Automation options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Automation icon The Automation options window appears Automation options window Options Category 24 Automation allows other programs to amp control and exchange information Ge Getting Attention with Eudora C Automation enabled from this machine Warn on Automation auto send of messages Extra Warnings c MAPI 339 Setting Eudora Preferences Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Automation enabled from this machine lf you select this option you can perform the automation operations described above from the computer on which Eudora is installed Warn on Automation auto send of messages lf you select this option a warning will appear if any message is sent automatically For example if you have a message set to be sent a certain time a warning appears just before the message is sent Another advantage is that if a virus ever tries to replicate itself using your address book entries this warning will appear 340 Setting Eudora Preferences Extra Warnings The Extra Warnings options determine whether you are warned before making a possible mistake Most of the warnings appear with an option to stop that warning from being displayed again You can toggle warnings to be either on or off To display the Extra Warnings options
215. d off from the context menu choose Float In Main Window The checkmark disappears 3 To turn the command on from the context menu choose Allow Docking A check mark appears A non tool window in the normal state such as a mailbox window or a message window can never be dragged out of the confines of the main Eudora window To convert a docked or floating window to a normal window right click the docked or floating window s border or tab and choose Float In Main Window from the drop down context menu Docked Windows A window is dockable if it is capable of being attached to one of the four edges of the main Eudora window A window is said to be in the docked state if it is currently attached to one such edge 200 Managing Windows in Eudora Sample windows docked to the main Eudora window Eudora DER File Edit Mailbox Message Transfer Special Tools Window Help 2 33 yatt tt Sages a SOF Mailboxes E3 a Eudora In Out amp Junk 4 Trash Discussions Need to Reply E Personal J Travel E 3 k pe n x n w o es 3 wW By w Gi 5 SH Filters BAR NOTE Some application programs identify the docking feature by using terms such as snap glue sticky join and the like 66 gravity Only tool windows whether alone or tabbed are dockable All other windows in Eudora particularly message windows and mailbox windows are not dockable
216. day And Save Thoudg 251 1522K 57K gt When you check for mail Eudora recognizes which incoming messages are junk and those messages are filtered into the Junk mailbox Your incoming mail goes through the Junk filter before any other filter you may have set up After a certain number of days 30 days is the default Eudora automatically deletes these messages Occasionally messages Eudora filters into the Junk mailbox may in fact not be junk mail There is a new option on the Message menu that allows you to transfer wanted mail to the appropriate mailboxes To manage messages in the Junk mailbox that are not junk 1 Scan the messages in the Junk mailbox and select those that you consider not junk mail 2 From the Message menu choose Not Junk Or right click on the message and choose Not Junk from the context menu 176 Organizing Your Messages Message menu with Not Junk option selected Transfer Special Toc New Message Ctrl N Reply Ctrl R Reply to All Forward Redirect Send Again New Message To gt Forward To gt Redirect To gt New Message With gt Reply With i Reply to All With gt Send File Ctrl H Attach gt Change E Junk Delete Ctrl D By choosing the Not Junk command the messages you selected are automatically filtered to go to the designated mailboxes you have previously set up NOTE With time Eudora learns which messages are not junk and filters them to your designated mailboxes autom
217. dd button 60 Clear button 60 Delete button 60 Spelling Options dialog Ignore capitalized words 61 Ignore words with all capitals 61 Ignore words with mixed case 61 Ignore words with numbers 61 Report doubled words 61 Suggest words 61 Check Spelling command 280 Checking Mail 295 Checking Mail Options Check for mail every minutes option 127 Save password option 76 Choose a Nickname File dialog 244 Clear command 280 Clear Formatting button 37 Clear Formatting command 45 280 Client definition 484 Clock icon in the Status column 69 142 Close button in a docked window 203 Close command 278 Close messages with mailbox how to enter in Options 321 Color button 36 Color submenu 45 columns 481 command 49 283 Compact all mailboxes 147 one mailbox 147 Compact Mailboxes command 147 285 Composition window 32 Compound Sorting 179 Configuration option 129 Connect using Dial up networking how to enter in Options 307 contains option 168 Content Concentrator options 363 Content Concentrator definition 484 Content Concentrator how to use 101 Contents tab 405 Context menu definition 484 Context menu for tool windows 210 Context sensitive Help 19 Context Sensitive Help command 290 Contextual Filing 160 Copy amp Unwrap command Shift Copy 46 Copy command 279 Copy original s priority to reply how to enter in Options 309 Copy original s priority to reply option 42 97 Copy text and paragraph styles 46 Copy To action 173
218. der 7 To continue adding a third level of criteria click More Choose and enter more criteria to further reduce the search Click Search to display the messages that contain the criteria you entered Although the following example shows three levels of criteria you can click More to continue entering more criteria click Fewer to return one level back The Search button is disabled if you have a blank text box 189 Organizing Your Messages Example of search criteria for a three level search with results S Find Messages F etn Anywhere v contains v x Body v contains Results Mailboxes No matches in 18 mailboxes M eudora In Out amp Junk g Trash J Recent y Business E Boss E Projects E Reports Personal amp Books Cats ey Friends We Knitting i N S S N N K 2 K In the above example if you click Search Eudora will search for every message through every mailbox that contains the word message in the message body the text Ron somewhere in the headers and the word speaker anywhere in either the message headers or the body To select all the messages in the Results window choose Select All from the Edit menu or press Ctrl A The messages that fulfill the search criteria appear in the Results window The Search feature will not work if you have any text boxes blank
219. dora MAPI server w Never Automation When Eudora is running O Always Extra Warnings Delete MAPI attachments O Never O After sending message when message emptied From Trash Advanced Network Send single MAPI file attachment as inline attachment TXT and HTML files only Warn on MAPI auto send of messages Kerberos ww Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Use Eudora MAPI server lIf Never is selected the Eudora MAPI server is turned off and is never automatically loaded If When Eudora is running is selected the Eudora MAPI server is selected when Eudora is running If Always is selected the Eudora MAPI server is selected and is always loaded on startup Delete MAPI attachments lIf Never is selected MAPI attachments are never deleted from the attachment directory If After sending message is selected MAPI attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are sent If When message emptied from Trash is selected MAPI attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are emptied from the Trash 345 Setting Eudora Preferences Send single MAPI file attachment as inline attachment TXT and HTML files only Select this when you need to have the MAPI client send a single TXT or HTML file as an attachment with no body text Eudora turns off t
220. dow To mark a message Fetch Delete or Fetch then Delete either click the buttons in the incoming message window or select an option from the Server Status drop down list of the message summary Delete all messages that have been retrieved Delete all of the messages from the POP server that have already been fully transferred to the computer you are using Messages that have been partially downloaded are not deleted from the server Delete all messages on server Delete all of your messages from the POP server even the messages that have never been downloaded Be absolutely sure this is what you want to do because there is no way to undo it Fetch all message headers to In mailbox Retrieve from the POP server the header and the first few lines of every new message If you select this option the messages are not filtered Set the Server Status in the message summaries to specify what you want to do with the messages the next time you check mail CAUTION If you delete the message header and you have the Delete from server when emptied from Trash option on in either the Incoming Mail options window for your main account or the Account Settings dialog box for an alternate personality the message is gone completely from Eudora and the POP server How should checking sending be performed lf you have multiple personalities you can check or send mail based on the options on the left of the Mail Transfer Options
221. dow management commands Window context menu Tab Location gt v Allow Docking Hide Float In Main Window Tab Location This submenu is always available on the window context menu It lets you change the location of the tabs in a tabbed window and lets you show and hide the tab in a single tabbed window By default Eudora places window tabs at the bottom of a tabbed window Choose Top Bottom Left or Right from this submenu to move the tabs to the top of the tabbed window the bottom or the left or right side Eudora places a bullet radio button next to the current tab location selection Changing tab locations can sometimes increase the visible space within a tabbed window For example a short and wide tabbed window one docked horizontally might show more content if you move the tabs to the left side Show Single Tab is available in a single tabbed window and lets you show or hide the tab A checkmark next to the command indicates that the tab is shown the default This command is not available in a tabbed window containing two or more tabs you cannot hide the tabs in such a window 210 Managing Windows in Eudora Allow Docking This command controls the dockability of floating and docked windows It is available only when the Float In Main Window command is deselected It is not available for normal windows when Float In Main Window is selected A checkmark next to the command indicates that it is
222. dvanced to display the Advanced Import dialog box where you can look for the files Importing from Outlook Express NOTE Before you begin the import empty the Deleted Items folder in Outlook Express Also if the Import Mail and or Import Address Book Entries option is dimmed Eudora cannot find the messages and or address book To import from Outlook Express 1 From the File menu choose Import The Import Mail and Addresses dialog box appears 2 In the dialog box choose Outlook Express If you don t see Outlook Express go to step 3 3 Choose Import Mail and or Address Book then click OK Outlook Express should begin importing into Eudora 4 Click Advanced Introducing Eudora Email The Advanced Import dialog box appears Advanced Import dialog box showing Outlook Express required fields Advanced Import EUDORA Select which program you would like to import From Microsoft Outlook rae Picea i Please Locate your Folders dbx or Folders nch File Browse Browse Please Locate your WAB File 5 Choose Outlook Express 6 Inthe Please Locate your Folders dbx or Folders nch file click Browse and look for the Folders dbx for Outlook Express 4 x or Folders nch for Outlook Express 5 x file in you Outlook Express folder Make sure the file appears in the text box 7 Inthe Please Locate your WAB file click Browse and look for your Windows Address Book Make sure the file is visib
223. e Eudora ini File Description When switching from a task from one personality to a task of another personality and the two personalities have different dialup networking connection entries whether or not the already connected dialup networking connection should be maintained or a new dialup networking connection made It may be necessary to turn this setting off set to zero if you have personalities that check mail on servers that are behind firewalls and require that you dial in directly in order to connect to the mail server HTML style sheet used for displaying received messages Ask user for read receipts Always deny read receipts without prompting Always return read receipts without prompting Specifies which personality to use as SMTP relay personality If this is 1 Eudora will remove local file references that appear to be suspicious Attribution line when a Reply to All is done 461 Entry Default Value ReplyAttribution At 1 you wrote ReplyEnd ReplyPrefix gt ReplySelectOnlylF n ReplyStart Eudora ini File Description Attribution line when a Reply is done The string that gets inserted after the original text of a replied message A newline is added before the string The string that precedes all lines of the original message in a replied message If doing a Reply with selection and if none of the characters in this list are in the selection then Eudora will reply using the en
224. e 1 From the File menu choose Save Saved messages are put in the Out mailbox and if at least one recipient is entered in either the To or the Bcc field the saved message is shown with a bullet e in the Status column If both the To and Bcc fields are empty the Status column is blank The bullet indicates that the message not only has been saved but is also ready to be sent or queued Saved and sendable message in the Out mailbox Out BENE fo S E Label a wro Dae OE a a Subject 6 Mike L 04 41 PM 8 13 2003 Saved this message for later To Mike L Subject Saved this message for later You can continue making changes to the message or close it If you try to close an outgoing message window without saving that version of the message an alert appears asking if the message should be saved or the changes discarded If you select Discard and the message has never been saved the message is deleted 65 Creating Messages 66 _ Sending Messages and Checking Mail Sending or Queueing a Message After you compose a message you can send it immediately or put it in a queue to be sent later NOTE Most outgoing SMTP servers do not require a password to send mail For information about setting up a password check for sending mail see Troubleshooting on page 479 Sending a Message Immediately If you want to send your messages immediately instead of putting them in a queue to send later be sure the
225. e Maximize or Close that normal window 218 Managing Windows in Eudora If you right click an exposed area of the taskbar not on a button the standard Eudora drop down context menu displays If you drag an object over a taskbar button and pause for several seconds Eudora activates the normal window associated with that button For a tabbed window Eudora activates the tabbed window with the indicated window active You can then complete the drag and drop operation into the normal window For a tabbed window you can further pause the pointer over one of the inactive window tabs and that window becomes active and you can complete the drop Each taskbar button displays both the window icon and the window title of the normal window If there is not enough room to display the entire title Eudora truncates the title and places an ellipsis to indicate the truncation If you pause the mouse pointer over such a button Eudora displays the entire window title in a tooltip If you have many normal windows open or minimized the taskbar buttons shrink so that all buttons are visible When the bar becomes sufficiently crowded the QUALCOMM logo is hidden to make room Note that unlike with the Windows 98 2000 XP and Windows NT 4 0 taskbars you cannot move the Eudora taskbar to another edge of the main Eudora window it always stays at the bottom of the window work area You also cannot resize the taskbar as a separate item It resizes au
226. e etc See Eudora Shortcuts on page 397 e Right click anywhere in the preview pane to display a drop down list with commands appropriate for the previewed message e Click an attachment icon or name to open the attachment e Click a URL hot link to launch the application for that URL e Press Ctrl Shift F to open the Find dialog box in a highlighted message 147 Working with Mailboxes If the Show message preview pane option is selected in the Viewing Mail options window you can press F7 to show and hide the preview pane within the current mailbox only However this does not control the visibility of the preview pane in other mailboxes Also you can do this by clicking on the separator bar between the message list and the preview pane You can change the height of the preview pane relative to the message summary list Just position the mouse pointer over the separator bar between the list and the preview pane and drag the bar up or down If the Show message preview pane option is turned off in the Viewing Mail options window only the message summaries are shown in any mailbox window If the preview pane option is selected and the Mark previewed messages as read after _ second s option is selected in the Viewing Mail options window the current message is marked as read blank in the Status column after the specified number of seconds You can always change the message s status back to Unread by press
227. e Hyper Text Markup Language HTML format However the styles your recipient sees depends on how well their email software supports this standard HTML is the text formatting standard used in the World Wide Web by Web browsers and newer email applications HTML allows you to use enriched text which includes different fonts color sizes bold etc Also HTML lets you imbed pictures and create bullet lists in the emails you send Send plain and styled version in message Send styled text only Send plain text only These options only apply to messages that have some styled content Plain text messages are always sent as just plain text If a message does have styled text then these options control which versions of the message are sent an HTML version a plain text version or both an HTML and a plain text version in the same message If you send plain and styled text your recipient will be able to view your message even though their email program does not support HTML they view the message in plain text only Ask me each time If you select this option you are warned when you try to send or queue a message with text styles And you are given the option to send just a plain text version just an HTML version or both in a single message When the body of a message has no styles but the signature does has styles Send the signature with styles lIf you select this option signature with styled text is sent with a message that has no styled
228. e System Requirements e Getting Started e Installing Eudora e Opening and Configuring Eudora Importing Mail and Address Book from another Email Application e Operating Eudora in One of Three Modes e Choosing a Eudora Mode e Registering Eudora e Technical Support e Creating and Sending a Message e Checking for and Receiving Mail e Replying to a Message e Forwarding a Message e Redirecting a Message e Shortcuts The functions listed above except for Getting Started and the Eudora installation sections are described more thoroughly in this manual Introducing Eudora Email Online Help There are several ways to get online Help with Eudora e To find out what something on the screen does use context sensitive help e For instruction on how to perform certain tasks use the help topics e To receive daily tips on assorted Eudora features each time you open Eudora read the Tip of the Day Introducing Eudora Email Context Sensitive Help You can perform context sensitive help by any of the following methods e Choose Context Sensitive Help from the Help menu Then click the item in question A brief description of the item appears Click anywhere to close the description window e Click the Help button jj Then click the item in question A brief description of the item appears Click anywhere to close the description window e Press the F1 key Select the option command or field item in Eudora you want to know
229. e Web by Web browsers and newer email applications As well as allowing you to use enriched text HTML also lets you embed pictures and create bullet lists in the messages you send It s important to remember that you cannot completely control what happens on your recipients computers Depending on the type of computers they are using their installed fonts their options or preferences etc they could end up viewing something other than what you had intended Also the formatting changes you make are sent to your recipient but your default text settings are not Any text that you did not make changes to appears using your recipient s default text settings which may be different from yours To select preferences for sending text in your messages 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll through the category list and select Styled Text 3 Inthe Styled Text options window you can select whether you want Eudora to send your messages with both plain and styled text with styled text only or with plain text only Also you can set a warning each time you send a message with styled text However the default is to send both styled and plain text For details see Styled Text on page 322 Text in outgoing messages text files and signature files can be formatted using the commands on the Edit menu the Text submenu and the formatting toolbar See Text Toolbar on page 33 for information on using the formatting part of the toolbar Th
230. e a missing or empty Mappings section The Mappings section contains information for mapping between computer file extensions Macintosh creator and type and MIME type and subtype for attachment files in that order Entries marked in work on only incoming messages and entries marked out work on only outgoing messages Entries marked both work on both incoming and outgoing messages For a more detailed explanation see MIME Labeling on page 420 out txt ttxt TEXT text plain both doc MSWD application msword in xIls XCEL out xls XCEL XLS4 both xlc XCEL XLC3 both xlm XCEL XLM3 both ppt PPT3 SLD3 both wp WPC2 WP5 application wordperfect5 1 both zip application zip both rtf application rtf both ps application postcript in eps EPSF out eps dPro EPSF application postscript 471 both mpg video mpeg both jpg image jpeg both gif image gif both tif image tiff both pct PICT both mac MPNT PNTG Window Position Eudora ini File This section saves the positions of the standard windows not your mailbox windows and message windows Entry CheckSpellingWindowPosition DebugTraceWindowPosition FilterReportWindowPosition FiltersWindowPosition FindWindowPosition InputDialogWindowPosition MailboxesWindowPosition MainWindowPosition NicknamesWindowPosition PhWindowPosition ProgressWindowPosition Signature2WindowPosition SignatureWindowPosition TextFileWindowPosition Default
231. e column heading To change the attribute that is assigned to each column enter an attribute in the Attribute Name field such as cn sn gn etc Then select either Name Email w or Phone w in the Present As list which corresponds to the Name Email and Phone columns in the Results List You cannot change what appears in the Database column It always contains the name of the server where the data was found For example if you want to display cn in the Name column TelephoneNumber in the Phone column and mail in the Email column you would set up the attributes like this 272 Using Directory Services Attribute Name Present As from drop down list cn Name Telephone NumberPhone w mail Email w tribute Name In the Details portion of the Results window you can assign more readable attribute names Attribute Name Present As from drop down list l Location st State If you were to assign the names above State Texas would display instead of St Texas In the attribute list check the only display these attributes box if you want to limit what appears to only those attributes that are mapped NOTE In the Present As drop down list there is a choice called Not Displayed If you choose Not Displayed you can prevent a particular attribute from being displayed For example mapping the c country attribute to Not Displayed will have c removed from the displayed results in the Details List Th
232. e custom colors palette Custom colors palette Basic colors Custom colors EEHEHE EEDEN EEEE BEEEES See ll EEEE Hue po Red Sat 240 Green Fa ES Lum fi 20 Blue jo Add to Custom Colors To define a custom color 1 2 Select one of the 16 custom color boxes Using the mouse pointer click anywhere on the color palette to select the color Hue and Saturation Use the color control bar to the right of the color palette to adjust the color When you are satisfied with the color click Add to Custom Colors 332 Setting Eudora Preferences 4 Once you have completed creating the custom colors select the desired label color and click OK 333 Setting Eudora Preferences Getting Attention The Getting Attention options determine what Eudora does when it is running in the background and wants your attention or when new mail arrives To display the Getting Attention options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Getting Attention icon The Getting Attention options window appears Getting Attention options window Options Category lt a Use an alert dialog box Al Open mailbox Auto completion i Play a sound Use Default sie Saaz C Generate filter report E TR Background Tasks Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Use an alert dialog box lf you select this option an alert dialog
233. e date is correct on your computer especially the year e Be sure Eudora can find your winsock d11 If Eudora cannot find it be sure the Path line in your AUTOEXEC BAT file includes the directory that contains the winsock d11 Or if you do not want to edit your AUTOEXEC BAT file try copying your winsock d11 into your Eudora directory e Run ScanDisk to check for problems on the hard drive 479 Troubleshooting If you re having trouble with your mailboxes especially with repeated requests to rebuild a mailbox s table of contents quit Eudora and find the mailbox s toc file in the Eudora directory Change the toc extension to 000 then open Eudora and see if the problem persists On Windows 98 XP If you re having other problems especially crashes remove all of the items in your Startup directory C Windows Start Menu Programs StartUp then restart Windows while holding down the F8 key In the Startup menu select Safe Mode Then open Eudora and see if the problem persists Errors The following are possible errors and alerts you could receive from Eudora and suggestions for fixing them ERR Maildrop lock busy This usually happens after your PC has hung during a mail check and you are now attempting to re connect to the mail server The best thing to do is to contact your e mail administrator and report that you have a POPS server process that needs to be disconnected 503 Need RCPT Recipient
234. e default is off the addresses of the original message recipients are moved from the To field to the Cc field of the reply to all message Only the address of the original sender is placed in the To field If this option is off all of the addresses are placed in the To f ield of the reply message 310 Setting Eudora Preferences Attachments The Attachments options determine how Eudora sends and receives file attachments To display the Attachments options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Attachments icon The Attachments options window appears Attachments options window Options Category Encoding method MIME Composing Mail BinHex S O Uuencode p Attachment directory menande M C Put text attachments in body of message C Receive MIME digest as a mailbox attachment C Delete attachments when emptying Trash Delete automatic attachments O Never O After sending message When message emptied From Trash Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Encoding method This specifies what default encoding method to use for attached documents MIME BinHex or Uuencode To change the method for just the current message use the Attachment Type popup in the outgoing message window For details see Attaching a File to a Message on page 49 Attachment directory This specifies what directory will receive incoming att
235. e following Text submenu commands are described Text Editing Menu Commands To format text use the commands on the Text submenu of the Edit menu If text in the message body is selected the menu command applies the formatting to that text If no text is selected but the cursor is in the message body then the font related commands apply the formatting to the next text you type and the margin related commands apply the formatting to the current paragraph that is the paragraph containing the cursor You must place the cursor in the composition window to activate the options otherwise the options are inactive grayed out 44 Creating Messages The formatting options are Font Make the text a certain font by choosing from the fonts available on your system Remember that your recipient may not have the same fonts Bold Italic Underline Make the text bold italic or underlined The default is plain text Color Make the text black or the selected color Typewriter Set the text to the fixed width typewriter style message font selected in the Fonts Options Size Make the text the selected size Very Small Small the default Medium Large Larger Very Large and Humongous The increase or decrease is based on the next or previous standard point size Remember that you are viewing the text based on your default settings in the Fonts Options but your recipient s settings and fonts will be different For example if y
236. e following applies e Keep on top setting in the window is ignored e To Cc and Bcc buttons in the window apply to the topmost composition window if any e Special menu s Make Address Book Entry command and the File menu s Print Preview and Print commands apply to the Directory Services window only if the keyboard focus is in that window e When the Directory Services window is in the normal state either alone or as part of a tabbed window group the following applies e Keep on top setting in the window is obeyed e To Cc and Bcc buttons in the window apply to the composition window if any immediately under the Directory Services window or the tabbed window containing it e Special menu s Make Address Book Entry command and the File menu s Print Preview and Print commands apply to the Directory Services window only if it is the topmost normal window and is active Or if the tabbed window containing it is the topmost normal window and the Directory services tab is active Using Directory Service Protocols Protocols are used to access in Directory Services to find information on persons by entering their name email address etc The Protocols section of the Directory Services window lists the directory service protocols available to you to use when looking up individuals via these services 263 Using Directory Services Eudora comes with four installed protocols Ph e Finger LDAP Lightweight
237. e message by turning off the Text as Attachment button in the message toolbar or by turning on the Put text attachments in body of message option in the Attachments options See Attachments on page 311 The toolbar button applies to the current outgoing message the Attachments option applies to all outgoing messages The attachment types include the following MIME This is best for recipients with MIME compliant email readers regardless of what operating system they are using For more information on MIME see MIME and Mapping in the extended online user manual BinHex This is best for recipients on a Macintosh with an email reader that is not MIME compliant Uuencode This is best for recipients using PC or UNIX systems that are not MIME compliant Manually Decoding Attachments If you send an attachment and your recipient s email program does not automatically decode it it will probably be included in the body of the message in the chosen attachment format MIME BinHex or Uuencode If you receive a large message consisting largely of indecipherable text it is probably an attachment that was not automatically decoded Usually this is because the attachment headers are formatted incorrectly To decode an attachment that was not automatically decoded open the message and choose Save As from the File menu to save the message as a text file Then run the decoding utility appropriate for the encoding method that the
238. e number of days you d like Eudora to keep junk mail in the Junk mailbox Eudora scans the Junk mailbox periodically and removes the messages after the set number of days you enter in this field Warn before removing Check this box if you want Eudora to warn you that junk mail messages are about to be removed from the Junk mailbox 360 Setting Eudora Preferences Junk Mail Extras Paid mode only You can further change the Junk Mail options in the Junk Mail Extras options window To display the Junk Mail Extras options window 1 2 From the Tools menu choose Options Scroll and click Junk Mail Extras The Junk Mail Extra options window appears Junk Mail Extras options window Options Category i Miscellaneous 3 Junk Mail meth Junk Mail Extras Content Concentrator A BossWatch re Find Messages v Esoteric Stuff Only remove junk whose score is at least Junking a message assigns it a score of Trim old junk to mailbox Add Not Junk ed senders to Address Book Delete fetched junk from server Use Ctrl J for Junk Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Only remove junk whose score is at least _ A message is moved from the In mailbox to the Junk mailbox if the score is at least the number you enter here Junking assigns a score of _ When you indicate in Eudora that you would like a message t
239. e of the previous character Note that it s not a wildcard character as in file names 173 Organizing Your Messages Symbol Character representation question mark is a multiplier It will match zero or one of the previous character Note that it s not a wildcard character as in file names plus is a multiplier It will match one or more of the previous character squiggly brackets contain a number which specifies an exact number of the previous character brackets containing caret and other characters means any characters except the character s after the caret symbol in the brackets n caret is the start of the line dollar is the end of the line lt represents the start of a word gt represents the end of a word alpha represents any alphabetic letter digit represents any single digit number blank represents a space or tab l pipe is OR It requires that the joined expressions have parentheses around them Here are a few examples Symbols What they match E a matches Eudora Etcetera Ea ho p matches hop hoop hoooop but not hp etc matches etc but not etc e a matches eta eda e1a it only matches Eta if the matching is case insensitive eE a matches eta and Eta You can find further information on regular expressions on the web for example the following web site http www regular expressions info Creating an Auto Reply Message Sponsored
240. e popup 33 Attachments attaching files to outgoing mail 49 automatically deleting 158 detaching from a message 49 dragging to attach 49 encoding 49 opening 82 receiving 82 Attachments column 143 Attachments Options Attachment directory option 404 Delete attachments when emptying Trash option 158 Attachments definition 483 Authentication style how to enter in Options IMAP server 301 POP server 300 Authentication style option 129 131 Authentication SMTP 72 Auto name completion directory services 259 Auto name completion message header 39 Auto Completion options 326 Auto completion how to delete an entry 41 Automatic spell check 55 Automatically as you type how to enter in Options 325 Automatically expand nicknames how to enter in Options 358 Automatically expand nicknames option 253 Automatically Fcc to original mailbox how to enter in Options 309 Automatically open next message how to enter in Options 319 Automation options 339 Automation definition 483 Auto Reply 174 Auto save messages every _ minutes how to enter in Options 358 Background tasks in Options 336 Bcc button in Directory Services 261 in the Address Book 245 Bcc field to copy outgoing messages 72 Bcc definition 483 BinHex encoding 50 BinHex definition 483 BLAH BLAH BLAH button 81 blank in the Status column 141 Body field in Filters 168 Body definition 483 Bold button 35 Bold command 45 BossWatch List 250 BossWatch definition 484 Bot
241. e server status you requested is automatically completed Se Peached The message has been fetched Headers Retrieve message headers from the IMAP server but body and attachments Y Ony have not been fetched a Delete Delete the message from the server D Fetched Retrieve the whole message including attachments Body but no Attach ments MoodWatch Column MoodWatch scans each word and phrase in each message in the mailbox for offensive language The level of offensiveness is indicated by the appearance of one two or three red chili peppers with three red chilies being the most offensive and one the least nd There is no offensive language in the message LS There may be a slight bit of offensive language in the message ji There may be offensive language in the message Hi There is offensive language in the message Less offensive text in the message is underlined with a green squiggly line More offensive text in the message is underlined with both a green and red squiggly line 145 Working with Mailboxes Subject Column This column displays the subject of the message The sender originally typed this information into the message header but you can modify it See on Editing Incoming Messages on page 84 Displaying and Resizing Columns To indicate which columns you want displayed in your mailboxes 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll through the category list and select Mailboxes The Mailboxes option
242. each panel choose an item from the categories list on the left and the corresponding button icons for that category are shown in the Buttons section on the right 4 Click to select one of the button icons and view a description of the button s function in the Description field at the bottom of the panel These descriptions also appear in the status bar of the main Eudora window if the bar is currently displayed when you position the mouse pointer over the button icon In this case you don t have to click the button NOTE In these button descriptions any instruction to hold down the Shift key means to do so when you are actually using the button from the toolbar not when you are adding the button to the toolbar and not when you are clicking on the button in the Customize window to view its description For example if you click the New Message button in the main toolbar a new composition window opens If you hold down the Shift key and click the New Message button in the main toolbar the Message Options dialog box appears allowing you to select options for creating a new message Personality and Stationery 5 Drag the button icon to your desired position on the toolbar 215 Managing Windows in Eudora NOTE If you need help at any time during toolbar customization click the Help button in the Customize dialog box 6 When you are finished adding toolbar buttons click the Close button to close the Customize dialog box Fo
243. ear To see more statistical information for example Attachments received check the More Statistics box 230 Managing Windows in Eudora NOTE To change the color graph type and other settings for the Statistics window go to Statistics Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 354 for more information Printing the Statistics Report To print the information in the Statistics window e With the Statistics window open go to the File menu and choose Print Your Statistics report will print 231 Managing Windows in Eudora 232 Using the Address Book The Address Book is where you keep information about individuals or groups that you correspond with Each entry in the Address Book includes a name for a person or group their full email address email addresses for groups a full name any contact information including both home and work information other email addresses and information and any notes You can also use the Address Book to put names on the Recipient List and to address a new message See Using the Recipient List on page 252 To open your Address Book 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book or press Ctrl L or click the Address Book icon wee on the toolbar Address Book with sample entries 2 Address Book Nickname Nickname Brittnee C Recipient List C Bosswatch List Krystal Personal Home Work Other Notes Maressa Shalom Full Name Brittnee Gardner Shannon
244. eave this option selected The default stationery overrides this option see above Keep copies lf you select this option a copy of each message you send is kept in the Out mailbox If this option is turned off outgoing messages are put in the Trash mailbox after they are sent Default stationery overrides this option see above May use quoted printable If you select this option Eudora uses quoted printable encoding when necessary such as when sending messages that contain special characters or long lines of text If this option is turned off quoted printable encoding is never used We recommend that you leave this option selected Default stationery overrides this option Tabs in body of message If you select this option pressing the Tab key within the message body inserts a tab If it is turned off pressing the Tab key within the message body moves the cursor to the To field Default stationery overrides this option see above Show signature while composing lf you select this option you will see the signature you have previously set up in the message composition window If off you will not see the signature To set up a signature see Using a Signature on page 105 306 Setting Eudora Preferences Internet Dialup The Internet Dialup options determine how Eudora manages your Internet telephone connection To display the Internet Dialup options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Click the Internet Dia
245. eb Words submenu amp Eugene 03 50 PM 3 15 2004 Poker Party Date Mon 15 Mar 2004 15 50 12 0800 PST From Eugene lt eeon qualcomm com gt Subject Poker Party Party this Saturday Youknow the rules 50 buy in Texas Hold Em Copy Let m Search Web for Poker Search Eudora For Poker Search Mailbox For Poker Search Mailfolder For Poker Transfer gt Reply Reply to All Forward Redirect 3 Choose one of the search options e Search Web Eudora launches your web browser and initiates a search for the highlighted text e Search Eudora Eudora searches all your mailboxes for the text you entered in the search field e Search Mailbox If you have a mailbox opened Eudora searches that mailbox for the text If you have a message opened Eudora searches the mailbox that the message is in e Search Mailfolder If you have a mailbox opened Eudora searches all the mailboxes in the same mail folder as the open mailbox TIP If you want to search on a single word only you do not have to highlight the word Simply press the Control key and click or right click on the word to start a search 193 Organizing Your Messages Searching in Eudora The search field on your toolbar can also be used to search inside Eudora Type the words you wish to search for then click on the arrow to the right of the field A submenu appears with further search options Submenu flowers ka Search Web
246. eck state of other Ph databases is reflected in similar entries This entry reflects the check state of the Eudora Address Book database Eudora Nicknames when Eudora was last shut down The check state of other Eudora Address Book databases is reflected in similar entries This entry reflects the check state of the Finger database hostname domain com when Eudora was last shut down The check state of other Finger databases or daemons is reflected in similar entries This entry reflects the major version of DirServ dll that was last registered Combined with the minor version of this DLL see the next entry below Eudora at run time determines whether the DLL is a newer version than the one last registered so that it can register the new COM objects if any in the newer DLL This entry reflects the minor version of DirServ dll that was last registered See the description above for DIRSERV Major This entry reflects the major version of ISock dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies This entry reflects the minor version of ISock dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies 475 EUDORABK Major EUDORABK Minor LDAP Major LDAP Minor PH Major PH Minor Eudora ini File This entry reflects the major version of EudoraBk dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above appl
247. ecks 95 Receiving and Responding to Messages e Manually check for mail e Transfer and delete messages after they are retrieved However a dialog box appears asking you to connect for as long as it takes to transfer and delete your messages Once the tasks are completed you immediately disconnect from the server Replying to a Message To reply to the current message e From the Message menu choose Reply or click EA A new message window appears with the original sender s address automatically placed in the To field of the header All of the sender s original text is quoted in the message body This text can be edited as needed Additional text can be added to the reply just as to any outgoing message and the reply can then be sent or saved for further changes If the sender s text is quoted with a left sidebar also called an excerpt bar See the following example Sender s text showing excerpt bar This text include and text that is Y Messages that have been replied to are identified with a left arrow in the Status column of their message summary Using the Reply Options There are several options that you can use when replying to messages To include everyone who received the original message e From the Message menu choose Reply to All or click To include yourself as a recipient select the Include yourself option in the Replying options See Replying on page 309 This works only if yo
248. ection appears only when normal Eudora windows are currently open or minimized on the desktop and thus buttons appear on the Eudora taskbar which is what this section controls Recent File List This section appears only when files have been opened since the most recent Eudora startup NOTE We strongly urge that you do not change the values in these optional sections of the INI file and rather make any changes from the interface For example personalities can be created and edited from the Personalities window and stationery can be created and edited from the Stationery window Both windows are available from the Tools menu The values of the settings in each of these optional sections reflect the current values of the objects or conditions there are no default values per se Name and Location of the INI File The default name is EUDORA INI and the default location is in the mail directory But the name and location can be changed To specify a different INI file from the EUDORA INI that is not in the mail directory add a second parameter to the command line in the Program Item for Eudora for example Command Line c apps eudora exe c mymail c inis myeudora ini To use a different INI file that is in the mail directory Command Line c apps eudora exe c mymail myeudora ini Command Line c apps eudora exe c mymail myeudora ini This is a way to have multiple settings for one set of mailboxes nicknames etc For example
249. ed Forwarded Redirected Sent Sendable Unsent Queued Time Queued Unsandable or Recovered The verb field defaults to is Priority Choose this option to search for messages by priority A priority drop down options list displays the default is Highest You can choose from Highest High Normal Low or Lowest The verb field defaults to is Attachment Count Choose this option to search the number of attachments joined to each message A counter appears for you to select the desired number or you can type the number in the text box The verb field defaults to is Label Choose this option to search for messages by label Choose Label and the labels drop down options list displays the default is None You can choose from the labels you previously set up The verb field defaults to is Date Choose this option to search for messages by date Once selected today s date appears Click the down arrow to display the current month s calendar Using the arrows on the calendar you can display the preceding or succeeding months and years Choose the date to or from where you want the search to begin Size Choose this option to search for messages by their file size in kilobytes A counter appears for you to select the desired number of kilobytes or you can type the number in the text box The verb field defaults to is Age Choose this option to search for messages by age in days A counter appears for you to select the de
250. ed Mode Paid M Light Mode free with ads costs Baer pe ads free ref features Keeping Current a e Register with Us Profile Find the Latest Versions Your Registration Information lt No registration name entered gt lt No registration code entered gt Enter Your Code Go to the Eudora web site for more information 2 Inthe Which Eudora is right for you section e To use Eudora in Sponsored mode click Sponsored Mode free with ads Eudora displays the ad window e To use Eudora in Paid mode click Paid Mode costs money no ads Eudora displays the Eudora web site for you to purchase Eudora e To use Eudora in Light mode click Light Mode free fewer features Eudora changes to Light mode by shutting down certain features The features that will be off are listed in the Light mode dialog box 3 In the Keeping Current section e To add or change your profile click Profile Eudora displays a web site where you can provide information about yourself to help in customizing which ads would be of interest to you e To find the most current version of Eudora click Find the Latest Versions The Eudora web site displays where you can retrieve the latest version of Eudora and lets you know if there is a cost to upgrade 26 Introducing Eudora Email NOTE You can tell which mode you are in because that button is grayed out To find out more information about the modes click Go to the Eudora web site f
251. efault this is the same as your POP server 458 Eudora ini File Entry Default Value Description PasswordOKWordList lock busy own it A comma separated list of words that if found in the response of memory text from an error from the POP PASS command that will not assign stream cause the password to be erased works in conjunction with ush of temp the BadPasswordString entry above POP servers being unlock sometimes fail after sending the PASS command for reasons hangup timeout other than your password was incorrect and this entry allows not greater control over when Eudora will decide to ask you again owned quota for your password drop name recognition mode accessibl e by others regular file flock mailloc k few minute locked PhReturn A string that is appended to every Ph command before sending to the Ph server For example PhReturn return all would return all fields of the records returned by the query and PhReturn type person would return all matches to the query with the additional filter that the record is a person POPPort 110 Default port number for the POP service pop3 PreventExecutableEmb 1 If this is 1 Eudora will prevent executable HTML embeded ededContent content PreviewHeaders To Subject Cc A comma separated list of headers that should be shown in Bcc X the preview pane The matching is done on a prefix basis so Attachments any header that begins with one of these values will be shown P
252. egory icons This option allows you to turn the Category icons in Options on and off Show MDI task bar If you select this option Eudora displays the Eudora taskbar at the bottom of the window work area This taskbar contains buttons for all open and minimized normal Eudora windows such as mailboxes email and Address Book Automatically download HTML graphics lf you select this option Eudora will fetch and display images from the web that are embedded in a received email message using Eudora s internal HTML viewer Display attached images inline lf you select this option Eudora will display attached graphic files within the body of the message Display emoticons as pictures lf you select this option Eudora will display emoticons as graphic icons Minimize Eudora to the system tray lf you select this option Eudora will display as an icon in the system tray when minimized instead of in the Windows Taskbar Always show icon in system tray lf you select this option the icon for Eudora will display in the system tray whenever Eudora is open 316 Setting Eudora Preferences Viewing Mail The Viewing Mail options determine how Eudora displays incoming and outgoing message windows and the message preview pane in mailbox windows To display the Viewing Mail options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Viewing Mail icon The Viewing Mail options window appears Viewing Mail options wi
253. eiving and Responding to Messages If you always want the full message to be transferred to your computer during mail checks with or without attachments as specified separately rather than just the minimal headers then turn off the Minimal Headers Only option See Incoming Mail on page 298 with IMAP selected Full Message Except Attachments Over _ K To prevent Eudora from transferring large attachments to your computer during mail checks turn on the Full message except attachments over _ K option and specify a size You can set this option in the Incoming Mail options for your main account or in the Account Settings dialog box for any of your personalities If you enter zero the attachment regardless of its size will be retrieved Each time mail is then checked for the account any attachments larger than the specified size are not transferred to your computer with the message The rest of the message is transferred including the complete message body Any attachments within the specified size are also transferred Enter a large number to transfer most or all attachments to your computer Attachments not transferred during mail checks can still be retrieved When you open or preview the message associated with the attachment an icon for the attachment appears in the incoming message window or the message preview pane To retrieve the attachment e Click the icon to retrieve the attachment from the IMAP server Or right click o
254. elds If you select the This server requires me to log on option new fields appear in which to enter an Account name and a Password However most LDAP servers do not require you to log in Enter values in these fields if you have specific instructions from your LDAP administrator to so do 270 Using Directory Services 4 Select the Attributes tab to display the Attributes panel LDAP Database Attributes panel 1 2 3 Modify Database Network Attributes Search Options Log Attribute Name o Organization Tl Return listed attributes only Add Edit Remove In the Attributes panel you can add edit or remove attribute mappings using the buttons displayed just below the window You use the Attribute list to manage how information appears in the query results list and query results details portion of the screen To add an attribute mapping click Add The Add Attribute list appears LDAP Database window Attributes panel Add Attribute Add Attribute Attribute Name m __ Presented As In the Attribute Name text box enter the name for the attribute you wish to add a mapping for for example cn for common name You must know the raw field names for the particular LDAP server you are adding 271 Using Directory Services Listed are the most common raw LDAP field name attributes c Country expressed in a two letter country code for example US United States CA Canada UK Un
255. elete key This field can be left blank Message Body After filling in the header fields move the insertion point to the space below the message header Type the body of the message here For information about formatting your message text see Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 43 Also see Text Toolbar on page 33 You can insert pictures and horizontal lines into message text For details see Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 47 Using Automatic Name Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only Similar to the Finish Address Book Entry command see Finish Address Book Entry Command on page 249 Auto Completion allows you to enter a portion of a name in the To Cc or Bec field and Eudora automatically completes the name for you Just start typing and Eudora will attempt to complete the name If multiple past recipients match the text you ve entered a list of names from your history file and address book appear in a drop down name list provided both the history file and address book are selected in the new Auto Completion option window explained later in this section Select the correct name and the name and email address appear in the field The history file consists of names and email addresses of people you have previously sent or forwarded messages to or to whose messages you have replied within Eudora The address book consists of the nicknames you have entered
256. elow the New command on the Mailbox menu all of your top level mailboxes are listed followed by all of your top level mail folders Mail folders can contain other mail folders as well as mailboxes Navigate through the menu system to open a mailbox that resides within a folder or to create a new mailbox within that folder using the New command on the folder submenu Message Menu This menu lets you create send and delete messages 281 Using Menu Commands NOTE If you hold down the Shift key while selecting any of the message composition commands in the top half of the Message menu from New Message down to and including Redirect To the Message Options dialog box appears which lets you select the Personality and optional Stationery for the message Message menu Transfer Special Toc New Message Ctrl N Reply Ctrl R Reply to All Forward Redirect Send Again New Message To d Forward To gt Redirect To gt New Message With gt Reply With gt Reply to All With gt Send File Ctrl H Attach gt Change gt Junk Delete Ctrl D New Message Open a new message composition window Reply Reply to the sender of the current message Reply to All Reply to the sender and all original recipients of the current message Forward Forward the current message to someone else Redirect Redirect the current message to someone else Send Again Resend a message rejected by the mail system You can also use t
257. ely available in the form in which it was set up in the Make Filter dialog box Any changes you make in the Filters window must be saved before they become effective Following is more information on the Filters window Cancel Click Cancel to cancel the filter if you change your mind The filter is cancelled and your changes are not saved Detailed Filters with the Filters Window The Make Filter dialog box discussed previously lets you create quick simple filters that perform one operation a mail transfer based on one match condition a piece of header information The Filters window lets you create more complex powerful filters that use multiple match conditions and perform multiple filter actions You can also use the Filters window to create simple filters such as those created by the Make Filter dialog box To open the Filters window to create or modify a filter 1 From the Tools menu choose Filters or click on the Filters window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group The Filters window appears and any filters you have created are listed on the left For more information on how to manipulate the Filters window alone and as part of a tabbed window see Managing Windows in Eudora on page 197 165 Organizing Your Messages Filters window showing an example filter SH Filters Any HeadersManager Match M Incoming Outgoing Manual Header lt Any Header contains v Manager st i s s
258. ember to manually attach the document to the outgoing message MAPI streamlines this process dramatically To email the current open document from your word processor select the Send command from your word processor s File menu This automatically activates Eudora and attaches a snapshot of the open document to a new composition message The MAPI system standardizes how messages are handled by client applications so that each client application does not need to have a custom code for each target messaging application MAPI accomplishes this by providing a standard application program interface used by all MAPI enabled client applications An additional MAPI feature supported by Microsoft Office applications is the ability to add a routing slip to a Word Excel or PowerPoint document This routing slip contains a list of email recipients obtained from the MAPI subsystem Once a document has an embedded routing slip then it can be semi automatically routed as an attachment via email to all recipients listed in the routing slip Once the routing is complete the annotated document is returned back to the original sender NOTE Close all other MAPI applications before changing Eudora s status as a MAPI server To display the MAPI options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the MAPI icon The MAPI options window appears 344 Setting Eudora Preferences MAPI options window Options Category A Use Eu
259. en you check and send mail simultaneously the progress of these functions are displayed in the Task Status window Also you can send messages from different personalities at the same time The Background Tasks options found in Options under the Tools menu allow you to set parameters that determine how background tasks behave and what kind of information you want to see in the Task Status window In other words you can configure the behavior of background tasks Also you can set the Task Status and or the Task Error windows to be brought to the front of other windows in Eudora when activity occurs In the Background Tasks options window you can indicate the number of seconds of user inactivity before your newly retrieved mail is actually processed by Eudora If you have automatic mail checking set up in the Checking Mail options Eudora will retrieve the mail in the background from the incoming server at those time intervals But Eudora will not process it until there is no user activity performed on your computer for the amount of seconds you indicate in the Background Tasks options window An envelope displayed on the status bar located at the lower right hand corner of the Eudora window indicates that there is retrieved mail to be processed that is messages to be filtered and placed in mailboxes Technical Note In the background Eudora retrieves and sends mail in the foreground Eudora processes attachments and applies filters If you
260. ent Eudora has a string resource that contains the default list of extensions that should be used to warn 469 Entry Default Value WarnLaunchRemove WarnMapiAutoSend 1 WebLinkReminderLater 360 NumMinutes WhenOpeningComposit 0 ionWindowSelectAfter WhenOpeningComposit 0 ionWindowSelectAll WhenOpeningComposit 1 ionWindowSelectBefore WhenReplyingSelectAll 0 WhenReplyingSeparate 0 WithLine WhenReplyingTypeAfter0 WhenReplyingTypeBefo 1 re WholeSummaryLabelC 1 olor WordWrapColumn 76 WordWrapMax 80 Eudora ini File Description User supplied list of file extensions that should be removed from the default list of extensions to warn when trying to launch an attachment If 1 on Eudora provides a warning dialog when a simple MAPI client tries to send a messages through Eudora without showing any UI to the user The was also added to the Tools Options MAPI dialog When you get a link reminder if you select Remind Me Later the minimum wait until the next reminder When on if WhenOpeningCompositionWindowSelectAll and WhenOpeningCompositionWindowSelectBefore are off messages from the Out mailbox open with the insertion point at the end of the message When on messages from the Out mailbox open with the original text selected When on if WhenOpeningCompositionWindowSelectAll is off messages from the Out mailbox open with the insertion point at the top of the message When on reply messa
261. ent 820 11 13AM 8 12 2003 view Remove TE Directory Services Q Address Book SS Fites Bl Fiter Report BH Link History 2 To view a link in the list double click the item or click to highlight it then click View To remove the link from the list click Remove If you right click in the Link History window a context menu appears Link History context menu Copy View Remove Change Date Display gt v Hide v Float In Main Window 228 Managing Windows in Eudora Copy copies the link item to the clipboard View displays the link item s web site page Remove deletes the link item Change Date Display displays a submenu allowing you to set reminders when to see the link bookmark the link or sort the link items by date Change Date Display submenu Remind Me Sorts Highest Bookmark Sorts Higher Just Date Sorts Normal NOTE The items in this window expire and do not appear after 30 days Statistics Window Sponsored and Paid modes only You can now display and print your Eudora usage statistics These statistics keep track of how many messages you receive and send in a particular day week month or year You can also see how many attachments were received and sent as well as how many messages were read In the Sent Email section you can see how many messages you have replied to forwarded and redirected during a specific timeframe You can also view statistics and charts based on
262. ent from the message to any folder 81 Receiving and Responding to Messages Eudora lets you view incoming mail with advanced formatting graphics multimedia and the like Additionally if you have the Use Microsoft s viewer option turned on in the Viewing Mail options and you have Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 0 or later installed and available on your system then Eudora lets you take full advantage of the viewing capabilities of a Web browser You can view directly in the email message itself or linked to the Internet without having to open your Web browser See Viewing Mail on page 317 You can also download web based images that are embedded in your receiving messages when you check mail if you have Automatically download HTML graphics turn on in the Display options window See Display on page 315 Printing an Incoming Message To print the current message e From the File menu choose Print Eudora automatically prints headers and footers on each page giving the window title page number and your return address Receiving Attachments Unless you have specified a particular directory for your incoming attachments see Specifying an Attachment Directory on page 83 they are automatically decoded and saved in the Attach Directory in your Eudora Directory If you receive multiple attachments with the same name a number is added to the end of each duplicate name in the order they are received Attachment names appear at the
263. enter in Options 318 Message window width how to enter in Options 318 Message creating an auto reply 174 messages retrieved but not attachments 145 Microsoft Outlook importing from 22 MIME 419 487 Base64 encoding 419 Content type header 420 Macintosh creators 421 Macintosh types 421 Mapping 421 Quoted printable encoding 419 Types 421 MIME digest 312 MIME encoding 50 MIME definition 487 Minimal headers only how to enter in Options IMAP server 300 Minimal Headers Only option 91 130 Miscellaneous Options Allow drag and drop transfers option 159 Automatically expand nicknames option 253 Empty Trash when exiting option 155 Turbo redirect by default option 99 Miscellaneous options 356 Modifiers 395 Modify button 265 276 Mood Watch options 351 MoodWatch 63 icons in an outgoing message 35 in an outgoing message 35 incoming messages 64 outgoing messages 63 MoodWatch column 145 Move it to mailbox IMAP server 301 Move Message icon 80 Move To command 244 Multiple accounts in Eudora 115 Multiple PCs checking mail from 86 Multiple personalities 115 Multi Purpose Internet Mail Extension MIME definition 487 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions 419 N name completion directory services 259 Name completion message header 39 Need RCPT Recipient 480 Netscape Messenger importing 123 Netscape Messenger importing from 24 Netscape Messenger migrating from 123 Network buffer size of _ bytes how to enter in Options 348
264. ept in the eudora log and eudorlog old files The eudorlog old file is overwritten and a new eudora log file is created when the eudora log file reaches its approximately 100K maximum size To enable logging set the LogLevel entry in the Debug section of the Eudora ini file For more information see the Debug section of the EUDORA INI Settings File online help accessed by selecting Topics from the Help menu filters pce Names and extensions for Eudora filters are saved in the filters pce file finger ini LDAPInit ini ph ini The finger ini LDAPInit ini and ph ini files are used to store settings information for the Finger LDAP and Ph protocols used in the Directory Services window in mbx out mbx trash mbx These files hold your mail You ll see files like these for every mailbox you create NOTE These files are in UNIX mail format Mail folders that you create are stored as directories with the fol extension Mail folders contain mailboxes and other mail folders in toc out toc trash toc These files are the tables of contents for your mailboxes They make it much faster for Eudora to access your mail You ll see files like these for every mailbox you create Imos dat This file contains information about the messages on your mail server Imos leave mail on server nndbase toc This file is the table of contents for your nicknames Extra nickname files are stored in the Nickname directory see above
265. er Satisfaction TPS Reports Creating a Hyperlink in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora lets you create a hyperlink in an outgoing message that is it converts a piece of text or a graphic into a link to a URL When your recipients click the text or graphic their browsers open and take them to that URL To create a hyperlink 1 Type the text you want to link in your outgoing message for example Click here 2 Select the text to highlight it Or insert a graphic file by choosing Insert then Picture from the Edit menu and select the inserted graphic 3 Either choose Make Hyperlink from the Text submenu under the Edit menu or click the Make Hyperlink button on the message toolbar See Text Toolbar on page 33 In the URL field of the Hyperlink dialog box enter the full address of the URL for example http www eudora com 4 Click OK 54 Creating Messages The text or graphic is now linked and is highlighted and underlined in the message When your recipients receive the message open it and click the text or picture you hyperlinked their browsers or other applications will open and go directly to the URL you specified For example if you hyperlinked Click here to the Eudora Web site www eudora com and when your recipient clicks Click here your recipient s browser opens and the Eudora Web page appears Checking Your Spelling Automatically Sponsored and Paid modes only Automa
266. er over the tab of an inactive window in a tabbed window that window becomes active is brought to the front and you can complete the drop For example if you drag received messages to the Mailboxes window when it is inactive in a tabbed window and pause the pointer over the Mailboxes window s tab the window becomes active and you can drop the messages in a mailbox Note that tab auto activation is disabled when you are dragging a tool window tab Closing Tabbed Windows To close a tabbed window click the x close button in the upper right corner of the window Alternately right click any tab in the window or on the window border and choose Hide from the drop down context menu 209 Managing Windows in Eudora Note that when you close or hide a tabbed window the contents of all member windows and the state and position of the tabbed window are all preserved When you redisplay the tabbed window the active window shows its prior contents and the tabbed window appears in its prior state and position However if you attempt to close or hide a tabbed window in which the active window contains unsaved changes or you attempt to deactivate that active window by making another window active in the group Eudora asks you if you want to save your changes Window Context Menu If you right click the tab or border of a single tool window or on any tab or the border of a tabbed window Eudora displays a context menu containing win
267. er to display the Tip of the Day when Eudora is launched Allows you to add authentication to your SMTP server It should contain a comma separated list of authentication schemes whose use is to be disallowed The security conscious should set it to LOGIN PLAIN as this ensures that your SMTP server password will always be strongly encrypted when it goes over the network Users of IPSWITCH s Imail SMTP server should set it to CRAM MD5 so as to avoid a bug of theirs If this is 1 SMTP will use Kerberos 5 authentication if that personality s POP IMAP is set to use Kerberos 5 Allows you to require authentication when gaining access to your SMTP server Default port number for the SMTP service smtp Column at which recipient headers To and Cc are wrapped when sending a message 463 Eudora ini File Entry Default Value Description SpoolRenameRetryCou 10 Number of times to try to rename a spool file This is designed nt to help Eudora recover from cases where a virus scanner like McAfee has locked access to the tmp file SpoolRenameRetryInter 300 Number of milliseconds to wait before attempting to rename a val spool file This is designed to help Eudora recover from cases where a virus scanner like McAfee has locked access to the tmp file SSLAItPortReceiveVersi0 Applies to POP and IMAP Uses same values as on SSLReceiveVersion SSLAItPortSendVersion 0 Applies to SMTP Uses same values as SSLReceiveVersion SSL
268. ere you want the picture 47 Creating Messages 2 From the Edit menu choose Insert 3 From the Insert submenu choose Downloadable Picture The Insert Downloadable Picture dialog appears Insert Downloadable Picture dialog Insert Downloadable Picture Dl ee reco Ww intrepidadventure comfinages banner_1 Options Alternate text Intrepid Adventure URL when clicked on https wa intrepidadventure com Cancel 4 Enter the location of the downloadable picture into the URL of picture field 5 Optionally enter alternative text for the picture displayed when the recipient cannot view the picture or when the mouse is held over the image 6 Optionally enter a URL to launch when the image is clicked on The picture is displayed into the message body at the cursor position You can continue typing text Once the picture is inserted in your message you can drag it to where you want it in the message Your recipient will see the picture right in the message body To insert a horizontal line in message text 1 Move the cursor to where you want the line 2 From the Edit menu choose Insert 3 From the Insert submenu choose Horizontal Line A horizontal rule is inserted immediately above the line on which the cursor resides 48 Creating Messages Attaching a File to a Message Any file can be attached to and sent with a Eudora message Most of the time an attached document functions like a rider to the
269. ers for each personality Using SMTP Authentication SMTP authentication operates automatically in Eudora Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MD5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used Once Eudora discovers that your SMTP server allows authentication and when you send messages a dialog appears that prompts you to enter a password To not allow logging into your SMTP server 1 From the Tools menu choose Options then Sending Mail The Sending Mail options window appears 2 Turn off Allow Authentication 3 Click OK NOTE If you turn off the Allow Authentication option you may not be able to send mail Please check with your email administrator or ISP if you have any difficulties Keeping Copies of Outgoing Messages To keep copies of your outgoing messages e To puta copy of the current outgoing message in the Out mailbox select Keep Copy button in the Composing Mail options dialog box See Composing Mail on page 305 e To puta copy ofthe current outgoing message in a particular mailbox right click in the body of the message and select the mailbox from the Fcc submenu 72 Sending Messages and Checking Mail In all these cases when the messages are sent they are p
270. es 3 Enter a name for the new address book in the text box and click OK The address book appears on the list and you can now add people and group to your newly created address book Adding a Person to the Address Book To create a new entry or entries to be included in the newly created address book 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book or press Ctrl L Or if the Address Book is an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab 235 Using the Address Book 2 In the Address Book choose which address book if more than one is set up in which you want this person s information listed for example Family 3 Either click New in the Address Book or right click anywhere in the entry list to display the drop down list and choose New A new entry appears in the address book column left side Address book adding a new person Address Book View By Nickname Nickname trent Recipient List C Bosswatch List QA Eudora Nicknames arionna Personal Home Work Other Notes baxter crusty Full Name Trent B eric Findlay First Name Last Name gabriel Trent gt B khaelyn mearyn melissa miarylin trent intrepidadventure com mitzi nakasha nerith oswyn rae renegade sadine solen tana gt tod gt Tm kyrianne This nickname will expand to the Following addresses PIPPIPIIPIPIIIIIPIIIIIIIS address Book SAbirectory Services SS Fi
271. es Tab Display in Single Tabbed Windows If a tool window is in a tabbed window by itself with one tab you can hide or show the tab 208 Managing Windows in Eudora To hide or show the tab 1 To display the context menu right click the tab or the window border 2 From the Tab Location submenu choose Show Single Tab NOTE You cannot hide the tabs in a tabbed window with two or more tabs Tab Contents Location Auto Activation e Tab Contents A window tab contains both the icon and the text label associated with that window If there is room enough in the tabbed window both the icon and the label appear on each tab If there is not enough room only the icon appears for each tab If only the icon is visible pause the mouse pointer over the tab icon and Eudora will display the tab text in a Tooltip e Tab Location By default Eudora arranges window tabs along the bottom edge of a tabbed window Sometimes however it is more convenient to have the tabs appear along a different edge For example in a short and wide tabbed window one that is docked horizontally you can improve the visibility of the window s contents by moving the tabs to the left edge To change the location of the tabs in a tabbed window right click one of the tabs or on the window border and choose a new location from the Tab Location submenu of the context menu Tab Auto Activation During a drag and drop operation if you pause the mouse point
272. es see Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality on page 134 and Sending Mail on page 302 Default Signature Select the signature to use for all outgoing messages sent from this personality from the drop down list If you select a signature Eudora automatically attaches that signature to the end of all outgoing messages sent from this personality You can always change the signature in a particular outgoing message using the Signature drop down list in the composition window For more details about using signatures with alternate personalities see Using a Signature on page 105 and Sending Mail on page 302 NOTE If the stationery you chose has a signature attached to it that signature will override the signature you select here Secure Sockets when Sending See the next section Using SSL for Your Personalities on page 131 Check Mail If this is selected mail checking is activated for this personality in the following ways e If you have specified a number in the Check for mail every _ minutes option in the Checking Mail options window then when automatic mail checks are performed at these intervals mail for this personality is checked as well LETA Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only e Each time you do a manual check for mail by choosing the Check Mail command from the File menu or via another method mail is checked for this personality as well When you create a personality this op
273. es this entry OldKeepOnToPConverted to determine if the AddressKeepForeground entry from a pre 4 0 version of Eudora has been mapped to the current version When Eudora 4 x is run for the first time it sets the KeepOnTop entry described below equal to the value of AddressKeepForeground In addition it also sets this entry equal to 1 so that the next time Eudora is run it reads the check state from KeepOnTop rather than from AddressKeepForeground PanesY This entry reflects the height of the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down LeftPanex This entry reflects the width of the left pane of the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down RightPanexX This entry reflects the width of the right pane of the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down KeepOnTop This entry reflects the check state of the Keep On Top check button in the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down LDAP Idap bigfoot com This entry reflects the check state of the LDAP database Idap bigfoot com when Eudora was last shut down The check state of other LDAP databases is reflected in similar entries 474 Ph ph bigfoot com Eudora Address Book Eudora Nicknames Finger hostname domain com DIRSERV Major DIRSERV Minor ISOCK Major ISOCK Minor Eudora ini File This entry reflects the check state of the Ph database ph bigfoot com when Eudora was last shut down The ch
274. es window appears 2 For an existing personality highlight the personality and choose Properties from the context menu For a new personality right click anywhere in the Personalities window to display the context menu Choose New and then choose Skip directly to advanced account setup The Account Settings dialog appears 3 For SSL when sending mail choose the Generic Properties tab 4 For SSL when receiving mail choose Incoming Mail tab 5 In the Secure Sockets when Sending or Receiving field click the down arrow to display the drop down menu Secure Sockets drop down menu lf Available STARTTLS Required Alternate Port Required STARTTLS Following is a description of each option on the SSL drop down menu Never Do not use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security even if SSL is available on the server If Available STARTTLS default Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL that is if the server supports STARTTLS If your server doesn t support STARTTLS mail transfers will occur successfully but they will not be secured with SSL Required Alternate Port Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically use the older style alternate port method for starting SSL If your server does not support SSL on the appropriate ports mail transfer
275. esired message open or selected in a mailbox window from the Tools menu choose Personalities or select the Personalities tab if it is the deselected window in a tabbed group The Personalities window appears 2 Right click on a personality The drop down context menu appears 100 Receiving and Responding to Messages 3 From the context menu choose Message The Message submenu appears From the Message submenu choose Send Again As The message is sent again but from the selected personality which may or may not be the same as the personality under which it was originally sent Using the Content Concentrator Sponsored and Paid modes only This feature allows you to concentrate text inside a single message by trimming redundant headers and text in the message window You can also group threaded messages and view them with trimmed headers and text all at once in the preview pane of a mailbox Threaded messages are messages you receive that were either sent forwarded or redirected to you about the same subject or from the same sender To concentrate text inside a single message 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and choose Content Concentrator The Content Concentrator options window opens In the Single Message Profiles choose Compact or Terse for each field preview pane and or message window from the drop down menu See Content Concentrator Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 363 for more in
276. essage is underlined with both a green and red squiggly line Using MoodWatch for Outgoing Messages When you open a new composition window to begin writing a new message MoodWatch scans each word and phrase you type and determines if it might be offensive to your recipient The level of offensiveness is indicated by the appearance of one two or three red chili peppers with three red chilies being the most offensive and one the least As you write chili peppers appear next to the Send or Queue button cy There is no offensive language in the message L There may be a slight bit of offensive language in the message j There may be offensive language in the message H There is offensive language in the message After you click Send or Queue a warning appears indicating there is offensive text in your email message Following is the warning you would get if three chili peppers are displayed 63 Creating Messages Three chili warning dialog box Mood Warning Your message to joe camp regarding Don t be late is the sort yy of thing that might get your keyboard washed out with soap if you get my drift You might consider toning it down I Don t warn me anymore oo i Cancel To send the message despite the offensive text click Send Anyway Your message is sent If you have Eudora set to Queue messages for later transmission you can still retrieve the message in the Out mailbox to edit or delete it You can then send
277. essages to the email address given Forwarded messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages Redirect To Sponsored and Paid modes only Redirects messages to the email address given Redirected messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages Reply with Replies to messages with the selected stationery message Replies are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages One typical use of this action is to reply to specific senders with stationery telling them that you re on vacation I m out till the 10th I ll reply to your message when get back For more details see Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 109 NOTE For filter actions Forward to Redirect to and Reply with the resulting new message will always be queued regardless of your sending mail settings If you want the message sent automatically you need to have the Checking Mail settings set to Automatically check mail every _ minutes and Send on check enabled See Checking Mail on page 295 172 Organizing Your Messages Server Options Sponsored and Paid modes only Sets the message s server status to Fetch and or Delete Use this only if POP is your incoming server type Copy To Copies messages to the selected mailbox Transfer To Transfers messages to the selected mailbox Ski
278. etically order e By right clicking anywhere on the column headings The context menu appears for you to choose a sort criteria for that column For example if you choose the item to sort in descending order the mailbox sorts from top to bottom e By choosing the Sort from the Edit menu The Sort submenu appears for you to choose a column heading to sort NOTE The normal sort order is ascending for example with the most current dates at the bottom of the list If you hold down the Shift key and click the column header the sorting becomes descending You can mix ascending and descending sorts when sorting more than one column at a time Following is the context menu that appears when you right click the Who column heading Mailbox sorting context menu Sort by Sender None Sort by Sender Ascending Sort by Sender Descending Group by Subject In each column heading you can choose if that heading has no sort is sorted in ascending order or sorted in descending order Also you can group subjects together by choosing Group by Subject which keeps messages with the same subject together all the time Messages including replies with the same subject such as a work project are kept together in the mailbox regardless of whether you sort by Date Sender and so on A checkmark next to the Group by Subject option in the context menu indicates that the option is active 178 Organizing Your Messages New messages that come into a
279. ew pane option 147 Show Single Tab command 209 210 Show status bar how to turn on and off in Options 316 Show status bar option 214 Show toolbar how to turn on and off in Options 315 Show toolbar option 214 Show toolbar tips how to turn on and off in Options 315 Show toolbar tips option 214 Show hide signature how to change in Options 306 Sidebars in quoted text with styles 96 Signature definition 489 deleting 108 Signature popup 33 Signature window 105 Signature hide or show when composing 109 Signatures and redirect 100 and stationery 109 changing 107 creating 106 storage 405 Signatures command 105 109 287 Sigs directory 405 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 410 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP definition 489 Size button 35 Size column 144 Size submenu 45 Skip Attachments over K option 91 130 Skip messages over K in size how to enter in Options POP server 299 Skip messages over K in size option 88 129 Skip Rest action 173 SMTP 410 411 419 SMTP AUTH definition 489 SMTP Authentication 72 SMTP authentication for personalities 127 SMTP Relay 71 SMTP Relay Personality how to enter in Options 303 SMTP server how to enter in Options 303 SMTP server outgoing how to enter in Options 294 SMTP Server option 126 SMTP server option 479 SMTP definition 489 Sort submenu 280 Sort group by subject 178 Sorting 177 Sorting in ascending order 177 Sorting in descending order 177 Spacebar 79
280. example all messages from your father can be filtered to your mailbox named DAD Finger This is a directory services protocol The Finger protocol is a server that allows you to search for a person s information such as email address phone number etc Folder This is a file you create in Eudora where you can add mailboxes You can name folders for example FAMILY and your mailboxes can be named DAD MOM SIS etc Folder Carbon Copy Fcc You use Fcc to place a copy of your message in a mailbox or folder you designate Forward This a Eudora function where you can forward an incoming message and its attachments to another person Gateway In general software that translates information between one protocol and another Header The part of an email message that precedes the message It contains information such as the originator recipient and subject of the message Also it is used as an individual header filed such as the To header Home page An HTML document that resides in a data directory and is the primary starting point for anyone navigating that directory 485 Glossary Hypertext Markup Language HTML HTML is used to create Web pages A Web client interprets HTML and displays documents and graphics accordingly HTML also allows document authors to establish hypertext links between documents in various locations on the Internet and to create forms and image maps that enable users to interact with Web documents E
281. ext mail check you may get some mail that you have already received but that should only happen once This recipient is not acceptable to your SMTP server or Relay Denied This error messages displays if you have multiple personalities and have any relay restrictions to stop spam messages turned on Any relay restricitons come from your ISP Contact your ISP and ask them to turn the relay restrictions off Formatting and Printing The following are possible formatting and printing problems and suggestions for fixing them You received a message containing columns and the columns are not lining up correctly Your message font is probably a proportional font Change your display font in the Fonts Options Tools gt Options gt Fonts set the Fixed width option to a non proportional font such as Courier New or Courier and uncheck the Use proportional font by default option You have a message that is printing with strange line breaks When most e mail programs send out messages they insert hard returns at around 75 to 80 characters If they didn t some e mail applications would be able to display only the first 80 characters or so of a very long line of text What s happening with your message is that the width of the line that fits on the printed page is shorter than 75 to 80 characters so the hard returns end up in the wrong place The solution is to make the print font smaller or choose a print font
282. ext to surround the text string is or is not lf the specified header item is or is not an exact match of the text string filter the message starts with or ends with lf the specified header item starts with or ends with the text string filter the message The starts with item refers to the first non whitespace character after the colon so any spaces after the colon are ignored appears or doesn t appear lIf the header item appears or does not appear in the message filter the message the text field is ignored This is useful for filtering messages based only on the types of fields they contain For example some messages contain a Reply To header some don t intersects nickname lf the text string is included in a nickname whether it is a full address or a nickname within the nickname filter the message In other words the filter looks in all of your address books for the nickname that appears in the header of the message If it finds it it filters the message accordingly doesn t intersect nickname lf the text string is not included in a nickname whether it is a full address or a nickname within the nickname filter the message 168 Organizing Your Messages intersects address book If the text string or nickname is included in any one of your address books whether it is a full address or a nickname within the nickname filter the message In other words the filter looks in all of your address books for all ni
283. f you are not sure For new mail download These two settings let you control the way incoming mail is downloaded from the IMAP server One setting will always be marked Minimal Headers Only lf selected only a limited set of message headers is downloaded for each incoming message The message s status From field date time server status and subject are initially retrieved Typically you will see an open diamond for the server status which indicates a partial retrieval Opening or previewing the message retrieves the message body If you have a non text attachment then opening it will retrieve the attachments Full message except attachments over _ K If this setting is selected and a number is entered in the edit box any attachments larger than the specified size will not be downloaded with the message If the setting is zero default all attachments are downloaded regardless of size 130 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only When I delete a message These options you must choose one let you control the way you want your deleted messages handled Mark it as deleted Select this option to mark your messages on the IMAP for deletion These messages are not removed from the server until you choose to remove them See Deleting a Message from the Server on page 88 Move it to mailbox Select this option to move your deleted messages to a specific mailbox The default is your Trash mailbox
284. floating window is a standard Windows Always on Top window like tool palettes in paint programs Sample floating windows a Eudora File Edit Mailbox Message Transfer Special Tools Window Help 2 Order form sta E Thank you sta E Welcome sta E We re sorry sta Discussions Need to Reply Stationery Fa Filters m Match F Incoming F Outgoing I Manual Be rs New Remoye Header z lt Address Book Directory Services Filters E Filter Report A Link History Filters For Help press F1 203 Managing Windows in Eudora Only tool windows whether alone or tabbed can be made to float All other windows in Eudora particularly message windows and mailbox windows cannot be made to float NOTE The main toolbar although not a window can be made to float by undocking it from the main Eudora window using the gripper bar All windows in Eudora can be thought of as living in one of three layers or areas e Normal windows live in the window work area the bottom layer e Docked windows live at the level of the main Eudora window s border the middle layer Floating windows live at the level above the main Eudora window the top layer Therefore a floating Eudora window floats above all other Eudora windows except other floating windows The title bar of a floating window contains in addition to the title only the Close button This distinguishes the windo
285. form this function First be sure the files are plain text have a txt extension and are formatted as follows one nickname on each line with the real addresses separated by commas and one line for notes and info with the Notes text following the Info data For example alias Wow joe wow com lisa wow com chris wow com note Wow lt fax 222 2223 gt lt phone 222 2222 gt lt address 1234 Street gt lt name Wow Inc gt My favorite company Then for each client application add an ExtraNicknameDirs entry to the Settings section of the Eudora ini file This entry should be followed by the list of directories that contain Address Book files separated by semicolons Any Address Book files located in those directories are added to the Address Book You will need to exit and re open Eudora to see the new entries Using Address Book Files Not Created by Eudora To use an Address Book file that was not created in Eudora put the file in the Nickname directory located in your Eudora folder and be sure the format is as shown in the previous section Using Central Address Book Files on a Server You will need to exit and reopen Eudora to see your new entries in the Add ress Book NOTE You can migrate your address book from Netscape Messenger Outlook Express Microsoft Outlook to Eudora See Importing Settings to Create a Personality on page 123 255 Using the Address Book 256 EUDORA Using Directory Services Open
286. formation Concentrated messages in a single message window Compact setting To Danny lt datwoed qualcomm com gt dshume qualcomm corn From Eugene lt eeoe qualcornm com gt Subject Re Surprise birthday party for Joe Cc eeoe qualcormm corn At 8 42 AM 0700 8 4 03 Danny wrote At 11 24 AM 8 1 2003 0700 Eugene wrote Hey gang Joe s 63rd birthday is corning up next weekend I think we should have a surprise party for him What do you guys think Snip What s the name of that place by the water that he s always going on about Think we could get a table for 50 people A fancy restaurant Do we like him THAT much Just kidding A restaurant would be cool No idea what the place on the water is called Maybe Dawn would know 101 Receiving and Responding to Messages To group threaded messages and view them in the preview pane 1 In the selected mailbox select and highlight the message you want to group 2 Press the Alt key and click on the message NOTE You can group messages in two ways by sender or by subject Click the sender s name or subject when pressing the Alt key The messages are grouped by sender or by subject All messages that are threaded to the selected message appear together Group threaded messages by sender Terse a eare es aeee we Be TT sates 0 i Billyboys 04 14 PM 1 3 2003 2 Pictures 20 38 48 49 0 Billyboys 04 17 PM 1 3 2003 2 Pictures 39 40 41
287. found alert appears 180 Organizing Your Messages If the search is successful the message is scrolled to the first point where the match is found and the matching text is highlighted NOTE You can search for text in the messages summaries area of a mailbox Just place your cursor in the summaries window and choose Find from the Edit window Choose Find Text and enter the text you want to find in the Find Text dialog box Eudora will highlight the first occurrence of the text Stopping a Find If you want to stop Eudora from continuing a search click the Stop button in the progress window or press the Esc key Find Messages NOTE If you are using Eudora in Sponsored or Light mode you have access to fewer features when using Eudora s Search functionality You can perform complex searches through messages in all or a selected number of mailboxes or folders Once your search is complete you can sort delete and view the resulting messages You can search for a specific piece of information in all your mail or just search for a particular item that matches the criteria you set Set up the criteria for your search by selecting options from the drop down lists and by entering text To set up criteria for a message search 1 From the Edit menu choose Find or press Ctrl F The Find submenu appears 2 From the Find submenu choose Find Messages The Find Messages dialog box appears 181 Organizing Your Messages Find Me
288. full members As they are gaining experience tell them how to become full members e Do use ESP to keep a shared list of current email addresses for group mailings ESP updates email addresses when you change the email address for a personality When saved in the ESP Groups window ESP asks you if you want to update both your ESP s information and other members information or just update your ESP information If you choose both an email message is sent to all group members and automatically updates your changed email address e Do use ESP as a mini mailing list for perhaps a family group of friends coworkers and so on The list of email addresses stays current in all of the members lists when the addresses are modified e Don t put large files in ESP Other members of your group may have mail systems with limits on file size e Don t put files in ESP where group members need to work on them at the same time ESP works best when one member works on one file at a time e Don t put files in ESP that need to be updated in realtime There will be a few minute delay in updated group files Creating an ESP Group You can create an ESP group and then invite members to join it All members of an ESP group are of equal importance Although you are creating the ESP group it does not mean that you are its leader When you create a group ESP assigns the group a unique identifier which avoids any naming conflicts To create a new group 1
289. g messages already open 1 Perform your query 2 Click to select one or more summaries in your results list 3 Click the To Cc or Bcc button A new message is created and it is addressed appropriately with the selected query results To add an address to an existing message NOTE Make sure the message you want to address is active 1 From the Tools menu choose Directory Services or if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group click its tab The Directory Services window appears 2 Perform the query 3 Click to select one or more summaries in the results list 4 Click the To Cc or Bec button The addresses from the selected query results are added to the appropriate field of the current message NOTE The behavior of the To Cc and Bcc buttons is subject to the restrictions in Considering the State of the Window on page 263 261 Using Directory Services Making an Address Book Entry from Query Results You can make a nickname from your query results in the Directory Services window and at the same time add the entry to your Address Book To make a nickname from your query results 1 From the Tools menu choose Directory Services or if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group click its tab The Directory Services window appears 2 Perform the query 3 Click to select one or more summaries in the results list
290. gPlugi 0 ns CompSummaryltalic 1 ConConEllipsisCenter Snip ConConEllipsisLead ConConEllipsisTrail ConConMessageWindo None wProfile ConConMultipleMessag 20 eMaxNum ConConMultipleMessag Terse esProfile ConConMultipleMessag None esReplyProfile ConConMultipleMessag 1 esRequireRelated ConConMultipleReplyW 50 arnThreshold ConConMultipleSubject sSuffix etc ConConPreviewProfile Compact Eudora ini File Description What the percentage of wasted space taken up by deleted messages in a mailbox must be before the mailbox automatically gets compacted when closed Controls whether the outgoing EMSAPI plug ins on the composition message window toolbar should be separate buttons or contained within one button that pops up a list of all outgoing plug ins By default all outgoing plug ins get their own toolbar button In mailboxes other than the Out mailbox display the summaries of outgoing messages in italics Text for Content Concentrator to use at the center of concentrated text Text for Content Concentrator to use at the beginning of concentrated text Text for Content Concentrator to use at the end of concentrated text Type of content concentrating to use when viewing a message in a window Choices Terse Compact None Maximum number of messages to contentrate Type of content concentrating to use when viewing multiple messages Choices Terse Compact None Type of content concent
291. ges are opened with the original text selected Causes a blank line to be inserted between the cursor and the quoted message when either WhenReplyingTypeBefore or WhenReplyingTypeAfter is being used When on if WhenReplyingSelectAll and WhenReplyingTypeBefore are off reply messages open with the cursor below the quoted text When on if WhenReplyingSelectAll is off reply messages open with the cursor above the quoted text When on the entire summary of a message that has a label is drawn in that label s color When off only the text in the Label column appears in the label s color When the Word wrap switch is on this is the column in which lines in outgoing messages are wrapped When the Word wrap switch is on this is the length at which a line in an outgoing message is considered too long and must be wrapped 470 Eudora ini File Entry Default Value Description WordWrapOnScreen 0 If this is on set to non zero then the composition window will automatically wrap text on the screen at the number of characters specified in WordWrapColumn regardless of the width of the window WrapMenus 1 If this is set to 0 menus that are too long for the screen will not wrap and you may not be able to see all the menu items On Windows 98 2000 Me the operating system supports scrolling menus which you might find more attractive Mappings This is a sample Mappings section It is not a default for Eudora if you hav
292. ges from a third computer Each computer has no idea what has been done to the mailbox from the other computer until you resynchronize the mailbox which updates all operations performed on the mailbox from all computers that have access to the mailbox In some situations others may have access to these same mailboxes To resynchronize an IMAP mailbox or folder 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group The Mailboxes window appears 2 Right click an IMAP mailbox A drop down menu appears 3 From the drop down list choose Resynchronize Mailbox TIP When using the Resynchronize mailbox on every mailcheck the icon of the mailbox changes to easily tell which mailboxes will resynchronize on every mailcheck The mailbox Scarlett is set to Resync mailbox on every mailcheck The other mailboxes have the normal icon because they must be resynchronized manually G IMAP ie Inbox Bill HHH General mailbox and folder management for POP and IMAP servers is performed from the Mailboxes window For more information see on Using the Mailboxes Window on page 150 94 Receiving and Responding to Messages Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders If you have shared folders set up you and other users can access and change messages stored in mailboxes and folders you keep stored remotely on an IMAP server However users may access shared
293. h 347 Setting Eudora Preferences Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Network open timeout _ seconds default 300 This option lets you set the number of seconds before an attempt to make a network connection will time out For some servers especially those with heavy loads the attempt to establish the network connection can take longer than it takes to send data back and forth once the connection has been made A familiar example When you are browsing the World Wide Web you may find that it takes a while to connect to a server but then once you have connected to the server the Web page can seem to download quickly This option therefore gives you the ability to set a different and usually longer timeout for establishing the network connection This setting is different from the setting for the timeout after the connection has been made The latter timeout is set via the Network timeout after _ seconds option below Network timeout after _ seconds default 300 This option lets you set the number of seconds before an established network connection will time out See the discussion above for the Network open timeout _ seconds option Network buffer size of _ bytes default 4096 This option lets you set the size in bytes of the buffer that Eudora uses to transfer information to and from the server NOTE If you are having trouble transferring large messages the
294. h time a filter operation is performed Eudora adds the entry or entries to the Filter Report window and activates the window The Filter Report window displays three columns of data e Mailbox Lists the names of the mailboxes into which messages have been filtered during the current Eudora session Each listing represents one filter operation for that mailbox e Messages Lists the number of messages filtered into each mailbox in the Mailbox column during the filter operation e Time Lists the time that the messages were filtered into each mailbox in the Mailbox column during the filter operation By default the entries in the window are sorted by time However you can click the column headings and sort the display by mailbox names Mailbox or by the number of messages filtered Messages 220 Managing Windows in Eudora NOTE Whenever new entries are added to the list Eudora always appends them to the bottom of the list in order of arrival ignoring the current sort order Simply click a column heading to re sort Select one or more entries in the list and double click the selection or press Enter and Eudora opens the mailbox windows associated with those selections The Filter Report listing is a cumulative log of the filter actions for the current Eudora session Eudora automatically clears the log when you quit the program Closing the Filter Report window does not erase the contents of the filter report Only quit
295. hat nickname in a header field A new composition window is opened and the nickname is entered in the To field automatically If a composition window is open when you double click the nickname is entered in the header field that last had keyboard focus To address the message with the completely expanded address or addresses for that entry rather than the entry s nickname the addresses are listed in the 245 Using the Address Book Address es field for the entry 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and choose Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous dialog box appears 3 Turn on the Automatically Expand Nickname option Once the composition window appears you can use the To Cc and Bcc buttons to insert additional nicknames into the corresponding fields subject to the following restrictions e f the Address Book is a docked or floating window either alone or as part of a tabbed window group the To Cc and Bcc buttons apply to the topmost composition window if any e f the Address Book is a normal window either alone or as part of a tabbed window group the To Cc and Bcc buttons apply to the composition window if any that is immediately under either the Address Book or the tabbed window group containing the Address Book Make Address Book Entry Command The Make Address Book Entry command is used to create entries in your Address Book and is especially helpful for making group entries You can use thi
296. he Text As Attachment button in the outgoing message toolbar if it is selected so that the document is sent to the recipient as inline text in the message body This allows MAPI clients such as Internet Explorer to pass Web pages and other HTML and TXT documents right into the body of the Eudora message The Text As Attachment button if turned on in the outgoing message toolbar instructs Eudora to attach text files such as TXT and HTML to the message rather than incorporating the text into the message as part of the message body The default state of this button is controlled by the Put text attachments in body of message option in the Attachments options See Attachments on page 311 346 Setting Eudora Preferences Advanced Network The Advanced Network options control some of Eudora s advanced network functions WARNING Consult your email administrator before modifying any of these options To display the Advanced Network options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Advanced Network icon The Advanced Network options window appears Advanced Network options window Options Category A Al Network open timeout 300 seconds Extra Warnings Network timeout after 300 seconds Network buffer size of 4096 bytes EF MAPI Cl Cache network info Oo E _ Unload Winsock DLL after closing socket m Advanced Network ie Kerberos wy MoodWatc
297. he Server 88 Skipping Messages Over a Certain Size 88 Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions 89 Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server 91 Downloading Minimal Headers vs the Full Message 91 Full Message Except Attachments Over _ K 92 Deleting a Message from the Server 93 Resynchronizing an IMAP Mailbox or Folder 94 Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders 95 Using IMAP Tasks Offline 95 Replying to a Message 96 Using the Reply Options 96 Reply with Selected Text 97 Forwarding a Message 98 Redirecting a Message 98 Turbo Redirecting 99 Redirect and Signatures 100 Sending Rejected Messages Again 100 Using the Content Concentrator Sponsored and Paid modes only 101 Changing the concentration level in the preview pane 102 Using Signatures and Stationery 105 Using a Signature 105 Signature Window 105 Adding a New Signature 106 Modifying a Signature 107 Deleting a Signature 108 Using a Signature in a Message 108 Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only 109 Stationery Window 109 Creating New Stationery 111 Modifying Stationery 112 Deleting Stationery 112 Using Stationery in a Message 112 Replying with Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only 113 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only 115 Using Alternate Email Accounts 115 Personalities Window 115 Adding a New Personality 117 Creating a New Personality 118 Importing Settings to Create a Personality 123 Addi
298. he Tools menu choose Options 2 Click the Sending Mail icon The Sending Mail options window appears Sending Mail options window Options Category Email address jcamp myfirm com Getting Started Domain to add to unqualified addresses miyfirm com SMTP server smtp myfirm com SMTP Relay Personality None Allow authentication Immediate send Sending Mail Send on check ta Cluse submission port 587 Secure Sockets when Sending Composing Mail f If Available STARTTLS Last SSL Info n w Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Email address This is your return email address if different from your incoming mail account See Getting Started on page 293 for more details Domain to add to unqualified addresses This is the domain name that Eudora automatically adds to an unqualified address in messages sent from your primary account An unqualified address is an address that doesn t have the sign followed by a domain name This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain 302 Setting Eudora Preferences SMTP server This is the name of the outgoing mail server for your principal email account All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server If the computer that your primary incoming mail account is on also runs an SMT
299. he address are included in the To field for your recipient to see 9 Inthe First Name and Last Name fields type the first and last name of the person You can interchange the first and last names by clicking lt 10 In the This nickname will expand to the following addresses text field enter at least one complete email address for this person If this person has more than one address enter the additional addresses here if you want him or her to receive your messages at each address 237 Using the Address Book Make sure this field contains no other information except addresses and nicknames or your messages will be addressed incorrectly It is recommended that you have no more than 2 000 nicknames per nickname file If the files are too large they may appear collapsed in the address book but you can still use all the nicknames when addressing messages If you have a large number of entries you might want to consider using a Ph or LDAP server 11 To save your changes to the Address Book from the File menu choose Save Adding a Group to the Address Book You can set up a group as an address book entry by adding the group s email addresses or nicknames if already set up in your address book in the Personal dialog box To create a new group in an address book 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book or press Ctrl L Or if the Address Book is in an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab
300. he drop down name list E indicates that the name came from your history file If the name is from your history file both the username and email address appear in the drop down name list as you type To complete the name in the field select the correct name from the drop down list If you want to add another name in the To field type a comma after the first recipient s name Then you can begin to add another recipient s name as shown in the example below 40 Creating Messages Second name auto completion in the To field No Recipient Eudora is the BEST email program DER gt 1 lt none gt sme gt PREP igy H 4 W Send To C qualcomm com L Ladonne a Subject amp Lauren Ce amp Lenore Ree m Linh lt tingaling 3 hotmail com gt aa i linbh D Attached The example below shows auto completion in the Cc field Name auto completion in the Cc field C qualcomm com Lenore 10 51 AM 8 13 2003 Eudora is the BEST email program BEE To C qualcomm com Lenore Dawn Shump lt dshump qualcomm com gt Subject Eudora is the BEST email program Ce ml Bec Maressa Attached I maressac san tt com Mark Massage nod ha a Di rdoinle NOTE If you don t want Eudora to auto complete your email address as you type it you can just type one letter and all email addresses that start with that letter from your address book and history list appear in a drop down list for you t
301. he selected personality to messages For outgoing messages the message is not sent from the assigned personality For incoming messages all your responses to the message will be from the assigned personality until you change the personality associated with the incoming message or your response For more information see Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 115 Make Subject Assigns the new subject to message summaries does not affect the subject in the message itself If you choose this option the entire subject of the message is replaced with the new subject Use the amp symbol to stand for the old subject if you want to add the new subject to the old subject For example entering New Subject was amp results in New Subject was Old Subject Play Sound Sponsored and Paid modes only Plays the selected sound when messages are filtered Speak Sponsored and Paid modes only Plays a voice to alert you of a message being filtered Who and Subject fields display as well as a drop down list where you can choose a voice type Check Who to hear the voice read the sender s name and Subject to hear the voice read the subject line NOTE After you select Speak the Who and Subject fields and a drop down voice list appear If these fields are grayed out you must install Microsofts Speech Engine applications For more information and to retrieve the applications please refer to the following website
302. he signature item and from the drop down context menu choose Delete 2 When you are prompted to confirm the deletion click Yes to delete it Using a Signature in a Message To include a particular signature in an outgoing message select the signature you want from the Signature drop down on the message toolbar Selecting a signature for a message Signatures EA Snowflakes ff thereyouare i Weekly i Work i2 Work_Signature A To include a particular signature in all of your outgoing messages unless you are using stationery select a signature from the Signature drop down list in the Composing Mail options window for your dominant account only or in the Account Settings dialog box for any of your personalities You can change this for a particular message by selecting a different signature or None from the Signature drop down list on the message toolbar For more information see Composing Mail on page 305 and Account Settings Dialog on page 125 You can indicate if a signature with styled text can be sent with a message that has no styled text If not the signature is included but the style is removed See Styled Text on page 322 108 Using Signatures and Stationery To hide or show your signature while composing a message go the Composing Mail options window and turn on or off the Show signature while composing option See Composing Mail on page 305 Also you can include your default with all replies Go the Re
303. his command to resend saved or copied messages to avoid retyping message body text or message header text However if you try to resend a received message with an attachment The attachment is not included in the newly sent message New Message To Send a message to someone on your Quick Recipient List 282 Using Menu Commands Forward To Forward a message to someone on your Quick Recipient List Redirect To Redirect a message to someone on your Quick Recipient List New Message With Open a new message window with the selected stationery Reply With Open a reply message with the selected stationery Reply to the sender of the message only Reply to All With Open a reply message with the selected stationery Reply to the sender and all original recipients of the message Send File or Attach file Attach a file to the current message or anew message respectively Attach Use an attachment plug in to create and attach a special file to the current message or anew message Example AQUALCOMM PureVoice voice message attachment See Plug ins Extended Messaging Services on page 407 Send Immediately or Queue For Delivery Send the message right now or put it in the queue to be sent the next time queued messages are sent depending on whether Immediate send is selected in the Sending Mail options See Sending Mail on page 302 Change Change the queuing status priority label server status or personality of the selected
304. his change applies to the current message only 37 Creating Messages To The intended recipients email addresses or nicknames you have defined Multiple addresses and nicknames must be separated by commas See Using the Address Book on page 233 To select a name from a list see Using Automatic Name Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 39 From The sender s email address This is usually your incoming email account plus your real name You can use a return address other than your incoming mail account by entering the address in the Return address field of the Getting Started options See Getting Started on page 293 If you have Alternate personalities set up you can select the appropriate personality in the From field drop down list See Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 115 Subject Some brief text indicating the contents of the message This field can be left blank although it is considered a point of email etiquette to include a Subject with each message By default Eudora warns you when you send a message with no subject Cc The email addresses or nicknames of people to whom a copy of the message is to be sent These recipients are displayed in the message header for all recipients to see Multiple addresses must be separated by commas This field can be left blank Cc means carbon copy To select a name from a list see Using Automatic Name Completion Sponsored a
305. hose that transfer incoming messages to a particular mailbox based on the sender of the message or one or more of the recipients For example each time you check your mail you may want to have Eudora take all of the incoming messages it receives from your friend Joe and automatically transfer them into a mailbox you ve called Mail from Joe To get Eudora to do this you set up a simple filter For new users the Make Filter dialog box provides an easy way to learn how to use filters Once you are comfortable with the simple filters created this way you can go on to make more complex powerful filters using the Filters window Experienced users will find that the Make Filter dialog box provides a rapid convenient method for making a simple transfer filter To open and use the Make Filter dialog box 1 Open an incoming or outgoing message containing the information you want in your filter or select one or more message summaries in a mailbox 2 From the Special menu choose Make Filter Or right click in the body of the open message or in the selection of message summaries or in the preview pane fora single selected message and choose Make Filter from the drop down menu The Make Filter dialog box appears 161 Organizing Your Messages Make Filter dialog box with sample filter Make Filter Match Conditions V Incoming F Outgoing V Manual contains From NASANews hq nasa gov C Any Recipient C Subject Action
306. ice Protocol 3 is a protocol that provides a simple standardized way for users to access mailboxes and download messages to their computers POP3 is also called the Incoming server Postmaster A special type of user responsible for maintaining the mail delivery system for a particular group of computers A postmaster is responsible for following up on queries from users and other postmasters Internet standards require that the postmaster account be valid at every domain RAS Windows NT Remote Access Service This Windows 98 XP and NT service when configured correctly allows your computer to connect to your ISP via a modem You set this up in Dial Up Networking Redirect This means that incoming messages can be sent to a new recipient by way of you maintaining the original sender s address in the From field Request for Comments RFC In the Internet community RFCs are a numbered sequence of documents generally describing protocols for Internet communication An Internet standard protocol is also given a STD number in addition to an RFC number Only RFCs with a STD number are standards of the IETF Some RFCs are historical or experimental and are not standards Others have not yet reached standard status Still others provide documentation about the Internet itself RPA This is one of many authentication systems Eudora uses Use RPA if CompuServe is your ISP ScamWatch Eudora s feature to identify phishing scams and alert y
307. ick on the message and select Undelete message 156 Organizing Your Messages To remove all messages marked for deletion in the current IMAP mailbox choose Purge Messages The messages are completely removed not only from your PC but also from the IMAP server TIP Once you remove marked messages using the Purge Messages command these messages are gone and cannot be restored so use this command with caution Automatically Purging IMAP deleted messages Eudora can be configured to automatically purge deleted IMAP messages To configure Eudora to automatically purge deleted IMAP messages 1 From the Tools menu select Personalities The Personalities window appears 2 Right click on your IMAP personality A context menu appears 3 Select Properties The Account Settings Dialog appears 4 Click to select the Incoming Mail tab 5 Select one of the three options under Automatically Purge deleted messages Never Select this option to leave messages marked for deletion until you manually select to purge the mailbox Always Select this option to automatically purge the mailbox of deleted messages when you mark a message for deletion No deleted messages will be kept in the mailbox When __ of messages are deleted Select this option to trigger purging of deleted messages when the percentage of deleted messages in your mailbox exceeds the number entered into this setting For example if you entered 20 your mailbox would
308. ictionary If you add the word it will not display as a misspelled word in future messages Checking Your Spelling Manually Sponsored and Paid modes only If you prefer not to use the automatic spell check Eudora has a manual spell checker It can be used to check for misspellings in the Subject field and body of current message composition windows text files and signature files It includes a built in dictionary and also allows for the creation of a custom user dictionary Additionally it can be configured to ignore capitalized words words in all capital letters words with numbers and mixed case words to report doubled repeated words and to suggest alternative spellings Changes to the spelling options can be made in the Spell Checking options window To open this window from the Tools menu choose Options Scroll the category list and select Spell Checking For details see Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 324 57 Creating Messages For information on how to get dictionaries for languages other than U S English see Spelling Dictionaries on page 427 To automatically check spelling when you send or queue a message turn on the Check when message queued sent option in the Spell Checking options If this is on the message is checked for spelling errors when you send or queue it If you complete the spell checking process the message is automatically sent or queued If you click Cancel instead o
309. id filled area a graph bar a circle diamond or a square Count IMAP messages in Inbox only Turn this option on if you want Eudora for statistical purposes to count only the IMAP messages received in the Inbox Turn this option off if you want Eudora to count all received IMAP messages regardless of which mailbox they are received into If you use shared IMAP folders you ll probably want to leave this turned on otherwise messages that are not really addressed to you may get counted Reset Statistics Click this button to reset your statistical usage All historical information on your Eudora usage is deleted Statistical information will then begin from that moment on 355 Setting Eudora Preferences Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous options determine additional Eudora capabilities that are not categorized with other functions To display the Miscellaneous options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Miscellaneous icon The Miscellaneous options window appears Miscellaneous options window Options Category A Switch messages with j j j j C Unmodified arrow keys MoodWatch C Ctrl arrow keys A Alt arrow keys Statistics Empty Trash when exiting Say OK to alerts after 120 second s C Turbo redirect by default C Include outdated Return Receipt To C Automatically expand nicknames Auto save messages every 10 minutefs Hide address books from simple v
310. iders the message to be originally from you if the address in the From field exactly matches either your return address or one of the addresses belonging to your nickname called me if you have one See Using a Signature on page 105 Sending Rejected Messages Again If for some reason an email message can t be delivered to a recipient mail transport agents return the message to the original sender you A message is typically rejected because of an error in the recipient s address although many other reasons are possible The return message usually includes cryptic information that may let you determine the reason the message was rejected It also includes the text of the original message You can easily recover the original message make any corrections and resend it To recover make corrections and resend the current message e From the Message menu choose Send Again This eliminates the inserted extra text and reformats the message as it originally appeared You can then make changes or additions and send the message again The Send Again command is useful for resending saved messages from your Out box such as messages you ve copied to yourself to save yourself retyping You can send the same message to another recipient to avoid having to retype the whole message or you can send a different message to the same recipients to avoid having to retype their addresses in the header To send again alternate 1 With the d
311. ies This entry reflects the minor version of EudoraBk dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies This entry reflects the major version of Ldap dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies This entry reflects the minor version of Ldap dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies This entry reflects the major version of Ph dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies This entry reflects the minor version of Ph dll that was last registered A similar description as the one in DIRSERV Major above applies 476 Eudora ini File Debug The Debug section controls aspects of the Eudora log file The Eudora log file is a handy tool for debugging network connections especially when using the dialup connection method Default Value Description Entry LogFileName EUDORA LOG The name of the log file LogFileSize 1000 The size in KB of the log file that when reached will cause the log file to be copied to the file EUDORLOG OLD and a new log file to be started LogLevel 11 which is bits 1 A bit mapped value telling what type of information to 2 and 4 log Bit 1 1 Sending of a message 1 Bit 2 2 Receipt of a message Bit 3 4 Dialup script navigation commands Bit 4 8 Alert messages Bit 5 16 Progress messages
312. ies that all message dates will be in this format message time followed by message date followed by message time zone but only if the message did not originate from your local time zone Example 02 56PM11 21 97 0800 Age sensitive lIf you select this option message dates appear differently based on the age of the messages The three age categories are RECENT OLD and ANCIENT The age of a message is measured from the date and time at which the message was composed or sent based on the sender s email package and this depends on your setting for the Display dates using option RECENT messages are all those that are younger than the hours you specify in the Hours to be OLD field ANCIENT messages are all those that are older than the expiration time entered in the Hours to be ANCIENT field OLD messages are all those ages which falls between that of RECENT and ANCIENT messages they are older than the number of hours specified in the Hours to be OLD field but younger than the number of hours specified in the Hours to be ANCIENT field The date display format for all messages falling in the RECENT OLD and ANCIENT categories is determined by your entry in the RECENT format OLD format and ANCIENT format fields respectively RECENT format default 1 Your entry in this field determines the format in which the dates of RECENT messages appear RECENT messages are all those younger than the number in the Hours to be OLD field The defau
313. ight it and then press the Delete key If you choose to remove a mailbox in which messages are still stored or a folder in which other mailboxes or folders are stored you are prompted to confirm the deletion for each such item selected Click Remove it to delete the current item for which you are being prompted or click Remove all to remove all items selected for deletion and no further prompts will appear Or click Cancel to cancel the deletion If you delete a non empty mailbox or folder all messages mailboxes and folders contained within the mailbox or folder are also deleted Mailbox and Folder Management POP vs IMAP The location of your mailboxes and mail folders depends on whether your incoming mail server for your account uses the POP or IMAP protocol If your incoming mail server uses POP then all of your mailboxes and mail folders are created and stored on your computer If your incoming mail server uses IMAP then all of your mailboxes and mail folders are created and stored on the IMAP server The parallel situation holds true if you have multiple email accounts mailboxes and folders for all of your POP accounts are stored on your computer mailboxes and folders for all of your IMAP accounts are stored on the respective IMAP servers 152 Working with Mailboxes Mail folders stored on an IMAP server can contain not only mailboxes but also messages Mail folders stored on a POP server can contain only mailboxes not mess
314. il you actively delete it Therefore to delete an IMAP message you must delete it from the IMAP server To delete messages from the IMAP server you must perform two steps e Mark the message for deletion e Remove all marked messages To mark a message for deletion 1 Open the IMAP mailbox or folder containing the message 2 Select or open the message 3 From the Message menu choose Delete Or press the Delete key To unmark a marked message so that it won t be deleted from the IMAP server select or open the message and from the Message menu choose UnDelete Or right click to display the drop down list then choose UnDelete To remove all messages from the IMAP server marked for deletion from the Message menu choose Purge Messages The messages are completely removed both from the IMAP server and from your computer WARNING Once you remove marked messages using the Purge Messages command these messages are completely gone and cannot be restored Therefore use this command with caution 93 Receiving and Responding to Messages Resynchronizing an IMAP Mailbox or Folder Keeping your mailboxes and folders remotely on an IMAP server lets you perform operations on them from different computers For a particular IMAP mailbox you may delete some messages from the mailbox from one computer check mail from another computer resulting in new messages being transferred to the mailbox and change the status of some of the messa
315. ilbox might be configured to hide deleted messages If this option is disabled Eudora will not display deleted IMAP messages in the search results 368 Eudora Sharing Protocol Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP is a Eudora feature that allows a group of people called a share group to collaborate and share a common set of files ESP automatically gives each member of the share group a copy of those files and when one of the members changes a file it brings all the other members copies up to date automatically ESP also makes it easy for the members of a share group to send email messages to each other Unlike other collaboration tools ESP uses only email to keep everyone in sync on the shared files so there s no need to maintain and administer a shared server ESP allows you to create and manage share groups within Eudora on both Windows and Mac platforms If you send and receive email through Eudora you can belong to an ESP share group When you join an ESP group you designate a shared folder on your hard drive Eudora uses the shared folder to keep the most current copies of your group s documents together You and each member of your group have copies of the shared documents When you or a member of your group adds deletes or updates a document ESP automatically adds deletes or updates all copies of the document in all of the members shared folder You can use ESP for projects at work and for family members at home to help
316. in which the letters are printed closer together like Helvetica instead of Courier New for example To do this change the Font and Size options in the Printer section of the Fonts options Tools gt Options gt Fonts See Fonts on page 313 481 Troubleshooting Miscellaneous The Password checks for sending mail not just for checking mail SMTP servers which are used to send mail for most e mail accounts do not require a password for access the way a POP server does However if the POP daemon your server is using is descended from the UC Berkeley POPper you can use the POPSend protocol which routes SMTP calls through the POP server so that the POP server will require the password If you turn this feature on in your POP server add this line to the Settings section of the Eudora ini file UsePOPSend 1 This means you will have to enter your password to send as well as check mail However this is not terribly secure because users who know what they are doing can simply remove that ini file line or uncheck the Use XTND XMIT option and disable the feature It protects you against inexperienced but unscrupulous users 482 Glossary Address Book The Address Book is where you keep information about individuals or groups that you correspond with Alias Another name for an existing user s address In Eudora an alias is also called a nickname Application Configuration Access Protocol ACAP ACAP is a protocol
317. indexed itself even if we did index punctuation but many of the subpieces are so if you were to type this word to search for it also is broken up internally using normal punctuation rules and the search would work When the results are highlighted you will see it highlight the sub pieces and not the whole thing This is discussed more below Master Search Field Rules columnName notation allows column specific searches to be represented in the main search box Double quotes can be used to prevent this parsing of colon items examples below and also denote phrase searches Parenthesis control boolean combination and can control the range of a columnName specifier as shown below For example the search From lee The colon notation with no space after the colon indicates this is a column specifier It s the same as typing lee into the From column s search area But this notation allows other combinations like To lee OR cc lee 440 X1 Search Queries Note in the above that two different columns are combined Any space terminates the special column specific handling So the following finds the word box in any column including content but the word gift only in the subject column Subject gift box One exception a space is allowed when starting out with a NOT Subject NOT spam this is the same as Subject spam or Subject spam To make a multi word search within a column one can use either quotes or p
318. indow docked and open For multiple file selections use the Shift key to select a range and use the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections You can also select one or more items in the File List control and drag them to another application that can receive such files In general the File Browser window lets you drag items out of the window copying them rather than moving them but the window is not a proper drop target you cannot drop items into the window that you ve dragged from elsewhere on your desktop In particular you cannot move files by dragging them to a target folder in the Folder Browser control You also cannot drag and drop items within the File Browser window from one control to another for example You can however manage the files and folders in the window using the commands on the window s context menu such as Cut Copy Paste and Delete To display the drop down context menu to use these commands you must first select the file you want then right click 223 Managing Windows in Eudora Background Tasks multi threading In Eudora you can retrieve send and compose mail at the same time While sending and retrieving mail you can compose a message access Directory Services to look up addresses edit stationery and signatures read mail etc because retrieving and sending mail now occurs in the background The Task Status window is used to display sending and receiving activity as it happens For example wh
319. ing Directory Services Eudora lets you look up information about people on the Internet within your company and in your Eudora Address Book using four directory service protocols e Ph e Finger Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP Eudora Address Book To use directory services to search for someone 1 From the Tools menu choose Directory Services Or if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group click its tab The Directory Services window appears Directory Services window with an example query Directory Services DER Query Eudora Protocols Status Ready Last found 11 Email Phone _ Database 5 PC Eudora Developement eudorad qaalcom Qualcomm EB Srondo Eudora User for Eudo standa qaalcom Qualcomm E Annex Terminal Server Serial E Qualcomm Eudora Test Lab Qualcomm New Database amp Test Account Eudora eudora_a qualco Qualcomm amp Light Administration Eudora eudlicdt quucom Qualcomm Databases amp Test Account for Eudora dreg_aud quulco Qualcomm EB Eudora for Newton efndwtdn qualco Qualcomm gt gt Qualcomm Finger Server Finger 5 Big Foot LDAP al ias Sadoride Deel p ChE Switch Board LDAP ane udora Developemen Email w eudorad quulcomnm con bal Fourt1 LDAP mail_host unixmail Od InfoSpace LDAP user_account eudordre E InfoSpace Business LDAP type mailbox m Name PC Eudora Developement Fal Who Where
320. ing Shift Space while the message is selected or open press again to change back to Read If the Mark previewed option is turned off previewed messages are never automatically marked as read For more information see Viewing Mail on page 317 NOTE Eudora performs the auto marking behavior only when you manually select or preview messages not when it performs actions such as automatic mail checks or filtering Creating Mailboxes and Folders Eudora lets you create mailboxes to hold messages and folders to hold mailboxes There are three ways to create mailboxes and folders e Using the New command from the Mailbox menu and folder submenus e Using the New command from the drop down context menu in the Mailboxes window See Using the Mailboxes Window on page 150 e Using the New command from the Transfer menu See Transferring Messages on page 158 148 Working with Mailboxes NOTE Depending on whether your incoming mail server uses the POP or IMAP protocol there are some differences in the way mailboxes and mail folders are created stored and managed For more information see Mailbox and Folder Management POP vs IMAP on page 152 Creating a Mailbox or Folder Using the Mailbox Menu To create a new mailbox or mail folder 1 From the Mailbox menu choose New or from a mail folder submenu to put the mailbox in that folder The New Mailbox dialog box appears New Mailbox dialog box New Mailbox Creati
321. ing are the descriptions of the options Ignore capitalized words The spelling checker ignores words that begin with a capital letter such as proper nouns Ignore words with all capitals The spelling checker ignores words that contain all capital letters such as acronyms 324 Setting Eudora Preferences Ignore words with numbers The spelling checker ignores words that contain numbers Ignore words with mixed case The spelling checker ignores words that contain a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters Report doubled words The spelling checker reports words that appear twice in sequence in text and identifies them as Doubled words Suggest words If you select this option then when the spelling checker encounters an unknown word it displays Eudora s suggestions for the correct spelling of the word in the Suggestions field of the Check Spelling dialog box You can also select any combination of the suggestion options Phonetic words off by default Split words on by default Typographic words on by default NOTE If Eudora has no suggestions for the word in its dictionary then no suggestions are listed Check spelling Automatically as you type If you select this option misspelled words will automatically be double underlined and highlighted once you press the Spacebar after typing a word Only when requested If you select this option you can invoke the spell checker if you wish after you type
322. ings 380 Configuring Group Change Notifications 381 Maintaining ESP Group Members 385 Joining an ESP Group 386 Leaving an ESP Group 387 Working with Shared Folders 388 Changing ESP Group Information 389 Configuring Global ESP Settings 389 Using the ESP Mailbox and Folder 390 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts 395 Eudora Modifiers 395 Eudora Shortcuts 397 General Reference 403 Right Mouse Button 403 Mail Storage 403 Plug ins Extended Messaging Services 407 The Messaging Application Program Interface MAPI 408 Mail Transport 410 Outgoing Mail 410 Incoming Mail 411 More Information 411 MAPI Technical Report 413 Where to Get More Information on MAPI 413 What Does MAPI Do 413 MAPI Overview 413 Eudora Implementation of MAPI 415 Eudora MAPI Startup Procedure 416 Eudora MAPI Shutdown Procedure 416 Eudora DLL Swapping Restrictions 417 MIME and Mapping 419 What Is MIME 419 MIME Encoding 419 MIME Labeling 420 Practical Issues 421 Turning Off Quoted Printable Encoding 421 Mapping Between File Extensions MIME Types and Macintosh Types 421 Sources 425 Anonymous FTP ftp eudora com 425 Eudora Information 425 Obtaining an Internet Email Server 425 Ph Server Source Code 426 Password Change Server 426 Windows Sockets Products 426 Spelling Dictionaries 427 Developer Information 427 Dialup Eudora 428 General Steps 428 Configuring Dialup Networking under Windows 98 2000 ME XP Configuring Dialup Networking
323. intable any space at the end of a line gets encoded as 20 to protect it from such mail systems Let s try an example Here s a passage of text that you might type on your computer 419 MIME and Mapping Il est d montr disait il que les choses ne peuvent tre autrement car tout tant fait pour une fin tout est n cessairement pour la meilleure fin Without any encoding this might show up on your recipient s screen as Il est dimontri disait il que les choses ne peuvent btre autrement car tout itant fait pour une fin tout est nicessairement pour la meilleure fin This corruption happens because SMTP cannot handle the special characters However if you and your recipient both have MIME quoted printable encoding would be used and your text would show up properly Il est d montr disait il que les choses ne peuvent tre autrement car tout tant fait pour une fin tout est n cessairement pour la meilleure fin While your mail was actually in transit however it would have looked like ABI1 est d E9montr E9 disait il que les choses ne peuvent EAtre autrement car tout E9tant fait pour une fin tout est n E9cessairement pour la meilleure fin BB Base64 encoding is another way to protect binary data from the SMTP mail system However Base64 makes no attempt to be legible and is most appropriate for non text data MIME Labeling The other important part of MIME is that it le
324. ion Eudora copies incoming messages to your PC and leaves the message on the POP server If this is turned off Eudora transfers incoming messages to your PC and deletes the message from the POP server For important information concerning this option see Leaving Mail on the Server on page 86 Delete from server after _ day s If you select this option mail will be saved for the number of days you specify before being deleted from the POP server It is a good idea not to leave copies of your messages on the POP server indefinitely as this will create mail storage problems on the server Delete from server when emptied from Trash lf you select this option any messages that are deleted from your Trash mailbox are also deleted from the POP server Skip messages over _ K in size lf you select this option messages over the specified size are downloaded only in part These messages include the first few lines and a statement that says the message is not complete This can be useful on slow connections NOTE If you want to retrieve the full message after it has been partially retrieved right click on the message and change the server status 299 Setting Eudora Preferences Offline lIf you select this option Eudora won t attempt to make any connections This is a good option to have selected if you re using Eudora on a laptop computer that is not continuously connected Authentication style This specifies which POP account au
325. ionery files NOTE You can select only one item at a time in the list you cannot select multiple items If you right click a stationery item in the list a drop down context menu appears with the following commands New Create a new piece of stationery a new stationery file An untitled stationery window opens that you can fill out and choose Save As Stationery from the File menu Edit Open an editing window for the selected stationery item Make your changes and choose Save As Stationery from the File menu or close without saving to discard your changes Delete Delete the selected stationery item Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion Use the Delete key as a shortcut for this command Rename Rename the selected stationery file Use the F2 key as a shortcut for this command or click the stationery file s name box then edit the name right in the box New Message With Create a new message with the selected stationery As a shortcut for this command either select the stationery item and press Enter or just double click the stationery item Reply With Reply with the selected stationery to the sender s of the received messages that are currently selected Reply to All With Reply with the selected stationery to the sender s and all recipients of the received messages that are currently selected 110 Using Signatures and Stationery You can also display the drop down context menu and create new s
326. ions This field lists Eudora s suggestions for the correct spelling of the unknown word If the Suggest words option is selected all suggestions are listed here by default If the option is deselected click the Suggest button to display Eudora s suggestions Ignore This button causes the spelling checker to ignore this occurrence of the unknown word Ignore all This button causes the spelling checker to ignore this occurrence and all subsequent occurrences of the unknown word Change This button substitutes the contents of the Change To field for the unknown word Change all This button substitutes the contents of the Change To field for this occurrence and all subsequent occurrences of the unknown word 59 Creating Messages Suggest This button causes the Suggestions field to display a list of Eudora s suggestions for the correct spelling of the unknown word Add This button adds the unknown word to your custom user dictionary Edit Dictionary This button displays the Edit User Dictionary dialog box Edit User Dictionary Edit User Dictionary Word WorldMail Dictionary The Edit User Dictionary dialog box lists all of the words in your user dictionary in the Dictionary field It also allows you to add words to or delete words from your personal user dictionary or even to clear the entire dictionary NOTE Words in the user dictionary are saved in all lower case To add a word to the dictionary
327. irst matching map 424 Sources Sources Anonymous FTP ftp eudora com QUALCOMM s Eudora Division has an anonymous FTP server ftp eudora com that has information and software related to Eudora These are located within the eudora directory Included are POP3 Ph and password changing servers the srialpop program current product information dialup files and more Also look under the directory eudora eudorapro windows extras Eudora Information The information in this manual was correct at the time of printing However things happen very quickly in the electronic world meaning that some of this information may already be out of date For the very latest information about Eudora send email to eudora info eudora com Obtaining an Internet Email Server Post Office Protocol POP and Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP Servers are available for a variety of platforms If you would like to run a POP or an IMAP server on your own system we suggest the following servers e Windows NT QUALCOMWM s Eudora WorldMail Server WorldMail supports POP3 and IMAP4 as well as LDAP and Ph directory services Microsoft Windows NT 4 x Server or Workstation is required e Macintosh QUALCOMM s Eudora Internet Mail Server EIMS EIMS supports POPS as well as Ph directory services EIMS requires a Macintosh 68030 or higher Mac IIx Ilcx SE 30 or better or a PowerPC e UNIX QUALCOMM s QPopper QPopper 3 0 is av
328. iruses Content Concentrator y L Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Switch messages with Unmodified arrow keys lf you select this option and if there is an incoming message window open on the screen the up or left arrow key closes the current message and opens the previous message in the mailbox The down or right arrow key closes the current message and opens the next message in the mailbox If this option is turned off the arrow keys can be used to move the cursor insertion point within messages and in the preview pane 356 Setting Eudora Preferences NOTE The preview pane will get updated to correspond to the current message in focus This can be an easy way to read your mail To enable the preview pane see Viewing Mail on page 317 Even if you select this option the arrow keys do not switch messages if there is an outgoing message topmost on the screen Ctrl arrow keys lf you select this option you can switch messages by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the arrow keys The switching behavior is described above under the Unmodified arrow keys option The Ctrl arrow keystrokes do not work when composition windows are open on the screen Alt arrow keys If you select this option you can switch messages by holding down the Alt key and pressing the arrow keys The switching behavior is described above under the Unmodified arrow keys option The Alt
329. is already in but you can copy an entry into its file A Copy of Entry is created To save your changes from the File menu choose Save TIP Add a button for the File menu s Save ctrl to your main toolbar as a handy way to save Address Book changes 244 Using the Address Book Renaming a Nickname To change the nickname for an Address Book entry 1 Set the View By field to Nickname and make sure the desired entry appears in the list 2 Click the nickname for the entry pause and click it again You can then edit the nickname in the edit box that appears Alternately click the nickname once to highlight it then in the Nickname field in the Personal dialog box enter the new nickname and press Enter NOTE If you change a nickname be sure to correct any entries that reference that nickname Addressing a New Message from the Address Book You can open and address a new message from the Address Book using the To Cc and Bcc buttons To create a new message from the Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book entry list choose the entry you want to address the message to To choose multiple entries in sequence hold down the Shift key or to select entries non consecutively hold down the Ctrl key 2 Click To Cc or Bcc at the bottom of the Address Book A new composition window appears with the selected nickname s inserted in the recipient field NOTE Also you can double click an entry to enter t
330. is is useful if there is an usually long or confusing attribute you don t want to display in the window 5 Select the Search Options tab to display the Search Options panel LDAP Database window Search Options panel Modify Database Network Attributes Search Options Log Search timeout Maximum number of matches to return hooo H S M NoLimit Search Base c US Word wise Search Filter cn 0 Whole query Search Filter 273 10 Using Directory Services On the Search Options panel specify the Search timeout by moving the bar indicator You can adjust the bar indicator for a short to long timeout In the Maximum number of matches to return text box you can select the up arrow to increase or the down arrow to decrease the number of matches you d like to see displayed Or select the No Limit option to specify unlimited matches In the Search Base text box you can specify a part of the LDAP server to limit your search See your LDAP administrator to specify the value in this field However the default is usually sufficient In the Worldwise Search Filter you enter a type of search filter to form word queries cn 0 is the default The 0 is substituted for each word to form a set of word queries The purpose of this filter is to form a term for a word and then AND the terms together Examples appear below Query John Smith Configuration default cn 0 Filter amp c
331. is turned off a previewed message will not automatically be marked as read Note You can use the Shift Space shortcut to convert a message back and forth between the Unread and Read status 318 Setting Eudora Preferences Automatically open next message If you select this option deleting or transferring the current message opens the next message in the mailbox but only if that message is unread Zoom windows when opening If you select this option new message windows automatically open to their zoomed size The zoomed size is computed on a window by window basis For message windows zoomed size is just long enough to display all of the message but no longer than the main window and as wide as the Message window width setting Composition windows zoom to the height specified by the Message window height setting Allow executables in HTML content If you select this option you are able to run programs such as Java Applets JavaScript VB Script and ActiveX Controls that are embedded in an HTML message For security reasons you may want to leave this option turned off 319 Setting Eudora Preferences Mailboxes The Mailboxes options determine how Eudora displays various objects in mailbox window columns It also allows you to configure Eudora to select and drag message s for mailbox transfers To display the Mailboxes options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Mai
332. ited Kingdom FR France etc st State or province expressed in a two letter state code for example California CA Massachusetts MA Ontario ON etc Also if a country is considered a state for example France then this field can show a city name such as Paris Location that is a city county etc for example San Diego Montreal London Paris etc mail Person s email address More than one email address may be listed and more than one search listing may be returned for an individual with multiple email addresses gn Also Givenname The person s first name and or middle initial or any part of the person s name before the last name for example John W A Raymond etc Titles are sometimes given such as Dr Ms etc sn Person s surname or last name Suffixes are sometimes given such as Jr lll M D Esq etc cn Person s common name This includes the given name first middle initial prefix and the person s last name including suffixes o Organization which includes companies universities non profit organizations government agencies etc In the Presented As text box enter the text for the attribute you wish to see displayed on the query results list or click the down arrow to display some common attribute names NOTE Three of the four columns in the query results list window can be assigned to any attribute you wish but you cannot change the name of th
333. ition the pointer over the separator until you see a splitter cursor then drag the line to left or right In the File List control double click an item in the Name column or select one or more items in the column and press Enter to open the selected items For program files this action launches the program For document files this action generally launches the registered viewing or editing application for that document Eudora displays an error dialog box if it is unable to open a file in this way To adjust the relative heights of the Folder Browser and File List controls position the pointer over the separator bar between the Folder Browser and File List controls until the splitter cursor appears then click and drag the separator up or down Note that the File Browser window maintains a minimum height for the Folder Browser and File List controls so you cannot close them all the way To manually refresh the File Browser window display right click anywhere in the File Browser window but not on a Folder Browser item or File List item then choose Refresh from the drop down context menu TIP A good place to right click is in the Drive Selector box Alternately press the F5 key while keyboard focus is in the File Browser window You can select one or more files in the File List control and drag them to a message composition window to attach those files to that outgoing message This is especially handy if you keep the File Browser w
334. ive tool windows with tabs in left to right order To display this window choose one of the member windows from the Tools menu e Directory Services e Address Book e Filters e Filter Report e Link History The third default tabbed window is a docked window that contains two tool windows with tabs on the left side in top to bottom order To display this window display one of the member windows from the Tools menu e Task Status e Task Errors NOTE The far left window is the default window that will appear To change this default window select the window you want to appear as the default and drag it to the far left tabbed window grouping See Reorganizing Tabbed Windows on page 207 for more information 206 Managing Windows in Eudora As described later in this section you can reorganize these default tabbed windows any way you like Your newly arranged tabbed window will be preserved when you quit and restart Eudora NOTE Due to file format incompatibilities if you upgrade from a pre 4 0 version of Eudora you will lose the previous docking state of your Mailboxes window and toolbar Eudora will reset the toolbar and docking states to the default configuration noted above However customized toolbar information is preserved only the size and location of your toolbar may change Opening and Activating Tabbed Windows To open a tabbed window that s hidden open any of its member windows by selecting the appropriate comm
335. k and Format Painter turns off Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only To insert pictures and horizontal lines into the body of a message use the Insert submenu under the Edit menu or use the Insert Object button on the message toolbar See Text Toolbar on page 33 You can insert an object in the middle of a line of text or between lines of text in the message body To insert a picture in message text 1 Move the cursor to where you want the picture 2 From the Edit menu choose Insert 3 From the Insert submenu choose Picture A dialog box appears 4 Inthe dialog box select an image file and click Open The picture is inserted into the message body at the cursor position You can continue typing text Once the picture is inserted in your message you can drag it to where you want it in the message Your recipient will see the picture right in the message body With QuickTime 4 0 or later installed on your computer you can insert a variety of graphics files into your outgoing messages using the Insert Picture command You can insert formats that are supported by QuickTime for example JPEG GIF BITMAP TIFF PNG BMP PICT QTIF SGI TARGA FPX PHOTOSHOP and more NOTE What your recipient sees may depend on whether the receiving computer and email package support the display of inline images embedded in message text To insert a downloadable picture in message text 1 Move the cursor to wh
336. k file you just saved 9 When finished click OK Operating Eudora in One of Three Modes You can choose one of three operating modes on how you wish to use Eudora They are as follows e Paid mode This mode provides the full featured Eudora desktop email client without advertising and limited person to person technical support e Sponsored mode This mode provides the full featured Eudora desktop email client at no charge supported by sponsors advertising It includes all of the features that are in the Paid mode except for BossWatch Fast Search SoamWatch e Light mode This is an upgrade to the freeware version formerly known as Eudora Light It includes fewer features than the other modes and may include a sponsor image or logo NOTE For more information about technical support options see Technical Support on page 27 or http www eudora com techsupport options on the Eudora Web site Changing Eudora Modes If you bought Eudora from a web site Eudora installs in Paid mode However if you would like to change the operating mode for example to Sponsored mode you can do so right in the Eudora program To change the Eudora operating mode after you install Eudora 7 0 1 From the Help menu choose Payment amp Registration The Payment and Registration window appears 25 Introducing Eudora Email Payment and Registration Window Payment amp Registration Which Eudora is right for you w 3 a Sponsor
337. king Mail options determine how Eudora checks for and receives incoming mail messages sent to your principal email account dominant personality To display the Checking Mail options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Click the Checking Mail icon The Checking Mail options window appears Checking Mail options window Options Category Mail Server E pop myfirm com Getting Started User Name Ngn a jcampl Checking Mail Check for mail every 0 minute s C Don t check without a network connection ing Mail Incoming Mail C Dont check when using battery ey Send on check Sending Mail Secure Sockets when Receiving th If Available STARTS v Composing Mail Internet Dialup v Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Mail Server This is the name of your incoming mail server as entered in the Mail Server Incoming field of the Getting Started options See Getting Started on page 293 for more details User Name This is the login name you entered in the User Name field of the Getting Started options See Getting Started on page 293 for more details 295 Setting Eudora Preferences Check for mail every _ minute s If you enter a number greater than zero in this field then at regular intervals Eudora automatically checks your incoming mail server for new mail and transfers to your PC any mail addressed to your p
338. l be ignored a 3b b 3 a i e it s a commutative operator order doesn t matter a PRE 3 b is similar to a NEAR 3 b but a must preceed b to match a NEAR O b can be written using phrase search syntax a b OR b a a PRE O b a b not commutative a exact match b prefix match a PRE O b is not the same as a b since it will match alpha beta and a butterfly while the phrase search will only match the latter a exact x 4 is not a NEAR operation it s equivalent to x 4 3 6 is not a NEAR operation it s equivalent to 3 6 a NEAR b is not a NEAR operation it s a phrase search with 3 terms a near and b Some stranger examples Example 1 a AND b NEAR c NEAR has higher precedence than AND this is equivalent to a AND b NEAR cy 443 X1 Search Queries Example 2 a NEAR b NEAR c This is a single strung together NEAR operation So all of the following will match E E D es ele G a Git De EE 1 ET e EAR D se Boe a UE sg Ges D eae we acne m Mca eis ce sa De es ie ol a b more than 10 words b c In other words a is near b but so is c order doesn t matter The search expression could also be written as a NEAR b AND b NEAR cy Example 3 a NEAR b NEAR c That 2nd NEAR is meaningless so the 2nd NEAR is taken literally a NEAR b AND NEAR AND c Example 4 a NEAR b c The word a is near the phrase b c a b NE
339. l checks partial messages or full messages are transferred to your computer with or without attachments depending on the options you specify in the Incoming Mail options window for your main account see Incoming Mail on page 298 This is beneficial if you use a computer with limited disk space or a slow network connection To specify options for your personalities access the Account Settings dialog box from the Personalities window see Account Settings Dialog on page 125 When a message is transferred either in part or in full from the IMAP server to your computer during a mail check a copy of the message remains on the server until you actively delete it Downloading Minimal Headers vs the Full Message By default the Minimal Headers Only option is selected in the Incoming Mail options for an IMAP account As a result when you check mail for an IMAP account and the incoming mail is delivered to Eudora only a minimal amount of information about each message is transferred to your computer This consists of the information you would see in the message summary of a mailbox window the sender the date and time of the message the subject etc When you open or preview the message the full set of message headers and the entire message body is transferred to your computer Whether or not any attachments to the message are also transferred depends on your setting for the Full message except attachments over _ K option 91 Rec
340. lboxes icon The Mailboxes options window appears Mailboxes options window Options Category Show Mailbox Columns Status Date Replying C unk Msize Priority Server status Attachment Mood Watch Label Subject who up 5 amp Fr n C Show mailbox lines C Show count of selected messages in size box C close messages with mailbox Select newly inserted messages FUMLUB val jes a lt R Show no more than 10 items in the Recent mailbox menus viewing Mail When dragging in a mailbox Allow drag and drop transfers C Allow drag select of messages Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Show Mailbox Columns These options determine which columns appear in mailbox windows Select an option to display that column in all mailbox windows The options are Status Junk Priority Attachment Label Who Date Size Server status MoodWatch and Subject Show mailbox lines lf you select this option lines appear in the message summaries portion of mailbox windows horizontal lines to separate message summaries and vertical lines to separate columns 320 Setting Eudora Preferences Show count of selected messages in Size box lf you select this option a column is added to the size box in the lower left hand corner of a mailbox table of contents The first column of the size box will display the number of messages that are selected Close mess
341. le extension the Macintosh creator code the Macintosh type the MIME type and the MIME subtype Here are some sample entries Mappings both gif image gif both mpg video mpeg both doc MSWD in xls XCEL out xls XCEL XLS4 both eps EPSF application postscript A map marked in only tries to match the map to messages that you receive A map marked out only tries to match the map to messages that you send A map marked both tries to match the map to both incoming and outgoing messages The first map above says that any incoming MIME message that has a part type of image and subtype of gif will get saved to a file with the extension gif It also specifies that outgoing messages that have an attachment with the file extension gif will get the MIME type of image and subtype of gif if the encoding method of the message is MIME The second map is similar to the first map in structure but uses a different file extension and MIME type and subtype You can use map entries to move between computer file extensions and Macintosh creator and type as well The third map says that if an incoming message has an attachment with the Macintosh creator MSWD which is the Macintosh creator for Microsoft Word then the file extension of the attachment when saved to disk should be doc the file extension that Word for Windows uses Since the map is marked as both it will als
342. le in the text box The WAB file has the wab extension You can search for it using Windows Explorer 8 When finished click OK Importing from Mircrosoft Outlook NOTE Before you begin the import empty the Deleted Items folder in Microsoft Outlook In Microsoft Outlook make sure its your default email program before you import it into Eudora Once the migration is complete close Eudora and restart Only then can you make Eudora your Windows default email program 22 Introducing Eudora Email To import from Mircrosoft Outlook 1 3 4 From the File menu choose Import The Import Mail and Addresses dialog box appears In the dialog box choose Microsoft Outlook If you don t see Microsoft Outlook go to step 3 Choose Import Mail and or Address Book then click OK Microsoft Outlook should begin importing into Eudora Click Advanced The Advanced Import dialog box appears Advanced Import dialog box showing Microsoft Outlook required field Advanced Import EUDORA Select which program you would like to import From Microsoft Outlook Netscape Messenger Outlook Express Please Locate your PST File Browse Browse Please Locate your PST File Choose Microsoft Outlook In the Please Locate your PST file click Browse and look for the pst file Make sure the file appears in the text box The PST file has the pst extension You can search for it using Windows Exp
343. le to a Message on page 49 Specifying an Attachment Directory To not use the default Attach Directory to receive your attachments 1 2 From the Tools men choose Options Scroll through the category list and select Attachments Beneath the Attachment directory prompt click on the large bar button A standard file dialog box appears Double click on the name of the directory you want to use its name appears above the list Click Use Directory The dialog box closes leaving the Attachments options window opened The name of the folder you just selected appears in the Attachment directory bar button 83 Receiving and Responding to Messages Attachments options window Options Category Encoding method Ss MIME Internet Dialup C BinHex M C Uuencode Aa Attachment directory Replying F C Attachments EA Put text attachments in body of message Attachments Receive MIME digest as a mailbox attachment Delete attachments when emptying Trash Delete automatic attachments C Never C After sending message When message emptied from Trash OK Cancel NOTE If at any time Eudora cannot find your selected directory Eudora will use the Attach Directory in the Eudora Directory for attachments until you designate a new directory Editing Incoming Messages You can edit the message body in an incoming message if you select the Pencil button in the toolbar You can also edit the S
344. lication the command is in Launch a program from a message lf you select this option you are warned if you try to launch a program from a message For security reasons you should never launch a program sent to you from an unknown source or if you re not expecting a program without performing a virus check on the file Do not launch any program if you don t know the sender Launch a program externally lf you select this option a warning alerts you to be careful when opening an attachment outside of Eudora for example directly from the Attachments directory or from a Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP directory Forward files that are not in the attachment directory lf you select this option Eudora will warn you when you forward a message and files are attached that do not reside in your attachment directory 342 Setting Eudora Preferences Enter an invalid server when creating a new personality lf you select this option Eudora validates the connection to your mail server when creating a new personality and will warn you if it is unable to connect to the server name you have entered 343 Setting Eudora Preferences MAPI The MAPI options control the Eudora MAPI Server Eudora s MAPI support allows you to quickly attach documents to email messages directly from the application that created the document Without MAPI you must first save the document remember what folder the document is in switch to Eudora and then rem
345. lick one of the following in the Role area Full Membership user sends and receives updates This allows you to receive from and send files to the group either automatically or manually Broadcasting Member user only sends updates ignores any incoming updates This allows you to only send files to the group either automatically or manually Incoming files are ignored Receiving Member user never sends updates but processes incoming updates This allows you to only receive files from the group Any changes you make to the shared folder are ignored Custom Member use the settings in the Advanced tab Go to step 6 The Full Member role is the default Inthe Notifications area If you want ESP to notify you when updates are coming into your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder box This box is checked by default If you want ESP to notify you when updates are going out of your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM my shared folder box This box is checked by default If you want ESP to monitor any of the group actions check the Log any group actions box The box is checked by default A log file is created and placed in a subfolder in the Eudora folder If you want ESP to notify you prior to changes in the group s membership check the Ask before responding to a membership update box The box is checked by default If you want ESP to re
346. ll Suggestions separate z mig urga Suggest Add Options sewerage Edit Dictionary 58 Creating Messages To correct the misspelled word e Type the correct spelling of the word in the Change To field if it is not already there and click Change e Select the correct word from the Suggestions list and click Change e Double click the correct word in the Suggestions list The spelling checker then proceeds with the check Check Spelling Dialog Box The Check Spelling dialog box allows you to ignore an unknown word change it suggest the correct spelling add the word to your user dictionary edit your dictionary or change the spelling options via the Options button Each of the fields and buttons is described Just Send Queue Click to send or queue the current message that contains the misspellings The misspellings are not corrected before they are sent or queued Unknown An unknown word is one that is not found in Eudora s built in dictionary or your own custom dictionary You can act on an unknown word using the Ignore Ignore all Change Change all or Add buttons as described below Change To This field works in conjunction with the Change and Change all buttons It allows you to modify the unknown word by either typing its correct spelling in this field or selecting a suggested alternative spelling from the Suggestions field and then clicking the Change or Change all button as described below Suggest
347. llow drag and drop transfers option is selected in the Mailboxes options window See Mailboxes on page 320 Creating a Mailbox or Folder During Transfer To create a mailbox and transfer the current message into it at the same time e From the Transfer menu choose New instead of the name of a mailbox The New Mailbox dialog box appears You can create a new mailbox or mail folder For details see Creating Mailboxes and Folders on page 148 When you are done the current message is transferred into the new mailbox 159 Organizing Your Messages To create the new mailbox without transferring the message into it select the Don t transfer just create mailbox Contextual Filing Sponsored and Paid modes only You can highlight a word or part of a word anywhere in a message and transfer the message to a mailbox that contains that word within the mailbox name For example if you have a mailbox named Old Newsletters you can highlight the word Newsletter and transfer the entire message to the Old Newsletters mailbox To perform a contextual filing 1 Highlight the word or words 2 Right click the word The contextual filing submenu appears showing the mailbox es with similar name s Contextual filing submenu eeon qualcomm com 10 30 AM 3 1 7 2004 March Newsletter SEE oy a tM OF HO 1 Subject March Newsletter Date Wed Mar 2004 10 30 From eeor Copy To eeon Subject w
348. llowing are specific instructions for the tabbed panels of the Customize window e General The Categories list contains names of menus and submenus The buttons correspond to commands on these menus and submenus For more information on the functions of these commands see Using Menu Commands on page 277 e Mailboxes The Mailboxes list shows the same view as your Mailboxes window open it by choosing Mailboxes from the Tools menu To add a toolbar button for a mailbox click the mailbox and drag the appropriate button to the toolbar If the mailbox is in a closed folder double click the folder icon to open it and display its contents or click the plus sign to open the folder then click the mailbox and drag the desired button to the toolbar Note that you cannot add a toolbar button for a mail folder For more information on the Mailboxes window see Using the Mailboxes Window on page 150 e Plugins tThe Plugins list shows installed message and resource plug ins You can add a plug in button to the toolbar so that just by clicking on the button you launch the plug in application Note that if you elected to install QUALCOMM s PureVoice voice messaging software plug in when you installed Eudora Eudora automatically adds a toolbar button for the PureVoice plug in at the extreme right of the toolbar See Plug ins Extended Messaging Services on page 407 for more information on installing and using plug ins e Recipients The Recipien
349. lly choose Do file updates To have Eudora ignore proposed updates to specific files in the shared folder automatically choose Ignore file updates If you want Eudora to record the activity for each type of incoming or outgoing item check the Log box 383 Eudora Sharing Protocol NOTE The system default options from the drop down menus for all incoming and outgoing menus correspond to the last chosen options you selected in the Notifications dialog box The Role buttons combined with the Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder and Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM my shared folder are then equal to the choices in the drop down menus The Advanced tab dialog box allows you to add update and delete settings independently of each other Whereas in the Notifications dialog box while simpler keeps the settings locked For example you could use the Advanced tab dialog box to specify that you want to be asked when a delete occurs but not when additions and updates occur 8 To set a group secret word or phrase click Set Shared Secret The Set Shared Secret dialog box appears Shared Secret dialog box Enter Shared Secret The shared secret helps to make ESP more secure If you change the secret you must tell all other members in your group the new value or ESP will not accept changes from other members Es Cancel 9 Inthe text box enter a secret word or phrase that will be known only
350. lorer When finished click OK 23 Introducing Eudora Email Importing from Netscape Messenger Before you import your Netscape Address Book you must first save it in LDIF format LDIF means LDAP Data Interchange Format To save your address book in LDIF format follow the instructions to import Netscape into Eudora To import Netscape 1 Launch Netscape Messenger 2 From the Communicator menu choose Address Book 3 From the File menu in Netscape Messenger choose Export The Save dialog box appears 4 Name the file while retaining the ldif extension and save it on your computer 5 Inthe dialog box choose Netscape Navigator If you don t check Import Address Book from LDIF file the Browser button is dimmed Click OK 6 If you don t see Netscape Navigator in the dialog box click Advanced The Advanced Import dialog box appears Advanced Import dialog box showing Netscape required fields Advanced Import EUDORA Select which program you would like to import from Microsoft Outlook Outlook Express Please Locate your prefs js File Browse Browse Please Locate your LDIF File 7 Inthe Please Locate your Prefs js file click Browse to look for the Prefs js file Make sure the file appears in the text box The Prefs js file should be in your Netscape folder 24 Introducing Eudora Email 8 In the Please Locate your LDIF file click Browse to locate the address boo
351. lt RECENT format of 1 and the default Hours to be OLD of 24 means that all messages from the past 24 hours appear with the time Hours to be OLD default 24 Your entry in this field determines the point at which RECENT messages become OLD messages The default entry of 24 hours means that messages become OLD after one day 329 Setting Eudora Preferences OLD format default 3 Your entry in this field determines the format in which the dates of OLD messages appear OLD messages are those that are older than the Hours to be OLD but younger than the Hours to be ANCIENT The default OLD format of 3 the default Hours to be OLD of 24 and the default Hours to be ANCIENT of 168 means that all messages older than one day and younger than one week appear with the day of the week Hours to be ANCIENT default 168 Your entry in this field determines the point at which OLD messages become ANCIENT messages The default entry of 168 hours means that messages become ANCIENT after a week ANCIENT format default 2 Your entry in this field determines the format in which the dates of ANCIENT messages appear ANCIENT messages are all those older than the number in the Hours to be ANCIENT field The default entry of 2 and the default Hours to be ANCIENT of 168 means that all those messages older than a week appear with the date NOTE Use the format key displayed at the bottom of the window to determine how to program entries in the Fixed
352. lude the Microsoft Dialup Networking tool and the Remote Access Services Define a Phonebook entry The Microsoft Dialup Networking tool lets you create multiple phonebook entries one for each of your Internet Service Providers Configure the Phonebook entry to automatically dial the modem establish a SLIP PPP session and if applicable auto configure your IP address and DNS server address es Configure Eudora to auto dial Eudora can use a Dialup Networking Phonebook Entry to automatically dial your mail server check and or send mail and hang up the connection when the mail transfer is complete Configuring Dialup Networking under Windows 98 2000 ME XP Dialup Networking is an optional component of Windows 98 2000 ME XP Before configuring Dialup Networking you should install your modem and make sure the Windows 98 2000 ME XP networking software includes support for the TCP IP protocol Consult your Microsoft documentation for details on installing your modem configuring the TCP IP protocol and installing the Dialup Networking tools After you install Dialup Networking follow these steps to define a new Phonebook entry 1 Double click on the My Computer icon to open an Explorer window Then double click on the Dialup Networking icon to open the Dialup Networking folder Double click on the Make New Connection button to display the Make New Connection Wizard Enter the name you want to associate with your Inte
353. lup icon The Internet Dialup options window appears Internet Dialup options window Options Category _ Have Eudora connect using Dial up networking f Snai when Eudora established the connection ncoming Mail 3 Hang up after receiving and sending Close connection on Exit Sending Mail Entry v a Composing Mail C Only do automatic mail checks when a network g connection is already established Internet Dialup Replying Have Eudora connect using Dial up networking lf you select this option the specified dial up connection referred to in Windows NT 4 0 as a phonebook entry is used when Eudora does any network operation This option is available only if you have installed the dial up networking services with Windows 98 XP or Windows NT 4 0 When Eudora established the connection Hang up after receiving and sending lf you select this option the connection terminates each time mail is retrieved and sent Close connection on Exit lf you select this option the phone connection terminates when you exit Eudora 307 Setting Eudora Preferences Entry Use the drop down list to select a dial up connection in this field You must have dial up networking set up in Windows New Select to create a new dial up networking entry See the online user manual for information on creating a dial up networking entry Edit Select to edit the current entry displayed in the Entry field
354. ly Perform a spelling check on the entire message or the selected text displays the Check Spelling dialog box Shift Check Spelling Perform an inline spelling check on the entire message or the selected text highlights misspelled words in red double underline right click a highlighted word to correct the spelling Message Plug ins Launch the installed message plug in as appropriate See Plug ins Extended Messaging Services on page 407 for more details 280 Using Menu Commands Mailbox Menu This menu lets you open a mailbox or bring an open mailbox to the front It also lets you create new mailboxes and mail folders Mailbox menu In Ctril 1 Out Ctrl 0 Junk Trash Recent gt New Business gt Personal gt In Open the mailbox where incoming messages are stored until deleted or transferred to another mailbox Out Open the mailbox where messages you compose are stored where queued messages are held until actually sent and where copies of sent messages may be initially stored Junk Open the junk mailbox where junk mail is stored automatically for Paid mode customers with SPAMWatch turned on Trash Open the mailbox where deleted messages are stored Recent Select to open a recently used mailbox New Display the New Mailbox dialog box to create a new mailbox Your Mailboxes Open the selected mailbox that you have created or create a new mailbox in a folder that you have created B
355. mailbox or folder Type in the new name and select the Make it a folder option if you want to make it a folder click OK If you chose to make it a folder enter the name of the mailbox within the new folder when the dialog box appears again and click OK The new mailbox or folder appears in the lists and is added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus Renaming a Mailbox or Folder To rename a mailbox or folder 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group Click the name of the mailbox or folder pause then click again to highlight the name Or right click the item and choose Rename or click once on the item and press F2 Type in the new name Press Enter to accept your change or Esc to cancel it 151 Working with Mailboxes Moving a Mailbox from One Folder to Another To move a mailbox from one folder to another 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group 2 Click to select the mailbox you want to move 3 Drag it to where you want it Removing a Mailbox or Folder To remove a mailbox or folder WARNING You cannot undo this deletion 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group 2 Right click it and choose Delete from the drop down list or click once on it to highl
356. ment Type popup 33 Bold button 35 Bulleted List button 37 Clear Formatting button 37 Color button 36 Font popup 35 Indent In button 36 Indent Out button 37 Insert Object button 37 Italics button 35 Keep Copy button 34 Make Hyperlink button 37 Priority popup 33 Queue button 35 Quoted Printable button 33 Return Receipt button 34 Send button 35 Signature popup 33 Index Size button 35 Tabs in Body button 34 Text As Attachment button 33 Typewriter button 36 Underline button 36 Word Wrap button 34 Outgoing option 166 Outgoing server SMTP 303 Outlook 97 amp 98 migrating from 123 Outlook 2000 importing 20 123 Outlook 98 importing 20 123 Outlook Express importing 20 123 Outlook Express importing from 21 Outlook Express migrating from 123 P Paid mode 25 26 Password changing 77 server source code for 426 check when sending mail 482 entering 75 forgetting 76 remembering 76 Saving 76 Paste As Quotation command 280 Paste command 279 Paste Special command 279 Payment amp Registration command 25 Payment and Registration command 290 Pencil button 81 Personalities 115 migrating from Outlook Express Outlook 97 Outlook 98 Netscape Messenger 123 Personalities command 115 134 287 Personalities window 115 Personality deleting 131 using in a message 135 Personality field in Filters 168 Personality Name field 126 Personality defintion 487 Personality adding via Account Settings dialog 124 Ph
357. mes to or from the BossWatch List by selecting multiple entries before right clicking Hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence or the Ctrl key to select entries non consecutively 251 Using the Address Book Using the Recipient List The Recipient List is your list of recipients to whom you often send mail To add a nickname to the Recipient List 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book or press Cirl L Or if the Address Book is an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab Click to select the desired entry in your Nickname list On the right side of the window check the Recipient List box or right click the selected item to display the drop down list Recipient List checkbox in the Address Book Nickname soe Recipient List lt _____ Cl BossWatch List Personal Home Work Other Notes Full Name Kirstin K Fearnley From the drop down list choose Add to Recipient List The entry s nickname is added to the Recipient List and the entry is bolded in the Address Book list To add an email address to the Recipient List 1 2 3 Open the Address Book Select the text that makes up the full address From the Special menu choose Add as Recipient The recipients email address is added to your Recipient List To remove an entry from the list 1 2 Open the Address Book Click to select the desired entry in your Nickname list Right click
358. message For example if you receive a message sent to your Home account your replies to that message are sent from your Home account There are two ways to change the personality of a response The first is to initiate the response and then change the personality using the drop down context menu s Change Personality submenu The second way is to change the personality associated with the original message to which you are responding Open that message and change its personality using the Change Personality submenu From then on all of your replies to that message will be sent from the newly assigned personality The message does not have to be open Just right click on a message or set of messages in a mailbox s TOC Select Change Personality and select the desired personality NOTE You can also set up a filter to automatically assign a desired personality to incoming or outgoing messages that satisfy the filter criteria See the Make Personality action under Filter Actions on page 170 137 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only 138 Working with Mailboxes Opening a Mailbox To open a mailbox select it from the Mailbox menu or double click it in the Mailboxes window NOTE The unread message icon appears in the Mailbox menu whenever a mailbox or folder contains unread messages that are less than five days old Also any mailboxes or folders in the Mailboxes window that contain unread messages are displayed
359. message during transfer Click Yes to transfer the message TIP Don t forget to clean out your Out mailbox once in awhile to increase your system performance NOTE You can undo mailbox transfers using the Undo command from the Edit menu 158 Organizing Your Messages Using the Transfer Menu The Transfer menu is one way to transfer messages among your mailboxes With a current message open or message summaries selected choose a mailbox from the Transfer menu The messages are transferred from their previous mailbox to the mailbox you selected Dragging Messages You can drag messages from one mailbox to another using the message summaries or by clicking y in an open message window To drag a message summary to another mailbox 1 Click to select the message summary or summaries 2 Drag the summary into any open or minimized mailbox window or any mailbox in the Mailboxes window When you release the mouse button the message is transferred To drag an open message to another mailbox click ty and drag the message into any open mailbox or any mailbox in the Mailboxes window When you release the mouse button the message is transferred When dragging to the Mailboxes window pause over a closed folder The folder temporarily opens making its mailboxes visible so that you can complete the drop operation The folder closes again when you complete or cancel the drop NOTE You can only drag messages around if the A
360. messages on server l Fetch all message headers to In mailbox Cancel NOTE If you only have one personality dominant only the left side of this dialog box appears Set the options you want and click OK to continue checking for mail The Mail Transfer Options fields are described Retrieve new mail Transfer your new mail from the POP server to your computer Send queued messages Send all the queued messages marked Q in your Out mailbox Delete messages marked for deletion Delete from the POP server the messages that are marked Delete in Eudora This is for messages that were retrieved only in part either with e Leave mail on server or Skip messages over _ K in size options found in the Incoming Mail options window for your main account or the Account Settings dialog box for your multiple personalities e Orthe Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option found in the Mail Transfer options window 89 Receiving and Responding to Messages Retrieve messages marked for retrieval Retrieve from the POP server the messages that are marked Fetch or Fetch then Delete in Eudora This is for messages that were retrieved only in part with e Skip messages over _ K in size option found in the Incoming Mail options window for your main account or the Account Settings dialog box for your multiple personalities e Or with the Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option found in the Mail Transfer options win
361. n John cn Smith Records in which cn attributes contain john and smith are returned Using the wildcard asterisks before and after john and smith would return matches such as Johnathon Smithson If you wish to search whole words remove the wildcard asterisks The above example would also return records such as John Dean Smith and Smithers Johnson Query John Smith Configuration cn 0 sn 40 gn 40 givenname 0 Filter amp I givenname John cn John sn John gn John I givenname Smith cn Smith sn Smith gn Smith The default search filter in this example would possibly return more records than the default because it searches more fields for a substring match of the word In the Whole query Search Filter you enter a type of search filter to create a term for the whole query You can set this filter as an alternate OR for the worldwise search filter results Examples appear below Query John Smith whole query search filter 274 11 12 13 14 Using Directory Services Configuration whole word cn 0 word wise I cn 40 sn 40 gn 40 givenname 0 Filter cn John Smith amp givenname John cn John sn John gn John givenname Smith cn Smith sn Smith gn Smith Select the Log tab to display the Log panel LDAP Database window Log panel Modify
362. n a message to display the drop down list and from the drop down list choose Fetch then Include Attachments If you wish to re retrieve a message at any time 1 Right click on a message to display the drop down list 2 From the drop down list choose Fetch 3 Either choose Include Attachments or Use Defaults If you want to delete the local copy of a message right click on the message to display the drop down list From the drop down list choose Remove Cached Contents The message still exists on the server if you want to re retrieve it If the Full message except attachments over _K option is turned off only the attachment headers are transferred to your computer 92 Receiving and Responding to Messages NOTE In IMAP your attachments download to the Attach folder which is in the IMAP folder However if you have previously set up a directory in the Attachments options window to where you want your attachments to go all attachments POP and IMAP go to that directory See Attachments on page 311 Deleting a Message from the Server If you have the When I delete a message move it to Trash option turned off in the Incoming Mail options window see Incoming Mail on page 298 allnew messages are delivered to your IMAP server and are kept there until you actively delete them Also whenever you retrieve a message either in part or in full from the IMAP server to your computer a copy of the message is kept on the IMAP server unt
363. n do so by just highlighting the text you want to appear in your reply To select text to include in a reply 1 In a received message click and drag to highlight the text you want to include in your reply 2 Once the selected text is highlighted choose Reply from the Message menu or click Ban The selected text now appears in your message reply 3 Add more response if needed 4 To send click Send or Queue 97 Receiving and Responding to Messages Forwarding a Message Any message can be forwarded to someone else You forward a message to someone who would consider the message as important as you do To forward the current message e From the Message menu choose Forward or click Ra A new message window appears with your address in the From field the original subject preceded by Fwd and a space in the Subject field the original sender s text quoted in the message body and any original attachments in the Attached field For details on how text is quoted see the section Replying to a Message on page 96 Make any changes or add any comments you want and enter the recipient s address in the To field The message can then be sent or saved for further changes NOTE If you forward an outgoing message a message you sent the attachments are not automatically included Messages that have been forwarded are identified with a right arrow in the Status column of their message summary Other ways to forwa
364. n his or her hard drive to store documents schedules messages illustrations images or any other file the members deem necessary for sharing ESP allows you and your group members to determine how often ESP checks each member s shared folder for updates and how the information in the shared folders is backed up To configure shared folder settings for your group 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears In the left column choose the Group name whose shared folders you want to set Click the Settings tab The Settings dialog box appears Settings dialog box Users Eudora Settings Notifications Advanced Shared Folder Check IV Check shared folder for changes every 10 minutes Don t check when using battery Auto Backup When Other Share Group Members Make Changes IV Auto Backup updated documents IV Auto Backup deleted documents Store upto 1 previous versions 4 Check the Check shared folder for changes every _ minutes box and specify the time interval at which you want ESP to check the shared folder for group updates If this option is not checked ESP won t check the shared folder The system default is for ESP to check the shared folder every 10 minutes If you want ESP to automatically create a backup when other members update files in the shared folder check the Auto Backup updated documents box The box is checked by default 380 Eudora Sharing Protocol 6 If you wa
365. n t want to use MoodWatch at all you can turn it off in this window Also you can choose if you want to use MoodWatch for incoming messages only outgoing messages only or both To display the Extra Warnings options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the MoodWatch icon The MoodWatch options window appears MoodWatch options window Options Category MoodWatch Enable MoodWatch Advanced Network Warn when queuing sending j O Message seems it might be offensive j Message is probably offensive ji O Message is on fire O Never Kerberos MoodWatch Delay when queuing sending hi j O Message seems it might be offensive ih O Message is probably offensive ji O Message is on fire Never Statistics Miscellaneous Scanning incoming mail j Scan new mail as it arrives oS Scan stored mail in the background Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Enable MoodWatch If checked MoodWatch is on To turn MoodWatch off just uncheck the box 351 Setting Eudora Preferences Warn when queueing sending The following options warn you when MoodWatch detects anything that may be offensive in your message Message seems like it might be offensive Turn this option on to set MoodWatch to its most sensitive level If your message has some content that looks like it might be offensive one chili pepper appearing you will be wa
366. nColor Eudora ini File Description RGB color of the remaining portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window RGB color of the completed portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window for receiving mail RGB color of the remaining portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window for receiving mail TimeZone TimeZone xxxn Where xxx yyy are timezone abbreviations like PST PDT nnyyy TocDateLeeway 10 ToobarDisplayFix 0 TreeControlAutoExpand 1000 Delay TreeControlAutoScrollD 100 elay TypeToSelectSubject 0 UnreadExpires 5 URLHelper CDT and nnn is the offset in hours WEST of GMT those that are east of GMT shoud enter a negative number here xxx is the timezone during Standard Time and yyy is the timezone during Daylight Savings Time If you do not change your clocks during Daylight Savings Time leave yyy blank Here are some samples TimeZone PST8PDT TimeZone MET 1 If you don t specify a TimeZone entry then a Date header will not be put in outgoing messages which is fine for most because their mail server will insert the correct Date header If you don t get messages bounced because of a missing Date header then leave the TimeZone entry alone Number of seconds that the date on a mailbox TOC file can be behind the MBX file that Eudora will not flag as being out of date Helpful for network file systems especially Windows NT Server which seems to have problems correctly time da
367. ncoming message window Guy Incognito 04 48 PM 7 18 2003 House for Rent Sorrento Valley BAR TP M PF o 1 Subject House for Rent Sorrento Valley X Sender guy incognito apprentice X Mailer QUALCOMM Windows Eudora Versiun o u u 1 peta Date Fri 18 Jul 2003 16 48 54 0700 To classifieds From Guy Incuygimu joeyyuyup Subject House for Rent Sorrento Valley CC lt shabadoo gt 3 bedrooms 2 bath Carport w3 parking spots 1250 mo 1000 deposit Please respond back to me via email during the day NOTE You can also view the message in the message preview pane See Working with Mailboxes on page 139 for more details The incoming message window consists of the title bar toolbar and message body Title Bar The title bar provides information about the message including the name of the sender the time and date the message was delivered and the message subject Toolbar The toolbar consists of buttons and menus displayed just under the title bar Rly Move Message This can be used to move any current message into a different mailbox In an opened message hold the mouse button down on the icon and drag it to an open mailbox or a mailbox in the Mailboxes window TH Fixed Width Click this button to convert the message text to the fixed width typewriter style message font set in your Fonts options This lets you view aligned text such as columns and tables more easily 80 ELAH ELAH Subject
368. nd Paid modes only on page 39 Bcc The email addresses or nicknames of people to whom a blind copy of the message is to be sent These recipients are not displayed in the message header and the recipients in the To and Cc fields will not know that a copy went to these addresses Use Bcc to send a copy of a message to someone without showing the other recipients Multiple addresses must be separated by commas This field can be left blank Bcc means blind carbon copy To select aname from a list see Using Automatic Name Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 39 The Bcc field can also be used to put a copy of the message in one or more of your mailboxes To do this right click in the body of the message to display the drop down list From the drop down list choose your mailbox from the Fcc menu equivalent to the Transfer menu The name of the mailbox is inserted into the Bcc field preceded by the expression f Repeat the procedure to Fcc to multiple mailboxes Eudora automatically separates the entries with commas When the message is sent a copy is placed in each specified mailbox Fcc means folder carbon copy 38 Creating Messages Attached A list of documents being attached to and sent along with the message See the section Attaching a File to a Message on page 49 for instructions on how to add attachments To delete an attachment from an outgoing message select it and press the backspace or d
369. nd the Filter Report window Following are descriptions of the controls in docked windows Gripper Bar The gripper bar also called the grab handle is the double line at one edge of the docked window Drag the window by the gripper bar to undock it from the main window frame The window now floats you can leave it as a floating window or you can dock it to any edge of the main window or to another docked window NOTE The toolbar has a gripper bar Zoom Button When two or more windows are docked on the same edge of the main window Eudora activates each window s zoom button This button appears next to the x close button and contains a small triangle Click the zoom button to minimize maximize or restore the width or height of that docked window relative to the other docked windows adjacent to it 202 Managing Windows in Eudora Close Button The close button contains an x and appears next to the zoom button Click the close button to close the docked window Resize Bar When two windows are docked side by side along one edge of the main window a bar appears between them called the resize bar Drag this bar up or down or to the left or right as appropriate to enlarge one of the docked windows and reduce the other Floating Windows A window is in the floating state if it floats above the main Eudora window and can be placed anywhere on the desktop including outside the main Eudora window In this way a
370. ndicate what order you want your messages filtered and grouping your filters will make them easier to find When the filters are invoked automatically or manually each message is matched against each filter in order from top to bottom If the message meets a filter s criteria the actions are done as specified until there are no more actions Then the message is matched against the next filter If at any point a Skip Rest action is done the remaining actions for that filter if there are any are performed on that message the rest of the filters in the filters list are skipped for that message The next message is filtered again going from top to bottom down the filters list Filter order matters when a message addressed to you is also sent to a mailing list you re on If you have a filter that always places messages addressed to you into a personal mailbox then you want Eudora to perform the filter for your personal mailbox before any other filtering You can change the width of the filters list to create more or less space for your list To do this put the arrow over the vertical splitter bar to the right of the list and drag the line to the left or right The next two sections refer exclusively to the Filters window For information on the match conditions and filter actions in the Make Filter dialog box see Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Command on page 161 Filter Criteria Match Area Each filter in
371. ndow Options Category gt Message Window Use Microsoft s viewer Display Use separate settings from Internet Explorer i Message window width 80 viewing Mail Message window height 20 L Preview Pane Mailboxes Show message preview pane A C Mark previewed messages as read after s second s Styled Text ele Automatically open next message Zoom windows when opening Cl Allow executables in HTML content Spell Checking el zsh Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Message Window These options determine how Eudora displays received and composition messages 317 Setting Eudora Preferences Use Microsoft s viewer lf this is turned off Eudora displays advanced formatting graphics and multimedia in incoming and outgoing messages using its own built in viewer If you select this option Eudora takes full advantage of the Web browser capabilities of Microsofts Internet Explorer 3 0 or later by showing Web content right in incoming and outgoing messages or linking to the Internet without your having to open the Web browser This option is available only if you have Microsofts Internet Explorer version 3 0 or higher installed and available on your system Use separate settings from Internet Explorer If this setting is turned on Eudora will keep its own display settings separate from Internet Explorer If this is turned off changes to E
372. ndows to be brought to the front of other windows in Eudora when activity occurs See Task Status Window on page 225 and Task Error Window on page 227 In the Background Tasks options window you can indicate the number of seconds of user inactivity before your newly retrieved mail is actually processed by Eudora If you have automatic mail checking set up in the Checking Mail options Eudora will retrieve the mail in the background from the incoming server at those time intervals But Eudora will not process it until there is no user activity performed on your computer for the amount of seconds you indicate in the Background Tasks options window An envelope displayed on the status bar located at the lower right hand corner of the Eudora window indicating there is retrieved mail to be processed that is messages to be filtered and placed in mailboxes Technical Note In the background Eudora retrieves and sends mail in the foreground Eudora processes attachments and applies filters To display the Background Tasks options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Background Tasks icon The Background Tasks options window appears 336 Setting Eudora Preferences Background Tasks options window Options Category 24 Task Status Columns Task C Details Persona Progress Status Getting Attention Sii L fi Background Tasks Wait for 20 seconds of user inactivity before processing filtering
373. nformation see Filtering Messages on page 161 and Filter Actions on page 170 114 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Using Alternate Email Accounts You can set up alternate personalities in Eudora for each email account you have For example if you have work home and school email accounts you can set up Eudora to send and receive email from each of these accounts all without having to quit and restart Eudora That is you can check mail for all your accounts at once or for selected accounts at once and you can do the same for sending mail To set up a personality you use the Personalities window New Account Wizard and the Account Settings dialog box as described in this section Your dominant personality or principal email account is set up when you install Eudora and can also be modified via the Account Settings dialog box Personalities Window You use the Personalities window to manage access and apply your e mail accounts personalities when you use more than one account To open the Personalities window e From the Tools menu choose Personalities Or if the Personalities window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Sample Personalities window Personalities Persona Account P lt Dominant gt homer pop homer qualcomm cor a Business jcamp mail myfirm com 115 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only The Personalities
374. ng a Personality via the Account Settings Dialog 124 Account Settings Dialog 125 Generic Properties 125 Incoming Mail 128 Using SSL for Your Personalities 131 Modifying a Personality 133 Deleting a Personality 134 Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality 134 Selecting a Personality in a Message Header 135 Using a Personality in a Message 136 Working with Mailboxes 139 Opening a Mailbox 139 Understanding the Components of a Mailbox 139 Message Summaries 140 Status Column 141 Priority Column 142 Attachments Column 143 Label Column 143 Sender Recipient Column Who 143 Date Column 144 Size Column 144 Server Status Column POP 144 Server Status Column IMAP 145 MoodWatch Column 145 Subject Column 146 Displaying and Resizing Columns 146 Using the Mailbox Size Display 146 Message Preview Pane 147 Creating Mailboxes and Folders 148 Creating a Mailbox or Folder Using the Mailbox Menu 149 Using the Mailboxes Window 150 Creating a New Mailbox or Folder 151 Renaming a Mailbox or Folder 151 Moving a Mailbox from One Folder to Another 152 Removing a Mailbox or Folder 152 Organizing Your Messages 155 Deleting a Message 155 POP Procedure 155 IMAP Procedure 156 Automatically Purging IMAP deleted messages 157 Automatically Deleting Attachments 158 Transferring Messages 158 Using the Transfer Menu 159 Dragging Messages 159 Creating a Mailbox or Folder During Transfer 159 Contextual Filing Sponsored and Paid modes only 160
375. ng a mailbox in the Top Level Name the new mailbox Make it a folder aK Cancel To create a mailbox type in the new mailbox name and click OK The mailbox is created and added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus and to the Mailboxes window To create a mail folder type the name of the new mail folder and select the Make it a folder option Click OK to create the folder The New Mailbox dialog box appears again Type the name of a mailbox to create within the new folder then click OK The new folder and its mailbox are displayed in the Mailbox and Transfer menus and in the Mailboxes window 149 Working with Mailboxes Using the Mailboxes Window The Mailboxes window lets you create new mailboxes and folders remove and rename them and move mailboxes among folders Mailboxes or folders that are bolded have unread messages By default the Mailboxes window is provided as the first window in a five window tool group docked vertically to the left side of the main Eudora window To manage mailboxes and folders from the Mailboxes window 1 From the Tools menu choose Mailboxes or click the Mailboxes window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group For more information on how to manipulate the Mailboxes window alone and as part of a tabbed window group see Managing Windows in Eudora on page 197 Mailboxes window Mailboxes Sy Personal ey Family EF Friends yy Travel EP East Co
376. nings on page 341 Quitting Eudora empties the contents of the Trash mailbox when the Empty Trash when exiting option in the Miscellaneous options is selected See Miscellaneous on page 356 155 Organizing Your Messages If you want to delete just a few messages from the Trash mailbox open the Trash mailbox and do the following 1 Click to select the desired messages 2 From the Message menu choose Delete or press the Delete key Deleting a message from the Trash removes it completely IMAP Procedure Deleting a message on an IMAP account requires two steps first mark it for deletion then purge the deleted message from the server To mark for deletion a message stored in an IMAP mailbox or folder 1 Click to select the message 2 From the Message menu choose Delete The message disappears from your mailbox To view messages that have been marked for deletion in an IMAP mailbox or folder 1 From the Tools menu select Mailboxes The Mailboxes window opens Appears docked on the left side of the Eudora window by default 2 In the Mailboxes window right click on the IMAP mailbox A context menu appears 3 Place a check mark next to Show Deleted Messages Messages that are marked for deletion have a red X in the server status column To unmark the message for deletion 1 Follow the steps above to show deleted IMAP messages 2 Click to select the message 3 From the Message menu choose UnDelete or right cl
377. nore 10 55 AM 8 13 2003 Eudora is the BEST email program BHAR z lt none gt M vane gt fap fy B pe lp amp q4 ey Send Arial z A B 7 U amp rm To C qualcomm com Lenore Dawn Shump lt dshump qualcomm com gt Subject Eudora is the BEST email program Ce Milo Bcc Attached Team Tomorow we will discuss the agenda for our anual share holders meeting next month 56 Creating Messages To correct the misspelled word 1 If you want to choose the correct word from the drop down word list right click and the drop down word list appears as shown Drop down word list C qualcomm com Lenore 10 55 AM 8 13 2003 Eudora is the BEST email program DER lt none gt gt me v rR eae eyh a Z Send Z 3A B 7 U amp T ee oly Ea To C qualcomm com Lenore Dawn Shump lt dshump qualcomm com gt Subject Eudora is the BEST email program Ce Milo Bcc Attached Team Mier we will discuss the agenda for our anual share holders meeting next month Tomorrow j Tomorrows Timor Tumor Tomato Ignore All Add 2 From the drop down word list choose the correct word Your misspelled word is replaced by the correct word NOTE Notice in our example that p m is double underlined indicating that its misspelled according to the spell checker From the drop down word list you can choose Ignore All to ignore the perceived error or Add to add the word to your d
378. nt ESP to automatically back up deleted documents from the shared folder check the Auto Backup deleted documents box The box is checked by default 7 Inthe Store up to _ previous versions text box indicate the number of previous document versions you want Eudora to store The system default is one version Configuring Group Change Notifications You can specify the role you want to play in the group which determines whether or not you can send or receive updates to the shared folder When you ve determined your ESP role you can then decide how you want ESP to handle updates to the shared folder and group membership 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Inthe left column choose the Group name whose change notifications you want to set for your role 3 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications dialog box appears Notifications dialog box Users Eudora Settings Notifications Advanced C Broadcasting Member only send updates ignore any incoming updates C Receiving Member never send updates but process incoming updates Custom Member use the settings in the Advanced tab Notifications Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder V Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM my shared folder IV Log any share group actions IV Ask before responding to a membership update IV Log any membership updates 381 Eudora Sharing Protocol C
379. nt In Sponsored and Paid modes only Indent the selected paragraph indented once to the left 36 Creating Messages Indent Out Sponsored and Paid modes only Remove one left indent from the selected paragraph Bulleted List Sponsored and Paid modes only Make the selected text a bulleted list Make Hyperlink Sponsored and Paid modes only Make the selected text or graphic a clickable hyperlink to a Uniform Resource Location URL so that when the recipient clicks the item he or she is immediately taken to the URL Clear Formatting Remove all the formatting from the selected text or paragraph Insert Object Sponsored and Paid modes only Insert a specified picture file or a horizontal line at the current cursor position in body text For details see Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 47 Last Emoticon Sponsored and Paid modes only This lets you add a graphic emoticon at the position of the insertion point in the message body For details see Sending Emoticons on page 50 Message Header Outgoing mail headers consist of six fields To From Subject Cc Bcc and Attached Each field is described below The To Subject Cc and Bcc fields can be directly edited To move the cursor from field to field press the Tab key or click in the desired field with the mouse To resize the header region of the outgoing message composition window drag the separator up or down T
380. nu The tabbed window redisplays with the selected window active You can use keyboard shortcuts to reappears hidden tool or tabbed windows where appropriate 211 Managing Windows in Eudora Float In Main Window This command is always available on the drop down context menu Selecting this command indicated by a checkmark next to the command converts a docked or floating window to a normal window Deselecting this command converts a normal window to a docked or floating window Note that the availability of the Allow Docking command depends on the state of this command When Float In Main Window is selected checked Allow Docking is unavailable the window is normal When Float In Main Window is deselected Allow Docking is available Eudora Toolbar The main toolbar is a strip of buttons that gives you easy access to your frequently used Eudora commands Main Toolbar B JFZ NIAL ti BAe se The toolbar can be moved to wherever you want it on the screen Just hold down the left mouse button on the gripper bar which is the double line at one end and drag the toolbar around until you find a place you like You can dock it to any edge of the Eudora window left right top or bottom or you can dock it to another dockable window or you can put it anywhere on your desktop in the floating state The descriptions of the default icons are listed below a Trash 25 Opens In box 5 Opens Out box
381. o allow automatic shared folder scanning Using the ESP Mailbox and Folder When you create or choose a mailbox for the ESP group two tabs appear in the window as well as an icon One contains all the messages in the mailbox and other contains the shared folder and its files The icon displays the ESP menu Following is an example of an ESP mailbox 390 Eudora Sharing Protocol Sample ESP mailbox window Stationary Eel Mailbox Folder J ovals PRP Label gt We Sd Dae Cd y 0 Bryan 03 46 PM 8 23 2000 Stationary 4281 7Br Workgre 03 52 PM 8 23 2000 Bryan 04 11 PM 8 23 2000 Bryan 04 11 PM 6 23 2000 Bryan 04 58 PM 8 23 2000 Stanley Choi 01 38 PM 6 28 2000 Stanley Choi 01 38 PM 8 28 2000 Stanley Choi 01 38 PM 8 28 2000 Ctatinnans AIA 7FArlAdorleee ALAF PIA AIAN anon N m To Stationary 42817Br Workgroup lt rob gonk qualcomm com gt From Shump lt shump eudoramail corn gt Subject add lt workgroup StationaryWVorldMail Complete VM Error writing to log file sta gt When you click the Mailbox tab messages associated with this group appear While in the ESP mailbox you can perform all the tasks and functions as in any other Eudora mailbox When you click the Folder tab a browser window appears containing the shared folder and its files When you click h the ESP menu appears From this menu you can choose to perform for the group Following is an example of an ESP Folder displaying the ESP men
382. o be junked the score you enter here is assigned to that message Trim old junk to _ You can select where they would like the Junk mail to be stored when it is removed from the Junk mailbox for example another mailbox or Trash 361 Setting Eudora Preferences Add Not Junk ed senders to address book f Put not junked senders in the address book is turned on under Junk Mail Options this option adds addresses of Not Junk ed senders into the address book entered here Important you must create an Address Book file with the same name If Mail isn t junk if sender is in an address book is selected from the Junk Mail Options list any future email from this sender is not considered junk mail Delete fetched junk from server This option removes junk ed mail from the email server if the mail is being left on the server Use Ctrl J for Junk lf this option the ctrl J hotkey maps to junking a message If this option is off ctrl J is used for manually filtering messages 362 Setting Eudora Preferences Content Concentrator Sponsored and Paid modes only You can change how the concentrated messages appear in the message window and preview pane To display the Content Concentrator options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Content Concentrator icon The Content Concentrator Options window appears Content Concentrator options window showing drop down menu Options Category
383. o choose from Just turn on the Don t auto complete just list matches option in the Auto completion window in Options under the Tools menu To turn the name auto completion feature off go to the Tools menu choose Options and then select Auto completion Turn off Address Book and History File and click OK To delete an auto completion entry e From the auto complete drop down list choose the name you want to delete and press the Delete key 41 Creating Messages Setting the Message Priority You can assign a priority to incoming and outgoing messages The priority identification is only for you and your recipients it does not affect the way mail transport systems handle the messages There are five priority levels available with 1 being the highest and 5 being the lowest Each is represented by a small symbol in the Toolbar of a message window and the Priority column of a message summary Priority 3 normal is used for messages that have no assigned priorities and it is not displayed The highest priority symbol a double caret is red the lowest priority symbol an inverted double caret is blue New messages are created with a normal priority To change the priority of the current message use the Priority drop down list Selecting a priority for a message Craig myoffice net 04 12 PM 8 13 2003 Meeting Friday 8 29 ilf lt none gt x i y A ALSS gM aT Queue z A B 7 U a 7r se Se lee s ew High Normal
384. o give attachments with the extension doc on outgoing messages the Macintosh creator of MSWD if the encoding method of the message is BinHex 422 MIME and Mapping Note that the Macintosh type from this map is empty This allows multiple types to be recognized with just one mapping This is nice for in maps because it allows you to cover a range of creator type pairs with one map You must be careful in using this type of map with an out or both mapping though because an outgoing attachment that matched this map would have a Macintosh creator but no Macintosh type Some Macintosh applications cannot open files with a missing type Microsoft Word for the Macintosh can open files without a type so this map is fine being marked both Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh is an example of a program that can t open a file with an empty type This is why there are two maps for Excel the fourth and fifth maps above The incoming map for Excel is like the one for Microsoft Word but the outgoing map explicitly defines the Macintosh type The last map shows that you can have both Macintosh creator type and MIME type subtype in one entry This map says that if an incoming message has an attachment that is encoded in MIME and has the application postscript type subtype or has a BinHex attachment with the Macintosh type of EPSF then the resulting file will have an eps extension Similarly if an outg
385. o help you catch yourself before you send a message to someone you ll wish you hadn t Browser A World Wide Web client that is able to send and receive messages using HTTP and read and format HTML documents Challenge Response Authentication Mechanism Message Digest 5 CRAM MD5 The CRAM MD5 algorithm is an encryption strategy for exchanging passwords between the Internet mail server and a client Using CRAM MD5 passwords are not sent in clear text Client A computer or software program that accesses resources over the Internet It is also an application that requests a server to perform a function In the Internet mail environment the term client indicates a mail user agent for example Eudora Content Concentrator Eudora s feature to streamline messages by hiding the quoted parts of replies and concatenating multiple messages in a thread Context menu The context menu appears when you press the right button on your mouse Context menus usually contain options that allow you to do tasks without going to the menu bar Daemon Daemons are generally server programs They run continuously and are available when clients wish to initiate a session However an SMTP daemon periodically acts as a client when it needs to forward messages that are not to be delivered locally Dialup Networking This is a specified dialup connection referred to in Windows NT 4 0 as a phonebook entry used when Eudora does any network operation This option
386. o runs on an SMTP server you can leave this field blank See Sending Mail on page 302 126 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Allow Authentication Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MDS If CRAM MD5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used See Using SMTP Authentication on page 72 Default Domain Enter the domain name that Eudora automatically adds to an unqualified name addressed in messages sent from this personality An unqualified name is a name that doesn t have an sign followed by a domain name This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain Also different personalities can be used to send messages to different domains For example you can use one personality to send work related messages to the domain myfirm com and another personality to send personal messages to the domain in your home email address or to your school account for example myschool edu Default Stationery Select the stationery to use for all outgoing messages sent from this personality from the drop down list or select lt No Default gt for no default stationery For more details about using stationery with alternate personaliti
387. of buttons and menus displayed just under the title bar It allows you to control the priority of your message override some of your default options for the current message send or queue the message and apply text styles You can select or turn off each feature for the current message by clicking a button on the toobar A feature is selected when the button is depressed and turned off when the button is raised You can set some of the defaults for the toolbar in the Sending Mail options See Sending Mail on page 302 The drop down lists and buttons on the top row of the text toolbar are described Standard 7 mme CP Priority drop down list This lets you indicate that your message is of higher or lower priority than a normal message For most messages this is just an empty box normal priority For details see Setting the Message Priority on page 42 Signature drop down list This lets you automatically append one of your signatures to the end of a message For details see Using a Signature on page 105 Attachment type drop down list This lets you select the encoding format for attachments For details see Attaching a File to a Message on page 49 Quoted Printable Encoding If this button is on quoted printable encoding is used when sending messages that contain special characters or long lines of text It is used for all plain text attachments We recommend that you always keep this feature selected Text As Att
388. of the message 2 From the formatting toolbar above your new message window click the a button 51 Creating Messages The emoticon submenu appears with the list of available emoticons g e jel Cry Foot in Mouth Kiss Undecided Whatever Money Mouth Sad J Happy D Laugh P_ Stick Out Tongue X Lips Sealed Embarrassed lt Foolish gt 0 Angry gt Evil Grin gt D lt Hug B G OSLOOHOHOROOHHE a a 8 Cool Wink O Surprise gif wi D gt Applause O Halo Xt Sick 3 From the list click on an emoticon The emoticon appears in the outgoing email message newman Re Saturday night Jerry lt feld qualcomm com gt Subject Re Saturday night Ce Bee Attached When said that he looked like a puppy dog meant it in the nicest possible way 52 Creating Messages To use the Insert Emoticon command 1 When composing a new message go to the Edit menu The menu appears below the Edit menu 2 Choose Insert Emoticon A menu appears displaying the emoticons Mailbox Message Transfer Special Tools Window Help E m AAA tg Text gt Insert gt C cry Foot in Mouth Kiss Undecided Whatever Finish Address Book Entry Ctri Insert Recipient gt Find Sort Check Spelling Ctrl 6 Message Pl
389. oing message has an attachment with the extension eps and if the MIME encoding is being used for the message then the attachment will get the application postscript MIME type subtype If the message was using the BinHex encoding then the attachment would get the Macintosh type of EPSF But what happens if an attachment matches more than one map Eudora will try and find the best match For example if you had the following Mappings section Mappings in xls XCEL in xlc XCEL XLC3 and you received a message with an attachment that had a Macintosh creator of XCEL and a Macintosh type of XLC3 a Microsoft Excel Chart then the file would get an extension of xlc since the first map only matched the Macintosh creator but the second map matched both the Macintosh creator and type Eudora can receive attachments that have both a MIME type subtype and a Macintosh creator type Eudora understands attachments with the MIME type subtype application applefile which has Macintosh creator type information embedded in it With this type of attachment Eudora will consider a match with the Macintosh creator type as a better match than a match with the MIME type subtype 423 MIME and Mapping Finally if an incoming attachment matches two different maps to the same degree e g both maps have the same MIME type subtype with different file extensions then Eudora will use the file extension in the f
390. ok 2000 It may take a long time for the migration to occur depending on the amount of mail the complexity of your settings and the size of your address book that you are importing into Eudora During the migration if the process stops because of a corrupt message you must go into your importing application and delete the corrupt message to resume the migration When the migration is occurring notice in the Mailbox window that a mailbox tree begins to form For example you will see the folder Outlook and all its mailboxes listed underneath A plus sign next to the folder name indicates that other folders mailboxes are contained within this folder Your imported settings are immediate and your mail is migrated To import from another program 1 From the File menu choose Import The Import Mail and Addresses dialog box appears 20 Import Mail and Addresses dialog box Import Mail and Addresses SR eek we import Settings Select which account you would like to import Import mail and addressbook from Main Identity someone mycompany cc icrosoft Outlook Import mail addressbook and personalities from Default Outlook Profile QuALCOM TIP In the dialog box previously shown only the programs that appear in the text box are detected Just select them choose to import your mail and address book and click OK However if you don t see the programs you want to import click A
391. ol for example bobclark janedoe inthe text box Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people For more information concerning regular expressions refer to the readme txt file in the Eudora folder or go to the following URL http Awww regular expressions info NOTE Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text matches regexp lf the specific item matches the regular expression string of characters search and display those messages is after is before Date only If the date is after or before the date displayed search and display those messages is greater than is less than Age Size Priority Attachment Count only If the specific item is greater than or less than the number indicated search and display those messages Once you have chosen the verb enter the text string that you are searching for or choose a value from the drop down list if one appears In the text box you can enter as much text as you want In the following example a username was entered 187 Organizing Your Messages Example of search criteria for a one level search s Find Messages A Search v Results Mailboxes No matches in 18 mailboxes 3 Out amp Junk GH Trash C Recent Business J Boss 9 Projects 5 Reports Personal EP Books ey Cats E Friends amp Knitting amp Online shopping amp Sailing oa 4 a Q ao v j v v
392. om Swap with Work C Primary Information 3 In this dialog box you can type postal information phone numbers and a web site address for this person All fields are optional 4 If you d like to swap the Home and Work information click Swap with Work 5 If the information listed here is this person s main information check the Primary Information box 240 Using the Address Book To enter work information 1 Click the Work tab The Work dialog box appears Work dialog box Nickname sadine C Recipient List C Bosswatch List Personal Home Work Other Notes Title P ercussionist Organization INAS Orchestra Street 17 Regents Road Address city San Diego State Province ICA Country USA Zip Postal Code 921 21 Phone 800 244 3756 Fax 800 244 3756 Mobile 800 244 3756 Web http Awanw eudora com support Swap with Home Primary Information 2 In this dialog you can type the person s work information including title company name postal address phone numbers and a web site address for this person s company All fields are optional 3 If you d like to swap the work and home dialog information click Swap with Home 4 lf the information listed here is this person s main work information check the Primary Information box To enter other information 1 Click the Other tab The Other dialog box appears 241 Using the Address Book Other dialog box
393. omery gt by way of Steve Janoff lt clarkent qualcomm com gt Subject Additional Manuals Ce Bee Attached Could you please send me ten additional manuals Roger Ron Please send Roger the manuals tomorrow if you can Thanks Steve Messages that have been redirected are identified with a diagonal arrow pointing up and right in the Status column of their message summary Other ways to redirect a message e With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window open the Personalities window right click on a personality and choose Redirect As from the Message submenu of the drop down list e Set up a filter that uses the Redirect To filter action For more information see Filtering Messages on page 161 and Filter Actions on page 170 Turbo Redirecting You can redirect a message to someone on your recipient list queue the new message without displaying it and delete the original message all with one command To do this choose the Turbo redirect by default option in the Miscellaneous options window Then when you select a recipient from the Redirect To submenu under the Message menu a turbo redirect will be performed automatically For more information see Miscellaneous on page 356 99 Receiving and Responding to Messages Redirect and Signatures When you use Redirect or Redirect To your signature is not added to the message when it is sent unless you originally created the message Eudora cons
394. on then enter that address in the field Otherwise if your provider assigns IP addresses dynamically via Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP then keep the default Server assigned IP address setting If your Internet Service Provider supports DHCP then the name server addresses will automatically be configured by DHCP and you should keep the default Server assigned name server addresses setting Otherwise select the Specify name server addresses option then enter the server addresses assigned by your Internet Service Provider Click OK to accept the TCP IP Settings changes Back in the Server Types dialog click OK to accept the changes Back in the Phonebook Entry Properties dialog click OK to accept the changes You should now be back in your Dialup Networking folder Double click on your new Phonebook entry to dial your Internet Service Provider Your modem should immediately dial the phone number defined in your Phonebook entry and Windows 98 2000 ME XP should prompt you for your username and password 430 Dialup Eudora 15 Once your modem negotiates the connection with the remote system you typically then have to log in to that remote system by entering the username and password assigned to you by your Internet Service Provider Some systems require that you first press Enter to display a login prompt then enter the username and password In any event once you are logged on authenticated some providers au
395. onditions you ve specified for this filter The three action choices are all message transfer actions they transfer the filtered message to a mailbox For messages that satisfy your match conditions your simple filter will transfer the messages to either a new mailbox an existing mailbox or your Trash mailbox Transfer to New Mailbox Select to transfer the filtered message to a new mailbox that you will specify The text field is filled in with a suggested new mailbox name based on your selected content match condition From Any Recipient or Subject You can change this name if you like The In Folder field is a label showing you the folder in which your new mailbox will be created By default this is the same folder that holds the mailbox containing the messages you ve selected The new mailbox is created as soon as you create this filter You can set the value of the In Folder field to your own desired default folders based on the chosen match condition From Any Recipient or Subject Use the three Eudora ini file entries FilterFromFolder FilterRecipFolder and FilterSubjectFolder respectively Enter the path as it appears on the mailbox window For example FilterFromFolder mail lists entertainment See Eudora ini File on page 445 Transfer to Existing Mailbox Select to transfer the filtered message into one of your existing mailboxes Select the mailbox from the button next to the field The default mailbox is the In box
396. one of the group members inviting you to join their group The Join ESP Share Group dialog box automatically appears after Eudora is done receiving the email message Join ESP Share Group Join ESP Share Group to join the test share group Would you like to join D Dawn Group Leader lt D_work myoffice com gt invites you Cancel 2 To join the group click Join If you don t want to join click Cancel 386 Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP prompts you to join the group by opening the New Group Wizard Choose a folder to store your copies of the shared documents and a mailbox to receive messages associated with the group See Creating an ESP Group on page 371 for details ESP processes the invitation adds you as a member of the group and sends an RSVP message to the member who invited you to join When the inviter s copy of ESP receives your acceptance you ll be sent a membership update message which will add the other group members to your list NOTE Until you receive an introduction from another group member ESP doesn t associate those members with you as part of the group When all introduction messages are received and answered you are a member of the group Leaving an ESP Group When you want to leave a group ESP removes the group from your list of available groups and sends a message to the other group members asking them to remove you from the group To leave a group 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups
397. ons the toolbar buttons always appear raised To see a description of each toolbar button position the mouse pointer over the button a description appears in the status bar at the lower left of the main Eudora window if the Show status bar option selected in the Display options windows If the Show toolbar tips option is selected in the Display options a toolbar tip appears when you pause the mouse pointer over a toolbar button Adding Moving and Removing Toolbar Buttons Sponsored and Paid modes only To add buttons to the main toolbar 1 Right click anywhere on the toolbar even on a button to display the drop down list 2 From the drop down list choose Customize The Customize toolbar window appears 214 Managing Windows in Eudora Customize toolbar window Customize General Mailboxes Plugins Recipients Stationery Personalities Categories Buttons e 2 o oe FBS Edit Text 2 al Message Feii z F Message Change 2 2 ES Special 5 Tools 3 Window su Help Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to any toolbar Description The Customize window contains six tabbed panels General Mailboxes Plugins Recipients Stationery and Personalities Each of these panels lets you add toolbar buttons for functions related to the tab title NOTE The procedures for adding a toolbar button from each panel are similar 3 In
398. operties Incoming Mail Personality Name Business Real Name Joe Camp Email Address jcamp myfirm com User Name jcamp SMTP Server smtp myfirm com Authentication allowed Use relay personality if defined Cluse submission port 587 Default Domain Default Stationery lt No Default gt Default Signature lt No Default gt Secure Sockets when Sending If Available STARTTLS v Last SSL Info Check Mail Following are option descriptions for the Generic Properties panel 125 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Personality Name Enter a descriptive name to describe the personality for example Business or My PC Account lt Dominant gt indicates your dominant personality Your dominant personality is your principal email account All of your initial email settings are for your dominant personality If you do not specify a personality your dominant personality is used Note that the name shown here may be different from the Real Name associated with the personality see below Real Name Enter the real name of this personality generally a first and last name The text you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this personality and identifies the source to your recipients It appears before your return address in the message header Email Address Enter the email address used in outgoing messages and
399. option you are warned if you try to delete a group of messages containing more messages than the specified number Delete a message from the Search results lIf you select this option you are warned if you try to delete messages from the Find Messages search results window Queue a message with no subject lf you select this option you are warned if you try to queue a message that contains no text in the Subject line It is considered a point of email etiquette to give each message a subject Queue a message bigger than _ K default 500 If you select this option you are warned if you try to queue or send a message that is greater in size than the specified number This number must be between 0 and 1000000 one million no commas This size includes messages and attachments Quit with messages queued to be sent lf you select this option you are warned if you try to quit Eudora while there are still queued messages in your Out mailbox Empty the Trash mailbox lf you select this option you are warned if you try to empty the Trash mailbox one way is using the Special menu Empty Trash command Once messages are deleted from the Trash they are completely gone from your system Start Eudora and it s not the default mailer lIf you select this option you are warned if you try to start Eudora when it s not the default mailer When Eudora is the default mailer lt mailto gt commands open a Eudora message regardless of what app
400. or more information 4 To exit the dialog box click Close Registering Eudora If you are using Eudora in Paid mode you need to register to be eligible for technical support Also you need to be registered to upgrade to newer version of Eudora and stay in Paid mode See subscription information at www eudora com email subscription_fag html If you don t register and or use Eudora in Sponsored or Light mode you are not eligible for technical support NOTE If you switch from one mode to another you must register in that mode even though you registered in your previous mode For example if you are a Paid mode registered user and you wish to get a refund and use Sponsored mode you must reregister in Sponsored mode To register your copy of Eudora 1 From the Help menu choose Payment amp Registration The Payment and Registration window appears 2 Inthe Keeping Current section click Register with Us Eudora takes you to Eudora s registration web page 3 Enter your information click Submit Registration An email will be sent to you confirming your registration Technical Support For information on Eudora s basic functions refer to the procedures provided in this guide and to your online help which you can access from the Eudora Help menu 27 Introducing Eudora Email Many common issues can be solved by visiting the Eudora technical support web site www eudora com techsupport win The technical support web site
401. ority popup 81 Retrieve From Server Fetch button 81 Subject field 81 Tow Truck icon 80 Incoming option 166 Indent In button 36 Indent Out button 37 Insert Emoticon 280 Insert Object button 37 47 Insert Picture command 404 Insert Recipient submenu 253 280 Insert submenu 47 280 Insert System Configuration command 290 Inserting objects in outgoing message text 47 Installed Message Plug ins dialog 286 408 Installing ESP 370 Internet dialup options 307 Internet directory definition 486 Internet e mail server how to obtain 425 Internet Engineering Task Force definition 486 Internet Explorer 82 Internet Message Access Protocol 410 Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP definition 486 Internet Service Provider defintion 486 Internet definition 486 intersects nickname option 168 IP address definition 486 is not option 168 is option 168 ISP definition 486 Italic command 45 Italics button 35 J Java definition 486 Junk command 281 283 284 Junk Mail Extra options 361 Junk Mail options 359 Junk mailbox filtering incoming mail 176 Junk menu option 176 Junk Score field in Filters 168 K Keep copies how to enter in Options 306 Keep Copy button 72 Kerberos 426 Kerberos options 349 Kerberos definition 486 Key stroke shortcuts 397 L Label column 143 Labels Index how to assign to messages 143 Labels options 331 Launch a program from a message how to enter in Options 342 LDAP Database 270 LDAP protocol
402. ou stop typing for the amount of time indicated here If the you set the time for 5 seconds Eudora delivers your mail if you stop typing for at least 5 seconds This field is beneficial if you don t want to be interrupted too frequently while using Eudora If the number in this field is large you ll get fewer interruptions Bring error window to front Select this option to have the Task Error window brought to the front when an error occurs Bring task status window to front Select this option to have the Task Status window brought to the front when a task occurs for example sending or receiving mail 338 Setting Eudora Preferences Automation The Automation options let you control and exchange information with Eudora from other programs that support the Windows Automation Interface such as Microsoft Visual Basic These options give you external access to Eudora mail folders mailboxes and messages and to the Eudora application itself With automation enabled you can create delete and move Eudora mail folders mailboxes and messages as well as get notification of these three operations when they are performed manually You can also get lists of the subfolders under folders and of the messages within mailboxes For more information on the automation feature see the following Web site click the following URL http eudora qualcomm com developers where you can find up to date automation SDKs Software Developer s Kits an
403. ou to suspicious URLs in messages Server An entity that provides a network service A server can be hardware such as a file server software such as a mail server or services Such as a transportation service A mail server is a program that accepts relays and delivers mail Shared folder This is a folder that allows multiple users to receive mail in the same directory Because all members of a shared folder can access messages in the shared folder it is not necessary to duplicate the same message for multiple users Only IMAP clients such as Eudora can access shared folders ESP Eudora Sharing Protocol users can also share folders 488 Glossary Signature A signature is a few lines of text automatically added to the end of an outgoing message when it is sent A signature can be whatever you want but it is mostly used to give contact information telephone address etc You only use one signature at atime ina message Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP SMTP is a protocol widely implemented on the Internet for exchanging email messages SMTP is also called an Outgoing server Secure Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions S MIME A specification for secure email messages allowing authentication digital signatures and privacy encryption SMTP AUTH SMTP AUTH authenticates messages that are sent This operates automatically in Eudora The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MD5 is not available
404. our recipient s default font size is larger than yours and you send a message with text set to Humongous your recipient will see text even more humongous than yours Left Right Center Align the selected or current paragraph to the left the right or the center of the current indent Margins Indent In Indent Out Indent the selected or current paragraph s left margin in one level or outdent the left margin remove one level of indent You must have text highlighted to activate this option Bulleted List Convert the selected text to a bulleted list or begin a bulleted list at the insertion point Make Hyperlink Convert the selected piece of text or the selected graphic to a clickable underlined hyperlink to a URL you specify when your recipient clicks the hyperlink he or she is immediately taken to the URL You must select text or a graphic to activate this option Clear Formatting Clear all formatting and go back to the default settings This option is not active if you have no formatting in your message 45 Creating Messages Insert Object Insert objects in the body of a composition message Includes the commands Picture insert an embedded graphic file Downloadable Picture inserts a link to a graphic on a web server and Horizontal Line insert a horizontal rule as a separator Other Formatting Options If you select the Word Wrap button in the message toolbar a carriage
405. ow Eudora uses your current Replying settings If the Reply to all By default setting is turned on the new entry will include all of the recipients of the message plus the sender However if the nclude yourself setting is turned off and the current message is an incoming message your address is not included in the new entry Creating a Group from the Address Book You can take several of your existing nicknames and group them together under one composite nickname For example you can quickly combine your Family Friends and School nicknames under a composite nickname called Everybody The Everybody entry contains the nicknames Family Friends and School rather than their expanded email addresses However if you address a new outgoing message to Everybody it will be sent to all of the email addresses contained in the Family Friends and School entries To make entries from the Address Book 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book Or if the Address Book is in a group of tabbed windows click its tab The Address Book window appears 2 Choose several different entries in the entry list hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence or the Ctrl key to make nonsequential selections 3 From the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry The Make Address Book Entry dialog appears 248 Using the Address Book Make Address Book Entry dialog box Make Address Book Entry Personal Information Nickname
406. owing in the address book window e You can also start typing in the list of entries and the appropriate entry is selected when you enter enough unique characters to identify it To page up and down in the list of entries use the arrow keys To resize the list drag the divider e To move the keyboard focus back and forth between the left and right sides of the Address Book press F6 e To move quickly through the tabbed panels on the right side of the Address Book use the Ctrl Tab Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn Ctrl Home and Ctrl End keys Printing Your Address Book To print your Address Book entries e While the Address Book is opened from the File menu choose Print 234 Using the Address Book Searching for Your Address Book Entries To search for entries in your address book 1 With your address book open press Ctrl Shift F or from the Edit menu choose Text then Find Text 2 In Find dialog enter the nickname of the person you are searching for That person s entry appears Creating an Address Book within your Address Book Sponsored and Paid modes only To create an address book within your Address Book 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book or press Ctrl L Or if the Address Book is an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab 2 Click New Book The New Address Book dialog box appears New Address Book dialog box New Address Book Name the new address book 28 a cor
407. ox to create a new mailbox and transfer the current message s into that mailbox all in one step You can specify to create the mailbox only and not transfer the messages Your Mailboxes Transfer the current message s into the selected mailbox that you have created or into a new mailbox that you create Below the New command on the Transfer menu all of your top level mailboxes are listed followed by all of your top level mail folders Mail folders can contain other mail folders as well as mailboxes Navigate through the menu system to transfer the current message s to a mailbox that resides within a folder or to create a new mailbox within that folder and transfer the current message s into that mailbox all in one step using the New command on the folder submenu 284 Using Menu Commands Special Menu This menu lets you use additional Eudora functions Special menu Tools Window Help Filter Messages Ctrl J Make Filter Make Address Book Entry Ctrl K Add as Recipient Remove Recipient Empty Trash Compact Mailboxes Forget Password s Message Plug ins Settings Filter Messages Filter the open message or the selected message s against all the manual filters in your Filters list Useful for filtering messages after you have received them especially after creating new filters Make Filter Open the Make Filter dialog box to create a simple transfer filter based on information in the open message or the
408. p Rest Siops filtering for the message The message is not matched to the rest of the filters in the filter list Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only When searching for messages or defining a filter in Eudora an option you can use is regular expressions Following is a description of regular expressions and how they are used in Eudora There are two functions in Eudora where you can use regular expressions Filters window Located in the drop down list where you indicate the relationship between a mail header and a piece of text for example the Subject contains Eudora Any Recipient is joe xyz com and so on There are two regular expression criteria in that list namely matches RegEx and matches RegEx case insensitive Find Messages window Located in the center drop down list The option matches regexp appears In the Find Messages window regexp is not case sensitive There are various standard implementations of regular expressions but Eudora uses the POSIX implementation Following are symbols that are supported in Eudora Symbol Character representation period represents any one character brackets contain a set of characters from which a match can be made It corresponds to one character in the search string backslash is an escape character which means that the next character will not have a special meaning 2 asterisk is a multiplier It will match zero or mor
409. plying option to turn the option on See Replying on page 309 Note that if you open a new message with stationery or if you have default stationery set for all new messages then the signature stored with that stationery file is the one used with the new message overriding any default signature However you can always make the final decision about what signature to send with a new message by choosing it from the Signature drop down on the message toolbar For more information on stationery see the next section Using Stationery Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Stationery files are templates for outgoing messages If you find yourself repeatedly sending the same message save the message as a stationery file and send it whenever you need to with the New Message With or Reply With commands This way you don t have to copy and paste text into a message you can just open a pre written message and edit it as necessary Stationery Window Stationery files are created and managed from the Stationery window You can also open a new stationery message from the Stationery window To open the Stationery window e From the Tools menu choose Stationery Or if the Stationery window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab 109 Using Signatures and Stationery Sample Stationery window Stationery Thank you Welcome We re sorry The Stationery window displays a single column list of your stat
410. position window sorts by Who column in table of contents window Sorts by Who column reversed in table of contents window Opens the Transfer Menu Jumps to From line in Composition window 399 Alt S Alt T AIt U AIt V AIt Shift V AIt W AIt X Arrows Enter Space Esc Delete F1 F2 F3 AIt F3 F5 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Opens the Special Menu Opens the Tools Menu Jumps to Subject line in Composition window Sorts by server status in table of contents window Sorts by reversed server status in table of contents window Opens the Window Menu Opens the Mailbox Menu Moves from one message to another in a mailbox depends on your settings in Miscellaneous Options Selects the outlined button in any dialog alert or window opens the selected messages or open edit the selected item s or opens the attachment on the cursor line Opens a selected message summary or close the current message For long messages scrolls the message down one page Stops any operation currently in progress Deletes the selected text or item Displays help and context sensitive help Renames the selected item in a tool window e g the Mailboxes window or the Address Book Finds again Enters the selected text in the Find window Refreshes the view in the File Browser window 400 F6 Ctrl Alt F6 F7 Home End Page Up Page
411. pt with the Redirect or Send Again commands The message toolbar in the composition window is set according to how the stationery message was saved regardless of how the options below are set But you can always change them after you open the message See Creating New Stationery on page 111 305 Setting Eudora Preferences When not using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only The values you choose for the following options apply only when you are not using a default stationery file that is when the Select a default Stationery for new messages option above is set to lt No Default gt if you have selected a default stationery file from the drop down list then the values below are ignored Instead Eudora uses their corresponding values that were set when the stationery file was saved So for example if you choose default stationery that uses a custom signature and you set the default signature drop down list below to your Standard signature your Standard signature will be ignored and the custom signature will be used Word wrap lf you select this option Eudora automatically inserts carriage returns in long lines when a message is sent creating roughly 76 characters per line This makes the message legible on the recipient s computer It is a good idea not to include your own carriage returns within paragraphs if you have this option on Use carriage returns only to create new paragraphs We strongly recommend that you l
412. ptions dialog The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small Small Medium Large Larger Very Large and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window FontSizeTableSmall 7 9 10 12 16 22 Font sizes used for displaying text in the built in non 28 FontSizeTableSmallest 7 8 9 10 12 16 24 ForceSaveForStatistics 0 Microsoft viewer They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small Small Medium Large Larger Very Large and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window Font sizes used for displaying text in the built in non Microsoft viewer They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small Small Medium Large Larger Very Large and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window Forces the saving of the Statistics info even if the disk drive is spun out 453 Entry Default Value GssDIIName gssapi32 dll GuessParagraphs 0 HTMLInPlainText 0 IdleTime 60 IgnoreEMSDelete 0 IgnoreldleOnManualCh 0 eck ImaplgnoreUIDPLUS 0 IMAPLeafMenu 0 IMAPPort 143 IMAPPreviewPane 1 IMAPRemoveOnDelete 0 ImapSupportEMSAPI 1 IncludeHeaders 0 IncludeSigForward 1 Eudora ini File Description For a user to specify the GSS K5 DLL name Guess Paragraphs
413. r in Options 319 508
414. r leave spelling errors in the message a dialog box appears asking you if you still want to send or queue the message If you don t want that dialog box to be displayed turn on the Don t warn me anymore option in the Spell Checking options To check the spelling of a current composition window text file or signature file click Check Spelling in the main window toolbar or choose Check Spelling from the Edit menu Ctrl 6 If there are no misspellings the No misspellings found alert appears For an alternate way to check your spelling use the ShifttCheck Spelling option on the Eudora main window toolbar which lets you see all misspelled words at once and change only those you want to See Saving a Message for Later Changes on page 65 Also if text is selected Eudora checks the spelling only of the selected text Otherwise it starts the spelling check from the beginning of the message body or text file and checks the entire text If a misspelled unknown or repeated word is found the Check Spelling dialog box appears with the word listed in the Unknown field If you want to send or queue the message without correcting the misspelled word click Just send The following dialog box appears only if the Warn me when sending queueing message with misspellings option is turned on See Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 324 Check Spelling dialog box Check Spelling Unknown seperate Change To S lanore a
415. r new mail at any time e From the File menu choose Check Mail or click 29 Any account that has the Check Mail option turned on in the Account Settings dialog box is checked If you haven t successfully entered your password since opening the Eudora program a prompt appears for each personality being checked A Task Status window can also appear indicating retrieval of your incoming mail See Task Status Window on page 225 74 Sending Messages and Checking Mail Stopping a Mail Check To stop a mail check in the middle of the process 1 On the Eudora status bar right click on the progress indicator or envelope A drop down context menu appears Task indicator s context menu Stop All Tasks Go offline Show Task Status 2 From the drop down list choose Stop All Tasks to stop the mail check To resume mail check right click on the progress indicator and choose Process All Waiting Tasks Using Your Password Each time you open Eudora and check mail for the first time you need to enter a password for each incoming mail account that you have This password is required by the incoming mail server before it will transfer your mail so that no one else can get your mail from the server NOTE This does not protect your mail once it is on your computer Unless a message has been sent with some type of security it is just plain text which many applications can read If you are interested in securing the messages on yo
416. r the In mailbox or a mailbox already assigned to another group Click Next The Share Group Folder dialog box appears 374 Eudora Sharing Protocol Group Folder dialog box New ESP Share Group Wizard _ Share Group Folder Please choose a folder where files for this share group will live Click Next to accept the creation of a folder with the suggested name and location Use New Folder Eudora Documents In Folder C Documents and Settings Administrator My Documents ESP groups Use Existing Folder An existing folder must not be assigned to any other share group or be inside of a folder assigned to any other share group lt Back Cancel Help 8 Do one of the following e lf you want to create a new folder to store all group files choose Use New Folder and type the name of the folder in the text box e lf you want to create a new folder in a location other than the one shown under Use New Folder switch to My Computer or Windows Explorer create the folder and switch back to Eudora Choose Use Existing Folder to navigate to the folder you ve just created then choose it e lf you want to store all group files in an existing folder choose Use Existing Folder and click the long gray button A list of your existing folders appears Click one of the folders and to enter it in the field click OK NOTE You can t use a folder already assigned to a group or a folder that s inside of another folder alread
417. rating to use when replying to multiple messages Choices Terse Compact None If 1 will only concentrate messages with matching subjects or senders Warn the user when they are replying to more than this number of messages Text for Content Concentrator to use in subject line Type of content concentrating to use when viewing a message in a preview pane Choices Terse Compact None 450 Entry Default Value ConnectionStatusCache 2000 Time ConvertFormatFlowed to Excerpt CtrlJMapping 1 0 DaysBetweenJunkAge 1 Off DeleteAttachedVCFs DeleteFetchedJunk DesDIIName DisableStatistics DoPluginCompletion EditAllHeaders EnrichedSoftLine EudoraPassPort 0 des32 dll 72 106 Eudora ini File Description Time in milliseconds that Eudora will cache the online status before checking with the system again which can help with some setups where checking the online status can be very intensive Turns the format flowed feature on and off Specifies which menu the Ctrl J key sequence is mapped to If O user has not specified which menu If 1 Ctrl J will be mapped to the Junk menu If 2 Ctrl J will be mapped to Filter Messages The number of days to wait before checking if any junk is old enough to trim Deletes any attachment with a VCF extension vCard files which can be handy if people who send you lots of messages have their email client set up to automatically attach their vC
418. rches for specific text within a single message multiple messages or even multiple mailboxes To display the Find submenu of commands e From the Edit menu choose Find 179 Organizing Your Messages Find submenu under the Edit menu Find Text Clit Sort Find Messages Ctrl F Finding Text Within One Message To search for text within a single message 1 Open a message 2 From the Edit menu choose Find or in an open message or in the preview pane press Ctrl Shift F 3 From the Find submenu choose Find Text The Find dialog box appears with the blinking insertion point located in the text field Find dialog box F Match whole word only Cancel Match case 4 Inthe text field type the text you want to find 5 Check Match whole word only to match the text as whole word not embedded in another word Check Match case to match the case of the entered text 6 When finished click the Find Next button 7 To continue searching in the same message for the next occurrence of the text click the Find Next button in the Find dialog box or choose the Find Text Again command from the Find submenu These commands are equivalent and limit the search to the same message Repeating these commands cycles through the matches in the open message only Starting at the cursor s current position in the message Eudora searches the current message for the specified text If no match is found the not
419. rd a message e With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window open the Personalities window right click on a personality and choose Forward As from the Message submenu of the drop down list e Set up a filter that uses the Forward To filter action For more information see Filtering Messages on page 161 and Filter Actions on page 170 Redirecting a Message Incoming messages can be sent to a new recipient by way of you maintaining the original sender s address in the From field You should redirect a message that should have gone to someone else To redirect the current message e From the Message menu choose Redirect or click 2 98 Receiving and Responding to Messages A new message window appears with the original sender s address in the From field with the statement by way of followed by your real name and or return address the original sender s text in the message body and the original attachments in the Attached field Make any changes you want and enter the recipient s address in the To field The message can then be sent or saved for further changes NOTE You may want to enclose any changes in brackets so that you don t confuse the recipient about who wrote what Redirected message E docs qualcomm com Additional Manuals Standard bd me v re eaegyh oY Send iA B I Uae amp rr es ob oF To docs qualcomm corm Roger Montgomery lt rmontg
420. re it is not sufficient to copy the EUMAPI DLL and EUMAPI32 DLL Eudora DLL files into the Windows SYSTEM directory alongside the standard Microsoft MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL files For client applications to find the Eudora MAPI DLLs the DLL files must be named MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL This creates a conflict since most Windows installations will have the MAPI DLL and MAPI32 DLL files preinstalled in the Windows SYSTEM directory to support Microsoft Exchange 415 MAPI Technical Report NOTE Eudora is able to swap the Eudora EUMAPI and EUMAPI82 DLLs with the Microsoft MAPI and MAPI32 DLLs when the user launches Eudora and is able to unswap the Eudora MAPI DLLs when the user exits Eudora This approach gives the user the most flexibility and preserves the user s ability to use Microsoft Exchange and or Microsoft Fax when Eudora is not running If we permanently install the Eudora MAPI DLLs over the existing Microsoft MAPI DLLs then applications such as the Microsoft Fax service bundled with Microsoft Exchange which rely on the Microsoft MAPI DLLs will no longer work This is clearly unacceptable for users who need to use MAPI for both Microsoft Exchange and Eudora Eudora MAPI Startup Procedure When launched Eudora runs the following swap procedure when the user has selected either the Always or the When Eudora is running MAPI Server option in Eudora see MAPI Technical Report on page 413 for more information
421. red by x Indexing Content Concentrator A Only use Re Index Email if Fast indexed search is not working correctly BossWatch Show index update progress in Task Status Window e when more than 100 updates are pending cates oy Find Messages Searching Include deleted IMAP messages in search results Logging TaskjError windows gt at Sandahl Use fast indexed search powered by X1 This setting turns on the indexed search capabilities within Eudora If this setting is turned off Eudora will revert to the slower old style search Index Now Click this button to go through all mailboxes to update the existing index Re Index Email Click this button to discard current index files and begin indexing Eudora mail NOTE You should only need to use Index Now and Re Index Email buttons if indexed search is not working properly Most users should never need to use these buttons 367 Setting Eudora Preferences Show index update progress in Task Status window when more than _ updates are pending If this option is checked Eudora will will show a message in the Task Status window when there are more index updates to process than the number specified Default setting is 100 Include deleted IMAP messages in search results Ilf this option is checked Eudora will display deleted IMAP messages in the search results if those messages match the search criteria even though the IMAP ma
422. remembers the previous criteria if you close and reopen the Find Messages dialog box The drop down and verb lists displaying the criteria you can select are shown below 182 Organizing Your Messages Find Messages drop down and verb options lists Find Messages w contains E Friends amp F Knitting amp Online shopping amp Sailing amp Stocks 3 In the drop down criteria list Anywhere is the default choose where in the message you want Eudora to search for text Following is a description of each option Anywhere Choose this option to search everywhere in the message including all header fields and message body This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on Headers Choose this option to search only in the header fields of the message This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on Body Choose this option to search only in the body of the message Attachment Name s Choose this option to search only attachment names in the message Summary Choose this option to search text entered in only the header From and Subject fields of the message 183 Organizing Your Messages Status Choose this option to search for messages by status A status drop down options list displays the default is Unread You can choose from Unread Read Repli
423. resize the columns drag the divider line to the right of the desired column to the left or right Note that the columns resize dynamically during a query to accommodate the width of each target s data The Status field displays the status of your query such as Ready Connecting Getting Data etc and the number of items found as shown in your summary list This number is updated dynamically until the query is complete or you stop it If the results list does not fit in the available viewing space scroll bars appear to let you navigate through the remaining part of the list To view the details of a result in the details pane select the result in the results list by clicking once on it The full data appears in the details pane If nothing is selected in the results list the details pane is blank If multiple summaries are selected in the results list the details pane lists the details for each item with each item separated by a divider line To select multiple items in the results list use the Shift key to select a continuous range or use the Ctrl key to make non consecutive selections Scroll bars appear in the details pane if the displayed information cannot fit in the viewing space 260 Using Directory Services Addressing a Message from the Directory Services Window You can create and address a message with the query results in the Directory Services window To create a new message NOTE Make sure there are no outgoin
424. return is automatically inserted at the end of each line of text with roughly 76 characters per line when the message is sent This makes the message legible on your recipient s computer It is a good idea not to include your own carriage returns within paragraphs if you have the Word Wrap option selected Use carriage returns only to create new paragraphs in the message To manually wrap text 1 Select and highlight the text you want to wrap 2 From the Edit menu choose Wrap Selection e To unwrap text select the text you want then hold down the Shift key and from the Edit menu choose Wrap Selection e To copy wrapped text without taking the carriage returns that is to copy and unwrap hold down the Shift key and choose Copy from the Edit menu Using Format Painter Sponsored and Paid modes only By using Format Painter you can copy text and paragraph styles from one place to another To copy styles 1 Select or click in the text whose styles you want to copy 2 Click the Format Painter button on the toolbar The cursor changes to an I beam with a paintbrush indicating that Format Painter is turned on 3 By clicking the word or highlighting the text the style is immediately applied when you release the mouse button 46 Creating Messages The style of the text such as font size color bold italic underlined etc as well as the paragraph styles such as alignment bullets indenting etc are copied 4 Clic
425. reviewHeadersMaxLin 4 This is designed to keep preview pane headers to a minimum es PreviewMultiDelay PreviewSingleDelay This is most often used to control large To or Cc headers where someone inserts a large number of individual addresses 500 The number of milliseconds to delay before refreshing the preview display if a multiple messages are selected 250 The number of milliseconds to delay before refreshing the preview display if a single message is selected 459 Entry PreviewSplitterPos PreviewTableEnd Preview TableRowEnd PreviewTableRowStart PreviewTableStart PrintHeaders Progressldle Eudora ini File Default Value Description 0 If non zero then if a mailbox hasn t already specified a position for the splitter between the message list and the preview pane then the splitter will be positioned this many pixels from the top of the mailbox window lt table gt r n HTML markup for the end of the table that s used to display the headers in a preview pane lt td gt lt tr gt r n_ HTML markup for the end of the table row that s used to display the headers in a preview pane Each header appears in a separate row of the table lt tr bgcolor s HTML markup for the start of the table row that s used to text s gt lt td gt r display the headers in a preview pane Each header appears n in a separate row of the table lt table HTML markup for the beginning of the table that s used to
426. revious day week month or year To display the Statistics options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Statistics icon The Statistics options window appears Statistics options window Options Category Kerberos H MoodWatch y il Count IMAP messages in Inbox only Statistics K Reset Statistics Miscellaneous 3 Junk Mail rk Mal eres y Choose the settings you want to change Settings are described below Series This column lists the different timeframes displayed in the Statistics window Current refers to the current day week month or year as selected in the Statistics window Previous refers to the previous day week month or year as selected in the Statistics window Average is the cumulative average that occurs on a day to day basis For example if you choose to view your statistics for each day the current graph would be today and the previous graph would be yesterday The average graph would indicate the cumulative average since you began keeping statistical information in Eudora 354 Setting Eudora Preferences Color Choose the color you wish to represent the current previous and average criteria Graph Type Choose the graph type you prefer to display for the current previous and average criteria The graph type you choose will appear in the color you chose in the Color column The graph types you can choose are a line a sol
427. rge giving a summary for the attachments in the message If UsePOPSend is on Eudora will send mail using the POP3 extended command XTND XMIT Since this is an optional command for POP3 many POPS servers do not support this command Berkeley s popper however does There are pros and cons to using POP3 to send your mail It provides a level of security since it requires a username password pair to send mail messages unlike SMTP It is faster than SMTP especially when checking for new mail at the same time It doesn t check for valid recipients until the entire message is sent and some implementations Berkeley s popper for example won t tell you which recipients are invalid and will send the message to the valid recipients anyway If off Eudora will never attempt to use QuickTime to display images Useful for situations where QuickTime is causing instability in the system If this is1 junk mail will automotically be placed in the Junk mailbox Filename of user defined list of words to change when spell checking If this is 1 sending messages for all personalities will use the SMTP settings for the relay personality Filename of user defined list of words to ignore when spell checking Filename of user defined list of words to suggest when spell checking If this is 1 the user will be warned before old junk is trimmed User supplied list of extra file extensions that Eudora should warn when trying to launch an attachm
428. rimary account The number you enter here specifies the number of minutes between automatic mail checks It s a good idea to set this at no less than 15 minutes Checking mail more frequently may overwork your incoming mail server This option only works when Eudora is running Entering 0 in this field turns off automatic mail checking Don t check without a network connection lf you select this option Eudora will not attempt to retrieve mail unless you are connected to a network Don t check when using battery lIf you select this option and your PC is running on battery power mail is not automatically checked even if automatic mail checking is selected that is the Check for mail every _ minute s field has a number greater than zero in it Send on check If you select this option any messages that are queued in the Out mailbox are sent when a mail check is performed whether the mail check is automatic or manual If this is turned off messages queued in the Out box are not sent during a mail check Secure Sockets when Receiving Use the drop down menu to choose a SSL security setting for your dominant personality when receiving messages Following is a description of each option on the SSL drop down menu Never Do not use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security even if SSL is available on the server If Available STARTTLS default Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having E
429. rk Other Notes Full Name Malcolm Reynolds 250 Using the Address Book 4 From the drop down list choose Add to BossWatch List The entry s nickname is added to the BossWatch List and the entry is displayed with a red exclamation point in the Address Book list To remove an entry from the list 1 Open the Address Book 2 Click to select the desired entry in your Nickname list oo Right click the item to display the drop down list A From the drop down list choose Remove From BossWatch List The entry s nickname is removed from the BossWatch List and the entry s icon no longer displays a red exclamation point in the Address Book list Including Nicknames on the Recipient List To include a nickname in the Recipient List 1 Right click the appropriate Address Book entry in the list to display the drop down list 2 From the drop down list choose Add to BossWatch List The nickname for the selected entry is included on the BossWatch List and the entry is displayed with a red exclamation point in the Address Book list To remove a nickname from the BossWatch List 1 Right click the item in the Address Book list to display the drop down list 2 From the drop down list choose Remove From BossWatch List The nickname for the selected entry is removed from the BossWatch List and the entry s icon no longer displays a red exclamation point in the Address Book list You can add or remove multiple nickna
430. rmatting Ctrl Drag window or toolbar Temporarily suspends docking while dragging a dockable window or the main toolbar Alt Drag toolbar button Moves the button on the toolbar 396 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Eudora Shortcuts The shortcuts for Eudora functions are as follows Ctrl 0 Ctrl 1 Ctrl 6 Ctrl Ctrl gt Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl A Ctrl B Ctrl C Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl F Ctrl Shift F Ctrl H Ctrl 1 Ctrl J Ctrl Shift J Opens Out mailbox Opens In mailbox Checks spelling Pastes as quotation Adds one level of quotes Removes one level of quotes Finishes address book entry nickname Selects all Makes text bold Copies to clipboard Deletes Sends immediately or Queues for delivery Opens Find Messages window Opens Find Text dialog box Attaches document Makes text italic Filters messages OR filters Junk mail messages Filters a message out of the Junk mailbox into the designated mailbox 397 Ctrl K Ctrl L Ctrl M Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl R Ctrl Shift R Ctrl S Ctrl T Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Shift Y Ctrl Z Ctrl tab Shift F4 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Makes address book entry nickname Opens Address Book Checks mail Open
431. rned when you queue it Message is probably offensive Turn this option on to set MoodWatch to a medium sensitivity level If your message has some content that looks like it is offensive two chili peppers appearing you will be warned when you queue it Message is on fire Turn this option on to set MoodWatch to a low sensitivity level If your message has some content that is offensive three chili peppers appearing you will be warned when you queue it Never tTurn this option on to never display a warning in your outgoing messages despite offensive text in its content Delay when queuing sending The following options allow you to delay sending an offending message giving you time to cool off During the delay period you can either delete the message or send it After the delay period is over your message will be sent Message seems like it might be offensive Turn this option on to delay a message to be sent when MoodWatch is at its most sensitive level If your message has some content that looks like it might be offensive one chili pepper or more appearing your message will sit in your Out box for ten minutes before Eudora sends it Message is probably offensive Turn this option on to set MoodWatch to a medium sensitivity level If your message has some content that looks like it is offensive two chili peppers or more appearing your message will sit in your Out box for ten minutes before Eudora sends it Mes
432. rnet Service Provider Also select your modem in the drop down list Then click Next In the edit box enter the phone number for your Internet Service Provider Then click Next 429 10 11 12 13 14 Dialup Eudora Click Finish on the last page of the New Connection Wizard to complete the creation of the Phonebook entry In the Dialup Networking folder right click on the icon for the Phonebook entry you have just created and select the Properties command While testing your new Phonebook entry configure Dialup Networking to display a terminal window after your modem has connected to the remote computer To do this click the Configure button to display the modem configuration properties Select the Options tab then check the Bring up terminal window after dialing option Click OK to accept the change Back in the Properties dialog for your Phonebook entry click the Server Type button to display the Server Types dialog In the Type of Dial Up Server drop down list select either SLIP or PPP as appropriate Also uncheck the NetBEUI and IPX network protocols but make sure that the TCP IP protocol is checked Finally uncheck the Log on to network and Enable software compression options In the Server Types dialog click the TCP IP Settings button to display the TCP IP Settings dialog If your Internet Service Provider has assigned you a specific static IP address select the Specify an IP address opti
433. ropriate charset e g USASCII Controls whether or not the X Attachment header should be sent out with outgoing messages that contains attachments 462 Entry Default Value SeparateMSHTMLSetti 0 ngs ShowAttachmentlicons 1 ShowMeTheErrors ShowProgress 0 1 ShowProgresslnactive 0 ShowSelectedSummary 0 Count ShowTipOfTheDay SMTPAuthAllowed SMTPAuthBanished SmtpAuthK5INI SMTPAuthRequired SMTPPort SMTPRecipientWrap 0 CRAM MD5 25 72 Eudora ini File Description Controls whether Eudora keeps its settings for the MS Viewer in a different part of the registry so that they don t conflict with IE or any other app that uses MSHTLML which can be handy for having the default font size be different in Eudora than in IE Controls whether or not icons representing attachments should be shown in the body of the message Controls whether or not to show the error dialog immediately on send receive errors By default errors are listed in the Task Errors window and that window is brought to the foreground Show hide the Progress window If Eudora is not the foreground application this controls whether the Progress window should be shown or not Adds an extra number to the beginning of the numbers listed in the compact button in the lower left corner of the mailbox summary display that shows how many message summaries are currently selected in that mailbox Determines wheth
434. rt Why doesn t Eudora talk directly to your addressee s computer For one thing it would take a lot longer for your mail to leave your computer because your computer would have to call up each addressee s computer and deliver your mail For another some computers are hard to find it s much better to let another computer hunt for your addressee than to make your computer do it Finally sometimes your addressee s computer won t be available when you want to send mail The SMTP server handles this by holding your mail until the other computer is ready to accept it eliminating the inconvenience of having unsent messages hanging around on your computer Incoming Mail When somebody sends you mail other computers use the SMTP protocol to deliver the mail to your POP or IMAP server Your POP or IMAP server puts mail in your mail drop where it stays until the Eudora program picks it up When you check your mail Eudora uses POP version 3 or IMAP version 4 to pick up your mail and move it to your computer Why doesn t Eudora use SMTP to receive your mail SMTP works best when the computers it Knows about are always ready for mail Unless you wanted to run Eudora 24 hours per day seven days a week SMTP wouldn t work very well for you It also doesn t work well in lab environments where you might use any number of different computers More Information If you want to Know more about the Internet in general consult
435. rt section of this manual This is a problem for people who speak languages other than American English and so need accented characters or non American English letters or for people who want to use special symbols like the bullet MIME provides a way around this restriction It offers two encodings quoted printable and pase64 These encodings use US ASCII character codes to represent any sort of data you like including special characters or even non text data Quoted printable is used for data that is mostly text but has special characters or very long lines Quoted printable looks just like regular text except when a special character is used The special character is replaced with an and two more characters that represent the character code of the special character So a bullet in quoted printable looks like 95 However there are some other things that quoted printable does For one since it uses an to mean something special equals signs must themselves be encoded as 3D Second no line in quoted printable is allowed to be more than 76 characters long If your mail has a line longer than 76 characters the quoted printable encoding will break your line in two and put an at the end of the first line to signal to the mail reader at the other end that the two lines are really supposed to be one Finally a few mail systems either add or remove spaces from the ends of lines So in quoted pr
436. rtcut icon and press F2 or just click on the shortcut label twice slowly 434 Dialup Eudora To create a Phonebook shortcut under Windows NT 4 x 1 Open the Dialup Networking tool click the More button and select the Create shortcut to entry item 2 Choose a name for the shortcut in the Save dialog then save the shortcut to your Desktop folder To test the Dialup Networking connection double click on the shortcut icon on your Desktop Once your Phonebook entry successfully and automatically creates a TCP IP connection to your Internet Service Provider you are ready to configure Eudora to automatically dial the Phonebook entry Configuring Eudora to Auto Dial the Phonebook Entry If you connect to your Internet Service Provider with a modem you can easily configure Eudora to automatically dial on demand using Microsoft Dialup Networking Eudora only needs a connection to your provider when performing network operations such as checking or sending mail or when performing a directory services lookup When Eudora is configured to auto dial it automatically hangs up the connection when the network operation is complete Before you can configure Eudora to auto dial you must create and configure a Microsoft Dialup Networking Phonebook entry to automatically connect to your Internet Service Provider see the procedures above To auto dial a Dialup Networking Phonebook entry start Eudora select Options from the Tool
437. ructions for editing signature files appear after the procedure below To create a new signature 1 From the Tools menu choose Signatures or click the Signature window s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group Right click anywhere inside the Signature window to select the drop down context menu From the context menu choose New 106 6 7 Using Signatures and Stationery Eudora displays the Create New Signature dialog box asking you for a name In the dialog box enter a signature name and click OK A signature window appears Enter your signature text in the signature window You can format the text with styles see Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 43 and Text Toolbar on page 33 Entering a new signature 4 Work Signature Jim Schmigt Senior Project Manager 00 8 To save the signature from the File menu choose Save Close the Signature window Modifying a Signature To change a signature 1 Right click the signature in the Signature window to display the drop down context menu From the context menu choose Edit The signature window appears for that signature Make the changes To save the signature from the File menu choose Save Close the Signature window 107 Using Signatures and Stationery Deleting a Signature To delete a signature 1 Select the desired item in the Signature window and press the Delete key Or right click t
438. rver window New Account Wizard See ee Outgoing Email Server Please enter the name of your outgoing email server SMTP server in the edit box below Outgoing Server smtp myfirm com e g gt smtp isp com You can also choose whether or not you want to allow Eudora to authenticate to the outgoing email server when sending mail For most accounts leaving this on is the best choice Allow authentication 11 In the Outgoing Server text box enter the name of your outgoing server If you do not want authentication when sending mail uncheck the Allow authentication box See Using SMTP Authentication on page 72 This server is sometimes the same as your Incoming server name Click Next The Success window appears 12 Click Finish You have successfully entered your new personality Your new personality will be checking mail whenever you retrieve mail To change any of your personalities settings go the Account Settings Dialog on page 125 122 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Importing Settings to Create a Personality To set up a newly migrated account from Netscape Messenger 4 x and later Microsoft Outlook Express 5 0 Outlook 98 and Outlook 2000 as an alternate or multiple personality account using the New Account Wizard 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or if the Personalities window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab 2 Inthe Personalitie
439. ry 197 Managing Windows in Eudora e Signatures e Personalities e Task Status e Task Errors e Address Book e Directory Services e Link History NOTE If you minimize and then restore the main Eudora window then all normal docked and floating Eudora windows including tabbed windows are also minimized and restored with it Closing a tool window does not erase its contents unless the contents are saveable and you choose to discard changes When you close a tool window or a tabbed window the content state and position of the window or of all windows in the tabbed window are preserved The preservation of content is useful for persistent data such as filter reports and directory service queries If you try to close or de activate a tool or tabbed window with unsaved changes Eudora asks if you want to save the changes NOTE If you are using Eudora in Sponsored mode an ad window appears at the left hand bottom of your screen The ad window is the minimum size that corresponds to the ad being displayed and this window can be moved Normal Windows A window is in the normal state if it is restricted to the window work area of the main Eudora window and cannot be dragged out of the main window 198 Managing Windows in Eudora Sample normal windows inside the main Eudora window r Eudora DER File Edit Mailbox Message Transfer Special Tools Window Help EERTE t 2 40 Mailboxes Kevin 04 48 PM 7 18 22
440. s queries To make a query on someone 1 From the Tools menu choose Directory Services The Directory Services window appears 2 In the Databases list select the database s you want to search in your query To select a database click the checkbox to the left of the database until a checkmark appears in the box You can select multiple databases and you can use multiple protocols You must select at least one database in the list for Eudora to perform the query NOTE Eudora remembers which databases you ve selected when you quit and restart the program 258 Using Directory Services 3 In the Query field type a text string you want to search against If one or more of your selected databases use a protocol other than Ph your entry in this field is always interpreted as a name If you have only Ph servers selected as your databases you can enter any commands that Ph will interpret 4 To start the query press Enter or click Start The query begins and the Start button changes to Stop To stop the query before it is completed click the Stop button When the query is completed or if you click Stop to cancel the query the Stop button changes back to Start Automatic Name Completion in Directory Services Sponsored and Paid modes only When looking up names in Eudora s Directory Services Eudora remembers the name and places it in a directory services history file So whenever you begin typing a name a drop down lis
441. s 1 FlattenSpeaking 1 FontSizeTableLarge 10 12 14 16 20 26 42 FontSizeTableLargest 11 14 16 18 22 28 48 Eudora ini File Description If on then if a message contains 7 bit characters except for directional quotes then those directional quotes are turned in to regular non directional quotes so that the message may be sent out as 7 bit no quoted printable encoding needed The Microsoft Text To Speech engine has troubles with non ASCII characters so this setting will make non ASCII characters get converted to their ASCII equivalents before being handed off to the TTS engine Font sizes used for displaying text in the built in non Microsoft viewer They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small Small Medium Large Larger Very Large and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window Font sizes used for displaying text in the built in non Microsoft viewer They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small Small Medium Large Larger Very Large and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window FontSizeTableMedium 8 10 11 14 18 2 Font sizes used for displaying text in the built in non 4 36 Microsoft viewer They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the O
442. s a new message Opens file Prints Exits quits Eudora Replies to the message Replies to all Saves current window Sends queued messages Underlines text Pastes from clipboard Closes window Cuts to clipboard Opens Directory Services Opens Directory Services and performs a lookup on selected text Undo Switches between opened mailboxes and messages Tiles windows horizontally 398 Shift F5 Shift F10 Shift Space Alt A Alt B Alt C AIt D AIt Shift D Alt E Alt F AIt H AIt K AIt Shift K AIt L AIt Shift L AIt M AIt O AIt Shift O AIt R Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Cascades Windows Opens right click drop down menu for selected item Toggles current message status between Read and Unread Jumps to Attached line in Composition window Sorts by Attachments in the Table of Contents Jumps to Bcc line in Composition window Jumps to Cc line in Composition window Sorts by Date in table of contents window Sorts by reverse Date in table of contents window Opens the Edit Menu Opens the File Menu Opens the Help Menu Sorts by size in table of contents window Sorts by size reversed in table of contents window Sorts by Labels column in table of contents window Sorts by Labels column reversed in table of contents window Opens the Message Menu Jumps to the To line in Com
443. s command from anywhere in Eudora including open messages open mailbox windows the Address Book and the Directory Services window To use the Make Address Book Entry command do one of the following e In an open window go to step 1 e In an open mailbox window first select the message summary or summaries you want in the address book then go to step 1 1 From the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry The Make Address Book Entry dialog box appears 246 Using the Address Book Make Address Book Entry command and dialog box Tools Window Help Make Address Book Entry Fiter Messages Cikta Personal Information Make Filter Make Address Book Entry Ctrl K Nickname Jayne_Cobb Add as Recipient Full Name Jayne Cobb Remove Recipient b i First Last Name Empty Trash aS J Swap Cobb Compact Mailboxes hl P Forget Password s This nickname will expand to the following address Message Plug ins Settings hero cantonmudders com In the Address Book EUAN y C Eut it on the Recipient List C Put it on the BossWatch List ay In the Nickname text box Eudora enters the name in the email address or the message You can change it if you like In the Full Name field Eudora enters the full name as it appears in the email address of the message You can change it if you like In the First Name and Last Name fields Eudora enters the first and last name of the person as it appears in the em
444. s menu to display the Options dialog then click on the Advanced Network category Check the Automatically dial amp hangup this connection option In the Entry list select the Phonebook entry you want to dial In the Username edit box enter the username if any that is required to log in to your Internet Service Provider this is the value that is substituted for the USERID variable in your Dialup Networking script Check the Save password option if you want Eudora to save your Dialup Networking password in the Eudora ini file If you leave the Save password option turned off then Eudora will prompt you to enter your password each time it auto dials the Phonebook entry To test the auto dial capability make sure your modem is not already connected then select the Check Mail command from the File menu in Eudora Eudora will automatically dial your Internet Service Provider log in establish a TCP IP connection transfer any new mail and automatically hang up when the mail transfer is complete 435 X1 Search Queries X1 Search Queries X1 Search Queries When performing searches using the Ultra Fast indexed search feature Paid mode only you can perform complex queries using the functionality of X1 This section describes how to create such advanced queries to get the most out of your Eudora Columns A column is a grouping of data within the indexed database Advanced users can utilize the matches X1 query verb in the Search
445. s sent through Eudora s MAPI will convert plain text quoting in to excerpts so that messages are easier to read on different width screens e g PCs vs PDAs The maximum number of checking sending tasks that can occur simultaneously while using a Eudora specified dialup connection The maximum number of background tasks that can be running at the same time Note that if you are connected over a modem dialup networking connection only one network task at a time will be run otherwise network performance would suffer greatly The maximum number of popup menus for mailboxes These are equivalent to mailbox folders that is local mailbox folders that contain other mailboxes or IMAP mailboxes that contain other mailboxes Used when Eudora can t be started due to the large number of popup menus created which is limited by Windows This will allow you to start up Eudora and run it long enough to remove some mailboxes so that fewer menus will be needed Running for extended periods of time with this switch in Eudora ini is not recommended Controls whether your return address should be used in the MAIL FROM command for return receipts RFC 2298 says that it should be empty in order to prevent mail loops but some SMTP servers reject that due to bad spam prevention heuristics The minimum score old junk must have before it will be trimmed The minimum score needed for mail to be considered junk Controls whether the original sender s
446. s the default Maximum to Concentrate Enter the maximum number of messages you would like to group Keeping this number small is recommended because concentrating a large number of messages can take time The default is 20 messages Require matching subjects or senders Check this box if you want subjects and senders to match when selecting messages to group Generate multiple messages on reply Check this box if you want individual reply messages to be sent to each sender of each concentrated message instead of one message being sent to all the senders 364 Setting Eudora Preferences BossWatch Paid mode only The BossWatch options determine how BossWatch will alert you to messages being sent to addresses that match your designated criteria To display the BossWatch Options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the BossWatch icon The BossWatch Options window appears BossWatch Options window Options Category K C Warn me additionally with a dialog C When sending to more than 0 recipients C when I do a Reply All Miscellaneous C Speak addresses Adult Male 1 American English Truvoice C When sending to more than 0 recipients C When I do a Reply All Junk Mail Extras Domain Warnings Warn me when I address an email message to a recipient Content Concentrator oO Outside domain a Inside domain BossW
447. s treated as spaces In a search however they signal a phrase search without having to use double quotes i e re search is equivalent to the search re search Initial punctuation is converted into spaces except for strings of minus signs So abc turns into abc and we ignore strings of spaces so that is equivalent to just abc a however is a double negative a search Phrase searches are by default prefix phrase searches So abc will find a b cat but a b c will ONLY find a b c where c is not a prefix Example Search Results email abcd efg com me emailaddr net c mydrive is over here 1 234 567 123 45 6789 123 423 cats and dogs B amp B 1 2 a m i e 0 0 U S A it s there s something email abcd efg com me emailaddr net c mydrive is over here 1 234 567 OR 1234567 123 45 6789 NOT 123 OR 123 literal negative 123 search cats and dogs b b yo a m i e 9 0 u s a its there s something 442 X1 Search Queries Example Search Results b hello b b hello b var 1000 var 1000 DEF_VALUE 2 def value 2 Proximity Searching 3 is equivalent to NEAR 3 a NEAR b a NEAR 10 b and matches a ten words b 10 is the default for NEAR and PRE with no n argument after it a b a b i e alone sign not the same as a NEAR b a NEAR b a NEAR b the straggler sign wil
448. s will fail 132 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Required STARTTLS Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL If your server does not support STARTTLS mail transfers will fail NOTE If you use SSL and cannot make a connection when receiving or sending mail you may need to check with your ISP to update any invalid SSL certificates However to override any issues with SSL when retrieving or sending mail choose Never from the drop down menu to make a successful connection To display the most current information for an SSL connection between a server and Eudora since the last time you started Eudora 1 Click Last SSL info The Eudora SSL Connection Information Manager window appears with SLL and certificate information WARNING If you display the SSL information windows make certain you don t change any of the field information unless you are familiar with SSL Modifying a Personality To modify an existing personality 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or if the Personalities window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab 2 Open the Personalities window and right click the desired personality to display the drop down context menu 3 From the context menu choose Properties The Account Settings dialog box appears 4 Make your changes in the Account Settings dialog box See
449. s window right click to display the drop down context menu Choose New The New Account Wizard window Account Settings appears New Account Wizard Account Settings window New Account Wizard See ee Account Settings Would you like to O Create a brand new email account Account Setup Skip directly to advanced account setup Several dialog boxes appear for you to choose Netscape or Microsofts email applications for you to import from For more information and procedures see Importing from Other Email Programs on page 20 123 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Adding a Personality via the Account Settings Dialog You can add a new personality without going through the New Account Wizard series of windows but via the Account Settings dialog box Instead of entering information per window you enter all the information on two tabbed panels in one dialog box the Account Settings dialog box To add a personality via the Accounts Settings dialog box 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or if the Personalities window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab 2 Inthe Personalities window right click to display the drop down context menu Choose New The New Account Wizard window Account Settings appears New Account Wizard Account Settings window New Account Wizard See Account Settings Would you like to Create a brand new email account O Impor
450. s window appears 3 In the Show Mailbox Columns list select the column boxes you want to display If you don t want to display a column just deselect the box See Mailboxes on page 320 To resize a column in a mailbox window move the mouse pointer until it is over the column heading divider to the right of the column you want to resize then drag the divider to the position you want The column divider moves to the new location and the mailbox is redrawn You can shrink a column only as far as its left divider If you do that a double divider line appears in place of the column and its contents are hidden To redisplay the column drag the right divider line to the right Using the Mailbox Size Display In the lower left corner of the message summary part of each mailbox window three numbers show the size information for that mailbox The first is the number of messages in the mailbox the second is the total amount of space those messages require the third is the amount of disk space that is wasted with the mailbox Mailbox size display TOAD Wasted space is created when messages are deleted or transferred from a mailbox TIP Check Show count of selected messages in Size box under the Mailboxes options to display 4 sets of numbers The first number will be the selected message count 146 Working with Mailboxes To manually clean up the wasted space in all mailboxes e Click the mailbox size display for that mailbox only
451. sage If you use the Insert Recipient submenu commas are added where necessary Including Nicknames on the Recipient List To include a nickname in the Recipient List 1 Right click the appropriate Address Book entry in the list to display the drop down list From the drop down list choose Add to Recipient List The nickname for the selected entry is included on the Recipient List and the entry is bolded in the Address Book list 253 Using the Address Book To remove a nickname from the Recipient List 1 Right click the item in the Address Book list to display the drop down list 2 From the drop down list choose Remove From Recipient List The nickname for the selected entry is removed from the Recipient List and the entry is unbolded in the Address Book list If you change a nickname the Recipient List is updated as appropriate For details about using the Recipient List see Using the Recipient List on page 252 NOTE You can add or remove multiple nicknames to or from the Recipient List by selecting multiple entries before right clicking Hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence or the Ctrl key to select entries non consecutively 254 Using the Address Book Using Central Address Book Files on a Server You can set up central Address Book files on a server and configure Eudora clients so that they refer to the central files NOTE You should be an expert user or an administrator to per
452. sage and the concentrated body of the message For information on the Content Concentrator settings see Content Concentrator in the Eudora Manual 103 Receiving and Responding to Messages For more information see Content Concentrator Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 363 104 Using Signatures and Stationery Using a Signature A signature is a few lines of text that are automatically added to the end of an outgoing message when it is sent A signature can be whatever you want but it is mostly used to give contact information telephone address etc You use only one signature at a time ina message but you can create as many different signatures as you want Also you can choose to have your signature display or not display when writing an email See Composing Mail on page 305 NOTE If you are using Eudora in Light mode you are allowed only one signature Signatures are created and managed from the Signature window Signature Window Use this window to manage and apply signatures To open the Signature window e From the Tools menu choose Signatures Or if the Signature window is ina visible tabbed window click its tab Sample Signature window Signatures 105 Using Signatures and Stationery The Signature window displays a single column list of your signature files NOTE You can select only one item at a time in the list you cannot select multiple items If you right click a signature in
453. sage is on fire Turn this option on to set MoodWatch to a low sensitivity level If your message has some content that is offensive three chili peppers appearing your message will sit in your Out box for ten minutes before Eudora sends it Never Turn this option on to never delay your outgoing messages being sent despite offensive text in its content This is the default 352 Setting Eudora Preferences Scanning incoming mail Scan new mail as it arrives Turn this option on to allow MoodWatch to scan all of your incoming mail MoodWatch determines the level of offensive text contained in the message MoodWatch then displays one two or three chili peppers in the MoodWatch column of the mailbox where the message resides Scan stored mail in the background Turn this option on to allow MoodWatch to scan all of your stored messages MoodWatch determines the level of offensive text contained in each message MoodWatch then displays one two or three chili peppers in the MoodWatch column of the mailbox where the message resides 353 Setting Eudora Preferences Statistics Sponsored and Paid modes only In the Statistics options window you can choose the color and graph type you prefer when displaying and printing the Statistics window found in the Window menu The Statistics window displays your email usage that is the statistics on received sent and general Eudora usage You can display this information for the current or p
454. sages are sent If you choose On or after you can use the Time and Date fields to fill in the time and date at which the message should be sent The message is saved in the Out mailbox with a clock icon in the Status column and with the specified date and time in the Date column The message is sent when the specified time arrives NOTE For the message to be sent at the correct time Eudora must be running at that time If Eudora is not running the message is sent the first time Eudora is run after the specified time has passed If you choose Don t send for a message that has never been queued nothing happens The message is held in the Out mailbox until it is either deleted or re queued and sent NOTE When exiting Eudora with queued messages or timed queued messages sent within the next 10 hours Eudora gives you a warning and a chance to send these messages Editing a Queued Message To edit a queued message 1 Open the Out mailbox 2 Click to select the message summary 3 Make the necessary edits and save it 69 Sending Messages and Checking Mail The message is kept in the Out mailbox If you close the changed message without saving it an alert appears asking you to verify the changes Taking a Message Out of the Queue To unqueue a queued message 1 Open the Out mailbox and select the desired message summary 2 From the Message menu choose Change Queueing and click Don t send This changes the mess
455. se button 203 gripper bar 202 resize bar 203 zoom button 202 Docking turning on 211 doesn t appear option 168 doesn t contain option 168 494 Index Domain to add to unqualified addresses how to enter in Options 302 Domain definition 484 Dominant personality 126 Don t check when using battery how to enter in Options 296 Don t check without a network connection how to enter in Options 296 Don t send option 69 70 Don t transfer just create mailbox option 160 Download Options 130 Downloadable Picture command 280 Drag and drop transfers how to enter in Options 321 E Edit incoming mail 84 outgoing mail 43 Edit menu Insert Picture command 404 EIMS 425 Email Address how to enter in Options 302 E mail server Internet how to obtain 425 Embedded directory 404 Empty the Trash mailbox how to enter in Options 342 Empty Trash command 155 285 Empty Trash when exiting option 155 EMSAPI 407 EMSAPI plug ins 405 Encoding method how to enter in Options 311 Encoding methods BinHex 50 MIME 50 Uuencode 50 ends with option 168 Enter key 79 ERR Maildrop lock busy 480 Error getting a network socket 480 Esoteric Settings plug in 292 ESP creating a group 370 setting up one group on two computers 370 ESP Eudora Shared Protocol User tab 378 ESP Eudora Sharing Protocol advanced setup 376 configuring global settings 389 configuring group change notifications 381 configuring shared folder settings 377 380 crea
456. send the URL to the system which will invoke the default browser Some Navigator users may want to turn this setting off if they like the behavior of opening a new window as opposed to reusing an existing browser window when clicking on a URL in Eudora The number of seconds Eudora will wait for a response to opening a connection before it gives up Number of inital messages that have to be spooled before message processing begins Allows for better detecting of mailbing list to whcih you should not auto respond As a default errors to list is the value Add any other headers that will identify it as a list hence will not auto respond via filters When filtering incoming messages with precedence headers of list or bulk do not automatically create new outgoing messages If this is 1 and a message is the user specifies a message as not junk the sender of that message will be added to the address book Address book to add senders of not junked messages to If blank Eudora Nicknames will be used If on the opening splash screen will not be displayed 457 Entry Offline OfflineLinkAction OIldWABImport OpenRetryCount OpenRetryInterval OptionsHideCursor OwnerLok PasswordChangeServe r Default Value 0 250 Eudora ini File Description Set to 1 to temporarily set Eudora offline it will not perform automatic timed mail checks when offline Eudora displays the Offline Link Dialog if you
457. sender used Decoding utilities can be found at various shareware sites on the Internet Sending Emoticons Emoticons are characters used to indicate an emotion or expression In internet communication emoticons such as smiley faces can add an extra level of context to email messages 50 Creating Messages There are three ways to put emoticons in an outgoing email message You can type the emoticon characters directly into your message you can use the emoticon pull down menu or you can use the Insert Emoticon command under the Edit menu To type an emoticon 1 When composing a new email message click your cursor in the body of the message 2 Type the emoticon characters Eudora will automatically replace the characters with a graphic emoticon Emoticons E cry Foot in Mouth Kiss I Undecided Whatever Money Mouth Sad Happy D Laugh P Stick Out Tongue X Lips Sealed Embarrassed BEODOHSBEO lt Foolish gt o Angry gt Evil Grin a gt D Hug W gt Rose l Yawn 8 Cool i Wink 0 Surprise gif D gt Applause O Halo 41 Sick 8 GE 2OOH For example if you type the characters in a new email message Eudora will replace with the happy face D graphic icon To choose an emoticon from a pull down menu 1 When composing a new email click your cursor in the body
458. signature and stationery to a personality 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or if the Personalities window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Select the personality and right click to display the drop down context menu From the context menu choose Properties The Accounts Settings Generic Properties panel for this selected personality appears 134 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Account Settings Generic Properties panel Account Settings for Business Generic Properties Incoming Mail Personality Name Business Real Name Joe Camp Email Address jcamp myfirm com User Name jcamp SMTP Server smtp myfirm com Authentication allowed Use relay personality if defined Cluse submission port 587 Default Domain Default Stationery lt No Default gt Default Signature lt No Default gt Secure Sockets when Sending lif Available sTARTTLS Last SSL Info Check Mail 4 Inthe Default Stationery drop down list select the stationery for this personality 5 In the Default Signature drop down list select the signature for this personality Note that if the stationery you just selected has a signature linked to it this signature overrides any signature you select here 6 Click OK This personality is now linked with the stationery and signature you chose from the drop down lists Selecting a Personality
459. sired number of days or you can type the number in the text box The verb field defaults to is Personality Choose this option to search for messages by account A drop down list displaying your previously set up personalities appears Select the desired personality Mailbox Name Choose this option to search for messages in a specific mailbox Enter the name of the mailbox in the text box This works well if you selected several mailboxes but only wanted certain mailboxes that matched the criteria you selected To Choose this option to search text entered in only the To header field of the message From Choose this option to search text entered in only the From header field of the message 184 4 Organizing Your Messages Subject Choose this option to search text entered in only the Subject header field of the message CC Choose this option to search text entered in only the Cc header field of the message BCC Choose this option to search text entered in only the Bcc header field of the message Any recipient Choose this option to search text entered in only the To Cc and Bcc header fields of the message In the example below Headers was selected from the drop down options list as the first criteria After you select the option from the drop down list select a verb to link the first option with the text you you want to find The verb drop down lists are shown below Verb drop down lists
460. size of this buffer may be decreased Cache network info This option causes Eudora to remember the results of previous database functions when using the Winsock connection method This speeds up database functions within a single Eudora session Unload Winsock DLL after closing socket lIf you are using Winsock dialer select this option if you like to have your computer dial and hang up between functions for example sending and receiving mail 348 Setting Eudora Preferences Kerberos These options control the Kerberos authentication system If your network uses Kerberos for authentication the appropriate options are provided by your email administrator To display the Kerberos options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Kerberos icon The Kerberos options window appears Kerberos options window Options Category system Only Fill them in if your network administrator tells you to do so a These settings are for the Kerberos security 4139 ae Kerberos Authentication Oon Off Kerberos 4 POP only Oo off Advanced Network Kerberos POP3 port pedi Realm Kerberos Pe Service name remd yy Service format 1 Yo4 o3 MoodWatch For the service format insert A 1 For the Service name above o2 For POP host Full domain name 3 For Realm above Statistics o4 For POP host name Miscellaneous v Cancel Select
461. sks that are currently waiting units in milliseconds between images The width in pixels of the background task progress bar that shows up in the status bar Set to zero to prevent the progress bar from being displayed Controls the speed of the animated icon in the status bar for tasks that currently have errors units in milliseconds between images Controls the speed of the animated icon in the status bar for tasks that are currently waiting units in milliseconds between images Signature precedence is as follows User s selection Stationery s signature Personality s signature Set this to 0 to put Personality s signature before Stationery s When replying to a message controls whether or not duplicate copies of your email address will be removed from the To and Cc headers This helps to avoid buildup of your email address in email conversations If on Ctrl F will open the Find Text window and the Ctrl Shift F will open the Find Message window By default its the opposite When on pressing the lt Tab gt key in a mailbox will switch focus between the message list and the previewed message 466 Eudora ini File Entry Default Value Description TabooHeaders X A comma separated list of headers without colons that UID Received S should not be shown when the Show all headers switch the tatus X UIDL Blah Blah Blah icon is off for a message The matching is Message In done on a prefix basis so any header
462. ss Book 234 Fcc menu 38 72 Fcc definition 485 Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option 90 Fetch button 81 88 Fetch server status 88 144 173 Fetch then Delete server status 88 144 145 File Browser command 221 287 File Browser window 221 File formats 47 File Transfer Protocol definition 485 Filter icons 166 Filter Messages command 163 166 285 Filter Report command 220 287 Filter Report window 171 220 Filtering mail into the Junk mailbox 176 Filters and option 170 appears option 168 automatically named 166 Conjunction popup 170 contains option 168 Copy To action 173 creating an auto reply 174 definition 485 doesn t appear option 168 doesn t contain option 168 doesn t intersect address book option 169 doesn t intersect nickname option 168 ends with option 168 Forward To action 172 ignore option 170 intersects address book option 169 intersects nickname option 168 invoked from top to bottom 167 is not option 168 is option 168 Make Label action 170 Make Personality action 171 Make Priority action 170 Make Status action 170 Make Subject action 171 Match Type popup 168 Matching Text field 169 None action 170 Notify Application action 172 Notify User action 171 Open action 171 or option 170 Play Sound action 171 Print action 171 Redirect To action 172 re ordering 166 Reply with action 172 Server Options action 173 Skip Rest action 173 speak action 171 starts with option 168 Transfer To action 173
463. ss Book Entry command to complete a nickname in your message 1 Inthe To Cc or Bcc field type a unique portion of the nickname 2 From the Edit menu choose Finish Address Book Entry The nickname drop list for that letter appears 3 Choose the desired nickname from the list To insert the real addresses for the entry instead of the nickname e Hold down the Shift key and from the Edit menu choose Finish amp Expand Address Book Entry To set this auto expansion to happen all the time so that you don t have to hold down the Shift key check the Automatically Expand Nicknames box in the Miscellaneous options in Options under the Tools menu For an alternate way to complete nicknames see the section Using Automatic Name Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 39 Using the BossWatch List The BossWatch List is your list of recipients you wish to call special attention to when composing messages To add a nickname to the BossWatch List 1 From the Tools menu choose Address Book or press Ctrl L Or if the Address Book is an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab 2 Click to select the desired entry in your Nickname list 3 On the right side of the window check the BossWatch List box or right click the selected item to display the drop down list BossWatch List checkbox in the Address Book Nickname Mal C Recipient List Bosswatch List _J_ Personal Home Wo
464. ss than zero so we search for both Multiple Negative Searches NOT NOT a is equivalent to a Same with NOT a and a But NOT a is equivalent to NOT amp a 439 X1 Search Queries Spacing In general extra spaces are ignored except when found within double quotes Some operators need to be surrounded by spaces for them to be interpreted in their special way But when the next character is an open paren no extra space is required i e a amp b c NOT this that etc Same for quotes i e this AND that and the other Normal words work too i e this that is identical to this AND that Maximum Word Length There is a maximum size for any word we ll index and this will affect searches The maximum length of any string of characters we index is 39 So if you search for a word longer than that you will get no results even if you are sure the word exists in a document somewhere Since most words have far fewer characters this is not a problem And usually longer words have punctuation in them and if any of those words between the punctuation are less than 40 characters they will be indexed and searchable For example you might search for a URL http www thisdomainislongbutlessthan40characters com some path file html It has no spaces and could be typed as one term by the user to search for in the main search box It is longer than 39 characters as a whole so the entire word is not
465. ssages are sent When message emptied from Trash If you select this option automatic attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are emptied from the Trash 312 Setting Eudora Preferences Fonts The Fonts options determine how Eudora displays and prints text Note that the choices available for each option and the default may depend on the fonts installed in your system To display the Fonts options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Fonts icon The Fonts options window appears Fonts options window Options Category Message Proportional Arial LS Attachments Fixed width Courier New v Use proportional font by default Size Small Printer Font Arial Size Medium Screen Font Arial Size Small Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Message These fields list the proportional and fixed width fonts to be used for displaying the text in your received and composition messages and in the message preview pane in mailbox windows Also included are the size of each font and the use of proportional or fixed width font by default Proportional Specify the proportional font to use in message windows and the preview pane Spacing is adjusted according to each character s width Fixed width Specify the fixed width font to use in message windo
466. ssages dialog box s Find Messages Anywhere v contains Results Mailboxes _ No matches in 18 mailboxes E eudora v In y Out O amp Junk Si Trash C Recent Sy Business 9 Boss 9 Projects J Reports Personal amp Books amp Cats amp Friends amp Knitting amp Online shopping amp Sailing EP Stocks v v v H v v H E lt E A AAA In the Find Messages dialog box your mailboxes appear along with check boxes If the boxes are checked Eudora will perform a search in these mailboxes according to the criteria you are about to set up To omit a mailbox from the search just un check the box If you had a mailbox selected when opening the Find Messages dialog Eudora will default to only that mailbox being checked Otherwise all mailboxes are checked by default If you right click in the Find Messages window a context menu appears allowing you to clear all the check marks so you can select the mailboxes to search Choose Clear All to clear the check marks or choose Check All to check all the mailboxes Find Messages context menu right click Check All Clear All The top part of the dialog box is where you select and enter criteria for your search Each search can use up to five terms and verbs as its criteria connecting them as appropriate Eudora
467. st when you begin to type a name in the To Cc or Bcc fields Turn off to not display the drop down name list Names should appear in alphabetical order Select to display names in the drop down list in alphabetical order Turn off to display names based on usage Add the from lines of replied to messages Select to add the name appearing in the From field from a received message that you replied to This name and email address goes into your history file Time to wait before popping up Auto completion box in milliseconds Enter the number of milliseconds you want to wait before the auto completion drop down list appears for you to choose a name The larger the number the longer the wait Zero indicates that the name list will appear immediately Maximum number of entries to keep in history Enter the number of names you want to keep in your history file at any given time As you add names the old entries are removed leaving the amount of names equal to the number you entered in this field 327 Setting Eudora Preferences Date Display The Date Display options determine how Eudora displays message dates in the Date column of mailbox window message summaries To display the Date Display options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Date Display icon The Date Display options window appears Date Display options window Options Category A Display dates using Local timezone
468. stacks blocking and asynchronous World Wide Web Also known as the Web the World Wide Web is a graphical interface to Internet resources Web refers to the set of hypermedia pages accessible via the Internet 490 EUDORA Symbols 328 in the Status column 142 e in the Status column 65 70 79 141 in the Status column 73 142 me nickname for personal identification 100 A About Eudora command 291 ACAP definition 483 Account Settings dialog adding a new personality 124 Add as Recipient command 252 285 Add to Recipient List command 251 252 253 Address Book 233 Add as Recipient command 252 Add to Recipient List command 251 252 253 adding a group 238 adding a person 235 adding nicknames to the Quick Recipient List 251 253 addressing a message from 246 Bcc button 245 BossWatch list 250 Cc button 245 changing entries in 243 245 command 235 copying entries in 243 creating a group from the address book 248 creating a message from 245 creating an address book within 235 creating new entries in 235 deleting entries 244 displaying entries in 234 Expand Nickname option 245 F6 key 234 file format 255 Home tab 240 Insert Recipient submenu 253 Make Address Book Entry command from 246 move or copy an entry 244 moving entries in 243 New button in 235 Notes tab 242 Index Other tab 241 paging up and down 234 Personal tab 238 printing 234 recipient list 252 Remove From Recipient List command 2
469. t are shown with italicized message summaries To select one or more message summaries use one of the following options e To select one summary Click it e To select a consecutive range of summaries select a summary hold down the Shift key and select another summary Or drag the mouse over the summaries to select them as long as you begin on an unselected summary To select all of the summaries that have the same information in a particular column hold down the Alt key and click one column in the summary For example if you click the Status column for one summary all of the summaries with that status are selected e To make non consecutive selections hold down the Ctrl key and select summaries To find messages by name or subject type the first few letters of a name or subject and Eudora selects the message Each message summary is divided into columns The column names are shown below with the corresponding icons that appear in the column headings a Status A Junk score H Priority gt Attachments Label Label Who Sender Recipient Who 140 Working with Mailboxes E Date Date j Size tal Server Status Hi MoodWatch E subject Subject You can show or hide these columns using the Mailboxes options window See Mailboxes on page 320 A message s Status Priority Label Personality and Server Status can be changed directly in the mailbox window To do this select the messages you want to change
470. t before popping up 0 Date Display 4uto completion box Milliseconds pP Maximum entries to keep in history 100 Labels Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options History File Select to make available the names from your history file to auto complete in the To Cc and Bcc fields in the message header Turn off to not display names and email addresses from your history file in the drop down name list The history file consists of names and email addresses that appear in the To Cc and Bcc fields in the messages you send reply to or forward 326 Setting Eudora Preferences Address Book Select to make available the nicknames you ve previously set up in your address book to auto complete in the To Cc and Bcc fields in the message header Turn off to not display nicknames from your address book in the drop down name list Plug in Addresses Select this option to make available the email addresses stored elsewhere in Eudora for example in ESP Don t auto complete just list matches Select this option if you don t want Eudora to auto complete your email address as you type it If you choose this option you need to just type one letter and all email addresses that start with that letter from your address book and history list appear in a drop down list for you to choose from Use drop down list for completion choices Select to display the drop down name li
471. t of names from your history file displays alphabetically Just select the desired name from the list and the name s information appears Following is an example of the auto name completion function Directory Services Auto Name Completion Query Ed Protocols AA Status 34 Eudora Registered Drivers I eudora c retum all Finger Name eudoraseeh Endara Address Ronk New Database Databases Configured Servers C Qualcomm Finger Server Cb Switch Board O Fourl1 Obf InfoSpace MIA a aui I Keep On Top TA Directory Services Address Book Fiters S Fitter Report Link History 259 Using Directory Services Reading Query Results Your query results are listed in the left half of the Directory Services window in the results list top view and the details pane bottom view You can resize the two views relative to each other by dragging the separator up or down The results list consists of one line summaries of the hits or successful targets of your query These are listed by four columns e Name indicates the username or other name of the target e Email is the email address of the target e Phone is the target s telephone number e Database tells you in which of your selected databases the target was found Click a column heading to sort the results list alphabetically or numerically by that column Shift click to sort in reverse order To
472. t settings From an existing email account 3 Select Skip directly to advanced account setup The Account Settings dialog box window appears and you begin to enter information into the fields To continue see the next section Account Settings Dialog 124 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Account Settings Dialog This tabbed dialog box appears when you select Skip directly to advanced account setup from the New Account Wizard Account Settings window or when you right click on a personality in the Personalities window and choose Properties from the drop down context menu When you display the dialog box enter the information in the fields If you are modifying an existing personality the fields are filled in with the information associated with the personality you have selected After you make your changes in the dialog box click OK to save them Cancel to discard them or Help for more help NOTE Any changes you make to your dominant personality in this dialog box are also changed where they are mirrored in relevant options of the Options dialog box The same is true in reverse changes you make in the Options dialog box are carried over here when you next open this dialog box Generic Properties This dialog box window contains the general characteristics associated with this personality Sample Account Settings Generic Properties panel Account Settings for Business Generic Pr
473. tationery by right clicking anywhere in an empty Stationery window or by right clicking anywhere off a stationery item in a Stationery window that is not empty Creating New Stationery Following is the basic procedure for creating a new stationery file in the Stationery window and additional information on creating and sending stationery messages To create a new stationery file 1 From the Tools menu choose Stationery or click the Stationery window s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group The Stationery window appears Right click anywhere inside the Stationery window to display the drop down context menu From the context menu choose New Eudora opens a composition window to be used for stationery NOTE The Send Queue button is inactive in the window the message cannot be sent or queued Put the text you want into the message body fill in the headers as appropriate subject copies etc and make any desired setting in the toolbar From the File menu choose Save As Stationery The Save as Stationery dialog box appears Enter a file name and click Save to save the stationery file The file is saved to your Stationery folder Close the stationery message 111 Using Signatures and Stationery Modifying Stationery To change a stationery file 1 In the Stationery window right click the stationery item to select and display the drop down context menu 2 From the context menu choose Edit
474. te stamping files Setting this to 1 causes the icons to be imaged from a device independent bitmap to resolve issues with video drivers that cannot display Eudora s toolbar icons Setting this to 2 limits the toolbar to the icons that are in the default toolbar Delay in milliseconds in which Eudora will wait before auto expanding an item in a tree control Delay in milliseconds in which Eudora will wait before auto scrolling a tree control When on typing characters in the summaries of a mailbox window will attempt to match words in the Subject field Default behavior is to match the Who field The number of days after which a message is no longer used to determine if a mailbox has unread messages in it The full path of the application used to launch URLs 468 Entry URLHighlight UsePOPCAPA UsePOPMangle UsePOPSend UseQuickTime UseJunkMailbox UserChangeLex UseRelay UserlgnoreLex UserSuggestLex Warn BeforeAging WarnLaunchExtenstion Default Value 1 1 uchange tlx uignore tlx usuggest tlx 1 Eudora ini File Description Display URLs in blue underline style Whether or not Eudora should send the CAPA command to the POP server Used only to see if the server supports the MANGLE command modifier See UsePOPMangle Whether or not Eudora should use the MANGLE modifer to the TOP command in a POP connection MANGLE can produce some better results for messages that are la
475. tes S Filter Report Link History 4 Inthe Nickname field right side of window enter what you want to call this person A nickname sometimes called an alias is an easily remembered shorter substitute for the email address in the entry Nicknames can be used in place of proper email addresses in the To Cc and Bcc header fields of outgoing messages A nickname entered here should be the name you wish to type in a header field To Cc Bcc when composing an email message For example although your Dad s name is John Smith you can enter Dad as the nickname So when you address a message you can just enter Dad in the header field 236 Using the Address Book NOTE You cannot use the actual email address as the nickname It must be different 5 If you want the nickname on your recipient list check the Recipient list box Once the person is on the recipient list the name is bolded in the address book list 6 To create the entry click anywhere or press Enter 7 Click the Personal tab The Personal dialog appears Personal dialog box Nickname tre nt Recipient List BossWatch List Personal Home Work Other Notes Full Name Tre nt B First Name Last Name Trent B This nickname will expand to the Following addresses trent intrepidadventure com 8 In the Full Name field type the real name or an informal name for the person If there is just one address for the entry this name and t
476. text If this is turned off then the signature is sent but the text styles are removed NOTE If selected the signature becomes one with the message However if an attachment is included with you message this option turns off 323 Setting Eudora Preferences Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only The Spell Checking options control the behavior of Eudora s built in spelling checker when it performs a spelling check on the body of a message composition window a text file or a signature file You can also change these options from the Spelling Options dialog box accessed by clicking the Options button in the Check Spelling dialog box accessed via the Edit menu To display the Spell Checking options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Spell Checking icon The Spell Checking options window appears Spell Checking options window Options Category C Ignore capitalized words A ignore words with all capitals Style d Text Ignore words with numbers C Ignore words with mixed case E Report doubled words Spell Checking Suggest words C Phonetic words g Split words al Typographic words Check spelling Fo Automatically as you type only when requested Auto completion Date Display Outgoing messages d Ignore original text Warn me when sending queuing message Labels with misspellings Select the options you want to change Follow
477. th filter it unless lf the message matches the first term filter it unless the message also matches the second term in which case do not filter it This lets you exclude certain variations of the first term Filter Actions For a filter you re creating or modifying in the Filters window all messages that match the filter criteria are acted on as specified with the Actions drop down menus Each filter can do up to five things to a message that matches the criteria You can use the same action twice if it does not directly affect the original message For example Copy To can be used twice but not Transfer To Some filter actions have an associated icon For these actions Eudora places the action icon next to the filter in the filters list Up to five icons can appear per filter The Action options are as follows None No action Make Status Assigns the selected status to message summaries Make Priority Assigns the selected priority level to messages If you select a set level from the drop down menu messages are set to that priority If you select Raise or Lower messages are raised or lowered one priority level based on their pre filter level Make Label Sponsored and Paid modes only Assigns the selected label to messages Label colors and names are set in the Labels options window See Labels on page 331 170 Organizing Your Messages Make Personality Sponsored and Paid modes only Assigns t
478. that briefly describes the purpose and or contents or this share group Share Group Description TPS Eudora Reports and Documents e g gt Pictures from our vacation this summer lt Back Cancel Help 5 In the Share Group Description text box type a brief description of the group purpose or file contents then click Next The Share Group Mailbox dialog box appears 373 Eudora Sharing Protocol Share Group Mailbox dialog box New ESP Share Group Wizard wy Share Group Mailbox Please choose a mailbox where messages sent to this share group should be transferred Click Next to accept the creation of a mailbox with the suggested name Transfer to New Mailbox Eudora Documents In Folder C Apps Eudora Transfer to Existing Mailbox An existing mailbox must not be assigned to any other share group or any other plugin The In mailbox is not allowed Do one of the following e Ifyou want to create a new mailbox for all group messages choose Transfer to New Mailbox and type the name of the mailbox in the text box e If you want all group messages to go to an existing mailbox or a new mailbox in a different location choose Transfer to Existing Mailbox then click the long gray button A list of your existing mailboxes appears Right click to create a mailbox in a different location Click to select a mailbox then click OK to enter it in the text box NOTE You can t transfer messages to eithe
479. the Close button to close the dialog box Example QUALCOMM s PureVoice voice messaging plug in gives you the option to begin recording automatically as soon as you launch the plug in See Plug ins Extended Messaging Services on page 407 for more information Tools Menu All of Eudora s tool windows and the options dialog boxes can be opened from this menu as well as the Options dialog box Select a tool window name to open that window or select Options to open the Options window and set your options Tools menu lies Window Help Filters Filter Report Mailboxes File Browser Stationery Signatures Personalities Task Status Task Errors Address Book Ctrl L Directory Services Ctrl Link History Statistics Reset Tools Li ESP Groups Options 286 Using Menu Commands Filters Display the Filters window which lets you create modify and remove message filters Filter Report Display the Filter Report window which provides a report of all filter operations transfers to mailboxes since the last time Eudora was opened Note For these filter reports to be generated you must turn on the Generate filter report option in the Getting Attention options See Getting Attention on page 334 This option is turned off by default Mailboxes Display the Mailboxes window which lets you manage your mailboxes and mail folders File Browser Display the File Browser window which lets you browse through your
480. the main toolbar hold down the Alt key and drag the button off the toolbar Adding and Removing Separators To add a separator line between two toolbar buttons where no line currently exists first determine which button is farther from the gripper bar when the toolbar is docked Now hold down the Alt key and carefully drag that button a little bit in the direction opposite the gripper bar A separator line will be inserted between the two buttons Be sure to drag the button less than one button width away from its position if you overdrag it you will hop over the adjacent button and reposition the dragged button on the toolbar To remove a separator line from between two toolbar buttons again determine which of the two buttons is farther away from the gripper bar when the toolbar is docked Now hold down the Alt key and drag that button toward the gripper bar The separator line is removed Alternately you can hold down the Alt key and drag the other button slightly in the direction away from the gripper bar and that will remove the separator line Again be careful not to drag either button too far or you will reposition it past the adjacent button on the toolbar 217 Managing Windows in Eudora Eudora Taskbar The Eudora taskbar appears along the bottom edge of the window work area in the main Eudora window and normally shows the QUALCOMM logo at the right Sample Eudora taskbar and status bar Lo Address Book Qin ZH Jim 02 5
481. the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Kerberos Authentication Turn on Kerberos 5 to authenticate the POP IMAP and SMTP protocols Kerberos 4 POP only Turn on Kerberos 4 to authenticate POP only Kerberos POP3 port This is the port that the Kerberos POP server is listening on Realm This is the network realm that the Kerberos server resides in 349 Setting Eudora Preferences Service name default rcmd This is the type of service that you re requesting Service format default 1 4 3 This is the name of the ticket that Eudora requests from the Kerberos server The formatting key below this field indicates what to enter Enter 1 to stand for the service name entered in the Service name field enter 2 to stand for the full domain name of the POP host enter 3 to stand for the realm entered in the Realm field enter 4 to stand for the name of the POP host For more information about Kerberos see the following Web site Click the following URL http web mit edu kerberos www index htm 350 Setting Eudora Preferences MoodWatch Sponsored and Paid modes only In the MoodWatch options window you can determine at what level you wish your messages to be monitored before a warning appears telling you that perhaps your message content may be offensive to your recipient Also you can set MoodWatch to monitor incoming and stored messages for offensive content If you do
482. the script filename in the File name field Click the Apply button to accept your changes Click the Properties button to display the properties dialog for your Phonebook entry Click the Configure button to display the modem properties dialog Then select the Options tab Uncheck the Bring up terminal window after dialing option Now click OK to accept your changes Back in the properties dialog for your Phonebook entry click OK to accept your changes To use the script under Windows NT 4 x Open the Dialup Networking tool and from the dropdown list select the Phonebook entry you want to change Click the More button then select the Edit entry and modem properties item from the button menu In the Edit Phonebook Entry dialog select the Script tab click the Run this script option and then enter the name of your saved login script This script is compatible with both Windows 98 2000 ME XP and Windows NT 4 x Dialup Networking tools If the login sequence fails then the script will halt leaving you free to attempt a manual login via the popup Dialup Networking terminal window Creating a Desktop Phonebook Shortcut You may find it convenient to create a desktop shortcut to your Phonebook entry something we recommend To create a Phonebook shortcut under Windows 98 2000 ME XP 1 Open the Dialup Networking folder then drag a Phonebook icon to your Windows desktop Torename the shortcut label select the sho
483. them stay in touch For example you can create a share group by inviting members of your family to share their most current photos with each other When one member of the family adds a digitized photo to his or her shared folder all members of the family can see it It s like maintaining a family album that can be shared with members of family no matter where they live When communicating between members of your group email messages from the group members are automatically routed to the mailbox of your choice However you can assign only one mailbox per group You do ESP functions from the ESP Groups window found on the Tools menu These are the basic tasks in creating and maintaining a share group e Create a share group e Assign the share group a mailbox in Eudora and shared folder on your hard drive for example your C drive 369 Eudora Sharing Protocol e Invite members to join the share group e Configure how ESP will update the shared folders e Configure how your group members are notified of changes to the shared folder e Maintain group membership by inviting or deleting members or by synchronizing all shared folders However you may be asked to join a share group If so answer the invitation and the you can create a new shared folder and mailbox NOTE You can only belong to a group on one computer For example you can use your home computer to set up a group for family photos and you can use your work computer
484. thentication technology to use for this account Passwords Kerberos APOP or RPA Ask your email administrator which one to use if you are not sure Use RPA for CompuServe Server configuration IMAP Incoming Mail options window IMAP Options Category 5 A Server configuration PoP ip IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix Getting Started For new mail download Minimal headers only Eull message except attachments over 0 K Checking Mail _ eT Incoming Mail When I delete a message Mark it as deleted Sending Mail ta Authentication style Composing Mail Passwords O Kerberos ey O Cram MDS IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix tThis specifies the mailbox location prefix that IMAP will use when locating your mailboxes on the incoming mail server An example prefix is usr mail Ask your email administrator what to enter here if you are not sure For new mail download These options you must choose one let you control the way incoming mail is downloaded from the IMAP server Minimal headers only lf you select this option only a limited set of message headers and nothing else is downloaded for each incoming message That means the remaining message headers the message body and any attachments are not initially retrieved for the message By accessing each part of the message you can retrieve the remaining portion from the server 300 Setting Eudora Preferences Full message ex
485. ther trademarks and service marks are the property of their respective owners Use of the Eudora software and other software and fonts accompanying your license the Software and its documentation are governed by the terms set forth in your license Such use is at your sole risk The Software and its documentation including this manual and QUALCOMM s software maintenance and extended maintenance if applicable are provided AS IS and without war ranty of any kind and QUALCOMM AND ITS LICENSORS HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS QUALCOMM EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND AGAINST INFRINGEMENT QUAL COMM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE QUALCOMM DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTA TIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY QUALCOMM OR A QUALCOMM AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WAR RANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY
486. tible application such as your Web browser word processor spreadsheet graphics application etc MAPI compatible applications have a Send or Send Mail option in the File menu When you select the option the Eudora MAPI server displays a new outgoing message with your current document attached All you need to do is address the message type any details you want to include in the body of the message and click Send or Queue To run the Eudora MAPI server set the options in the MAPI category of the Eudora Options windows To display the MAPI Options select Options from the Tools menu and click on the MAPI category See MAPI Technical Report on page 413 You have several options in the MAPI Options dialog for loading the Eudora MAPI server You can set it to always run or to run only when Eudora is running or you can specify that it never run These three options open or exit the server as soon as you select them NOTE When you are running the Eudora MAPI server Microsoft Exchange will not work If you need to use Exchange turn off the Eudora MAPI server 408 General Reference You also have several options for saving or deleting MAPI attachments When you use MAPI to attach a file and send a message that file is immediately copied into the Attach directory or a directory you have specified You can use the MAPI options to save those copies never delete them or to delete them after sending their corresponding messages or to
487. tic spell check is the inline spell check feature of Eudora If automatic spell check is turned on misspelled words are double underlined in the message body after you type them and press the spacebar To correct the word or display a drop down word list from which to choose the correct word right click the underlined word Before you start using the automatic spell check feature you must turn on this feature To turn on the automatic spell check 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and select Spell Checking The Spell Checking options window appears 55 Creating Messages Spell Checking options window Options Category Ignore capitalized words A Ignore words with all capitals Style d Text Ignore words with numbers Ignore words with mixed case E Report doubled words Suggest words C Phonetic words 9 M Split words Typographic words Spell Checking Auto completion Check spelling Fo Automatically as you type Fiala ies O only when requested ate Displa pay Outgoing messages p Ignore original text g Warn me when sending queuing message Labels with misspellings Getting Attention y 3 Select Automatically as you type 4 Click OK Your automatic spell check is on When you type in your message and misspell a word the word is immediately underlined after you press the spacebar as shown in the example New message with automatic spell check C qualcomm com Le
488. ting Eudora erases this information File Browser Window Use this window to browse the Windows desktop For example you can use this window to find files to attach to new outgoing messages To open the File Browser window 1 From the Tools menu choose File Browser Or if the File Browser window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Sample File Browser window Documents and Se Gag Dropbox EPOAgent 9 eudora eudoratest lt Name E GatorPatch log winbom log 221 Managing Windows in Eudora The File Browser window performs some but not all of the functions of the standard Windows 98 XP and Windows NT 4 0 Explorer programs NOTE The File Browser window is not an exact replica of Windows Explorer The File Browser window contains three controls e Drive Selector top box A drop down list in this field contains a fixed set of high level folders on your system just like the corresponding control in Windows Explorer The Drive Selector field determines what appears in the Folder Browser middle section When you first launch Eudora the Drive Selector automatically sets itself to the drive containing your Windows folder Note that the first entry in the drop down list is a shortcut called My Attachments that points to your Eudora attachments folder e Folder Browser middle section This is a tree control that displays the folder hierarchy whose root is the sele
489. ting a group 371 definition 485 editing group information 389 installing 370 inviting members 377 joining a group 386 leaving a group 387 mailbox and folder 390 maitaining group membership 385 Notifications tab 381 Settings tab 380 Tips 370 working with shared folders 388 ESP Groups option 288 Eudora Address Book protocol 257 Eudora directory contents 403 Eudora Email Introduction 15 latest version 26 registering 27 starting and quitting 31 What s new in this version 16 Eudora established the connection how to enter in Options 307 Eudora information 425 Eudora Internet Mail Server EIMS 425 Eudora modes 25 changing 25 Eudora Modifiers 395 Eudora Nicknames file 404 Eudora Quick Start Guide 17 Eudora Readme file 407 Eudora Shortcuts 397 Eudora taskbar 218 Eudora WorldMail Server 425 Eudora cnt file 405 Eudora exe file 405 Eudora hlp file 405 Eudora ini file 405 Eudora ini files Debug 477 defaults 447 Mappings 471 Settings 448 Tool bar 473 Window position 472 EUDORA INI Settings File 445 EUDORA INI Settings File help topic 405 eudora log file 406 eudorlog old file 406 Excerpt bars in quoted text with styles 96 Exit command 278 Index Expand Nickname option 246 Extended Messaging Services 407 Extended Messaging Services Application Programming Interface 407 Extra Warnings Options 68 Try to delete unread queued or unsent mail 155 Extra Warnings options 341 F F1 key for help 19 F6 key in the Addre
490. tion 485 Generate filter report how to enter in Options 335 Generate Filter Report option 220 Generate filter report option 287 Generic Properties tab 125 Getting Attention Options and Notify User filter action 171 Generate Filter Report option 220 Open mailbox option 79 Play a sound option 79 Use an alert dialog box option 79 Getting Attention options 334 Getting Started Options Mail Server Incoming option 73 Getting Started options 293 Graphic file formats 47 Gripper bar on the main toolbar 212 Gripper bar in a docked window 202 Group by subject 178 Guess Paragraphs option 195 H Header definition 485 Help 18 Help button 19 Help key F1 19 Help menu 289 405 Payment amp Registration 25 Tip of the Day 19 topics 19 Topics command 405 Help Topics dialog 405 Hide command 211 Hiding tabbed tool windows 211 History file auto completion 40 Home page definition 485 Horizontal Line command 46 280 Horizontal lines inserting in outgoing message text 48 Hot link in outgoing mail 54 Hot links in incoming mail 85 Hours to be ANCIENT in Options 330 Hours to be OLD in Options 329 How should checking sending be performed option 90 HTML 43 HTML formatting viewing source 403 HTML graphics 316 HTML message viewing in your Web browser 403 HTML definition 486 HTTP definition 486 Hyperlinking text and graphics 45 Hypertext Markup Language definition 486 HyperText Markup Language HTML 43 Hypertext Transfer Protocol
491. tion 488 Redirected status diagonal arrow 99 Redo command 279 Refresh command 223 Refresh Mailbox List command 95 153 Registered Drivers column 264 Registering Eudora 27 Regular expression in Find Messages window 187 Regular Expressions 173 Matches regular expressions in filters 169 Rejected messages sending 100 Remove From Recipient List command 251 252 254 Remove Recipient submenu 252 285 Rename command 151 Renaming a mail folder 151 Renaming a mailbox 151 Replied status left arrow 96 Reply Copy original s priority to reply option 97 in a filter with stationery 113 Include yourself option 96 Map Ctrl R to Reply to All option 97 Put original To recipients in Cc field option 97 Reply command 96 with stationery 112 113 Reply command 96 282 Reply to All command 97 282 Reply to All With submenu 283 Reply with action 172 Reply With submenu 113 283 Replying Options Copy original s priority to reply 42 Copy original s priority to reply option 97 Include yourself 96 Map Ctrl R to Reply to All option 97 Put original To recipients in Cc field option 97 Replying options 309 Reply To field in Filters 167 Requirements 15 Reset Tools option 288 Resize bar in a docked window 203 Index Resynchronize Mailbox command 94 153 Retrieve From Server Fetch button 81 Retrieve messages marked for retrieval option 90 Retrieve new mail option 89 Retrieve only message headers 90 Return Address option 126 Return
492. tion is checked by default If the Check Mail option is turned off mail for this personality is not checked during manual or automatic mail checks unless you override the setting To override and check the mail for the personality choose Check Mail from the drop down context menu right click in the Personalities window Incoming Mail This panel contains settings that identify and configure the incoming mail server to be used in receiving mail for this account When Configuration POP Sample Account Settings Incoming Mail panel POP configuration Create New Account Generic Properties Incoming Mail Server pop mycomputer net Configuration POP Or map P Cl Leave mail on server C Delete from server after 0 days C Delete from server when emptied from Trash arah K in size C Skip messages over 40 Authentication style Passwords O Kerberos APOP ORPA Secure Sockets when Receiving If Available STARTTLS v Last SSL Info Following are option descriptions for the Incoming Mail panel POP configuration Server This is the name of the incoming mail server for this personality All incoming messages to this personality are routed through this server 128 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Configuration This indicates which email protocol the incoming mail server uses POP Post Office Protocol or IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol Ask
493. tional information on using personalities to send and receive mail There are three types of new personalities you can add WUE Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only e Brand new personality see Creating a New Personality below e Personality migrated from Netscape Messenger Microsoft Outlook Express or Outlook 98 see Migrating to Create a New Alternate Account on Importing Settings to Create a Personality on page 123 Creating a New Personality To create a new personality alternate email account 1 From the Tools menu choose Personalities or click the Personalities window s tab if it is a deselected window in a tabbed group The Personalities window appears 2 Right click anywhere inside the Personalities window to display the drop down context menu 3 From the context menu choose New The first New Account Wizard window Account Settings appears New Account Wizard Account Settings window New Account Wizard A TETY Account Settings Would you like to Create a brand new email account O Import settings from an existing email account Email Account Setu O Skip directly to advanced account setup 4 Select Create a brand new email account and click Next The next New Account Wizard window Personality Name appears 118 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only New Account Wizard Personality Name window New
494. tire body of the message The string that gets inserted before the original text of a replied message A newline is added after the string ReservedDosNames _aux com1 com2 Reserved names of files that will not be used for filenames of com3 com4 co attachments These filenames are reserved for DOS and can n lpt1 lpt2 lpt3 1 causes problems in actual files with these names are created pt4 nul prn ReturnAddressFormat 1 lt 2 gt SaveDialupPasswordTe xt SavePasswordText SaveStatisticsInterval 15 SearchAllmapAccounts 0 SeenIntro 1 SendCharset SendXAttachHeader 0 Format of the From field in outgoing messages 1 is the Real name and 2 is the Return address Where your dialup password is saved in an encrypted format if you have the Save Password switch turned on Where your POP password is saved in an encrypted format if you have the Save Password switch turned on The Statistics data is saved to disk at intervals of this many minutes Controls whether all of your mailboxes in all IMAP accounts will be looked at when searching or just the mailboxes in the IMAP account that you start the search in applies to local mailboxes as well i e a search starting in a local mailbox will only search your local mailboxes if this setting is off You can make the introduction window return by changing the value to 0 Specifies which charset to indicate for outgoing messages If left blank Eudora will choose an app
495. to a mailbox or to delete them if the Allow drag and drop transfers is selected The drag select works only if the drag starts on an unselected not highlighted message 321 Setting Eudora Preferences Styled Text The Styled Text options determine when to use style information in outgoing and incoming messages To display the Styled Text options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Styled Text icon The Styled Text options window appears Styled Text options window Options Show Formatting toolbar When sending mail with styled text HTML Send both plain and styled Send styled text only Viewing Mail Send plain text only 3 Ask me each time Mailboxes J when the body of a message has no styles but i C L the signature does have styles Styled Text C Send the signature with styles Spell Checking 3 Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Show formatting toolbar lf you select this option the formatting toolbar appears by default in new message windows If this is turned off the formatting toolbar is hidden by default in new message windows This toolbar lets you easily format text styles in new messages 322 Setting Eudora Preferences When sending mail with styled text HTML This specifies what to do with HTML text styles when you send mail The styles are delivered to your recipients using th
496. to set up a group for a work related project However you cannot use both your home and work computer to view your family photos in your family group If you try to do that one or both computers will miss some of the photos However if you have two different email addresses you can belong to a share group on more than one computer If you check mail with one email address at work and a different address at home you just need to invite yourself to the share group twice once for each address Once you re in the group with one account you can send an invitation to your other account yourself ESP will treat your two accounts as two different share group members and each will receive all the updates Installing ESP ESP should install automatically into the Eudora Plugins folder However if you need to install ESP yourself e To install ESP on Windows copy the ESP dll file to the Plugins folder located in your Eudora folder Tips on Using ESP Although ESP is a valuable tool for you and your group when working on the same document or file there are some limitations Here are a few tips on using ESP that will make working on group files more efficient 370 Eudora Sharing Protocol e Do realize that the ESP folder is shared If you take a file out of the shared folder it will be removed from each member s shared folder e Do invite people to be in your group Some of them might have to become familiar with ESP before becoming
497. tocols 263 Using Directory Service Databases 264 Adding a New Database Server 265 Ph Database 266 Results List 267 Details List 268 Finger Database 269 LDAP Database 270 Modifying a Database 275 Deleting a Database 276 Using Menu Commands 277 File Menu 277 Edit Menu 279 Mailbox Menu 281 Message Menu 281 Transfer Menu 284 Special Menu 285 Tools Menu 286 Window Menu 288 Help Menu 289 Setting Eudora Preferences 292 Getting Started 293 Checking Mail 295 Incoming Mail 298 Sending Mail 302 Composing Mail 305 Internet Dialup 307 Replying 309 Attachments 311 Fonts 313 Display 315 Viewing Mail 317 Mailboxes 320 Styled Text 322 Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only 324 Auto Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only 326 Date Display 328 Labels 331 Getting Attention 334 Background Tasks 336 Automation 339 Extra Warnings 341 MAPI 344 Advanced Network 347 Kerberos 349 MoodWatch Sponsored and Paid modes only 351 Statistics Sponsored and Paid modes only 354 Miscellaneous 356 Junk Mail Paid mode only 359 11 Junk Mail Extras Paid mode only 361 Content Concentrator Sponsored and Paid modes only 363 BossWatch Paid mode only 365 Find Messages Paid mode only 367 Eudora Sharing Protocol 369 Installing ESP 370 Tips on Using ESP 370 Creating an ESP Group 371 Creating an ESP Group Advanced Setup 376 Inviting Members to Join Your Group 377 Configuring Shared Folder Sett
498. tom command 210 Browser definition 484 Bulleted List button 37 Bulleted List command 45 280 C Cache network info how to enter in Options 348 Cascade command 289 Cc button in Directory Services 261 in the Address Book 245 Cc field in Filters 167 in outgoing mail 38 Center command 45 Change Password command 77 426 Change Queueing command 68 Change Queueing dialog 67 68 69 Change submenu 68 283 Changing Eudora modes 25 Changing the concentration level in the preview pane 103 Check for mail every minute s how to enter in Options 296 Check for mail every minutes option 74 127 Check mail automatically 73 Delete server status 88 entering password 75 Fetch button 88 Fetch server status 88 Fetch then Delete server status 88 Forget Password s command 76 from Windows Taskbar 403 IMAP server management 91 Leave mail on server option 86 manually check 74 Minimal Headers Only option 91 minimum interval 74 Save password option 76 Skip Attachments over K option 92 Skip messages over K in size option 88 Trash button 88 with special instructions 89 Check Mail command 74 76 89 278 Check Mail option 127 Check spelling Check Spelling command 58 Check Spelling dialog Add button 60 Change all button 59 Change button 59 Change To field 59 Edit Dictionary button 60 Ignore all button 59 Ignore button 59 Suggest button 60 Suggestions field 59 Unknown field 59 Check Spelling dialog box 58 Edit User Dictionary dialog A
499. tomatically however when you resize the main Eudora window A New Mail notification icon in the Windows 98 XP NT 4 0 System Tray clock area also tells you when new mail has arrived If you hold the mouse over the icon a tooltip tells you how many messages you have If you double click the icon Eudora is brought to the foreground The icon goes away when you click the mouse button or press a key inside the Eudora window New Mail notification icon Re 12 29 PM 219 Managing Windows in Eudora Filter Report Window Eudora generates a filter report if the Generate Filter Report option is selected in the Getting Attention options window This report can be viewed in the Filter Report window See Getting Attention on page 334 To open the Filter Report window e From the Tools menu choose Filter Report Or if the Filter Report window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Sample Filter Report window Ai Filter Report Messages Time 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 amp PBrew BDS_Notify 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 EP Splitter Not Mine Jamie La Croix 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 EP Dawn s Dawn 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 EP Splitter Dawn_Splitter 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 EP WorkStuff Mail Delivery Subsystem 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 EP Splitter Not Mine Colleen Archer 11 24 AM 8 14 2003 EE Directory Services Q Address Book SS Fiters Fitter Report Link History If the generation of a filter report is enabled via the option mentioned above then eac
500. tomatically start your SLIP or PPP session while others require that you take an extra step such as typing ppp to initiate a PPP session Carefully note the exact steps you must take in order to manually log in and establish a SLIP PPP session you will need this information in order to automate the login process as described in Defining a Login Script Configuring Dialup Networking using Windows NT 4 x Dialup Networking is an optional component of Windows NT 4 x Before configuring Dialup Networking you should make sure Windows NT recognizes your modem and also make sure your Windows NT networking software includes support for the TCP IP protocol Consult your Microsoft documentation for details on installing your modem configuring the TCP IP protocol and installing the Dialup Networking tools To properly configure TCP IP you may need some information from your Internet Service Provider regarding your IP address and your DNS server s After you install Dialup Networking follow these steps to define a new Phonebook entry 1 Double click on the My Computer icon to open an Explorer window Then double click on the Dialup Networking icon to launch the Dialup Networking tool 2 Click the New button to display the New Phonebook Entry Wizard 3 Enter the name you want to associate with your Internet Service Provider then click Next to display the Server page 4 Most Internet Service Providers use a terminal server or a Uni
501. tomize Eudora to suit your needs The many Options categories are described in this section When you first install Eudora the Options windows contain preset settings After you totally finished changing the settings in all categories click OK Your settings will be changed NOTE For your convenience some options appear in more than one category For example your return address appears in both the Getting Started options window and the Sending Mail options window Changing an option in one category changes the option in all categories in which it appears For advanced users only if you need to use an Esoteric Settings plug in copy esoteric epi from the Extra stuff subdirectory into your main Eudora directory This will allow an interface to several features in your options settings You will notice additional icons appearing at the end of the category list in Options 292 Setting Eudora Preferences Getting Started On the Getting Started options window you can determine the minimum information necessary to send and receive mail The information here is for your dominant personality which is your principal email account To display the Getting Started options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Click the Getting Started icon The Getting Started options window appears Getting Started options window Options Real name Joe Camp Email address jcamp myfirm com Mail Server Incoming
502. ts list on the left shows all recipients that are listed on your Quick Recipient List which is the list of recipients to whom you frequently send mail See Using the Recipient List on page 252 for more information The buttons correspond to functions you can perform when addressing and sending mail to recipients on your list New Message To Forward To Redirect To all on the Message menu and Insert Recipient on the Edit menu If there are no recipients on your Quick Recipient List the Recipients area of this dialog box panel is empty e Stationery tThe Stationery list shows all of your stationery files The buttons correspond to stationery related commands New Message With Reply With and Reply to All With all under the Message menu For more information on using stationery see Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 109 216 Managing Windows in Eudora e Personalities The Personalities list shows all of your email accounts if you use multiple personalities multiple accounts The buttons correspond to personality related commands such as the Message menu Change Personality command For more information on using multiple personalities see Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 115 Moving a Toolbar Button To change the placement of a button on the main toolbar hold down the Alt key and drag the button to where you want it Removing a Toolbar Button To remove a button from
503. ts mailers communicate what kind of data is in a message or part of a message The primary mechanism used for this is the Content Type header Content Type text plain charset iso 8859 1 A content type header is divided into three parts the content type the content subtype and the parameters In this case the content type is text meaning the message contains mostly legible text The content subtype is plain which means there aren t any formatting commands or anything like that embedded in the text Finally charset iso 8859 1 is a parameter in this case it identifies the character set the message uses 420 MIME and Mapping The major content types are text legible text image pictures and graphics audiosound video moving pictures message messages or pieces of messages multipart several different kinds of data in a single message Practical Issues There are really only two things you sometimes need to do with Eudora and MIME One is that it may occasionally be necessary to turn off quoted printable encoding Another is that you may want to know how to define mappings between computer file extensions MIME types and Macintosh types Turning Off Quoted Printable Encoding Eudora automatically uses quoted printable encoding if your mail contains special characters Eudora also uses quoted printable encoding for attached plain text files If your recipients don t have MIME quoted printable may h
504. ttachments Share Group Role Settings dialog box Share Group Role Settings Choose the initial role and settings for the invitee s After choosing OK optionally edit the body of the invitation and send it to the person or people whom you wish to invite Initial Role No preference Full Membership user sends and receives updates Broadcasting Member user only sends updates ignores any incoming updates Receiving Member user never sends updates but processes incoming updates Notifications Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO the user s shared folder V Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM the user s shared folder Prefer that user does not change role displays warming Cancel 378 Eudora Sharing Protocol 5 You can determine which tasks each invitee to your group can do In the nitial Role area choose of the following roles No Preference Full Membership user sends and receives updates This allows the person you invite to receive from and send files to the group either automatically or manually Broadcasting Member user only sends updates ignores any incoming updates This allows the person you invite to send files top the group only either automatically or manually Incoming files are ignored Receiving Member user never sends updates but processes incoming updates This allows the person you invite to receive files from the group only Any changes you make to the
505. ty Trash when exiting option is selected in the Miscellaneous options See Miscellaneous on page 356 31 EUDORA Creating Messages Creating an Outgoing Message An outgoing message is a message you send to someone else To create an outgoing message e From the Message menu choose New Message or click the New Message icon on the main toolbar 2 The composition window appears Using the Composition Window The composition window consists of the title bar the toolbar the message header and an area for the message body Headers and Composition Window kady qualcomm com sophie qualcomm com lefty qualcomm com godot qualcomm c DSR w Standard y mei x PR Eat gy amp To kady qualcomm com sophie qualcomm corm lefty qualcamm com godot qualcomm com polydactyl qualcomm com jermy qualcomm com From duke qualcomm com Subject Eudora is the BEST email program G Bcc Attached Team Things are right on schedule for our project Thanks so much for your ever vigilant email updates on your various tasks It s through your hard work and perseverance that we will meet our deadlines and be successful Great work everyone Duke Kl A _ _o Title Bar When completed the title bar provides information about the message including the name of the addressee the time and date the message was sent and the message subject 32 Creating Messages Text Toolbar The text toolbar is of a series
506. u 391 Eudora Sharing Protocol Sample ESP Folder window and ESP menu MacMail_Dorner Mailbox Folder es 27 New Message Open Folder Plugins SDorn Invite etc ESP Groups Update Others To display the ESP menu click 4 Following are the descriptions of the options on the ESP menu New Message Opens a new composition window addressed to the group for you to type a message Open Folder Opens your shared folder in a new window Invite Invites a new member or members to join the group See Inviting Members to Join Your Group on page 377 ESP Groups Opens the ESP Groups window Update Others Updates the files in other members shared folders The file management icons are described below a Displays one page back Displays one page forward Moves up one directory level 392 Eudora Sharing Protocol Displays the properties for the selected file Deletes the selected file Displays files with large icons Displays files with small icons Displays files in a list format Displays file detail 393 Eudora Sharing Protocol 394 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Eudora Modifiers Many operations in Eudora can be implemented by holding down one or more modifier keys Eudora uses the Shift Ctrl and Alt keys as modifiers Keys you need to press are displayed between brackets Shift Check Mail Displays the Mail Transfer Options dialog to define the interaction
507. u are using Reply to All 96 Receiving and Responding to Messages To determine who you are for the Include yourself option Eudora uses the me nickname If you do not have a me nickname set up in your Address Book Eudora uses the contents of the Mail Server Incoming Login Name and Return address fields from the Getting Started options Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form loginname mailservername The me nickname is particularly useful if you have multiple addresses and don t want replies to go to any of those addresses To put the addresses of the other recipients of the original message in the Cc field instead of the To field select the Put original To recipients in Cc field option in the Replying options window Only the original sender s address is put in the To field This works only if you are using Reply to All See Replying on page 309 To copy the original message s priority to your replies select the Copy original s priority to reply option in the Replying options window To change the keyboard shortcut Ctrl R from its normal function of Reply to Reply to All turn on the Map Ctrl R to Reply to All option in the Replying options window The change is reflected on the Message menu Reply with Selected Text If you receive a message from someone and you would like to reply to this message by using a selected part of the message you ca
508. ubject in the Toolbar this is the subject shown in the message summary and you do not need to select the Pencil button to do this To edit an incoming message click on the Pencil button to turn it on then edit the message body When you are done save your changes and close the message See Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 43 for details on how you can edit the message text To edit the subject of an incoming message open it and edit the subject in the toolbar not in the message body When you are done click elsewhere in the message or close it The new subject appears in the message summary The contents of the Subject field of the message header remain unchanged 84 Receiving and Responding to Messages NOTE If you reply to the message the original subject is used for the reply not your changed subject Using Active URLs Sponsored and Paid modes only Any string of text that Eudora recognizes as a hot link or URL Uniform Resource Locator http ftp mailto gopher ph finger etc to the Internet is active Click a URL to open a World Wide Web location transfer a file do a gopher search use the finger tool etc URLs are highlighted and underlined to show that they are active ScamWatch URL Protection Many email scams use misleading URLs to trick users to click on their links What appears to be a legitimate web site address often hides a malicious URL link Eudora now features ScamWatch
509. ude your Paid Mode registration code in the Subject field or in the body of your message About security Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora supports Secure Sockets SSL a security protocol for transferring information SSL allows you to authenticate the server that sends and receives your email messages Also SSL is used to encrypt mail transfers so no one can read your messages while they are being sent to or received from your mail server SSL uses a security certificate system just as most web browsers to authenticate and encrypt your messages Valid certificates should be present for SSL to work properly These certificates are included in SSL and are usually updated by your ISP email administrator or Eudora Valid certificates come with Eudora and more will be provided to you as needed 28 Introducing Eudora Email For your dominant personality Eudora supports SSL through the Checking Mail and Sending Mail options window For any other personality Eudora support SSL through the Account Settings dialogs accessed from the Personalities window When you set up a new personality Eudora will be able to detect if the POP IMAP or the SMTP server for that personality supports SSL depending on which SSL setting you choose For information about using SSL for your other personalities see Using SSL for Your Personalities on page 131 Using SSL for your Dominant Personality To access SSL settings for your dominant personalit
510. udora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL that is if the server supports STARTTLS If your server doesn t support STARTTLS mail transfers will occur successfully but they will not be secured with SSL Required Alternate Port Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically use the older style alternate port method for starting SSL If your server does not support SSL on the appropriate ports mail transfers will fail Required STARTTLS Use SSL for server authentication and mail transfer security by having Eudora automatically invoke the STARTTLS command method to start SSL If your server does not support STARTTLS mail transfers will fail 296 Setting Eudora Preferences NOTE If you use SSL and cannot make a connection when receiving or sending mail you may need to check with your ISP to update any invalid SSL certificates However to override any issues with SSL when retrieving or sending mail choose Never from the drop down menu to make a successful connection Last SSL Info Click to display the most current information for an SSL connection between a server and Eudora since the last time you started Eudora The Eudora SSL Connection Information Manager window appears with SLL and certificate information WARNING If you display the SSL information windows make certain you don t change any of the field information unless you are familiar with SSL
511. udora display settings will also change the settings in the Internet Explorer browser Message window width This specifies the width of new and received message windows in characters This option has no effect on what your mail looks like when it is sent When mail is sent Eudora wraps at or before 76 columns If you use a proportional font Eudora sets the window width based on the average width of the characters in the font Message window height This specifies the height of new and received message windows in lines NOTE If the Zoom windows when opening option is selected received message window heights are automatically adjusted to the height of the message text Preview Pane These options determine the visibility and behavior of the message preview pane that appears at the bottom of mailbox windows Show message preview pane If you select this option Eudora displays the message preview pane in mailbox windows The preview pane previews a single selected message A splitter between the preview pane and the message summary list lets you resize the preview pane relative to the list Mark previewed messages as read after _ second s If you select this option and the Show message preview pane option is turned on the message currently selected in the mailbox window and previewed in the preview pane is automatically marked as read blank in the Status column after the specified number of seconds If this option
512. udora uses HTML to send and receive styled text Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP HTTP is the standard way of transferring information across the World Wide Web It supports a variety of media and file formats across a variety of platforms Internet A giant global network made up of many smaller networks all connected using the TCP IP protocol The Internet is the network of networks which spans the globe TCP IP is generally the network and transport protocol stack used to connect networks but protocol translating gateways enable non TCP IP networks to connect to the Internet as well Internet directory A directory that runs over TCP IP and is widely implemented on the Internet A directory implementing Ph LDAP and Finger is an Internet directory Internet Engineering Task Force IETF IETF is the standards setting body of the Internet Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP allows Eudora to access and manipulate electronic mail messages on a server and it permits manipulation of remote mailboxes so they function like local mailboxes IMAP4 provides a richer and more complex set of functionality than the POP3 protocol IMAP is also called an Incoming server Internet Service Provider ISP An ISP is the organization or company that provides you with Internet access and email availability For example America Online AOL is an ISP IP address The address that serves as a unique identifier of computers on the Internet It is
513. ug ins gt x lips Sealed Embarrassed lt 1 Foolish gt o Angry E5 gt EvilGrin gt D lt Hug W gt Rose S O Yawn 8 Cool orei 4 Ho Recip e pa A a D gt Apple 0 Halo X31 Sick 3 From the list click on an emoticon Sad Happy D Laugh P_ Stick Out Tongue 6 Ss S oe ayaan S ON The selected emoticon will appear in the outgoing message NOTE Emoticon display is controlled by the program reading the email message Emoticons are not sent as image files with your outgoing email so if the recipient of your email message is not using Eudora 6 2 their emoticons may display differently 53 Creating Messages Including a URL in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only To include a hot link also known as a Uniform Resource Locator or URL in a message enclose it with Jess than and greater than signs angle brackets to ensure that your recipient s email application can identify it as a URL for example lt http www eudora com gt is a hotlink URL in a message Craigamyoffice net Meeting Friday 8 29 ixil lt none gt nme rh EB tig Arial yA BOT UW T To Craig myoffice net Dawn lt Dawn_QCTS myoffice net gt Subject Meeting Friday 8 29 Ce Bec Attached Go to our website to verify the changes lt http Avww eudora com techsupport tutorials gt Custom
514. ug ins are available with Eudora Sort UpperLower and Unwrap e Icons in the message window are typically for plug ins that are used to manipulate messages as they are sent or when they are received These are referred to as on transmission and on display plug ins e The Tools menu typically includes plug ins that are used to do tasks that are not directly related to Eudora functions These are referred to as tools plug ins 407 General Reference e The Attach submenu under the Message menu typically includes plug ins that are used to create and attach particular files to a message These are referred to as attachment plug ins Example QUALCOMM s PureVoice voice messaging plug in for recording and attaching voice messages to your outgoing messages e Plug ins that are automatically used when a message is received are not available through the user interface These are referred to as on arrival plug ins To see all of your currently installed plug ins select Message Plug ins Settings from the Special menu The Installed Message Plug ins dialog appears If an installed plug in has any settings options you can use the Settings button to change them For information about available plug ins send e mail to lt eudora rep eudora com gt or visit the World Wide Web site lt http www eudora coms gt The Messaging Application Program Interface MAPI MAPI is an interface that lets you send email messages from any MAPI compa
515. unctions using only one selected personality The submenu is unavailable if multiple personalities are selected in the Persona column New Message As Create a new message as the selected personality As a shortcut for this command double click a personality in the Persona column or select the personality and press Enter Reply As Reply as the selected personality to the sender s of the one or more received messages that are currently selected Reply to All As Reply as the selected personality to the sender s and all recipients of the one or more received messages that are currently selected 116 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Forward As Forward as the selected personality the one or more received messages that are currently selected Redirect As Redirect as the selected personality the one or more received messages that are currently selected Send Again As Resend as the selected personality the one or more received or composition messages that are currently selected e New Create a new personality See Adding a New Personality on page 117 for more information When you select this command Eudora walks you through the New Account Wizard that is the name return address login name and incoming email server Change these settings as desired and when you are complete the new account is created Once created the personality will be checking mail e Properties
516. unless option 170 Filters command 165 287 Filters directory 404 Filters window 165 filters pce file 406 Find 179 Stopping 181 Within a message 180 Find command 280 Find Messages in mailbox and folders 181 Find Next button 180 Find submenu 280 Find Text in message summary area of mailbox 181 Find Text Again command 180 Find the latest version of Eudora 26 Finger Database 269 Finger protocol 257 Finger definition 485 finger ini file 406 Finish Address Book Entry command 249 280 Fixed Width button 80 Fixed width fonts how to enter in Options 313 Fixed width option 481 Float In Main Window command 200 202 204 208 211 212 Floating windows 203 fol directories 406 Folder definition 485 Font popup 35 Font submenu 45 Fonts options 313 For new mail download how to enter in Options IMAP server 300 Index Forget Password s command 76 286 Format Painter 34 46 Format Painter button 34 Formatting text 43 Copy amp Unwrap 46 Unwrap Selection 46 Wrap Selection 46 Forward command 98 282 Forward To action 172 Forward To submenu 283 Forward definition 485 Forwarded status right arrow 98 From field in a forwarded message 98 in Filters 167 in outgoing mail 38 in redirected message 98 FTP definition 485 ftp eudora com 425 Full message except attachments over K how to enter in Options IMAP server 301 Full message except attachments over K IMAP server Incoming Mail options 92 FUMLUB 321 G Gateway defini
517. unsaved changes to the shared folder If not the shared folder opens allowing you to access its files ESP periodically scans the folder for changes according to your settings and sends the updated files to other group members To update the shared folder of another group member manually choose the member from the Users dialog box and click Sync Folder This sends the entire contents of the shared folder to the selected member As ESP receives periodic changes to the shared folder from other users it incorporates the changes according to the settings you chose for the group for example with or without notification and with or without archiving 388 Eudora Sharing Protocol Changing ESP Group Information ESP allows you to change the configuration of a share group to meet the changing needs of its members The same tabs User Eudora Settings Notifications and Advanced you used to create a share group and configure its attributes can be used to change those of an existing group To make changes to an existing share group 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 In the left column choose the group you wish to change 3 Click any of the tabs and make your changes in their respective dialog boxes 4 When finished click OK Configuring Global ESP Settings You can control the type of messages received by the shared folder through the use of filters and automatic processing actions
518. up connection is application independent and supports TCP IP IPX and NetBEUI protocols Eudora Serial Dialup was not generic and applied specifically to checking and sending mail with Eudora e A SLIP PPP connection supports transmission of binary data as required by the IMAP4 protocol e Microsoft Dialup Networking supports a wider range of modem hardware and navigation scripts are generally modem independent As with the old Serial Dialup function Eudora can use Microsoft Dialup Networking to automatically dial your mail server check and or send mail and then automatically hang up the connection General Steps Following are the general steps necessary to set up Microsoft Windows to use Microsoft Dialup Networking If you have already set up Microsoft Dialup Networking and can successfully connect to your Internet Service Provider then skip to the section Configuring Eudora to Auto Dial the Phonebook Entry following e Make sure you have a SLIP PPP account You must arrange for SLIP PPP account access through your Internet Service Provider If you can choose between SLIP and PPP we recommend PPP 428 Dialup Eudora Install your modem Configure Microsoft Windows so that it recognizes your modem hardware Install networking components Configure your MS Windows networking software to include the TCP IP protocol Install Dialup Networking components Configure your MS Windows networking software to inc
519. ur computer you may want to consider a disk driver that can encrypt hard disk data If you need to enter a password the Eudora Password dialog box appears Enter your password and click OK If you make a mistake before clicking OK simply backspace and re enter the password correctly NOTE Your incoming mail account password is case sensitive so the uppercase and lowercase characters must be typed in exactly Be sure that Caps Lock is off If the Caps Lock key is on the word Caps will appear on the bottom right of the main Eudora window 15 Sending Messages and Checking Mail Password dialog box Enter Password PS Please enter the curent password for Imontgomery qualcomm com Password 4 canes If your password is rejected an error message appears indicating you have entered the wrong password Choose Check Mail from the File menu to redisplay the password dialog box As long as Eudora is running it remembers all of your passwords If you don t want it to remember for example if you are away from your PC choose Forget Password s from the Special menu The next time you check mail for any account Eudora prompts you for your password again NOTE If you have more than one personality a window appears listing the names of your personalities You can select the personalities whose passwords you want Eudora to forget All the personalities are selected by default Deselect the personalities you don t want
520. urt more than it helps If that s the case just turn off the QP button in the message Toolbar when you are sending text files to those recipients Mapping Between File Extensions MIME Types and Macintosh Types Since Eudora needs to have the appropriate extensions on attachment filenames in order to open them up from the message Eudora has the ability to map between file extensions MIME types and subtypes and Macintosh creators and types Messages received by Eudora can grab the MIME type subtype and or Macintosh creator type from an attachment and map that into the correct file extension Also on outgoing messages Eudora can make sure that attachments are encoded with the correct MIME type subtype and or Macintosh creator type depending on the file extension of the attachment being sent 421 MIME and Mapping Eudora knows about some MIME types However since new MIME types are being defined all the time it may be necessary to add to Eudora s knowledge from time to time Adding new mappings between the various types only requires editing the EUDORA INI file with a text editor like the one that comes with Eudora There is a section in the EUDORA INI file labeled Mappings followed by some entries one per line Each entry is called a map A map defines when the mapping should occur which can be in out or both followed by an equals sign and five parameters These five parameters are in order the computer fi
521. using this dialog box type the correct spelling of the word in the Word field and click Add The word is then added to the dictionary and displayed in the Dictionary field NOTE The Add button in this dialog box works the same as the Add button in the Check Spelling dialog box To remove a word from the user dictionary first type it in the Word field or locate it in the Dictionary field and single click it to display it in the Word field Then click Delete To delete the entire user dictionary click Clear You will then be prompted to confirm the deletions If you click Yes all of the words will be deleted from the user dictionary 60 Creating Messages Spelling Options dialog box Ignore capitalized words Ignore words with all capitals Ignore words with mixed case Report doubled words Suggest words V Phonetic words IV Split words V Typographic words Cancel The Spelling Options dialog box lists the spell checking options A check mark in the box next to the option name indicates that the option is selected The spelling options can also be modified in Options under the Tools menu For details see Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 324 The options are Ignore capitalized words The spelling checker ignores words that start with a capital letter such as proper nouns Ignore words with all capitals The spelling checker ignores words that contain all capital letters such as acronyms
522. ut in the specified mailbox with a checkmark in the Status column indicating that the message has been sent If none of these options are used outgoing messages are put into the Trash mailbox after they have been sent NOTE You can also set up a filter to save outgoing messages in particular mailboxes based on information contained in the message See on Filtering Messages on page 161 for more information Checking for Incoming Mail The incoming mail server is where your mail is received and stored until it is transferred by Eudora to your PC You can use several different mail accounts with Eudora Your main account or dominant personality is specified in the Getting Started options Additional mail accounts or multiple personalities are set up in the Personalities window and the Account Settings dialog box For more information on personalities and the Account Settings dialog box see Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 115 and Account Settings Dialog on page 125 NOTE To better understand how the incoming mail server functions with Eudora see Mail Transport on page 410 There are two ways to check your incoming mail server and transfer mail to your PC automatically or manually These are described in the sections below You can also control how your mail is transferred from the server and what happens to it on the server For details see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on p
523. utomatically Sponsored and Paid modes only 55 Checking Your Spelling Manually Sponsored and Paid modes only 57 Check Spelling Dialog Box 59 Using BossWatch 62 Using BossWatch for Outgoing Messages 62 Using MoodWatch Sponsored and Paid Modes only 63 Using MoodWatch for Outgoing Messages 63 Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages 64 Saving a Message for Later Changes 65 Sending Messages and Checking Mail 67 Sending or Queueing a Message 67 Sending a Message Immediately 67 Queueing a Message to Send Later 67 Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time 68 Editing a Queued Message 69 Taking a Message Out of the Queue 70 Sending Queued Messages When Checking Mail 70 Sending Messages with Special Server Instructions 70 Sending Mail Through One Account SMTP Relay 71 Using SMTP Authentication 72 Keeping Copies of Outgoing Messages 72 Checking for Incoming Mail 73 Checking for Mail Automatically 73 Checking for Mail Manually 74 Stopping a Mail Check 75 Using Your Password 75 Changing Your Password 77 Receiving and Responding to Messages 79 Receiving New Mail 79 Incoming Message Window 79 Title Bar 80 Toolbar 80 Message Body 81 Printing an Incoming Message 82 Receiving Attachments 82 Specifying an Attachment Directory 83 Editing Incoming Messages 84 Using Active URLs 85 ScamWatch URL Protection 85 Using ScamWatch 85 Managing Your Mail on the POP Server 86 Leaving Mail on the Server 86 Deleting a Message from t
524. utton directly above the Preview Pane in the middle of the mailbox between the Mailbox Size Display and the horizontal scrollbar A contextual menu appears The Contextual Concentrator Medical Update DE Lo 3 i ALabel gt who Dae SB 34 Subject Andy Murray 02 01 PM3 17 2 2 Injury Update Dave Taylor 02 04 PM 3 17 72 1 Re Injury Update Tim Leiweke 02 05 PM3 17 2 1 2 Re Injury Update Default Terse pe From Andy Murray Default Terse TEAM INJURY NO On Friday we plac s d players on injured reserve retroactive to the beginning of the season Interestingly enough Bob Mliller is not injured at all We re not quite sure why From Dave Taylor Are you serious How uninjured is he What did the doctors say Because if Bob Miller is not that badly unhurt we should consider trading him From Tim Leiweke 2 Choose one of the options from the contextual menu If a single message is highlighted the default is Compact If multiple messages are highlighted the default is Terse 3 Choose one of the following options e None This turns off Content Concentrator There is no change in the message format e Compact Message is truncated that is excess headers and text are removed and replaced with ellipses and a snip indicator Only the To From Subject and CC headers appear in the message e Terse Message is truncated further only the From field of the header appears in the mes
525. utton is on Eudora will use your S MIME certificate to digitally sign your outgoing message NOTE You must have an S MIME certificate installed on your machine to use this feature 34 ty Send ay Queue Creating Messages S MIME Encrypter If this button is on Eudora will use the public S MIME certificate s of your recipient s to digitally encrypt your outgoing message NOTE You must have the S MIME public certificates for your recipients installed on your machine to use this feature MoodWatch Sponsored and Paid modes only ice cube There is no offensive language in the message 1 chili There may be a slight bit of offensive language in the message 2 chilies There may be offensive language in the message 3 chills There is offensive language in the message Send or Queue This button lets you send a message immediately or put it in the queue to send later If the Immediate Send option is selected in the Sending Mail options the button is labeled Send If the option is not checked the button is labeled Queue For details see Sending Mail on page 302 and Sending Messages and Checking Mail on page 67 The drop down lists and buttons on the bottom row of the text toolbar are described below Note that the text styles and attributes controlled by this row can also be accessed via text file windows and signature windows Arial v Font drop down list Make the selected text a specific font typeface
526. w from a normal window when both appear to be in the window work area A normal window s title bar contains the window menu icon and three standard buttons Note that a floating window can be dragged outside of the main Eudora window whereas a normal window cannot You can diagonally resize any floating window in Eudora Simply position the pointer over any window corner and click and drag to enlarge or reduce To convert a window to a floating window either undock it from the main window if it is docked 1 To display the drop down context menu right click the window s border or tab 2 To turn off the command from the context menu choose Float In Main Window The checkmark disappears 3 Then choose Allow Docking to turn off the command The checkmark disappears For a docked window you can also temporarily override the Allow Docking command and suspend docking by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging the window The window drags as a floating window 204 Managing Windows in Eudora Tabbed Windows A tabbed window is a collection of tool windows combined into one window Each tool window in the tabbed window has its own window tab Sample tabbed windows Query L start Protocols Status Ready Database New Database Databases Configured Servers Protocol S x 2 Bs gee Finger O 9 Big Foot LDAP 13 Who Where LDAP C amp Unnamed Ph CB BigFoot Ph M amp Qualcomm Ph Bi
527. which allows applications to store and retrieve arbitrary configuration data from a central server Attachments Any file can be attached to and sent with a Eudora message Most of the time an attached document functions like a rider to the email message and does not appear within the message text Instead the name of the document is displayed automatically in the Attached field in the message header Authenticated Post Office Protocol APOP APOP is an MD5 based login command that does not send passwords in clear text over the network Automation You can control and exchange information with Eudora from other programs that support the Windows Automation Interface such as Microsoft Visual Basic These options give you external access to Eudora mail folders mailboxes and messages and to the Eudora application itself BinHex This is an attachment decoding method best used for recipients on a Macintosh with an email reader that is not MIME compliant Blind Carbon Copy Bcc In this header field you enter email addresses or nicknames of people to whom a blind copy of the message is to be sent These recipients are not displayed in the message header and the recipients in the To or Cc fields will not know that a copy went to these addresses Body The part of an email message that contains the main text of the message The body can contain text graphics sound and video clips 483 Glossary BossWatch Eudora s feature t
528. window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Extra Warnings icon The Extra Warnings options window appears Extra Warnings options window Options Category Warn me when I ik Delete unread mail Delete queued mail Getting Attention Delete unsent mail Delete 50 or more messages at a time Background Tasks Delete a message from the Search results Od C Queue a message with no subject Queue a message bigger than 500 k Automation Quit with messages queued to be sent 4 b Empty the Trash mailbox Extra W anas Start Eudora and it s not the default mailer Launch a program from a message Launch a program externally Forward files that are not in the attachment directory Enter an invalid server when creating a new personality Advanced Network y Select the options you want to change Following are the descriptions of the options Delete unread mail lf you select this option you are warned if you try to delete mail that is marked unread Delete queued mail lf you select this option you are warned if you try to delete mail that is queued to be sent marked or amp for timed queue in the Out mailbox Delete unsent mail lIf you select this option you are warned if you try to delete messages that are marked sendable with a bullet in the Out mailbox but not yet sent 341 Setting Eudora Preferences Delete _ or more messages at a time default 50 lf you select this
529. ws and the preview pane Every character requires the same amount of space 313 Setting Eudora Preferences Use proportional font by default lf you select this option message windows and the preview pane use your specified proportional font by default If this option is turned off message windows and the preview pane use your specified fixed width font by default Size Specify the size of the font to be used for text in message windows and the preview pane Printer These fields list the font and size to be used when printing any text from Eudora using the Print command messages text files signature files etc Font Specify the font to use when printing text from Eudora Size Specify the font size to use when printing text from Eudora Screen These fields list the font and size to be used when displaying any Eudora screen text other than that displayed in received and composition messages and the message preview pane This includes text files signature files and message summaries in mailbox windows Font Specify the font to use when displaying all other screen text in Eudora Size Specify the font size to use when displaying all other screen text in Eudora 314 Setting Eudora Preferences Display The Display options determine how Eudora displays various objects in the main Eudora window and the category icons in the Options list To display the Display options window 1 From the Tools menu choose
530. x definition 487 Mailboxes compacting all 147 compacting one 147 creating during transfer 159 creating in the Mailboxes window 151 creating using Mailbox menu 149 displaying columns 146 Make it a folder option 149 management on POP vs IMAP server 152 message summaries 140 moving in the Mailboxes window 152 New command 149 151 number of messages 146 opening 139 removing in the Mailboxes window 152 renaming in the Mailboxes window 151 resizing columns 146 size display 146 sorting messages in 177 space messages require 146 space wasted 146 transferring messages among 158 Mailboxes command 150 151 152 216 287 Mailboxes options 320 Mailboxes window 150 216 Mailing List definition 487 Mailing lists creating a nickname 235 Main Toolbar 212 Make Address Book Entry command 246 262 285 from Directory Services 262 from the Address Book 248 Make Filter command 161 285 Make Filter dialog 161 Make Hyperlink button 37 Make Hyperlink command 45 54 280 Make it a folder option 149 151 Make Label action 170 Make Personality action 171 Make Priority action 170 Make Status action 170 Make Subject action 171 Managing mail on the IMAP server 91 Index Delete command 93 Minimal Headers Only option 91 refreshing the mailbox list 95 Remove Deleted Messages command 93 resynchronizing a mailbox or folder 94 Skip Attachments over K option 92 UnDelete command 93 Managing mail on the POP server Delete from server when emptied from Tr
531. x server to support dialup users Therefore you should generally check all three boxes to indicate that 1 you are calling the Internet 2 it is okay to send your plain text password and 3 the server expects login information Ask your email administrator or your Internet Service Provider if you are unsure about these settings 5 Click Next to display the Modem or Adapter page 6 Select your modem from the list then click Next to display the Phone Number page 431 7 10 11 12 13 14 Dialup Eudora In the edit box enter the primary phone number for your Internet Service Provider If your provider has alternate phone numbers click the Alternates button and enter the alternate phone numbers Click Next to display the Serial Line Protocol page Select PPP or SLIP as appropriate to your Internet Service Provider most providers now support PPP then click Next to display the Login Script page When initially testing dialup connections to your Internet Service Provider we recommend that you select the Display a terminal window option Once you can manually establish a dialup connection you can then automate the dialup connection with a login script see Defining a Login Script later for details Click Next to display the IP Address page If your ISP has assigned you a specific static IP address then enter that address in the field Otherwise if your provider assigns IP addresses dynamically via
532. xt Preceding each line of text is a quote character which is a right angle bracket gt if there are no styles or an excerpt bar I if there are styles Clear Delete the selected text Text Apply text styles to the selected text or paragraph Includes such commands as Typewriter fixed width font Bulleted List Clear Formatting remove all styles and Make Hyperlink create a clickable link from a piece of text or an embedded graphic to a URL Insert lInsert objects in the body of a composition message Includes the commands Picture insert an embedded graphic file Downloadable Picture inserts a link to a graphic URL and Horizontal Line insert a horizontal rule as a separator Insert Emoticon Insert a smiley or other graphical depiction of your emotions into the text of your messaeg Select All Select the entire contents of a message or a mailbox Wrap Selection Insert carriage returns into the selection as appropriate Finish Address Book Entry Sponsored and Paid modes only Complete the partial text of a nickname Insert Recipient Insert the chosen recipient The submenu lists the recipients on your Quick Recipient List Find Search for the designated character string Sort Sort the message summaries in ascending order in a mailbox by the selected column Shift Sort Sort the message summaries in descending order by the selected column Check Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes on
533. y 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 For SSL when receiving mail scroll and choose Checking Mail The Checking Mail options window appears 3 For SSL when sending mail scroll and choose Sending Mail The Sending Mail options window appears Checking Mail options window Category a Mail Server D pop myfirm com Getting Started User Name T om jcampl Checking Mail Secure Sockets Check for mail every 0 minute s when Receivi ng C Don t check without a network connection dro p d own menu Incoming Mail C Don t check when using battery Send on check Secure Sockets when Receiving Never If Available STARTTLS v Last SSL Info If Available STAR if il LS Required Alternate Port Required STARTTLS 29 Introducing Eudora Email Sending Mail options window Options Category Email address E jcamp myfirm com Getting Started Domain to add to unqualified addresses aa miyfirm com Checking Mail SMTP server E smtp myfirm com Secure Sockets when Sending me Allow authentication d rop down menu mas Immediate send Sending Mail Send on check ta Cluse submission port 587 Incoming Mail SMTP Relay Personality None Never If Available STARTTLS Composing Mail If Available STARTTLS Last SSL Inf a Hiba N Required Alternate Port i Required STARTTLS phi In the Secure Sockets when Receiving or Sending
534. y Progress information is described in Background Tasks on page 336 To access and display the Task Status window 1 From the Tools menu choose Task Status Or if the Task Status window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab The Task Status window appears Task Status window Task Status Task Status Progress B Sending 1 messages left to send Checking 95 message s left to download sd Notice the progress indicators on the status bar located at the right hand bottom of the Eudora window A progress bar and spinning black and white ball indicate that background tasks are occurring 225 Managing Windows in Eudora Progress bar and task progress indicator On the progress bar or spinning indicator click to display the Task Status window Right click to display the indicator s drop down list Task indicator s context menu Stop All Tasks Go offline Show Task Status e Choose Stop All Tasks to cancel the tasks currently occurring e Choose Go offline to disconnect from the server An alert window appears letting you know that you are offline and cannot connect to the server This is useful if you are using a laptop computer e Choose Show Task Status to display the Task Status window You can see if your sent messages are sent queued or processing in your Out mailbox The following icons display to the left of the message name in your Out box f Message is sent Q Message is queued
535. y All If you select this option Eudora will warn you by speaking the email addresses of your recipients when you queue a message where Reply to All was used to generate the reply as well as to addresses on your BossWatch list NOTE You must have enabled Speak Addresses for the above setting to have any effect Domain Warnings Outside domain If you enter a domain in this setting Eudora will warn you when you are sending to a recipient whose address is not within the domain specified Multiple domains may be entered separated by commas Inside domain lf you enter a domain in this setting Eudora will warn you when you are sending to a recipient whose address is within the domain specified Multiple domains may be entered separated by commas Color code BossWatch addresses using this color lf you select this option Eudora will underline addresses from your BossWatch list in your composition window as well as outline the Send or Queue button with the selected color You can click on the color to customize it 366 Setting Eudora Preferences Find Messages Paid mode only The Find Messages options determine how Eudora s ultra fast indexed search functionality will work To display the Find Messages options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Find Messages icon The Find Messages Options window appears Find Messages Options Options Category ep Use Fast indexed search powe
536. y assigned to a group 9 Click Next The Success dialog box appears 10 Click Finish Your new share group is created The share group name appears in the list view attachment of the groups window 375 Eudora Sharing Protocol Creating an ESP Group Advanced Setup After you feel comfortable creating groups you can bypass it and enter the group information directly To use the Advanced Group Setup function 1 From the Tools menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Click New located at the bottom of the window The Share Group Settings dialog box appears Share Group Settings dialog box New ESP Share Group Wizard en Share Group Settings Would you like to Create a brand new share group Skip directly to advanced share group setup BBltovsstoecssssensssrsces cones sesoetssereesssovonseroriineowsrsnsossnneaseasle ennes foncancnonsanetiet Cancel Help 3 Choose Skip directly to advanced share group setup The New Group dialog box appears 376 Eudora Sharing Protocol New Group dialog box same dialog box as the Eudora tab New ESP Share Group Group Name Marketing Plans Shared Folder lt shared folder gt Mailbox Personality lt Dominant gt Description Marketing documents and items 4 Type the new group name in the Group Name text box 5 Click the Shared Folder long gray button and choose a folder for this group Click OK 6 Click the Mailbox long gr
537. your email administrator which one to use if you are not sure The settings in the rest of this panel depend on whether you ve chosen POP or IMAP in this field Settings for both configurations are described below Leave mail on server lf selected then during mail checks incoming mail for this personality is left on the incoming mail server and a copy is transferred to your PC If this turned off then when mail is checked incoming mail for this personality is deleted from the incoming mail server after it is transferred to your PC For more details see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 86 Delete from server after _ days This option has a check box for turning on or off and an edit box for specifying the number of days mail that was left on the POP server should be saved before being deleted It is a good idea not to leave copies of your messages on the POP server indefinitely as this will create mail storage problems on the server Delete from server when emptied from Trash lf selected any messages that are deleted from your Trash mailbox are also deleted from the POP server Messages are retained in your Trash mailbox until deleted For details see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 86 Skip messages over _ K in size lf selected messages over the specified size are downloaded only in part These messages include the first few lines and a statement that says the message is not complete This can be useful
538. your message Outgoing messages Ignore original text The spelling checker ignores any text that is preceded by a quote mark which is an excerpt bar Eudora assumes that this text was originally from another message and therefore does not need to be spell checked Warn me when sending queueing message with misspellings lIf you select this option Eudora displays a warning if you attempt to queue or send a message in which it has detected spelling errors 325 Setting Eudora Preferences Auto Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only The Auto completion options determine how you will use the name auto completion feature to complete names and email addresses in the To Cc and Bcc fields on the message headers of your outgoing messages Eudora completes the names by looking for the names in either your history file or address book To display the Auto completion options window 1 From the Tools menu choose Options 2 Scroll and click the Auto completion icon The Auto completion options window appears Auto completion options window Options category A Auto complete items in recipient Fields with data From Styled Text History File Address Book Plug in Addresses Spell Checki akale Lasa C Don t auto complete just list matches S Sy CDE Auto completion C Names should appear in alphabetical order Use drop down list For completion choices Fe Add the From lines of replied to messages Time to wai

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  HD2566  Manuel d`installation  Westfalia Bedienungsanleitung Nr. 106656  Sapphire 11138-15-20R graphics card  ROTARY CLUB DE CONFLANS SAINTE HONORINE ANNÉE 2011  GSM / GPRS / GPS VEHICLE TRACKER XT-009  tecnica colheira  931 05 Rev1 UM PH42M LCD_PH32M2 LCD 710213.cdr  Garmin iQue 3200 GPS Receiver User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
DMCA: DMCA_mwitty#outlook.com.